JP7001927B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

In the most popular pachinko gaming machines at present, the symbol called "special symbol" (or main gaming symbol) changes on the display part such as 7-segment when the gaming ball enters the starting port. When the special symbol is displayed and the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the special gaming state is more profitable for the player than the normal gaming state {a large winning opening (so-called attacker) that is normally closed. Is a type of model (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game with contents that are released under predetermined conditions. Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol that is directly linked to the interests of the player, it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for directing to enhance the interest of the game, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol". The effect symbol to be produced is variablely displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal display having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the variation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also in a predetermined mode (for example) in accordance with this. It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is confirmed because the decorative symbol is stopped in the predetermined mode.

Here, since this mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise a high degree of interest in the overall production including the variation mode of the above-mentioned design. The focus is on whether to grant. For example, the variable display "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variable display "decorative pattern" is hidden and a highly interesting moving image is displayed instead. One of them is a method to improve the interest of the game by such a directing method.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-31267 JP-A-2014-014494 JP-A-2014-014576 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-212245

However, since such a production method has been widely used in the past, there is a problem that the control method needs to be further improved in order to improve the interest.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
An identification information display unit that can display identification information,
A speaker that outputs the production sound and
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed as an effect. It is equipped with a design display control means for effect that controls the display in the unit.
As the gaming state during non-execution of the special game, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
Within the one effect period, the effectable movable body can execute a predetermined effect operation, and the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit is visible when the effect moveable body executes the predetermined effect operation. Is configured to decrease,
The movable body for production is configured to be able to perform a predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after recovering from a power failure.
When the movable body for effect performs the predetermined effect operation within the one effect period, the first effect symbol is hidden while the second effect symbol can be displayed. ,
When the effectable movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within the predetermined period after the power is restored, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed. Is configured to
During the period from the start of variable display of the identification information in which the movable body for effect is scheduled to execute the predetermined effect operation within the one effect period to the start of the execution of the predetermined effect operation, the power supply is cut off. The execution of the predetermined initialization operation is completed after the execution of the predetermined initialization operation is started when the effectable movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within the predetermined period after returning from. It is configured to be longer than the period until
The first display after a power failure occurs in a situation where a predetermined standby display is displayed on the effect display unit during a normal game state and a variable standby in which the identification information is not variable, and then the power is restored from the power failure. The power is cut off when the predetermined standby display is displayed on the effect display unit during the display mode of the effect symbol and during the variable standby where the identification information is not variable and displayed in the specific game state, and then the power is cut off. It is configured to be different from the display mode of the first effect symbol displayed after returning.
It is configured so that a predetermined effect sound can be output at least during the variable display of the first effect symbol under the situation where the predetermined effect mode is set when the special game is not executed.
It is configured to have multiple types of predetermined production sounds and to be able to switch the types of predetermined production sounds during the variable display of identification information.
The display mode of the first effect symbol at the time of stop display of the identification information has a first display mode and a second display mode, and the display mode of the first effect symbol is the first display mode. Therefore, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the stop display of the identification information, the display mode of the first effect symbol may be a second display mode different from the first display mode.
Even after the display of the predetermined standby display is started in the situation where the display mode of the first effect symbol is the second display mode and then the display of the predetermined standby display is finished, the display of the first effect symbol is displayed. It is configured so that the aspect can remain the second display aspect.
When the predetermined period elapses from the stop display of the identification information and the display mode of the first effect symbol is started to be displayed in the second display mode, the display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed in the second display mode. While the predetermined effect sound is output for at least a specific period from the start to the start of the display of the predetermined standby display, the second display displayed after the display of the predetermined standby display is completed. It is configured so that a predetermined effect sound is not output while the first effect symbol of the embodiment is displayed.
It is configured so that a predetermined error sound can be output from the speaker in response to the occurrence of a predetermined error.
Even if the predetermined period has elapsed from the stop display of the identification information and the display mode of the first effect symbol is started to be displayed in the second display mode and the predetermined effect sound is output, the predetermined standby is performed. A predetermined error sound can be output even when the first effect symbol of the second display mode displayed after the display is finished is being displayed and the predetermined effect sound is not output. Has been
The display mode of the first effect symbol at the time of stop display of the identification information is configured so that the display mode may be different before the predetermined period elapses and after the predetermined period elapses, while the identification information stop display. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode of the second effect symbol at the time is configured so as not to be different between before the lapse of the predetermined period and after the lapse of the predetermined period.
<Additional Notes>
In addition, although other embodiments different from this embodiment are listed below, they can be implemented without any limitation.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this other aspect is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
Of a plurality of production symbol rows, different types of production symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the production symbol rows other than the predetermined production symbol rows, so that a non-reach state can be formed. ,
After the reach state or the non-reach state is formed, it is configured so that the re-variation of the effect symbol can be executed.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
The operation pattern related to the predetermined operation when the re-variation of the effect symbol is executed after the reach state is formed, and the predetermined operation when the re-variation of the effect symbol is executed after the non-reach state is formed. It is configured to be different from the operation pattern.
In a situation where there is a specific hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, the effect display unit executes an effect symbol look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the specific hold using the effect symbol. It is possible and
If a specific hold occurs when a ball enters the starting port during a symbol change in a situation where there is no hold remaining, is there a hold that is digested before the specific hold during the symbol change? Depending on whether or not there is, and / or how many holds are digested before the specific hold during the symbol change, the effect mode of the effect symbol look-ahead effect is configured to be different. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by this.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to improve the control method of the image display corresponding to the gaming situation and to improve the fun of the gaming.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a special game operation condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of determining a drawing stop symbol on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is an image diagram of a display mode of a decorative symbol on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram relating to the configuration of the effect display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a transmission effect execution image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the pre-reading determination process at the time of winning the first main game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the pre-reading determination process at the time of winning the second main game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the look-ahead hold content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol reservation content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the first main game advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the second main game advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the pre-reading determination process at the time of winning the first main game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the hold display mode change control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the change example 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a pending change image diagram in the specific advance notice effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a hold digestion transmission image display process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is an image change image of a reserved digestion transmission image on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the first loading content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a time-saving and medium-time decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of a right-handed instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram relating to the display mode and display position of the decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an image diagram relating to a display area of a decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to the variable display period of the decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an image diagram relating to the decorative design used in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is an image diagram relating to a stop display mode of a decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an example of the display priority in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an image diagram relating to priority in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is an image diagram relating to a change in the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram relating to the hold display for each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram relating to the erasure of the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an operation diagram of a distribution member unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the symbol standby display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of a decorative symbol display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of a hold change display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of a hold occurrence display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of a reserved digestion display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of a reserved passage route in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of a pre-reading determination process at the time of winning a first main game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of a pre-reading determination process at the time of winning a second main game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a first decorative symbol effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a second decorative symbol effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the pre-reading display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of a stop symbol display at the time of a big hit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process B on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 116 is an image diagram of an interrupt effect execution in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process C on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the accessory drive control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a first decorative symbol effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process B on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process C on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a screen display during fluctuation standby in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a screen display of volume adjustment or light amount adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a screen display during normal fluctuation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a screen display during SP reach in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a transition of updating the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of holdings and the probability that the first decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the final display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the hitting method warning display (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the relationship between the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed during the look-ahead effect display and the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed during the fluctuation of the trigger fluctuation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between the power supply cutoff (not RAM clear) and the decorative symbol after the power supply cutoff is restored in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the relationship between the power supply cutoff (RAM clear) and the decorative symbol after the power supply cutoff is restored in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the relationship between the reach voice and the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a full rotation effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a variation mode of a decorative symbol for each stage in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the display contents of the decorative symbol during the change in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing a display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol when the re-variation is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific symbol is displayed and a super reach effect is produced in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, in which a development symbol is displayed corresponding to a notice type and a super reach effect is achieved. FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when a super reach effect is obtained when different display modes are used among the same notice types. FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when different look-ahead effects are performed to obtain a super reach effect. FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when different display modes of the same look-ahead effect type are performed to obtain a super reach effect. FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when developing into the same super reach effect via different displays. FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when developing into a super reach effect via a button effect. FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach effect is obtained in different effect stages in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing a display transition when re-variation is executed in different production stages in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo-continuous symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo-continuous symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the first decorative symbols are overlapped and displayed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 157 is an image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment regarding a case where a power failure occurs during execution of a loss fluctuation. FIG. 158 is an image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment regarding a case where a power failure occurs during execution of a jackpot fluctuation. FIG. 159 is an image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment regarding a case where a power failure occurs when the look-ahead effect is not executed. FIG. 160 is an image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment regarding a case where a power failure occurs during execution of a look-ahead effect. FIG. 161 is an image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment regarding the execution of a character effect. FIG. 162 is an image diagram relating to the action of the non-time shortening gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 163 is an image diagram of the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 164 is an image diagram relating to a display priority at the time of an error in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 165 is an image diagram relating to the display priority when the button effect is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 166 is an image diagram of a first decorative symbol and a gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 167 is an image diagram relating to the characteristics of the first decorative symbol depending on the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each action or the like in a specific symbol change on the first main game side in a non-time shortened gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each action or the like in the variable standby state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 170 shows execution of each action of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the right column, and the middle column in a specific symbol change on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing and execution time. FIG. 171 shows execution of each action of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the right column, and the middle column in a specific symbol change on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing and execution time. FIG. 172 shows the execution timing and execution timing of each action of the first decorative symbol in the left, right, and middle rows in the specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution time. FIG. 173 is an image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment from the fixed stop of the lost symbol to the first re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbol. FIG. 174 is an image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment from the action 2 at the start of fluctuation to the fixed position action 2 of the pseudo-continuous symbol. FIG. 175 is an image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment from the fixed position action 2 to the shaking action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row. FIG. 176 is an image diagram from the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row to the fixed stop in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 177 is a symbol of the first main game symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment in a situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists in the non-time shortened gaming state. It is an image diagram regarding the display from the mode in which the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the fluctuation is fixedly stopped by the lost symbol to the second shaking action, and the display from the jackpot end demo to the second shaking action. .. FIG. 178 shows the first decorative symbols and the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns in the normal symbol variation and reach variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. 1 It is an image diagram which shows the overlap relationship with a decorative pattern. FIG. 179 shows a fixed-position action when performing a chance look-ahead effect with a first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the first main game symbol in a non-time-reduced gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows. FIG. 180 shows a fixed position action corresponding to a trigger hold when executing a chance look-ahead effect with a first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is an image diagram. FIG. 181 shows a fixed-position action when performing a chance look-ahead effect with a first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the second main game symbol in a time-reduced gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is an image diagram which shows.

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. "Prize ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out, but also passing through a gate without a prize ball payout. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as an evacuation state). In a configuration that can take (there is) (so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning state is easy, and the evacuation state = the winning non-easy state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes pseudo-random numbers in addition to random numbers in a narrow sense (for example, hard as a random number). Random numbers, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number (random number for winning or losing lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification information are determined. "Random number for determining variable mode", "Random number for determining stop symbol", "Random number for determining winning symbol" for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variable game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the definite identification information, but at least one random number that is the same as or different from each other may be used. Further, in the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. ) Is called one random number (that is, in the above example, a random number of winning random number + random number of variation mode + random number of design determination ...) is called one random number. It is called). Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which the large winning opening can be opened, and a non-probability variable game state (low probability state) in which the lottery probability for transition to the special game state is a predetermined value. Transition to game state Probability fluctuation game state with high probability of lottery (high probability state), auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize at the start port that triggers the transition to special game (so-called high base state, for example, start) When the variable member is attached to the mouth, the opening period of the variable member can be lengthened, the probability of winning the opening of the variable member can be increased, and the time for notifying the result of the open lottery of the variable member can be shortened. Yes, all of these are valid or at least one is valid), non-auxiliary gaming state (low base state) with no assistance for winning a prize at the starting port that triggers the transition to special game, etc. One or more combinations. The "variable display stop time" is the time for holding the identification information in a stopped state when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and when the hold remains after the variable display is stopped, this variable display stop time is used. After that, the fluctuation related to the remaining hold is started (the fluctuation start condition and the pass / fail judgment permission condition are satisfied). Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (directing symbol, design). The main game symbol (special symbol) is the identification information that is displayed and controlled on the main control board side, and the decorative symbol (the effect symbol, the design) is the identification information as the effect displayed on the sub control board side. Is. "Displayable identification information" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal display, LED, 7-segment display) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color) and physics. Display (for example, the symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. "Direction" refers to display content that enhances the enjoyment of the game, for example, moving images such as animations and live-action photographs, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc., including fluctuations / stops of identification information, notices, etc. The combination of can be mentioned. The "decorative symbol" may be in any form as long as the type of the symbol can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably used for an image object such as a card type or a character type. Visual ones, for example, those with shapes such as numbers (including Chinese numbers), alphabets, letters, symbols, patterns, and patterns are described. Then, by finally stopping and displaying the image object on the valid line with a combination in which the numbers and symbols are the same, it is notified that a big hit has occurred. The "first decorative design (first production design)" and "second decorative design (second production design)" are both "decorative designs (production design, design)". However, each of them is configured to be able to independently notify the occurrence of a big hit (for example, the "first decorative symbol (first production symbol)" becomes "777" to notify the occurrence of a big hit. It is possible, and the "second decorative symbol (second production symbol)" becomes "777" to notify the occurrence of a big hit). The "variable mode" is, for example, a fluctuating time (including a fluctuating time of a main game symbol (special symbol), a fluctuating time of a decorative symbol (directing symbol, a scroll), and a fluctuating time of a normal symbol), and a decorative symbol. Decorative symbols that can be visually recognized by the player by scrolling from top to bottom (in addition, scrolling from bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc.) By switching the type of (directing symbol, design), the decorative symbol (directing symbol, design) is rotated and displayed on the spot, and the player can visually recognize the decorative symbol (directing symbol) by half-turning or one-turning. , The type of drawing) is switched (such scroll display, rotation display, etc. may be referred to as "switching display mode") and the like. "Temporarily stop (or temporarily stop) / do not stop (or temporarily stop) the decorative design (directing design, design)" means "temporarily stop → re-variate" as one set, and perform this one set / It is synonymous with not doing it. "Re-variation" means a situation such as "temporarily stop the decorative design (directing design, design)-> re-variate", and "start fluctuation-> provisionally suspend the decorative design (directing design, design)". It is a term that includes situations such as "stopping" and "starting re-variation-> temporarily stopping decorative symbols (designs for production, design) (temporary stop after the second time)" in pseudo-continuous production. A production stage that temporarily stops the combination of pseudo fluctuations and resurrection fluctuations in the resurrection production (for example, during the super reach production, the combination of decorative symbols (designs for production, terminology) indicating loss is temporarily stopped, and shifts after the super reach production is completed. It is a term that indicates a change that temporarily stops at a decorative pattern that indicates a hit after being re-changed in, and then stops deterministically). It is also synonymous with excluding the final stop display timing (typically, after that, the stop display is deterministically displayed together with the stop display of the so-called main game symbol) for notifying the presence or absence of a big hit. In addition, the "decorative design (design for production, design)" is based on the second element (for example, numbers), and the first element (presence / absence / content of incidental information such as characters and "SUPER") and the third element. (For example, a color effect) or the like may be attached. Further, in the "decorative design (design for production, design)", when the production mode is different, even if the second element is the same (same number, same alphabet, same character, same symbol, etc.), the first The elements and / or the third element may be configured differently. Further, due to the difference between the first element and / or the third element, the expectation that the reach fluctuation will be a big hit, and the expectation that the symbol fluctuation related to the pre-reading effect when a specific symbol combination is stopped at the time of executing the look-ahead effect will be a big hit. The profit margin for the player may be different, such as the number of rounds at the time of a big hit and the game state after the big hit. In addition, in such a configuration, a high probability state and a high base state (high probability high base state), a low probability state and a high base state (low probability high base state), and a high probability state and a low base state (high probability state). In the low probability low base state), the first element and / or the third element is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of the low probability state and the low base state (low probability low base state) which are the normal gaming states. It may be configured to be. Further, the "information display unit" is for displaying information including a notice effect, for example, an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and may indicate each of them individually. However, a combination of a plurality of display media (entire unit) such as an effect display device + a 7-segment LED + an LED lamp may be shown. Further, the "effect display unit" is for displaying an effect including a notice effect, for example, an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and each of these may be shown as a single unit. However, a combination of a plurality of display media such as an effect display device + a 7-segment LED + an LED lamp (the entire unit) may be shown.

The following embodiment is a model (type 1 type 1 multifunction device) in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines of type 1, type 2, type 3, general electric service, etc.). .. It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of turning on / off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa.

Here, prior to the detailed description of the present invention, a concise configuration according to the present invention will be described.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, two types of decorative symbols (designs for directing and design), a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, are provided, and the first decorative symbol is hidden or visually recognized. A configuration for displaying (variable display) the second decorative pattern in a difficult situation will be described in detail in (the present embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the present embodiment), a special symbol and a specific roll (a roll consisting of only numbers) are generated at the temporary stop timing of the middle row at the time of executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation. The configuration changed so that it can be temporarily stopped will be described in detail in (Change Example 1 from the present embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the present embodiment), at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the later the temporary stop timing is {or the number of pseudo-reams within the fluctuation. As the number of temporary stops in the middle row increases}, the configuration changed so that the number of stop modes that can be temporarily stopped increases will be described in detail in (Change Example 2 from the present embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the transparent effect is configured so that the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in a transparent state and the accessory in the effect display device SG can be visually recognized, and the transparent effect is being executed. A configuration in which the effect display in the second decorative symbol display device is executed even when the first decorative symbol is hidden will be described in detail in (Change Example 3 from the present embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the pachinko gaming machine has a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol as decorative symbols (designs for effect, design), and is configured to be capable of performing a look-ahead effect. A configuration in which the final variation of the look-ahead effect (variation related to trigger hold) can be stopped as a fixed stop symbol and can be stopped as a pseudo-continuous symbol of pseudo continuous variation will be described in detail in (second embodiment). ..

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the configuration of (second embodiment) is changed to a specific hold display mode at the time of executing the hold change effect (effect in which the hold display mode is changed) based on the winning of the look-ahead lottery. A configuration modified to provide a notice effect to be executed only when the above is performed will be described in detail in (Change Example 1 from the Second Embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (second embodiment), the appearance rate of special symbols (look-ahead lottery winning rate and angel zone) depending on the variation on the first main game side and the variation on the second main game side. The configuration in which the transition lottery winning rate) is changed so as to be different will be described in detail in (Example 2 of change from the second embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, in the time-reduced gaming state, one variation time of the first decorative symbol can be a time value for a plurality of variation times of the second decorative symbol (or the main game symbol). The configuration will be described in detail in (Third Embodiment).

Various configurations relating to the display mode, display position, display area, priority, etc. of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention are described in detail in (4th embodiment). explain.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, a configuration is provided in which a display corresponding to two holds, a first hold display and a second hold display, is displayed on the effect display device (modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment). ) Will be explained in detail.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the parallel lottery can be executed, and the decorative symbols (directing symbols, design) corresponding to the fluctuation of the first main game symbol are the first decorative symbol and the second main game symbol. A configuration in which the decorative design (design for production, design) corresponding to the fluctuation is used as the second decorative design will be described in detail in (Fifth Embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the configuration in which the configuration relating to the area where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed is changed from the configuration of (fifth embodiment) is changed (change from the fifth embodiment). This will be described in detail in Example 1).

The configuration applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail in (Sixth Embodiment).

(The present embodiment)

Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate D20 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, and extracting the game ball from the lower ball plate D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and an effect sound (sound effect) according to the gaming state or the like is output.

Next, the game board is formed with a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In the game area D30, in addition to mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, the auxiliary game start port H10, 1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out opening D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information.

Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start port entry detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is variable to a closed state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than in the normal state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to be vertically overlapped with each other, and due to the presence of the first main game start port A10, the first main game start port A10 is present. 2 The upper part of the main game start port B10 is blocked. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are both the first main game start port A10. And it is configured to be guided to the second main game start port B10.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game start port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game start port A10 side. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to be vertically overlapped with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port is not limited to this. The A10 and the second main game start port B10 may be configured to be separated from each other. In such a configuration, a member may be provided to close the upper part of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Further, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is likely to be guided to the first main game start port A10, while it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10, and the game area D30. The game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) may be configured so as to be difficult to be guided to the first main game start opening A10, while being easily guided to the second main game start opening B10. It should be noted that "easy to be guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined by, for example, the size of the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are launched on the right side and the left side, respectively.

Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game start port H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30. It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided {However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. (For example, auxiliary game start ports H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

Next, on the upper right side of the out opening D36, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and flow down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 is opened when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which has a shape and is located on the upper right side of the out opening D36 and below the second major winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and the first large winning opening). The mouth solenoid C13) is provided. Here, the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The first large winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first). 1 The big winning opening solenoid C13 is excited and changed). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advanced state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above the right upper side of the out opening D36 and above the first large winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second major winning opening C20 includes a second major winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second major winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second major winning opening). The mouth solenoid C23) is provided. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second major winning opening C20, and the second major winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second big winning opening C20 in the normal state where the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win in the second big winning opening C20 and in the open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advanced state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed display. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game symbol display unit B21g. It is provided with a symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers related to (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and "-" of the loss {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the holding number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display a maximum of four holding numbers (for example, it is composed of one lamp and is held). Number 1: Lighting, Number of Holds 2: Low-speed blinking, Number of Holds 3: Medium-speed blinking, Number of Holds 4: High-speed blinking).

Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and the decorative symbol on the first main game side (decorative symbol on the second main game side) is not displayed. In this case, a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG described later may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

Next, the effect display device SG executes display of an effect image including a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. It is a device to do. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display area SG12 (and a second hold display area SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a plurality of rows of decorative symbols (first decoration) that imitate a game of a slot machine, for example. A decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying a moving image of a symbol and a second decorative symbol) variation is provided. Although the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display in this embodiment, it may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display area SG12 (and the second hold display area SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the hold lamps of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of reserved auxiliary game symbol changes (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays a role of directing by blinking or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and controls the overall gaming operation (that is, the game, such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10). Mainly the main control board M that performs control that is directly related to the interests of the pachinko machine, and the sub-main control unit SM that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that gives interest to the game content. It is supplied from the sub-control board S, which is equipped with a sub-sub control unit SS that executes the effect display and controls the overall effect, and the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the prize ball tank KT according to the prizes in each prize opening. A game of a prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 or the like for paying out a game ball to the upper ball plate D20, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game of the upper ball plate D20. A launching device D42 that launches balls (reservoir balls) one by one into the game area D30, a launching control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine. , A power switch Ea or the like, which is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine, is provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the gaming side).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the gaming ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. On the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the main control board M. Sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are one board) that controls the execution of various effects, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc. (Arranged above) and the power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards are mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S has various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), sound from the speaker D24, and lighting of the game effect lamp D26. , Sub-main control unit SM that controls error notification, and display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) on the effect display device SG. It is provided with two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS to be executed. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the CPU (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.). Here, although not particularly shown, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to provide an unused area in order to prevent writing of a program or the like modified by fraudulent activity. It is suitable (for example, all unused areas are filled with 0, used areas are packed in a young address, etc.). Also, in order to prevent referencing data that is not normally referenced due to noise or fraudulent activity, it is used only for unused data (for example, data referenced in gaming machines with different specifications or for testing at the development stage). It is preferable to configure it so that the data to be used) is not provided. Similarly, when using the RAM area, it is preferable to pack the area in a young address and use the area so as not to provide an unused program area. Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection mode between each board / device will be outlined.

First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, first. 1 big prize opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (not shown, the general winning opening is a entry opening that has a prize ball but does not perform a symbol lottery. )}, Drive solenoids (not shown), drive solenoids (described above, 1st prize opening solenoid C13, 2nd prize opening solenoids C23, etc.), information display LEDs (not shown), etc., which are essential for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS), and the prize ball is paid out based on the progress of the game. Information (commands) related to the prize ball payout control board KH can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production / game can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal by wiring. It is configured to be able to output game-related information to an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main are configured. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used as the communication method). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of the game ball, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a request for lending the game ball to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, launching motor, ball feeding device) are provided. Etc.) are also connected. In this embodiment, the gaming ball lending device R is separated from the gaming machine and adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. In that case, the gaming ball lending control board KH is used for lending. Control and management control of recording media for lending such as electronic money may be supervised.

Next, as described above, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other effects. It is connected to a drive device (not shown). In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-main control unit SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Illuminations) Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured in. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, by configuring it to be integrated, there are merits such as space merit and reduction of the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when the VDP integrated with the voice control circuit is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H). It is connected to the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM) related to the production and the prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes the image effect, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), the speaker D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM), the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It is composed of ROMs and RAMs to be used, elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. It should be noted that each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in the peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each of the above means (devices) will be described.

First, the main control board M includes a game information control means MJ that controls acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, and a progress of a game such as a special game or a specific game. The game progress means MP that controls the current and past game states [for example, the state related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability variable game state, time shortened game state), special game state}, state related to the auxiliary game. (Easy open state, non-easy open state), stop symbol and variation mode information related to the main game symbol and auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, game state during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ] Etc. temporarily stored in the game state temporary storage means MB and various game information on the game peripheral device side {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss} , Information transmission control means MT for transmitting information regarding variation mode (for example, variation time), start signal / state information / end signal of special game, hold information, etc.} (and command transmission buffer for accumulating untransmitted commands) It has MT10) and a prize ball payout determining means MH that controls a prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on the winning of a game ball to various winning openings.

Here, the game information control means MJ determines the entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of the game ball into each entry port (starting opening, etc.) and whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the determination result is obtained. It has a random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and a hold control means MJ30 for temporarily storing within an upper limit number of balls entering each start port during variable display as a hold ball. is doing. Further, the game progress means MP directly determines the opening / closing of the display control means MP10 for controlling the fluctuation and stop display of each symbol and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. The second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, the special game control means MP30 that controls the control related to the special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the first main. With respect to the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, there is a determination as to which game state the current game state is to be transferred to, and a specific game control means MP50 for performing a process of shifting the game state based on the decision. is doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 has a first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start port A10, and a second main game start port. Second main game start port for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10 Auxiliary game start port for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B. The first major winning opening decision means MJ11-C10 and the second major winning opening C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first major winning opening C10 and the entry determination means MJ11-H. It has a second large winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20, which determines whether or not a game ball has entered.

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, and determines whether or not to acquire the random number on the first main game side, and according to the determination result. To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A and the second main game start port B10 for acquiring random numbers (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main) is determined according to the determination result. A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring a game symbol determination random number, etc., and an auxiliary game for determining whether or not to acquire an auxiliary game side selection random number and acquiring the random number based on the determination result. It has a random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H.

Here, the scope of the claims including the above and the "random number" in the present specification are, for example, "0" to "65535" and "65535" assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a random number for determining a variation mode). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "0" to "255". Further, the random number does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo-random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the values are expressed in sequence along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed. ) Is determined by a random value (initial value update method), a combination thereof, and the like. By acquiring random numbers by such a method, it is possible to generate aperiodic random numbers that are difficult for the player to predict. On the contrary, for example, in the case of a method of generating the next random number by using the random number used for a certain lottery, it becomes easy to predict the next random number. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

Next, the hold control means MJ30 transfers the hold digestion control means MJ31 that controls the process related to the hold digestion and the change start, and the first main game side random number acquired in a situation where the first main game symbol change permission is not given. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the random numbers, and based on the determination result, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol change permission is given. -A and whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number acquired in a situation where the second main game symbol change permission has not been granted are determined, and the symbol change permission is given to the random number based on the determination result. The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game side random number acquired in the situation where the auxiliary game symbol change permission is not given are temporarily stored. It is determined whether or not to store the random numbers, and based on the determination result, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol change permission is given. Have.

Here, the reserved digestion control means MJ31 has a fluctuation start condition satisfaction determining means MJ31j for determining whether or not the condition for starting the fluctuation is satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H combined a random number that can store up to four random numbers with the holding order. Each has a first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, a second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and an auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporary storage in the form. is doing.

Next, the game content determining means MN goes to the winning / failing lottery means MN10 that draws a lottery for whether or not the special game is successful and whether or not the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d can be opened, and to the special game when the result of the winning or losing lottery is a hit. (For example, the hit flag is turned on internally), the special game transition determination means MN20, the symbol content determination means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number. Based on the above, it has a variation mode determining means MN50 for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol. Here, the winning / failing lottery means MN10 is a first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A for performing a winning / failing lottery for the first main game symbol, and a second main game winning / failing lottery means for performing a winning / losing lottery for the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for performing a winning / failing lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / losing lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game winning / losing lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a winning / losing lottery regarding the first main game symbol. 1st main game win / fail lottery table MN11ta-A, 2nd main game win / fail lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a win / fail lottery for the 2nd main game symbol, and a win / fail lottery for the auxiliary game symbol. Each has a winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-H for auxiliary games, which is referred to when performing the above. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, when executing the winning / failing lottery based on the main game random number, the winning / failing lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same as any of all the winning random numbers, or is a winning. When a part or all of the random number values are continuous numerical values, the hit / fail judgment is executed by determining whether or not the main game random number value is equal to or less than the upper limit value of the winning random number value and equal to or more than the lower limit value. .. By executing such a pass / fail determination, an accurate determination process can be executed. On the contrary, when the hit / fail judgment is executed by comparison with only the upper limit of the hit random number range or comparison with only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, 0 or 1023 when the range of the random number value is 0 to 1023). Since it is necessary to set 1023) as a random number value, it becomes vulnerable to fraud (for example, it is a fraudulent act of passing a current through the main control board M, and all the bits in the storage area tend to be 0 or 1). There is a risk of getting rid of it. Further, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery {when a plurality of random numbers are used for one lottery (so-called two-step lottery is executed), two random numbers are executed. Because it is necessary to prevent them from synchronizing}.

Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 acquires the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A that determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B that determines the stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the random number for determining the game content (the second main game random number), and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. It has an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H, which determines a stop symbol of.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol. The lottery table MN41ta-A for determining the first main game symbol is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or not and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the first main game for the normal game state). Lottery table, probability fluctuation game → 1st main game probability fluctuation game state lottery table, time shortening game → 1st main game time reduction game state lottery table). Further, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or not and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game state lottery). Table, probability fluctuation game → second main game probability fluctuation game state lottery table, time shortening game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). The MN51-A, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), and It has an auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-A referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of success or failure and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the first main game normal). Game state lottery table, probability variable game → 1st main game probability variable game state lottery table, time shortened game → 1st main game time shortened game state lottery table). Further, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-B referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or not and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game). State lottery table, probability fluctuation game → second main game probability fluctuation game state lottery table, time shortening game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has a lottery table MN51ta-H for determining the auxiliary game variation mode, which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode is determined. The decision lottery table MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the display control means MP10 is on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. Assistance for a predetermined time on the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C that controls to stop and display after changing the first main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that controls to stop and display the game symbol after it is changed.

Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has a timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) for managing the fluctuation of the first and second main game symbols that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

Next, in order to determine whether or not the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B satisfies the conditions for opening / closing the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. The second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t for measuring the drive (opening) time of the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. -B and has.

Next, the special game control means MP30 has the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the content of the special game when the special game transition condition is satisfied. (Specifically, the special game content determination means MP32 to be set in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize A special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the mouth C10 or the second big prize opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first big prize mouth). It has a special game time management means MP34 for performing (opening and closing time of C10 and the second prize opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 includes the first and second major winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first special winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second major winning opening electric accessory C21d. It has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. Further, the special game content determining means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b (table). Details are not shown).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 satisfies the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition of the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition of the time shortened game state is satisfied. It has a time-saving game end condition determination means MP52 for determining. Here, the time-saving game end condition determination means MP52 has a time-saving number counter MP52c, which can count the number of time-saving games. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability fluctuation game in which the lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than in the normal game. Point to.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) during the time reduction game as compared with the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). Further, the time shortening game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability variation game with no time reduction limit). except for). That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The above-mentioned probabilistic game end condition determination means MP51 and time-saving game end condition determination means MP52 are, for example, a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability-variable game or a time-shortening game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time a symbol is changed. (In the case of a so-called pachinko gaming machine having a fall lottery function). The time reduction game state according to this example may be that the main game time reduction flag is on or the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, that is, the time reduction game state. May indicate that the open time extension function is activated (including high accuracy high base state and low accuracy high base state), and the open time extension function is not activated in the non-time reduction gaming state. It may indicate that (including a low probability low base state). The time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability-variable gaming state may be referred to as a high-probability lottery state, and the non-probability-variable gaming state may be referred to as a low-probability lottery state. In addition, the high-accuracy low-base state as another game state is set to the time-reduced game state when the time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state is executed, and the main game symbol is set. When the time-reduced game is not set to a time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state, it is preferable to set the non-time-reduced game state.

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB is the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). The first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning balls in any round, on / off of various flags related to the special game, etc.) It has an MB20b and a specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, on / off of various flags related to the specific game, etc.). ..

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C is stopped related to the first or second main game symbol (the first or second main game symbol in which the change start condition is satisfied) currently being changed. It has the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing the symbol and the variation mode information.

Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores information such as a stop symbol related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (auxiliary game symbol for which the change start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripherals include the first main game peripheral device A, which is a peripheral device on the first main game side, the second main game peripheral device B, which is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and the first main game side. And the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, which are shared peripheral devices on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, and the sub-sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol in time. It is related to the display of only the information that does not affect the result of the game, including the fluctuation of the design). Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers a special game transition, and a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers a special game transition, and a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C are in the closed state during normal games, and are in the open state under predetermined conditions during special games (big hits). And has a second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H has an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of

Next, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM has the display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and the effect content determination process and display control process related to the effect display. It has an effect display control means SM20 that controls the above, and an information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereinafter, each of the above means will be described in detail.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information related to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. ..

Next, the effect display control means SM20 includes the decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the variation mode of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the stop symbol determination process, and the display control process, and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol). The design hold information display control means SM22 that controls the hold quantity management and hold display processing of (1 decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the background effect display control means SM23 that controls the background image determination process and the display control process, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect display control means SM24 that controls the content determination process and the display control process, and a reach effect display control means SM25 that controls the reach effect content determination process and the display control process.

Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the decorative symbol {in the present embodiment, it is referred to as two types of decorative symbols (hereinafter, referred to as a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol). The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are independent of each other, and the game is played by combining three numerical symbols of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. The result can be notified} of the stop symbol and the display content determining means SM21n for determining the variation mode, and various information (variation mode) related to the symbol variation of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). Information display related information for temporarily storing information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc. The temporary storage means SM21b and the first decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) for measuring the fluctuation time. It has a map variation time management timer SM21t-1. Here, the marking display content determining means SM21n is a lottery (reference) table for determining the decoration variation content, which is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). SM21ta (details of the table are not shown) and decorations referred to when determining (or setting) the effect contents, display update timing, and display update contents of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It also has a design effect table SM21ta-2. Both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are independently displayed and controlled on the effect display control means SM20 side based on the information from the main control board M side, and these two types are used. By making good use of the decorative pattern of, it is configured to enhance the interest in the production and to make it easier to grasp the progress of the game. This point will be described later.

Next, the design reservation information display control means SM22 has a design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to the reservation related to the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). ..

Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the background effect display content determining means SM23n that determines the display content of the background effect and the information related to the background effect display based on the information from the main control board M side. It has a background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for the purpose.

Next, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 is the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n that determines the display content and display timing of the advance notice effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and the information related to the advance notice effect display. It has a notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b for temporarily storing the information.

Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 is the reach effect display content determining means SM25n that determines the display content and display timing of the reach effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and the information related to the reach effect display. It has a reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing the information.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is an image display that displays an image on the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control unit SM side and the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. It has a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display-related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information related to various image displays.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variablely displaying decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), and a first reserved display area SG12 (and a second) for displaying main game hold information. 2 Hold display area SG13) and.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS controls the sub-game. Means (sub-main control unit) It means that it is controlled by SM. It should be noted that the main control board M may be configured to control another peripheral device via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

From here, an example of a general processing flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart. The flowchart is mainly composed of terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), start / end / return, etc. .. Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in another flowchart, the one that refers to the other flowchart is shown as a subroutine (shown by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, at the stage of developing a gaming machine, it is also possible to develop a gaming machine with different specifications at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine (in this example, executed by a gaming machine with different specifications) is executed in the processing on the main side. It is configured so as not to leave a subroutine (which is not normally used), and prevents processing related to an unused subroutine, which is not normally executed, from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process of the figure (a) is executed. That is, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the initial setting is performed (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and the reset button of the power supply unit E (RAM clear). It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by the administrator of the game hall or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at the relevant timing). Alternatively, at that timing, a command may be set and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, it is stored in the checksum and the RAM area recorded at the time of power failure. Compare with the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal in step 1010, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M in various ways at the time of power failure. An information command is acquired, and various acquired information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in step 1014 (may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or a command may be set at the relevant timing and a control command described later). It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 4.0 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is T), {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the figure (b) is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. .. After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

It is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM or the like) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value at which a special game is executed (noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the start of program processing). To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game is executed).

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process of FIG. 3B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 4.0 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1500, the main control board M executes the special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes the special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (particularly, the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs the prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the prize opening in which the game ball has won a prize. The payout control board KH is made to execute, and the process for managing the result, etc.) is executed. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an output process of an external signal (information output to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC, or the like). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing that was done. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received on the sub-main control unit SM side is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). Since there are cases, the commands are configured to be transmitted in the order in which the commands are determined to be transmitted on the main control board M side (in the order in which the commands are set).

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power cutoff signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the process of FIG. 3C is executed when the power is turned off in the gaming machine. Will be done. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, when the NMI is interrupted), in step 1020, the main control board M sets the power cut information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power cutoff waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate, passed) into the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the hold balls are not the upper limit (for example, four). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information on the number of the holding balls. Is added by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Even if No in step 1102 or 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessory opening flag is off. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. .. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to set the game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) on the auxiliary game side. At the same time as acquiring, the lottery table MN41ta-H for determining the auxiliary game symbol is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the game state of the acquired auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag). When is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when is off) and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets the auxiliary game symbol to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). A predetermined time related to the fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the auxiliary game symbol variation display on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached with reference to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol by referring to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, and the acquired auxiliary game symbol. The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a “hit”. In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B is based on the game state on the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag), and the second main game. Start port Electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B has a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 0.5 when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off). Seconds) is set. Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. .. Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B to set the opening time of the electric accessory. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d and temporarily assists the game state. The flag for opening the electric accessory in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1300).

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238, if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230 or step 1238, the next process is performed. (Processing in step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to move to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing branch processing using the stop display fixed flag and timer. Achievable).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A is from the first main game start opening entry ball detection device A11s of the first main game start opening A10 to the first main game start opening entry ball information. Is received or not. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the main game (particularly the first main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a win / fail lottery random number for determining the win / fail, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a variation pattern of the main game symbol (special symbol) ( The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers for determining the variation time) are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. .. Next, in step 1310, the hold control means MJ30 is a command transmission buffer for transmitting information to the effect that the first main game hold random number has been acquired (first main game hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. In addition, even if No in step 1302 or step 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312.

Next, in step 1312, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B receives the second main game start opening ball entry from the second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s of the second main game start opening B10. Determine if information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (particularly the second main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a win / fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the case of the first main game content determination means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning / failing lottery random number for the first main game and the winning / failing lottery random number for the second main game). Acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. .. Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 is a command transmission buffer for transmitting information to the effect that the second main game hold random number has been acquired (second main game hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). Even if No in step 1312 or 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

In the present embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320, but the information on the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. It may be transmitted with a hold number, and it is also possible to substitute this information as information indicating that a random number has been acquired.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not the hold of the second main game symbol exists. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determining means MN executes the first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the second main game symbol exists, regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game symbol). (Even if) is configured to prioritize the pending digestion of the second main game symbol, but it is not limited to this (holding digestion based on the winning order and simultaneous parallel of both main game symbols). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery to draw a lot).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserved digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is a condition that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbol is not changing, and the main game symbol is held. Although not shown in this example, when a variable fixed time (time for stopping and displaying the confirmed display symbol after the final display of the main game symbol) is provided, the variable start condition of the next fluctuation is set during the variable fixed time. It may be configured not to satisfy.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the hold digestion control means MJ31 becomes the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol change, which is temporarily stored, is read out, and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game). It is deleted from the symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (hold digestion processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the winning / failing lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, and is the first. 1 The main game symbol winning / failing lottery is executed based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability-variable gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability-variable gaming state. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small hit) in which the gaming state cannot be changed is not illustrated, but a small hit may be generated (a small hit is won). Further, in such a configuration, for example, (1) the winning probability of a small hit differs between the first main game side and the second main game side, and the first main game side is higher than the second main game side. Is easy to win (the second main game side does not have to provide a small hit), (2) When a small hit is won, the game state after the small hit ends is the same as the game state before the small hit starts. (If the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends may be different from the gaming state before the jackpot starts), (3) The jackpot is the first main game side and the second main game side. The winning probability is the same, and the winning probability increases due to the probability fluctuation game state, whereas the winning probability differs between the first main game side and the second main game side in the small hit. The winning probability is not changed by getting and entering the probability fluctuation game state. (4) As a stop symbol of the symbol variation of the symbol won by the small hit, a "special symbol" dedicated to the small hit winning (for example, ★ such as "2 ★ 2" and "3 ★ 9" correspond to "special symbol") can be stopped), (5) Three of the same symbol as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the symbol variation won in the small hit Specific rolls that are not uniform and are a combination of numbers with a certain regularity (for example, order such as "234", reverse order such as "432", and odd order such as "357". Etc.) can be stopped, (6) The big hit (2R or more, the number of rounds is different) that is the same (or similar) opening mode {visibility) as the small hit from the player's point of view. Seems to be the same opening mode when viewed from the player (small hit is only one round, the big winning opening is opened multiple times in the one round, and the big hit is opened the same number of times as the multiple times. (Executed in a round)} is provided (in such a configuration, it is preferable to stop and display the combination of decorative symbols that is difficult for the player to distinguish between a small hit and a large hit), ( 8) In the second decorative symbol, the "special symbol" dedicated to small hits does not stop (or may not stop), and (9) a combination of decorative symbols that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a small hit or a big hit. Even in the configuration in which is stopped and displayed, the ratio of whether the player is a small hit or a big hit differs depending on the type of combination of decorative symbols that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, by aligning three, the probability after the big hit is completed). When the stop symbol includes a decorative symbol whose transition to the variable gaming state is substantially definite, the probability of being a big hit is higher than when it is not included).

Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) uses the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol). With reference to the symbol lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbol is related based on the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). The stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B"). One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 4R for 4A and 5A, 8R for 4B and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. It should be noted that the random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. However, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) is a lottery for determining the first main game variation mode corresponding to each gaming state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, variation). The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, FIGS. 12 and 13 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, both the first main game side and the second main game side are based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the main game symbol, the main game time reduction flag state, and the number of holdings at the start of the change. It is configured so that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined. That is, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, it is easy to determine the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction game state), it is relative. It is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is short, and when the number of holdings is 2 to 3, the fluctuation time is relatively short as compared with the case where the number of holdings is 0 to 1. It is configured so that the mode can be easily determined (only when it is lost). It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side may be configured to be relatively long in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) {the symbol variation on the second main game side. Is configured to be advantageous to the player, and by reducing the symbol variation efficiency of the first main game side, the hold of the second main game side is likely to occur (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}. In addition, in "the effect mode executed on the sub side", an example of the effect executed at the time of selecting each variation mode is shown. In addition, as an effect mode to be executed on the sub side, a pseudo continuous variation described later (an effect in which it seems that a plurality of symbol variations have occurred during one variation display of the main game symbol) is executed. A "pseudo-ream failure effect" may be provided, which is an effect of notifying the player that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is not executed after inciting whether or not the player is injured. In the game state of, the random number distribution (execution frequency) of "pseudo-ream failure effect-> stop of loss" is larger when the number of holds is 0 to 1 than when the number of holds is 2 to 3. (It may be configured in either the non-time-reduced gaming state or the time-reduced gaming state), and when the "pseudo-ream success effect" is executed, the pseudo-continuous to be described later is executed. It may be configured to notify the player that the pseudo continuous variation is executed after inciting the player whether or not the variation is executed. Further, the "pseudo-ream failure effect" and the "pseudo-ream success effect" are effects using a "special symbol" or a specific roll, which will be described later. For example, when the "pseudo-ream failure effect" is executed, "pseudo-ream failure effect" is executed. After inciting the player whether or not the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped in the middle row, the decorative symbol one frame after the "special symbol" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the middle row, and the "pseudo-ream success effect" is displayed. When executed, the effect mode is such that the "special symbol" stops (temporarily stops) in the middle row after inciting the player whether or not the "special symbol" temporarily stops in the middle row. There is. Further, in order to cause the second main game hold during the change of the first main game symbol in the time shortened game state which is an irregular symbol change, it relates to the first main game symbol related to the loss of the time shortened game state. The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that the variation mode for a short time is not selected regardless of the number of reservations (for example, the variation time is 5 seconds or more). The number of holds shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game hold and the second main game hold, but the first main game in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode. It is the number of game reservations, and in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode, it is the number of second main game reservations.

Next, in step 1414, the game content determination means MN temporarily stores the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Information about the determined main game symbol such as variation mode information and commands related to the current game state) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol to the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (2nd main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. The process proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and change. Determines if the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation ends to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (2nd main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). Stops the variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display unit B21g), and displays the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C as a fixed stop symbol. Control. Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. ..

Next, in step 1430, the game content determining means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, in step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes the specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1470, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1470, in step 1472, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction number) is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in step 1476 and step 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then the next (Processing in step 1500). Even if No in step 1452, step 1470 or step 1474, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 has the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction) in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) is turned off. Next, in step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1522, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and also turns off the special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1607, the special game executing means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) in the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is started to the sub-main control unit side (command transmission buffer MT10). In the control command transmission process in step 1999, it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. If No in step 1610, the special game executing means MP33 determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1612, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the special game executing means MP33 sets the opening pattern in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to win the first large winning opening. The mouth C10 (or the second big winning mouth C20) is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for the purpose (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is applied to the first winning opening C10 (or the second major winning opening C20). It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (ball). If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, if No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the large winning opening is set. Determine if it has passed. In the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 of the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second large winning opening C20). The drive is stopped and the first prize opening C10 (or the second prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the special game executing means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game executing means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1634, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the final round is completed (for example, the round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). (Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is ended to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, in step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (in a probability-variable game state after the execution of the special game is completed). It is a jackpot symbol to be transferred, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, if No in step 1652, that is, if the stop symbol is a non-probability variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the execution of the special game is completed, 4A / 4B in this example), step 1656. Then, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) in the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658.

Next, in steps 1658 and 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and next processing (step). (1997 processing).

Next, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3A is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information). When received → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, when various information commands are received → Reset the effect-related information at the time of power failure to the RAM on the sub side). Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM restores the number of holds (for example, the drawing hold counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). It should be noted that the effect being executed is not restored, and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next fluctuation. After that, the process shifts to the loop processing in which the iterative processing routine (b) of the sub-main control unit SM is repeatedly executed. Here, when (b) is executed, first, in step 2100, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs the hold information management process described later, as shown in the process of FIG. To execute. Next, in step 2200, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the first decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2350, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the second decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the background effect control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and this End the iterative processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main side routines (S2100 to S2999) are looped after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 3C is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal), this is the processing flow (c). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM uses the command input port from the main control board M side (when the STB signal line is turned on). Check the input port of the data signal line mentioned above). Then, in step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM has a command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored and returns to the processing that was executed immediately before this interrupt processing.

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a command (first main game symbol or second main) related to the occurrence of a new hold from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the hold information related to the game symbol) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game). Add "1" to the maximum of 4 for the 2nd main game). Next, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, and the hold information (particularly, the random number value and the hold look-ahead group information related to the main game symbol lottery). ) Is temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2118.

On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2111, did the map reservation information display control means SM22 refer to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receive the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2111, in step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the holding information related to the symbol change (particularly, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) from the marking holding information temporary storage means SM22b. , Shift the remaining pending information. Next, in step 2116, the map reservation display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. Even if No in step 2111, the process proceeds to step 2118.

Next, in step 2118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is loaded on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display area SG12 and the second hold display area SG13) by making full use of the effect display means SS. Figure Hold information Holds the same number of hold images as the number of hold counter values in the temporary storage means SM22b is lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the map display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the map display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) temporarily stores the symbol information (and the symbol information (and the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). The first decorative symbol (as described above, as described above, displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) with reference to the stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the fluctuation of the number. It is a controlled so-called decorative symbol, and the details of its display size and operation content will be described later.) Stop symbol {For example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7.7. Numbers such as "7" (hit rolls), in the case of a lost symbol, the number variations such as "1 ・ 3 ・ 5"} and the variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short time. If it is fluctuating, it is non-reach, if it is fluctuating for a long time, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined. Related information Temporarily store in the temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is composed of three columns, a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and is an effective line (a line capable of notifying the result of success or failure by arranging three numerical symbols). ) Is one line, and if the same number symbols are aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it will be lost). Also, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or only in the middle column), "special symbols" other than the numerical symbols (when displayed on the valid line, it does not mean a big hit, but after that, it is a big hit. It is a symbol that foretells the possibility that Has been done. Note that the temporary stop is to temporarily stop and display the decorative symbols in all rows during the period from the start of the variable display of the main game symbol to the stop display, and the provisionally stopped and displayed decorative symbols are displayed. , The state in which the variable display can be started again during the relevant period (hereinafter, used in the same meaning). Although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" in the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not included in the stop mode in which the temporary stop (provisional stop) is possible, the fixed stop is not performed, and the jackpot is notified. It is configured so that the "special symbol" at the time of executing the look-ahead effect can be temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped), can be fixedly stopped, and is not included in the stop mode for notifying the jackpot. ..

Next, in step 2208, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) temporarily stores the symbol information (and the symbol information (and the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). Refer to the stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the change in the design, and control the display based on the information from the second decorative symbol (as described above, from the main control board M side). It is a so-called decorative symbol, and the details of its display size and operation content will be described later). , Etc., if the number is doublet (hit), if the symbol is lost, the number is different, such as “1 ・ 3 ・ 5”} and the variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol varies for a short time. In the case of non-reach, in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined, and the doublet display-related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the advance notice effect-related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach effect-related). Information is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is composed of three columns, a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and one effective line (a line in which it is effective to arrange the same numerical symbols) is one line. If the same number symbols are aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it will be lost). In addition, only numerical symbols can be stopped in the left column, middle column, and right column (the "special symbol" does not stop like the first decorative symbol), and it is configured so that it does not temporarily stop during the symbol change. .. In this way, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to independently determine the display content for notifying the propriety of the main game symbol, that is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The decorative symbol has a basic property that both sides can independently notify the result of success or failure related to the main game symbol.

Next, in step 2216, the map display content determining means SM21n is the result of whether or not the main game symbol is temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). Based on the variation mode, the decorative design effect content is determined with reference to the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative pattern effect table 1 to the decorative pattern effect table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the pattern variation. The display update timing and display update contents are set, and the information related to the display of the map is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2218, the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (process of step 2300). Transition. Even if No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300).

In the above description, the main game symbol whose display is controlled on the main control board M side is the one on the first main game side (first main game symbol) or the one on the second main game side (). Although it does not mention whether it is the second main game symbol), basically, even if the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol. Alternatively, the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be determined in correspondence with the second main game symbol, that is, the variable display of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Regardless of which of the variable display is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be made feasible in conjunction with it. However, this is not the case in the time-reduced game state (a state accompanied by a so-called electric support state), for example, in the time-reduced game state, the variation display of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol. Regardless of which of the display is performed, it can be exemplified that only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is in a state in which the variable display can be executed in conjunction with the display.

Here, FIGS. 21 and 22 (decorative pattern effect table 1, decorative pattern effect table 2) are a part of the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern effect table 1, especially when the result of success or failure is a loss. And, it is an example of the decorative design effect table 2, in particular, a part of the case where the winning / failing result is a big hit). In the figure, the first decorative symbol may be simply referred to as the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol may be referred to as the second decorative symbol (the same shall apply hereinafter). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the result of success / failure of the main game symbol (shown in the leftmost column, in this example, “miss” or “big hit”) and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol). And the variation mode of the second decorative pattern (shown in the second column on the left), and in this example, only in the case of "pseudo-ream failure (total production time 30 seconds)" and "super reach (total production time 60 seconds)". Based on the example) and the acquired random value (the random value acquired on the sub-main board SM side, a part of the random value is shown in the left 3rd column), the decorative design effect content (left 4th column). In this example, "main effect A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1", "main effect B-1 (big hit) no pseudo-ream", etc.) can be determined. When the decorative design effect content is determined, the "display update timing" and the "display update content" can be uniquely determined. For example, when the decorative design effect content = "A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1", "display update content" = "display update content" = "display update content" = "display update timing" = "at the start of fluctuation (0 seconds later)". It is determined that the figure change starts (all rows of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), and when "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of change", "display update content" = "first design temporary stop display". (Left column), the second drawing is hidden. " Then, as will be described later, the "display update content" that has reached the "display update timing" is the first decorative symbol according to the elapsed time related to the fluctuation time of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It will be executed sequentially for each of the second decorative symbols. That is, when "A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1" is determined, after all the rows of the first decorative symbol and all the rows of the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, "display update timing" = "start of fluctuation". If the display of the first decorative symbol is controlled so that all columns are hidden (even if the variable display is not displayed) until "12 seconds later" is reached, the second decorative symbol is displayed. , The display is controlled so that all columns are displayed in a variable manner (the state of the variable display can be visually recognized), and when "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of fluctuation" is reached, the first decorative symbol is displayed. With respect to, the display is controlled so that only the left column is stopped, while the display of the second decorative symbol is controlled so that all columns are hidden (even if the variable display is not displayed). .. As described above, the basic operation in the example of this example is that when the first decorative symbol is visible (easy to see) to the player, the second decorative symbol is visible to the player. When the first decorative symbol is invisible to the player (difficult to see) while it is invisible (difficult to see), the second decorative symbol is visible to the player (difficult to see). The second decorative symbol is configured to be displayed in a complementary manner in order to ensure that the player is in a state of being easily visible), that is, notifying the player that the symbol is changing. It should be noted that the effect pattern (a series of display contents) defined in "A-1 (missing) pseudo-ream 1" is different from the effect pattern defined by the name of another decorative pattern effect content (that is, the display content is different). ) It should be added that it is a thing. Further, the range of the random number value is "0 to 1023" in all the variation modes, and this figure is an excerpt of a part of the random number range in the map variation mode (hence, corresponds to a certain map variation mode). The random number range of the acquired random number value to be obtained and the random number range of the acquired random number value corresponding to the map variation mode different from the certain map variation mode are different from each other, but both are "0 to 1023". It will be in the range).

Here, in the present embodiment, the so-called pseudo-continuous variation is configured to be feasible, and specifically, the decorative symbol production contents "A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1" and "A-2" in this example. (Loss) Pseudo-ren 2 "," B-2 (Big hit) Pseudo-ren 2 ". For example, in the decorative pattern production content "A-2 (missing) pseudo-ream 2", "display update content" = "design change start (first)" at "display update timing" = "at the start of fluctuation (0 seconds later)". After "1 (1 decorative symbol and all rows of 2nd decorative symbol)" is executed, "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "13 seconds after the start of fluctuation", and "14 seconds after the start of fluctuation" Display update contents "=" Temporary stop display of the first design (left column) "(the left column of the first decorative symbol is the stop display)," Temporary stop display of the first design (right column) "(the first decorative symbol The right column is a stop display), and the "first design special symbol temporary stop display" (the middle column of the first decorative symbol is a stop display at the above-mentioned "special symbol") is executed in sequence. After that, at "display update timing" = "15 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "start of fluctuation of the first design (all rows)" (only the first decorative symbol is displayed again in all rows). After execution, in "display update timing" = "26 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "27 seconds after the start of fluctuation", and "28 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "first drawing temporary stop display (1st drawing temporary stop display) "Left column)" (the left column of the first decorative symbol is the stop display), "1st decorative symbol temporary stop display (right column)" (the right column of the 1st decorative symbol is the stop display), "1st decorative symbol special symbol" By sequentially executing the "temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the above-mentioned "special symbol"), the player can see the first variation of the main game symbol during one variation display. As for 1 decorative symbol, it seems that the symbol fluctuation has occurred multiple times (the appearance of this pseudo continuous fluctuation and the appearance of the "special symbol" being stopped and displayed are the image diagrams of FIG. 40. See).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is hidden (a state in which the stop display / variable display is not displayed), and the middle row of the first decorative symbol is the above-mentioned "special symbol". The second decorative symbol is varied and displayed when it is temporarily stopped, and in other cases, the second decorative symbol is hidden. That is, when the player can visually recognize the first decorative symbol or can determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is hidden (the first decorative symbol). (Because there is no hindrance to the progress of the game by displaying only), when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or when it is not possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol {for example, When the "special symbol" is stopped and the numbers in the middle row (or all rows) are indistinguishable}, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, so that the player always has one of them. The decorative symbol (either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol) can be visually recognized, and the progress of the game can be easily grasped. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the "special symbol" does not temporarily stop, but this makes it difficult to grasp the progress of the game with respect to the first decorative symbol, and is interesting in terms of production. Since the main purpose is to increase the number of cards, the second decorative symbol provided to ensure that the progress of the game can be easily grasped is a "special symbol" (that is, if it is displayed on the effective line, a big hit is given. This is because it is configured not to display a symbol that may make it difficult to grasp the progress of the game, such as a symbol that foretells that a big hit may occur after that, although it does not mean it. In the case of the above-mentioned "non-display" (including both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), a state in which the variable display is performed at high speed (a variable state in which an afterimage can be seen) may be included. In the case of the "display" (including both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the display is fluctuating at a low speed (in the case of a display mode that fluctuates from top to bottom, slowly from the top). And (provisional) a fluctuating state toward the planned stop position) may be included.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so as not to temporarily stop during the fluctuation (and the "special symbol" does not stop), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second decorative symbol is also included. Similar to the first decorative symbol, it may be configured so that it can be temporarily stopped (and pseudo-variation can occur) during the fluctuation. That is, in such a configuration, all the rows of the first decorative symbol and all the rows of the second decorative symbol have substantially the same operation contents of the variable display and the stop display (including the temporary stop), and the stop display is displayed. The types of symbols will be different.

Further, the second decorative symbol does not need to be always displayed during the variable display of the main game symbol, and the display condition and display mode of the second decorative symbol may be changed as appropriate. For example, (1) a specific effect is being generated (instead of making the first decorative symbol invisible, the effect is such that a movie moving image is reproduced using the entire display area on the effect display device SG, or a so-called effect. The second decorative pattern is displayed (2) at the time of a specific reach effect (No. 1) 1 Instead of making the decorative symbol invisible, it is time to execute a reach effect in which the expectation of a big hit is remarkably increased. For example, the display content of the effect performed on the effect display device SG is forcibly suspended. The second decorative symbol is displayed only when the so-called freeze reach effect is executed, and the second decorative symbol is hidden in other reach effects (especially when the reach effect with low jackpot expectation is executed). 3) The appearance position of the second decorative symbol on the effect display device SG is changed according to the effect pattern (for example, the above-mentioned movable accessory for effect advances to a state of obscuring the display area on the effect display device SG. In the case of such an effect, it can be moved to the display area on the effect display device SG that is not obscured by the movable accessory for this effect), and (4) the first decorative symbol can be moved / reduced / enlarged. On the other hand, with respect to the second decorative symbol, the probability that the movement / reduction / enlargement display cannot be executed, or the movement / reduction / enlargement display is executed, the movement width, the reduction ratio, the enlargement ratio, etc. are the first decorative symbols. It may be lower than, etc.

The second decorative symbol changes during a specific reach effect or in a situation where the first decorative symbol forms a reach state (for example, the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped at the same symbol). It may be configured as displayed.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2309, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2310. Even if No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2312, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 first decorates the first decoration based on the first decoration variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start timing of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the first decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). ), And the process proceeds to step 2330.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2314, in step 2318, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has a variation mode temporarily stored in the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the above-mentioned "special symbol" ( In this example, the "special symbol" is configured to temporarily stop only at the middle symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is in the flag area of the temporary storage means SM21b for information related to the display of the design, and the angel zone flag (to notify that the jackpot expectation is increased). The flag that triggers the display of the background image) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2324. On the other hand, even if No in step 2320, the process proceeds to step 2324. Next, in step 2324, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the first decorative symbol (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). ), And the process proceeds to step 2330. In the present embodiment, the "angel zone background" is displayed as a background effect by turning on the angel zone flag. However, as the timing when the angel zone flag is turned on, for example, , (1) While the symbol fluctuation with a relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, the symbol fluctuation that becomes reach), (2) When the symbol fluctuation related to the hold of the digestion schedule is stopped before the symbol fluctuation with a high jackpot expectation. And so on. Further, although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" that triggers the angel zone flag to be turned on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) described above, or in the case of (2) described above. It may be fixedly stopped.

On the other hand, if No in step 2318, in step 2326, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) is the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in (and the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2326, in step 2328, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Even if No in step 2326, the process proceeds to step 2330.

Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first decorative symbol is normally displayed (the above-mentioned player visually recognizes the first decorative symbol). It is determined whether or not it is obtained or it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol (when the second decorative symbol is hidden). In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the second symbol display flag (the second decorative symbol is in a non-display state) in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. (Flag for switching between on = off and display state = on) is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, if No in step 2330, in step 2334, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2336. ..

Next, in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means). With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2336, in step 2338, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the first decorative symbol (sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 2340, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2342, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2350). do. Even if No in step 2310 or 2336, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2350).

In this embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM manages the timing related to the variation display of the first decorative symbol, the execution timing of the background effect, and the like by using the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. However, the management method such as the timing related to the change of the first decorative symbol and the execution timing of the background effect is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display content determination process in step 2200. All the contents such as timing, preview image / reach image display timing, background effect display timing (background effect display switching timing), etc. are determined and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS, and the sub-sub control unit SS follows the received contents. It may be configured to execute (display) the effect at any time at the same timing (the same applies to the second decorative symbol).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second symbol display flag is on. .. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a second decorative symbol variable display execution command (command for variable display of the second decorative symbol) (transmission of the display command in step 2999). It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360. On the other hand, if No in step 2354, in step 2358, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for erasing the variable display of the second decorative symbol (command for hiding the second decorative symbol) (in step 2999). Display command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the transmission control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360.

Next, in step 2360, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means). With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the second decorative symbol (sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 2364, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (process of step 2400). Transition. Even if No in step 2352 or step 2360, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area. As shown in the figure, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the hold display (the hold for the first main game symbol and the hold for the second main game symbol may be displayed at the same time) are the effect display devices. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the SG, and in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the final display timing (the timing when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed), and the game progresses. Since the first decorative pattern is the main decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern has higher visibility than the second decorative pattern (the displayed area is assumed to be larger). Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing (confirmed display timing) of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the same timing.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406 and step 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special gaming flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and also turns on the effect display device. The jackpot start display is displayed on the SG (displayed appropriately based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 2412. Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2412.

Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (game playability and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type etc.).

Next, in step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display an effect related to the special game being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the current jackpot and the stopped jackpot symbol ( It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999 (for example, in the case of a special game related to the latent probability variation jackpot symbol, it is decided to shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the special game ends. A production that cannot be recognized by the player is performed). Next, in step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 displays the end of the big hit on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of the big hit). Next, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special gaming flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2500). .. Even if No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the angel zone flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "angel zone background" (background effect that can be displayed triggered by the temporary stop of the "special symbol") as the background effect, and step 2506. Move to. Next, in step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the fluctuation (a part of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) that triggered the transition of the “angel zone” is completed. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2509, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect that was set before the "angel zone background" was set), and proceeds to step 2520. do.

On the other hand, if No in step 2502, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main side. .. In step 2512, in the case of Yes, in step 2514, a stage transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/20 in this example) is executed (the stage transition lottery is executed at the start of each fluctuation). .. Next, in step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result of step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 shifts to loop each stage in the order of a predetermined stage transition pattern (for example, flat ground stage → space stage → volcano stage → flat ground stage). Based on (Iku), the background effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520. In addition, even if No in step 2506, step 2512 or step 2516, the process proceeds to step 2520.

Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the set background effect on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side is set. It is transmitted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of decorative symbols, a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, are provided, and the first decorative symbol is hidden (stopped). By configuring the second decorative symbol to be displayed (variable display) in a situation where the display / variable display is not displayed) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, the player always displays one of the decorative symbols. It can be a user-friendly gaming machine that can be visually recognized and can accurately determine whether or not a stopped symbol or a jackpot symbol is stopped.

(Example 1 of change from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the "special symbol" is always stopped for the temporary stop symbol in the middle row, and the variation is always displayed during the first decorative symbol. 2 The decorative symbol is configured to be hidden, but the display control method of the decorative symbol is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a change example 1 from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 27 and 28 (decorative pattern effect table 3, decorative pattern effect table 4) are a part of the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern effect table 3, especially when the result of success or failure is a loss, and , The decorative design effect table 4, in particular, a part of the case where the result of success or failure is a big hit). First, the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail with respect to the first decorative design. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is configured to be displayed even during the change. Further, for example, at the time of executing pseudo continuous fluctuation such as "A-6 (missing) pseudo-ream 2 (specific roll)", the specific roll is stopped in addition to the "special symbol" at the temporary stop timing of the middle symbol. It is configured to be possible. Here, unlike the "special symbol", the specific roll is a roll in which all columns (left column, middle column, right column) stop with numbers, but the stop mode follows certain rules. (For example, the order is "345" or the like), and it is configured to notify the player that the pseudo continuous variation is being executed by stopping the specific roll. Further, in the change example 1 from the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, in the case of a loss, the specific roll is more likely to stop at the temporary stop timing of the middle row than the "special symbol". On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the "special symbol" is easier to stop than the specific roll at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, that is, the "special symbol" is easier than when the specific roll is stopped. The expectation that it will be a big hit is higher when it stops. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if it is configured so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the specific roll is stopped than when the "special symbol" is stopped. Further, when the pseudo-variation is executed in the pseudo-continuous variation, all the symbols are re-variated, that is, the three symbols are re-variated after the three symbols are temporarily stopped. In such a case, the three symbols are re-variated. , If the "special symbol" temporarily stops in the middle row and then re-changes, the decorative symbol in the middle row at the start of the re-variation is no longer a "special symbol" {for example, "6 ★ 7" "(★ = special symbol), it will change again in the state of" 667 "(the middle symbol is preferably the symbol of the" ± 1 "frame of the right symbol or the left symbol)} When the "special symbol" temporarily stops in the middle row, the three symbols "667" are temporarily stopped behind the "special symbol", and then the "special symbol" changes again. When erased, the first decorative symbol in the left column, the first decorative symbol in the middle column, and the first decorative symbol in the right column may be configured to change again. In such a case, by setting the display priority of the image of the "special symbol" in the middle row higher than that of the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the "special symbol" is set as the mode of the pseudo-continuous variation to display the specific result. Since it is only necessary to display it, it is possible to prevent the method of determining the first decorative pattern from becoming complicated.

Next, the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail with respect to the second decorative design. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured to be always displayed while the main game symbol is changing. In the case of reach, the second decorative symbol is also temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is also confirmed and displayed at the same time at the final display timing of the first decorative symbol. (The same symbol will be stopped and displayed for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). The variable display mode of the second decorative symbol is not limited to this, and for example, the first decorative symbol can be visually recognized, and the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol. In that case, the second decorative symbol is hidden, that is, the specific roll is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the first decorative symbol, the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped, and the middle column is temporarily stopped. If it is inside, the second decorative symbol is hidden, while if the "special symbol" is stopped at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner (or provisionally). It may be configured to be a stop display). Further, it may be configured to stop and temporarily stop all the second decorative symbols in accordance with the stop and temporary stop of the first decorative symbol. Further, the second decorative symbol may be configured to always be displayed in a variable manner regardless of the fluctuation status of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol may also be fixedly stopped only when the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the present embodiment, the quasi-continuous fluctuation is configured so that the specific roll can be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing in the middle row. By providing a plurality of types of stop modes at the time of temporary stop at the time of execution and different expectations for big hits depending on the stop mode, the player pays attention to which of the stop modes is. Therefore, the fun of the game will increase.

In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol is being executed during a specific effect such as during a reach effect. May be configured not to be variablely displayed (hidden), or only a specific column (for example, the middle column) may be hidden.

In addition, in the change example 1 from this embodiment, the specific roll (or "special symbol") is configured to be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, but the specific roll (or "special symbol") is configured. ) May be displayed in the left column and the right column. For example, (1) the left column and the right column are the same number, and the middle column is ± 1 of the same number. (For example, "4, 5, 4" or "special symbol" is arranged at the position of 5 in the middle row), (2) In the same stop mode as the lost eye that is not a specific result. However, there is a change in sound or color to notify that it is a specific result, (3) temporary stop in all rows at the same time, (4) numbers in the left column and / or right column are temporary stop timings in the middle row. Change, (5) If the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are separated by "2" or more, the decorative symbols in the middle column are separated from the left and / or right columns by "2" or more. In case of temporary stop due to loss, etc., it may be done. In addition, the appearance condition of a specific roll may be changed, for example, it is likely to appear when the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left column and the right column are the same (or appear only when they are the same). For example, it may be configured to be different from the appearance condition of the "special symbol". In addition, the appearance of a "special symbol" (or a specific roll) after the reach has a higher expectation of a big hit than the appearance of a "special symbol" (or a specific roll) when it is not a reach. After that, there is a high possibility that the "special symbol" will temporarily stop again during the symbol change {for example, "7 ★ 7" has a higher expectation of a big hit than "7 ★ 8" (★ = special symbol). Alternatively, it may be configured so that there is a high possibility that it will be temporarily stopped again. In addition, when the left column and the right column are the same number as shown in (1) and the middle column is the number ± 1 of the same number, or the middle column and the right column are the numbers in the left column. When numbers such as ± 1 and ± 2, that is, when the numbers in the middle and right columns are predetermined numbers based on the numbers in the left column, only the numbers displayed in the left column are determined by lottery, etc. The numbers displayed in the middle and right columns should be ± 1 or ± 2 with respect to the same numbers displayed in the left column determined by the lottery or the numbers displayed in the left column determined by the lottery. (That is, the numbers to be displayed in the middle and right columns are not determined by lottery, etc., but the numbers corresponding to the numbers to be displayed in the left column are determined). For example, when the left column is N (N is a number from 1 to 8, for example), the middle column is N + 1, and the right column is N, the number to be displayed in the left column is determined from 1 to 8 by lottery or the like. .. If the number in the left column is determined to be "4", the middle column will be 4 + 1 = "5", the right column will be the same "4" as the left column, and "4, 5, 4" will be the specific result. Set. By configuring in this way, the specific rolls are set using the table in which only the numbers in the left column are set, without using the table in which multiple specific rolls that are a combination of the left column, the middle column, and the right column are set. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the determination of a specific result in the decorative symbol display content determination process of step 2200. In addition, although the case where the numbers in the left column are determined by lottery and the numbers in the middle column and the right column are determined based on the numbers in the left column is illustrated, the numbers in the middle column or the right column are determined by lottery, etc. In the case of the numbers in the columns, the numbers in the left and right columns may be determined, and in the case of the numbers in the right column, the numbers in the left and middle columns may be determined.

(Example 2 of change from this embodiment)
Here, the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative symbol at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation is given in the present embodiment and the modification 1 from the present embodiment, but the configuration of the first decorative symbol at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation other than the configuration is given. It is possible to create new playability by configuring the display mode. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a modification 2 from the present embodiment, and the changes to the modification 1 from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 29 and 30 (decorative pattern effect table 5, decorative pattern effect table 6) are a part of the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern effect table 5, in particular, a part of the case where the result of success or failure is a loss, and , A decorative design effect table 6, in particular, a part of the case where the result of success or failure is a big hit). First, the first decorative design will be described in detail as to the changes from the first modification from the present embodiment. In the second modification from the present embodiment, the "special symbols" that are displayed during the fluctuation and can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation are "special symbol A" and "special symbol A". There are two types, "Special Symbol B". Here, the "special symbol A" is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (even after that timing), while the "special symbol B" is configured to be pseudo continuous. It is configured so that the temporary stop can be performed from the temporary stop timing of the second middle row in the fluctuation. Further, the specific roll is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped from (even after that timing) the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. That is, in the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, two types of "special symbol A" and the specific output can be temporarily stopped as the stop mode, while the second middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation can be temporarily stopped. In the temporary stop timing of, as the stop mode, "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" and three types of specific rolls can be temporarily stopped, and the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation is configured. There are more types of stop modes that can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the second middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation than at the temporary stop timing. As described above, in the temporary stop timing of the middle row of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the number of types of stop modes may be increased as the temporary stop timing in the latter half is reached, or the types of stop modes may be increased as the temporary stop timing in the latter half is reached. May be configured to be less. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes increases toward the temporary stop timing in the latter half, a stop mode with a high expectation that the change becomes a big hit as a type of selection candidate each time a pseudo change is executed is used. It may be configured to be newly added, and by such a configuration, the player pays attention to each time the pseudo-variation is executed. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes decreases as the temporary stop timing in the latter half is reached, the stop mode with a low expectation that the change becomes a big hit is selected as the type of selection candidate each time the pseudo change is executed. It may be configured to be deleted, and by configuring it in such a configuration, it is possible to guarantee the degree of expectation that the fluctuation will be a big hit each time the pseudo fluctuation is executed. Since the second decorative design has the same configuration as that of the first modification from the present embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, the temporary stop timing can be temporarily stopped as the temporary stop timing becomes the latter half at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. By configuring so that the number of stopping modes increases, the player pays attention to the number of times the middle row temporarily stops and the stopping mode at the time of the temporary stop, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

(Example 3 of change from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of decorative symbols, a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, are provided, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed (stop display / variable display is not displayed). The second decorative symbol is displayed (variable display) in a state) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, but the configuration using the second decorative symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a modification 3 from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2232 (variant 3) to step 2236 (variant 3), step 2900 (variant 3), step 2246 (variant 3) and step 2248 (variant 3), that is, step 2204. Then, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2232 (variation 3), the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the current gaming state is a probability fluctuation gaming state. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2232 (variation 3), in step 2234 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n displays the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in a probabilistic display mode (during the probability variation game state). The display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed in the above) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2900 (variation 3). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2232 (variation 3), in step 2236 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n displays the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in a non-probable variable display mode (variable 3). The display mode of the decorative symbol to be displayed during the non-probability variation game state) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2900 (variation 3). As described above, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to be different depending on whether or not the game is in the probability-variable gaming state, and the first decoration is used. When the display mode of the symbol changes (for example, when the non-probability variable gaming state is changed to the stochastic variable gaming state), the display mode of the second decorative symbol is also configured to change with the change. The display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not limited to a configuration that differs only depending on whether or not the game is in the probability-variable gaming state. It may be configured to differ depending on which production (production stage) is, and the like.

Next, in step 2900 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n executes a marking stop symbol determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2246 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2248 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol, and proceeds to step 2216.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the drawing stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (variation 3) in FIG. 31 in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. First, in step 2902, the map display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the symbol variation is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the map display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the number of rounds executed in the special game related to the jackpot symbol is the maximum number of rounds ( In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 16R). In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the marking display content determining means SM21n has three sets of the first decorative symbol and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol as "white" symbols (for example, "777") and Determined to be one of the three sets of "black" symbols (for example, "444") (the three sets of "white" symbols are selected. The total distribution rate and the three sets of "black" symbols are selected. Is 1: 1 with the total distribution ratio selected), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2904, in step 2908, the marking display content determining means SM21n has three "black" symbols for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol (for example, "444"). It is determined to be one of the above, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. As described above, in the change example 3 from the present embodiment, the three sets of "white" symbols (for example, "777") are in the case of a special game in which the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example) is obtained. It is configured so that it can only be stopped, that is, when the three sets of white symbols are stopped, it is almost certain that the special game of the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example) is executed. (It may be a relatively high profit for the player than the three sets of "black" symbols).

On the other hand, if No in step 2902, in step 2910, the marking display content determining means SM1n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2912, the marking display content determining means SM21n sets the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol to a predetermined lost symbol (in this example, "345", and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol is only one pattern. Is determined), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. The type of the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol does not have to be only one pattern, but it is preferably less than the type of the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. Further, the stop symbol when the second decorative symbol is lost is a predetermined lost symbol (“345” in this example), whereas the stop symbol when the first decorative symbol is lost is selected from a plurality of candidates. (For example, it is randomly selected from 300 types of stop symbol candidates), so that the frequency at which the predetermined lost symbol is stopped at the time of loss is higher in the second decorative symbol than in the first decorative symbol (for example). As a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol, a predetermined lost symbol may be configured so as not to stop). In addition, all the lost symbols that can be stopped in the second decorative symbol (for example, only one pattern of "375" may be used) are the highest for the player in any of the gaming states when three identical symbols are aligned. It may be configured to always include one or more profitable symbols (eg, "7" symbol) (eg, "375" and "276" may stop).

Next, FIG. 33 is an image diagram relating to the display mode of the decorative pattern in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are used depending on whether the gaming state is the non-probability variable gaming state or the stochastic variable gaming state. It is configured so that the display mode (in this example, it is a display color and is a display attribute such as a color arrangement pattern, a shape, a size, etc.) can be different. Specifically, in the non-probability variable gaming state, only the "7" symbol is displayed in "white" together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and all the symbols other than "7" are displayed as "white". While it is configured to be displayed in "black" (in a non-probable variable display mode), in the case of a probability fluctuation gaming state, "3" symbol and "7" are displayed together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The symbols are displayed in "white", and all the symbols other than "3" and "7" are displayed in "black". That is, together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the "3" symbol is configured so that the display mode may differ depending on the gaming state (the display mode is a probable variable display mode). The conditions under which the display mode is different are not limited to whether or not the game is in the probability-variable gaming state, and may be whether or not the game is in the time-reduced gaming state, and differ depending on which background effect (effect stage) is being executed. It may be configured to be possible. In addition, in the change example 3 from this embodiment, the symbol whose display attribute can change depending on whether or not it is in the probability fluctuation gaming state is the “3” symbol, but the “3” symbol is described above. It is included in the combination of predetermined lost symbols (in this example, "345") in which the second decorative symbol is stopped at the time of loss (it becomes the stopped symbol in the left column), and is in the non-probability variable gaming state. Is displayed in "black" for all the stop symbols of the second decorative symbol at the time of loss, while in the probability fluctuation game state, the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol at the time of loss is "white" from the left column. , "Black", "Black" will be displayed. In this figure, the configuration is based on a comparison between the non-probability variable gaming state and the probability fluctuation gaming state, but this is a configuration based on a comparison between the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. There may be (the non-probability variable gaming state in this figure may be a non-probability variable gaming state, and the probabilistic variable gaming state may be a time-reduced gaming state), a non-time-reduced gaming state and a non-probability variable gaming state and a time-shortening game. It may be configured after comparing with the state and the probability variation game state (the non-probability variation game state in this figure is set as the non-time shortening game state and the non-probability variation game state, and the probability variation game state is the time reduction game. It may be a state and a probability fluctuation game state). It should be noted that such a comparative fit substitution is applicable to all configurations such as any of the embodiments and modifications of the present case.

Next, FIGS. 34 and 35 (decorative pattern effect table 7, decorative pattern effect table 8) are a part of the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern effect table 7, especially when the result of success or failure is a loss. And, it is an example of the decorative design effect table 8, in particular, a part of the case where the winning / failing result is a big hit). The change from this embodiment is that the item of the decorative symbol type is set as the display update type, and three items of "first decorative symbol", "second decorative symbol" and "transmissive liquid crystal display" are provided. In the third modification from the present embodiment, the transparent effect that the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transparent is configured to be executable, and the period during which the transparent effect is executed is the first decorative pattern. Is hidden, but the second decorative symbol is displayed (see "33 seconds" of the display update timing).

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2327-1 (variant 3) and step 2327-2 (variant 3), that is, when the notice image or reach image display timing is reached in step 2326, step 2327-. In 1 (variation 3), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 is a transparent effect (effect) based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. It is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the effect) that the display area SG10 of the display device SG is transparent. In the case of Yes in step 2327-1 (variant 3), in step 2327-2 (variant 3), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 sets an image display command related to the transparent effect (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, if No in step 2327-1 (variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2328. When the transparent effect is executed, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transmitted, and the state in which the accessory in the effect display device SG is driven can be visually recognized, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Is erased (hidden), and the second decorative symbol is continuously displayed by the second decorative symbol display device in the effect display device SG (details will be described later). Further, in the third modification from the present embodiment, a hold number display area is provided adjacent to the display of the second decorative symbol of the effect display device SG (to the right when viewed from the player). With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the number of reservations even during the execution of the transparent effect.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 18 in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is step 2410 (variation 3), that is, after setting the command related to the jackpot display in step 2408, or when the special gaming flag is on, step 2410 (change). In variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command (for example, "777" continues to stop) to continuously display the second decorative symbol from the time when the jackpot symbol related to the special game is stopped (step). It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2412. As described above, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed even during the execution of the special game, and the player can use which decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It is possible to determine whether or not the special game is being executed even during the special game.

Next, FIG. 38 is an image diagram relating to the configuration of the effect display device in the third modification from the present embodiment. First, as shown in the conceptual perspective view and the conceptual top view of the effect display device, a second decorative symbol display device is provided on the back side (as viewed from the player) from the display area SG10, and the device emits light (light emission). The light is output in the direction of the display area SG10), so that the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area are displayed in the display area SG10. Further, although the effect can be displayed in the display area SG10 by outputting the light from the light source, the effect is not displayed in the area of the display area SG10 adjacent to the second decorative symbol display device, and the effect is not displayed. The display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area by the decorative symbol display device is configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the transparent effect is executed, the effect in the display area SG10 is not displayed, and the accessory inside the effect display device SG is visible. Since the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device is executed even during the execution of the transparent effect, it is visible to the player. With this configuration, the player can recognize the change status and the number of holdings of the decorative symbol by visually recognizing the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device even in the situation where the transparent effect is executed. Become. The type of hold to be displayed may be different depending on the game state (for example, the number of first main game hold is displayed in the non-time shortened game state, and the time shortened game state is displayed). (Displays the number of 2nd main game hold), the number of 1st main game hold and the number of 2nd main game hold may always be displayed, or the total of the number of 1st main game hold and the number of 2nd main game hold. It may be configured to display the number of holds. The configuration for displaying the effect in the display area SG10 is not limited to this, and the display area SG10 may be configured to be switched between a transparent state and a non-transparent state. For example, the position of the light source may be changed. A light guide plate (a transmissive plate-shaped member that vertically scatters light emitted from a light emitting element incident from a side surface) may be used (for example, light is output from diagonally behind the display area). It may be a display area (so-called edge light type) for displaying through, a display area made of an organic EL, or the like. As a configuration example using the light source plate, when viewed from the player side, a "transmissive liquid crystal (liquid crystal shutter)" and a "light source plate {arranged close to the light source liquid source (about 5 mm) are provided, and the light source plate is concerned. A light source A for distributing light to the light guide plate is arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the light source} ”,“ A light source B that constantly outputs light in the lower left of the display area SG10 ”,“ Auxiliary ”, When arranging in the order of "light source C for emphasizing an object and showing it to the player" and executing a transmission effect (when you want to emphasize an object and show it to the player), the output of the light source A is turned off (light source). The output of A may be reduced compared to when the transmission effect is not executed), the outputs of the light source B and the light source C are turned on, and the transmission effect is not executed (I do not want to show the character to the player, and I do not want to show the character to the player. When the player wants to show the effect in the display area SG10), the outputs of the light source A and the light source B are turned on, and the output of the light source C is turned off (the output of the light source C is reduced as compared with the time when the transmission effect is executed). It may be configured to be). Further, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area is not limited to the configuration of this example, and for example, when the second decorative symbol display device emits light (light is output in the direction of the display area SG10). The second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area can be displayed in the display area SG10 by the same mechanism as the mechanism in which the effect is displayed by outputting the light from the light source to the display area SG10, that is, Even if the second decorative symbol display device replaces the light source and the transmission effect is executed and the light source stops outputting light, the second decorative symbol display device constantly outputs light, so that the second decorative symbol is output. And the display of the hold number display area may be configured to be always visible (the light source plate is used to prevent transmission of the transmissive liquid crystal).

Next, FIG. 39 is a transmission effect execution image diagram in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. In this example, the pseudo continuous variation is executed twice in the normal gaming state (non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state) (variation of pseudo-ream 2), and one symbol variation is executed. The case is illustrated. First, the variation of a certain decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is started, and then the special symbol is temporarily stopped as the first temporary stop symbol in the middle row. After that, the variation of a certain decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is started again, and then the special symbol is temporarily stopped again as the second middle row temporary stop symbol. After that, the variation of a certain decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is started again, and the display area SG10 becomes a transparent state due to the execution of the transparency effect, and the back of the display area SG10 (game). The state in which the character in (from the perspective of the person) is being driven becomes visible to the player. After that, the transparent effect ends (the display area SG10 becomes non-transparent), the accessory in the back of the display area SG10 (as seen from the player) becomes invisible, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed again. It becomes visible (displayed). After that, in the case of loss, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the lost symbol {the second decorative symbol stops at the predetermined lost symbol (“345”), and the first decorative symbol It is a combination of stop symbols that can be different from the lost symbol ("787")}. In the case of a big hit, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the jackpot symbol {the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol and the jackpot symbol of the second decorative symbol have the same combination of stop symbols. It has become}. After that, the special game is executed, and even during the execution of the special game, the second decorative symbol continues to be stopped and displayed with the same jackpot symbol as at the start of the special game. It should be noted that the transparency effect may be executed even during the execution of the special game (the display area SG10 may be in the transparent state). By configuring the transparent effect to be executed immediately before the execution, the player can raise the expectation of shifting to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game by visually recognizing the transparent effect. Even if the transparency effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area is maintained (because it is visible), so that the progress of the game is not hindered. It is configured as. As an example of displaying decorative symbols during a special game, for example, during a special game, only one of the aligned symbols is displayed in order to notify the player which three decorative symbols are aligned and become a big hit. (For example, if a big hit is made with "777", "7" is displayed), and when the transparent effect is executed, the display of the aligned symbols becomes invisible, so that the player can see the aligned symbols. In order to make it recognizable, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area may be maintained even during the special game.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in a transparent state, and the accessory in the effect display device SG becomes visible. Since the effect is configured to be executable and the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device is executed even if the first decorative symbol is hidden during the execution of the transparent effect, the player can use the second decorative symbol. By visually recognizing the effect display on the display device, it is possible to recognize the change status of the decorative symbol and the number of holdings, and it is possible to make the gaming machine more user-friendly. In addition, the game state transition distribution rate after the end of the special game related to the entry into the first main game start port A10 and the game state transition distribution after the end of the special game related to the entry into the second main game start port B10. It is possible to suggest or notify the player that the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is highly profitable by differentiating the rate and different the display attributes of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) depending on whether or not the game is in a probability-variable gaming state. By making the number of types of symbols different, the game ball is inserted into the first main game start port A10 and the game is advanced, rather than the non-probability variable game state in which the game ball is entered into the second main game start port B10. In the probability-variable game state in which the player enters the ball and the game progresses, the number of types of display attributes of the jackpot symbol in which the transition to the probability-variable game state is almost definite after the end of the special game is increased, and now It is possible to appropriately suggest or notify the player whether or not the game state of the player is highly profitable for the player.

Further, in the change example 3 from the present embodiment, the current game state and the effect display mode (background effect, etc.) correspond to any change of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The decorative symbol of the display attribute is variablely displayed, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the change of the first main game symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the change of the second main game symbol are displayed in common (and the display attribute). (The display attribute and display area of the decorative symbol are not differentiated between the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol).

(Second Embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of decorative symbols, a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, are provided so that the result of the symbol variation can be accurately recognized. However, the configuration is a look-ahead lottery. It can also be applied to the configuration that enables the execution of. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a second embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1322 (second) to step 1344 (second), the purpose of which is to subsubscribe the variation mode random number delimiter information which is the information referred to when determining the look-ahead effect content. That is, in step 1308, after storing the first main game content determination random number, in step 1322 (second), the hold control means MJ30 is a flag of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Refer to the area and determine whether the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1322 (second), in step 1324 (second), the hold control means MJ30 is in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and whether or not the main game time reduction flag is off. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1324 (second), in step 1326 (second), the hold control means MJ30 has a hit / fail result and a stop symbol related to the stored hold based on the hold information (win / fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Is determined in advance. Next, in step 1328 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to the newly generated hold result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control unit SM, which is a command transmission buffer MT10. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

Next, in step 1330 (second), the hold control means MJ30 predetermines (variation) the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group related to the stored hold based on the hold information (random number for determining the variation mode). For the mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group, refer to the main game table 3 of FIGS. 41 and 42), and the process proceeds to step 1332 (second). Further, even if No in step 1322 (second) or step 1324 (second), the process proceeds to step 1332 (second). In the second embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation time). Next, in step 1332 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sub-subscribes a command related to new hold occurrence (command for holding generation of first main game content determination random number, command related to variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.). It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. In addition, when the design information is configured to be transmitted to the sub side as in the second embodiment, an effect suggesting a big hit may be executed as an effect to be executed on the sub side, and in such a configuration, the effect suggesting a big hit may be executed. , It is desirable to have a configuration in which the stop symbol of the main game symbol that becomes the big hit can be notified to the player (the stop symbol is notified only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol becomes a big hit).

As described above, in the second embodiment, the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode when the main game content determination random number (first main game content determination random number or second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when hold occurs). It is configured to determine the group.

It should be noted that, at the timing when the hold occurs, the main game content determination random number information, the pass / fail random number delimiter information, the variation mode random number delimiter information, and the variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub side, but further, the sub side may be configured. The information to be transmitted to is not limited to this, and information related to the stopped symbol of the main game symbol, information related to the profit mode of the main game symbol that is a big hit (number of rounds of the special game related to the main game symbol scheduled to be stopped, etc.) ), Number of holds immediately after winning a hold (The number of holds on the winning side of the 1st main game side or the 2nd main game side may be the number of holds on both the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side) It may be configured to be able to transmit information related to It is one of the random number delimited information that is grouped by associating the result of the winning / failing lottery with, for example, it is a loss or a probability fluctuation game state regardless of whether it is a probability fluctuation game state or a non-probability fluctuation game state. Even if it is in a non-probability variable gaming state, it is a hit, if it is a probabilistic variable game state, it is a hit, but if it is a non-probability variable game state, it is lost, and so on.}.

Next, in step 1318, after storing the second main game content determination random number, in step 1334 (second), the hold control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and special game. Determine if the execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1334 (second), in step 1338 (second), the hold control means MJ30 has a hit / fail result and a stop symbol related to the stored hold based on the hold information (win / fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Is determined in advance. Next, in step 1340 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to the newly generated hold result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control unit SM, which is a command transmission buffer MT10. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

Next, in step 1342 (second), the hold control means MJ30 predetermines the change mode random number delimited information and the change mode group related to the stored hold based on the hold information (random number for determining the change mode) (variation). For the mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group, refer to the main game table 3 of FIGS. 32 and 33), and the process proceeds to step 1344 (second). Next, in step 1344 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sub-subscribes a command related to a new hold occurrence (a command for holding a second main game content determination random number, a command related to variable mode random number delimiter information, etc.). Set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and shift to the next process (process in step 1400). ..

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1334 (second), in step 1336 (second), the hold control means MJ30 is in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the main game time reduction flag is off. Judge whether or not. If Yes in step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1344 (second). On the other hand, if No in step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1338 (second).

In steps 1308 and 1318, the first main game content determination random number is stored and the second main game content determination random number is stored, but the main game content determination random number is stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board. When storing, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers). It is preferable to configure it so that other information such as values is not stored (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, the information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like. To prevent it from getting stuck). In addition, regarding the winning / failing lottery random number, the change in the gaming state (the already recorded game state related to the hold) between the acquisition of the winning / failing lottery random number and the execution of the winning / failing lottery related to the winning / failing lottery random number. Not only the change but also the game state may change due to the newly generated hold, so the game state at the time of executing the win / fail lottery related to the lottery random number is unpredictable). Is configured to store the lottery random number until the execution of. In the second embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the hold information can be transmitted only when the hold occurs related to the first main game in the non-time reduction game state, while the time reduction game state. In, it is configured so that it can be transmitted only when the hold related to the second main game occurs, but it does not matter whether the hold is related to the first main game or the hold related to the second main game regardless of the game state. Instead, the command may be configured to be able to be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may be configured to execute a determination as to whether or not to use the received command. Further, a specific example of the command related to the pass / fail result information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is "D000H: Missing, D001H: Missing if low accuracy, Hit if high accuracy, D002H: Hit in both low accuracy and high accuracy". A specific example of the command related to the stop symbol information transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is "D100H: 16R probability variation hit, D101H: 16R non-probability variation hit, D102H: 2R probability variation hit", and is sent to the sub-main control unit SM. Specific examples of the command related to the random number delimiter information to be transmitted are "D200H: delimiter 1, D201H: delimiter 2, D202H: delimiter 3".

Next, FIGS. 41 and 42 (main game table 3) show the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the second embodiment. This is an example. The difference from the present embodiment is that the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information are provided, that is, in the second embodiment, the variation mode is relative to a certain random number value (or random number value range). It is configured so that the random number delimiter information is determined, and the number of variation mode groups (the number of random numbers separated), the variation time, and the random number value range of the variation mode group differ depending on the game state and the result of the winning / failing lottery (for example). , Even in the same group 1, the range of random numbers is different), and by transmitting the variation mode random number delimiter information to the sub side, the variation mode group according to these gaming states is on the sub side. It is configured so that it can be derived with. That is, when the gaming state changes between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the hold, the variable mode group scheduled at the time of the occurrence of the hold and the variable mode group executed at the time of digestion of the hold may differ. (For example, the variable mode group was planned to be group 1 because it was in a non-time shortened gaming state when the hold occurred, but the actual variable mode group became group 2 because it was in a time shortened game state when the hold was exhausted. However, with respect to the variation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned over all game states, when the variation mode random number delimiter information is received on the sub side (subsequent gaming state). It is possible to normally execute the so-called hold look-ahead effect (without considering the transition). Further, the variation mode random number delimiter information in FIGS. 32 and 33 is a variation on the first main game side or a variation on the second main game side, whether the winning / failing lottery result is a hit or a loss, and the game. It is configured to form different variation mode random number delimited information depending on whether the state is a time-reduced gaming state or a non-time-reduced gaming state, but it is not limited to this, and is it a variation on the first main game side? One variation mode random number delimiter including whether it is a fluctuation on the second main game side, whether the winning / failing lottery result is a win or a miss, and whether the game state is a time-shortened game state or a non-time-shortened game state. It may be configured to form information. Further, in order to cause the second main game hold during the change of the first main game symbol in the time shortened game state which is an irregular symbol change, it relates to the first main game symbol related to the loss of the time shortened game state. The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that the variation mode for a short time is not selected regardless of the number of reservations (for example, the variation time is 5 seconds or more). The number of holds shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game hold and the second main game hold, but the first main game in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode. It is the number of game reservations, and in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode, it is the number of second main game reservations.

Next, FIG. 43 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is in step 2003 (second), that is, after the initial processing is executed in step 2002, in step 2003 (second), the sub-main control unit SM is on the main side (main). Based on the information received from the control board M side), the number of holds (for example, the drawing hold counter value) is restored. In addition, the information related to the effect being executed and the look-ahead effect is not restored (because the information related to the contents of the hold is not retransmitted from the main side), and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next change. .. With this configuration, if a power failure occurs when the background effect is "Angel Zone Background", which will be described later, the information stored on the sub side will be lost. After the return of, there is no information that the trigger is on hold, and the background effect will be changed from the "angel zone background" to another background effect (background effect such as a flat ground stage, which will be described later). As a result, there is a discrepancy between the hold information stored on the main side and the hold information stored on the sub side due to the power failure (for example, due to noise at the time of power failure or recovery from the power failure). However, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a zone effect with a high expectation is executed on the sub side while the low expectation is fluctuating on the main side. The processing after the power failure is restored is not limited to this, and even after the power failure is restored, the information that the trigger is held immediately before the occurrence of the power failure is restored, and the background effect is ". It may be configured to maintain the "angel zone background". In such a configuration, for example, a save area capable of maintaining information even during a power failure is provided on the sub side, and when a power failure occurs, the information related to the effect is backed up in the save area and the power is restored. It may be configured to restore the backed up information from time to time. In addition, even if it is configured to receive the information related to the contents of the hold again from the main side when the power is restored, the change starts, the change stops, or the hold occurs (even for the hold other than the newly generated hold). Good {Although not shown in this example, it is configured so that only the information related to the number of holds is transmitted from the main side (the information related to the contents of the hold is not transmitted) at the time of recovery from the power failure. .. Therefore, since the information related to the hold that existed at the time of the power failure does not exist after the power is restored, the look-ahead effect cannot be executed for the hold (note that the information is held from the main side when the power is restored). It may be configured to receive the information relating to the above, and to be able to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold). If a power failure occurs during the change of the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), the change is made from the main side if the function for maintaining the information at the time of the power failure is not provided. A blackout screen (for example, a screen displaying "Preparing" etc.) will be displayed until the end command of is received}. In the second embodiment, it may be described that switching the background effect so as to display the "angel zone background" as the background effect shifts to the "angel zone". It should be noted that the recovery from a power failure may be referred to as a power recovery, a recovery from a power failure, or the like.

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are step 2120 (second) to step 2128 (second), step 2550 (second), step 2600 (second) and step 2650 (second), that is, step 2104. Then, after adding 1 to the drawing hold counter, in step 2120 (second), the drawing holding information display control means SM22 receives a new hold winning / failing result and stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side. The command related to the above is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2122 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, and the hold information (particularly, the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information). , Etc.) are temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. If the information related to the result of winning / failing, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number delimiter information is not transmitted from the main side, in step 2120 (second) or step 2122 (second). The information is not temporarily stored in the reserved information temporary storage area. Next, in step 2124 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new hold is a hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2124 (second), in step 2550 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 executes the first main game winning pre-reading determination process described later, and step 2126 (second). Move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124 (second), in step 2600 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 executes the second main game winning pre-reading determination process described later, and steps 2126 (second). Move to 2).

Next, in step 2126 (second), does the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refer to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and have information that the new hold is a trigger hold? It is determined whether or not (information indicating that the trigger is on hold is added in step 2576 or step 2622). In the case of Yes in step 2126 (second), in step 2650 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes the look-ahead hold content determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2118. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2126 (second), the process proceeds to step 2118.

On the other hand, after subtracting 1 from the drawing hold counter in step 2112, in step 2128 (second), the marking holding information display control means SM22 receives the holding information related to the symbol change (particularly, the result of winning or failing, the stop symbol information, The variable mode group and the variable mode random number delimited information) are deleted from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, the remaining hold information is shifted, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first main game winning pre-reading determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. 44. This process will be described separately for the process related to the prohibition condition of the look-ahead lottery and the process related to the look-ahead lottery. In the former prohibition process of the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2552, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the second main game hold (first main game hold) in the hold. It is determined whether or not there is a hold) that is consumed in preference to the game side. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the hold look-ahead effect execution enable / disable determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is hold in the hold. Determine if it is not present. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that is won in the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning (first pre-reading lottery at the time of winning the main game, pre-reading lottery at the time of winning the second main game). In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold before the new hold. Is determined. If Yes in step 2560, the process proceeds to step 2562.

Next, in the latter process related to the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2562, the hold look-ahead effect execution enablement / disapproval determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k executes a winning look-ahead lottery in which the new hold is won with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example). The process proceeds to step 2574. On the other hand, if No in step 2562, in step 2568, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not the new hold variation mode group is group 3. Is determined. As described above, in the second embodiment, when determining whether or not the look-ahead lottery can be executed, it is configured to determine whether or not the look-ahead lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode group. When determining whether or not the look-ahead lottery can be executed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the look-ahead lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode random number delimiter information. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k executes a winning look-ahead lottery in which the new hold is won with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example). The process proceeds to step 2574. On the other hand, if No in step 2568, the process proceeds to step 2574.

Next, in step 2574, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning is won. In the case of Yes in step 2574, in step 2576, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k is "trigger hold" for a new hold winning the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2552 (when the second main game hold exists in the hold), in step 2578, the hold look-ahead effect execution enable / fail determination means SM26k temporarily stores the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information indicating "trigger hold" from the stored information related to the hold (if there is no hold with the information indicating that it is a trigger hold in the hold, this process is not executed and the next step is performed. (Move to the process of), and then move to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}. Even if No in step 2554, step 2558, step 2560, or step 2574, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}. In the process of step 2578, when the hold on the second main game side exists (occurs), the newly generated second game machine in the second main game side preferential digestion game machine as in the second embodiment. Since the hold on the main game side is exhausted first, the planned fluctuation order is not obtained, and the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations is not normally executed. In addition, as a prohibition condition of the look-ahead lottery, a condition as to whether or not there is a hold of a specific variation mode group (or a suspension of a specific variation mode random number delimited information) in the hold before the new hold is a prohibition condition. May be good.

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the second main game winning pre-reading determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. 44. This process will be described separately for the process related to the prohibition condition of the look-ahead lottery and the process related to the look-ahead lottery. In the former prohibition process of the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2602, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the current game state is the time-shortened game state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is hold in the hold. Determine if it is not present. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold before the new hold. Is determined. If Yes in step 2606, the process proceeds to step 2608.

Next, in the latter process related to the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2608, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (with a probability lower than the winning rate of the first main game winning look-ahead lottery for the jackpot hold) for the new hold. Yes, in this example, the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning in 1/5) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2608, in step 2612, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not the new hold variation mode group is group C. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (with a probability lower than the winning rate of the first main game winning look-ahead lottery for the loss hold) for the new hold. Yes, in this example, the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning in 1/15) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2612, the process proceeds to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning is won. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the hold look-ahead effect execution enablement / non-executability determination means SM26k is "trigger hold" for a new hold that has won the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}. Even if No in step 2602, step 2604, step 2606 or step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in both the case where the new hold becomes a big hit and the case where the new hold becomes a loss, the look-ahead for the hold of the first main game side is more than the look-ahead lottery for the hold of the second main game side. The lottery is easier to win (pre-reading lottery winning rate when the first main game hold is a big hit hold = 1/3> pre-reading lottery when the second main game hold is a big hit hold Winning rate = 1/5, pre-reading lottery winning rate when the 1st main game hold is a hold that is lost = 1/10> Pre-reading lottery winning rate when the 2nd main game hold is a big hit hold = 1 / 15). With this configuration, the "special symbol" related to the first main game side appears more than the "special symbol" related to the second main game side in the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect. It is easy to do.

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the look-ahead pending content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) in FIG. 44. First, in step 2652, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold is a hold that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of the trigger hold with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and next processing (step 2118). Process). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, in step 2656, the display mode of the trigger hold is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118).

Here, the two tables in the lower part of the figure are a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a big hit) and a hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss). In the second embodiment, the type of display mode that can be selected when the display mode of the trigger hold that may change when the hold change effect is executed is determined by referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) is rainbow color. There are four types of display modes, red, green, and blue, and there are three types of display modes that can be selected when deciding by referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss). It is drawn by a random number dedicated to the mode determination. When referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), red is most likely to be selected, while when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss), blue is most likely to be selected. The jackpot expectation level (expectation level that becomes a jackpot due to the symbol change related to the hold) for each display mode of the hold when the occurrence of The order is red, green, and blue in descending order. It should be noted that the display mode that can be changed is only an example, and there is no problem even if the number of types is increased or decreased or the color that can be changed is changed. Further, in this example, it is configured so that the expected degree of a big hit can be suggested by the display color of the hold, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the case of a big hit (or together with the expected degree of a big hit). It may be configured to suggest the game state after the special game is executed. In such a configuration, especially during the probability-variable game state, the display color of the hold suggests the degree of expectation to shift to the probability-variable game state after the special game is executed when the hold is a big hit. (For example, if the hold display color is red, the probability change expectation is high, if it is blue, the probability change expectation is small, etc.), it is possible to determine whether the probability fluctuation gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues or ends. It is possible to carry out a fanning and effective production.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree can be different depending on the display mode selected from the plurality of types of hold display modes. Further, the hold change effect may be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the look-ahead effect (from the timing when the look-ahead lottery is won to the end of the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold). With this configuration, for example, when the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the look-ahead effect, and the hold display mode that changes in the first hold change effect is blue, the second time. The display mode of the hold that changes in the hold change effect of is changed to green or red, that is, the display mode of the hold with high expectation of big hit is changed (ranked up) every time the hold change effect is executed. It is desirable to configure it so that it does not impair the expectations of the player. Further, the effect related to the change in the hold display is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not accompany the change in the hold display may be provided. It is possible to provide an effect mode in which the effect occurs and the hold display does not change as it is (so-called Gase pattern), and an effect mode in which the hold display change is executed thereafter.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is about step 2206 (second) and step 2250 (second), the purpose of which is to stop the first decorative symbol (including at the time of temporary stop), in particular, the above-mentioned ". The purpose is to change the factor for determining "special symbol" (that is, a symbol that does not mean a jackpot but foretells that a jackpot may occur after that). That is, in step 2204, after turning on the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2206 (second), the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n). Refers to the symbol information (variation mode related to the main game symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, and changes the first decorative symbol. {For example, if the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short-term variation, non-reach, if it is long-term variation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined and the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b (And the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2208.

Further, in step 2216, the decorative pattern effect content is determined, and the display update timing and the display update content are set. The figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218. That is, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (including the time of temporary stop) is determined by the advance notice effect / design stop symbol determination process, which will be described later.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) in FIG. 48. First, in step 2252, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the change is a change related to the trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2260, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines the advance notice effect content from the “special advance notice effect candidate”. Here, the "special notice effect candidate" is a notice effect candidate to be referred to when determining the advance notice effect when the background effect is the "angel zone background" described later. Next, in step 2262, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and next processing (process of step 2218). ). Here, in step 2262, it is desirable that the above-mentioned "special symbol" is not selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, and the reason is the "angel zone" described later. When it is in the "background" (that is, the state where the existence of a hold with a high expectation of a big hit has already been notified), the above-mentioned "special symbol" (that is, it does not mean a big hit, but a big hit can occur after that). This is because if the symbol that announces the above is stopped and displayed, the player may be incomprehensible because the double notification of similar information is performed.

On the other hand, if No in step 2252, in step 2256, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2256, in step 2258, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the angel zone entering flag is off. If Yes in step 2258, the process proceeds to step 2264. On the other hand, if No in step 2258, the process proceeds to step 2260.

Next, in step 2264, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines the advance notice effect content from the "normal advance notice effect candidate". Here, the "normal advance notice effect candidate" is a advance notice effect candidate to be referred to when determining the advance notice effect when the background effect is other than the "angel zone background" described later. Next, in step 2266, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 turns on the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2268, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol in the middle row of the first decorative symbol as a "special symbol", and based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, the first decorative symbol A temporary stop symbol for the left column and the right column is determined (a symbol different from the left column and the right column is temporarily stopped), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2218).

On the other hand, if No in step 2256, in step 2270, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the variation mode group of the variation is group 3. The change related to the hold of Group 3 that did not win the look-ahead lottery (look-ahead lottery at the time of winning) (it did not become a trigger hold) while being excluded from the lottery of the angel zone transition lottery described later is the angel zone transition lottery described later. Will be subject to the lottery}. In the case of Yes in step 2270, in step 2272, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 indicates that the variation is a pseudo continuous variation (a variation in which the pseudo variation is executed at least once, and is exemplified in FIGS. 21 and 22 in this example. It is determined whether or not the effect of A-1, A-2, B-2, etc.) is executed. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2274, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 wins the angel zone transition lottery with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example) (changes the background effect to the angel zone background during the change). Execute a lottery to see if or not. Next, in step 2276, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the angel zone transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2276, in step 2278, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines the advance notice effect content from "normal advance notice effect candidate-> special advance notice effect candidate after the special symbol temporary stop timing" (for example, FIG. 21). In the case of A-1 and A-2, from the start of the fluctuation to 14 seconds, the content of the notice effect is determined from the "normal notice effect candidate", and after 14 seconds from the start of the change, which is the first middle row temporary stop timing. , Determine the content of the notice production from "special notice production candidates"). Next, in step 2280, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the temporary stop symbol in the middle row of the first (first in pseudo continuous fluctuation) of the main game symbol to a "special symbol" (background effect is changed to an angel zone). Based on the information about the stop symbol of the main game symbol, the temporary stop symbol of the left column and the right column of the first decorative symbol is the same symbol (same as in the case of reach). The stop mode) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2218). The temporary stop symbol is a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-variation in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, and may be hereinafter referred to as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

On the other hand, if No in step 2270, step 2272 or step 2276, in step 2482, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines the advance notice effect content from the "normal advance notice effect candidate". Next, in step 2284, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and next processing (process of step 2218). ).

In the second embodiment, the angel zone transition lottery is executed in step 2274 to determine whether or not the variable angel zone transition is possible (the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle of fluctuation is set as a "special symbol", and the special symbol is used. It was configured to decide whether or not to move to the angel zone with the temporary stop as an opportunity), but it is not limited to this, and the combination of the first pseudo-ream symbol (the first middle row temporary stop symbol) and the advance notice effect. A plurality of candidates may be provided, and in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation, the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the advance notice effect may be determined from the combination candidates. Specifically, as the combination candidates, "pseudo-ream symbol A, advance notice effect 1", "pseudo-ream symbol A, advance notice effect 2", "pseudo-ream symbol A, advance notice effect 3", "pseudo-ream symbol A, advance notice". Six combination candidates of "Direction 4", "Special symbol, notice effect 1" and "Special symbol, notice effect 2" are provided, and the combination of the pseudo-ream symbol and the notice effect is determined by lottery from the candidates, and the pseudo-ream is determined. When a combination of a pseudo-continuous symbol whose symbol is a "special symbol" and a notice effect is selected, it may be configured to shift to the angel zone during the fluctuation. It should be noted that the method for determining the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the advance notice effect is not limited to the time of pseudo continuous variation, and the determination method may be used also in the case of other variation modes. Further, the combination is not limited to the pseudo-continuous pattern and the advance notice effect, and may include a background effect, a sound mode, and the like.

In addition, as a method for determining the advance notice effect, first, the basic advance notice effect among the advance notice effects (a notice effect that can be executed regardless of the background effect being executed, an effect to be executed in the first half of the fluctuation, etc.) is determined. After that, based on the determined basic preview effect, a non-preliminary effect such as a background effect is determined, the determined effect (preliminary effect, background effect, etc.) is executed, and then the decision is made. It may be configured to determine an undecided effect among the advance notice effects based on a basic advance notice effect and a non-preliminary effect such as the determined background effect (the determination method is repeated a plurality of times). , May be configured to determine all of the notice effects performed in the variation). With this configuration, the advance notice effect executed by the variation can be determined at a plurality of timings, and it is generated by determining all the advance notice effects executed by the variation at one timing. It is possible to reduce the defects of the production. In this example, (1) "fixed stop": the fixed stop is executed after the temporary stop, and if the fixed stop symbol combination is a big hit (three sets of the same symbol), the game shifts to the special game. , If there is a loss (not all three of the same symbol), the game does not shift to the special game. (2) "Temporary stop": The temporary stop is executed before the fixed stop (for example, shaking fluctuation) once. Pseudo-variation can be executed by temporarily stopping and then re-changing in the middle of fluctuation in the symbol fluctuation. (3) If a "special symbol" is displayed when the look-ahead effect is executed, the "special symbol" is regarded as a fixed stop. Not only is it displayed, but it is also configured so that it can be displayed as a temporary stop before a fixed stop. Further, in this example, the fixed stop and the final stop are synonymous, and "stop" is used for both the fixed stop and the temporary stop, but the stop symbol in the fluctuation of the main game symbol is the fixed stop symbol. The stop symbol in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is used for both the temporary stop symbol and the fixed stop symbol (when it is described that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is "777", etc., the stop symbol is used. = It is a fixed stop symbol).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram showing an example of the advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol display. As shown in the upper part of the same image diagram, in this example, when shifting to the angel zone in the fluctuation, the normal background effect (an example of the background effect that is not the angel zone background effect) is executed as the background effect. The "special symbol" is stopped as the first temporary stop symbol in the middle row. In addition, the angel zone background effect is executed as the background effect triggered by the temporary stop of the "special symbol", and then the final stop symbol is stopped. In this example, the case of a big hit is illustrated, but the background effect is similarly switched even in the case of a loss. {In this case, the temporary stop of the "special symbol" is on the left and right. The decorative design may be a random pattern (different design), but it may not be (the same design) (= "special design" may be temporarily stopped after reach)}.

In addition, as shown in the middle of the same image diagram, in this example, when other pseudo continuous fluctuations that do not involve the transition to the angel zone are performed (when the angel zone transition lottery is not won), the normal background effect is used as the background effect. Is being executed, the temporary stop symbol that informs the player that the pseudo continuous fluctuation, which is different from the "pseudo-continuous symbol A" (different from the "special symbol", is being executed, is executed as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. ) Temporarily stops. Next, even after the "pseudo-continuous symbol A" is temporarily stopped, the normal background effect is executed for the background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of the same image diagram, in this example, under the situation where the normal background effect is executed as the background effect, if the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning is won while the decorative pattern is changing, the change is stopped. Lost symbols (random eyes) stop as symbols. After that, the next fluctuation is started, and the "special symbol" is stopped as the stop symbol of the fluctuation (that is, the fluctuation is the fluctuation before entering the look-ahead angel zone). Next, when the "special symbol" is stopped, the angel zone background effect is executed as the background effect from the next change (that is, the next change is the first change in the look-ahead zone). In this example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the symbol change related to the hold scheduled to be digested before the trigger hold, it is not temporarily stopped except for the fixed stop (previous temporary stop). (It is not used when it changes again after being temporarily stopped as a stop symbol of pseudo-variation). That is, in the symbol change related to the hold scheduled to be digested before the trigger hold, the symbol change related to the trigger hold is performed from "the timing when the special symbol is temporarily stopped → the pseudo change is executed and the symbol change is lost". It cannot be done until the angel zone background is displayed. As described above, in the second embodiment, the player is configured to execute the angel zone background effect triggered by the stop (or temporary stop) of the "special symbol", so that the player can stop the "special symbol". By visually recognizing (or temporary stop), it is possible to recognize the transition to the angel zone, and at the same time, "special" not only when the fluctuation is stopped (when the stop is related to the confirmation display) but also when the temporary stop is in the middle of the fluctuation. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the stop (or temporary stop) of the "design".

As shown in the figure, when the "special symbol" is stopped as a temporary stop symbol at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation, the same number in the left column and the right column is stopped (temporary stop) (at the time of reach). (Same as the stop mode) On the other hand, when the "special symbol" is stopped as the final stop symbol of the next change after the look-ahead lottery is won, different numbers (random numbers) are stopped in the left column and the right column. There is.

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2506 (second), that is, after setting the "angel zone background" as the background effect in step 2504, the background effect display control means is set in step 2506 (second). The SM23 refers to the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and changes (a part of the pseudo continuous change) (or is put on hold) that triggered the transition of the "angel zone". Such fluctuations) {The fluctuation that triggered the transition to the "angel zone" (or the fluctuation related to the hold) is the change related to the trigger hold or the change related to the transition to the angel zone}. judge. In step 2506 (second), if Yes, the process proceeds to step 2508, and if No, the process proceeds to step 2520.

With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol as decorative symbols, and is configured to be capable of executing a so-called hold look-ahead effect. Therefore, when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol, the background change effect indicating that the expectation of transition to the special game is increased is executed. Then, for the hold that is in the digestion order before the hold (trigger hold) that triggers the hold look-ahead effect, the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as a fixed stop symbol when the symbol of the first decorative symbol changes at the time of the hold digestion. In this case, the meaning that the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed is "the symbol change has ended" and "the degree of expectation for transition to the special game has increased". On the other hand, regarding the trigger hold, the "special symbol" can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol when the symbol of the first decorative symbol changes at the time of holding and digesting, so the meaning of the stop display of the "special symbol" in this case is , "The pattern fluctuation changes again" and "the expectation for the transition to the special game has increased". In this way, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, a novel production method is created in which the same type of "special symbol" has a different meaning depending on the timing (or situation) at which the stop display is displayed. Will be able to.

In the second embodiment, regarding the hold in the digestion order before the trigger hold, the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the fixed stop symbol when the symbol of the first decorative symbol changes at the time of the hold digestion. , Trigger hold is configured to be the same type of "special symbol" when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol when the symbol of the first decorative symbol changes at the time of holding and digesting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "special symbol" in the former case may be referred to as "special symbol A", and the "special symbol" in the latter case may be referred to as "special symbol B". With this configuration, it is possible to clearly convey to the player the meaning that the "special symbol" in both cases is stopped and displayed. Further, the probability that the "special symbol" is displayed in the former case may be lower than the probability that the "special symbol" is displayed in the latter case.

Further, in this example, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have three columns and one effective line, but there is no problem even if these are changed. For example, (1) "special symbol". The number of symbol rows and / or valid lines increases (for example, the number of valid lines becomes 9) (2) When the "special symbol" stops, the symbol row and / or valid lines increase. The number of lines decreases (for example, the number of symbol rows becomes two, and when one of the symbols stops, the reach state is reached. Furthermore, the number of symbol rows becomes one row = = a hit is notified almost decisively, and then May be configured to notify the difference in the profit margin attached to the player by the type of the symbol to be stopped and displayed).

(Example 1 of change from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the "special symbol" has a different meaning depending on the timing (or situation) when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed, but the so-called hold look-ahead effect and the "special symbol" are used. It is possible to create a more innovative production method by further enhancing the interlocking with. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a change example 1 from the second embodiment, and the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment to the first modification. The changes from the second embodiment are from step 2220 (second variation 1) to step 2224 (second variation 1), and the purpose thereof is to hold the hold whose display mode has been changed by the hold look-ahead effect at the time of hold digestion. The content of the effect in the above is to be configured to be associated with the changed display mode. That is, in step 2216, the decorative symbol effect content is determined, the display update timing and the display update content are set, and then in step 2220 (second variation 1), the binding information display control means SM22 uses the marking reservation information. With reference to the temporary storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the hold display mode related to the change is a dedicated effect display mode (a specific hold display mode different from other hold display modes, which is red in this example). do. In the case of Yes in step 2220 (second variation 1), in step 2222 (second variation 1), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines the advance notice effect content from the "dedicated advance notice effect candidate". Here, the "dedicated notice effect candidate" is an effect candidate selected only in the change related to the hold of the dedicated effect display mode (red in this example), which is a specific hold display mode, and is, for example, at the time of the change. , It can be mentioned that the battle effect with a specific enemy character is executed. It is desirable that the symbol variation related to the "dedicated notice effect candidate" is configured so that the expectation of a big hit is relatively higher than that of other notice effect candidates. Next, in step 2223 (second variation 1), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2224 (second variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and steps 2218. Move to. If No in step 2220 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2250 (second variation). Here, if the "special symbol" is easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, the hold display mode is the dedicated effect display mode and the first decorative symbol It is possible to further enhance the interlocking with the fact that the "special symbol" can be easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol).

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the second embodiment, the reserved effect display mode (red in this example), which is a specific hold display mode, is held as a notice effect candidate. By configuring so that the "dedicated notice effect candidate", which is an effect candidate selected only in the fluctuation related to the above, can be selected, at the time of executing the hold change effect (the effect in which the hold display mode changes) based on the winning of the look-ahead lottery. , A notice effect that is executed only when the display mode is changed to a specific hold display mode can be provided, and by increasing the expectation of a big hit when the effect is executed, the player can hold the hold when the change is made. By paying attention to the display color (holding change execution mode), the fun of the game will be enhanced. Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the effect executed by the symbol change related to the trigger hold is not determined at the time of the occurrence of the trigger hold, but is determined at the time of digestion of the trigger hold. By configuring in such a manner, "trigger hold occurs-> hold display mode is determined and displayed in the display mode-> trigger hold is digested-> hold display related to trigger hold. The effect to be executed is determined by the symbol variation related to the trigger hold based on the embodiment. " It should be noted that there is no problem even if the configuration related to the reserved digestion transmission image described later is applied to the modification 1 from the second embodiment.

In addition, in the change example 1 from the second embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed as the so-called hold look-ahead effect and the hold display mode becomes the dedicated effect display mode (red in this example), the notice effect content. Was configured to be selected from the "dedicated notice effect candidate", but the hold change effect is executed at the timing when the "special symbol" is stopped as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol. It may be configured to further link the stop of the "special symbol" with, for example, "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are provided as the "special symbol", and the "special symbol A" is stopped. In this case, the hold change effect may be changed to a hold display mode other than red, while when the "special symbol B" is stopped, the hold change effect may be changed to a red hold display mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interlocking between the so-called hold look-ahead effect and the "special symbol".

(Example 2 of change from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, it is configured to further enhance the interlocking between the so-called hold look-ahead effect and the "special symbol", but this interlocking between the first main game side and the second main game side. The strength of the sex may be different, and an example of such a configuration is referred to as a modification 2 from the second embodiment, and the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment to the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2226 (second), step 2250 (1) (second variation 2) and step 2250 (2) (second variation 2), the purpose of which is the first main. It is to control to change the selection rate of the "special symbol" according to whether it is a symbol variation on the game side or a symbol variation on the second main game side. That is, in step 2216, the decorative symbol effect content is determined, the display update timing and the display update content are set, and then in step 2226 (second variation 2), the design display content determination means SM21n temporarily stores the main side information. With reference to the means SM11b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2226 (second variation 2), in step 2250 (1) (second variation 2), the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the first main game notice effect / drawing stop symbol, which will be described later. The process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2226 (second variation 2), in step 2250 (2) (second variation 2), the recording display content determining means SM21n is described later in the second main game notice effect / drawing stop. The symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218.

Next, FIG. 53 shows the first main game notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (1) (second variation 2) in FIG. 52 in the second embodiment to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of. Since the processing of this subroutine is the same processing as the advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), the description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that, in the second embodiment, the same process is executed on the first main game side and the second main game side, but in the second modification from the second embodiment, the present process is the second. The purpose is to execute different processes on the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side.

Next, FIG. 54 shows a second main game notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (2) (second variation 2) in FIG. 52 in the second embodiment to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of. Since the processing of this subroutine is similar to the advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), only the differences from the processing will be described in detail. The difference from the advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process of step 2250 (second) is step 2286 (second variation 2) and step 2288 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2256, in hold. In step 2286 (second variation 2), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b when the trigger hold does not exist, and the variation is the variation relating to the group C. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2286 (second variation 2), in step 2272, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and is the variation a variation in which a pseudo continuous variation is executed? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2288 (second variation 2), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 has a predetermined probability (the angel zone transition lottery winning rate on the first main game side executed in step 2274) 1. The probability is lower than / 10, and in this example, the angel zone transition lottery that is won in 1/30) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2276. If No in step 2286 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2482.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 2 from the second embodiment, the angel zone transition lottery (pseudo) is performed by the symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side. By configuring the "special symbol" to temporarily stop due to continuous fluctuations and to make the winning probability of (lottery whether or not the angel zone background is displayed as a background effect) different, the symbol changes on the first main game side. It is possible to change the selection rate of the "special symbol" in the first decorative symbol depending on whether there is a symbol variation on the second main game side, and thus the symbol variation on the first main game side. It is possible to widen the range of the production and enhance the interest in the production by making the production tendency that accompanies it different from the production tendency that accompanies the pattern change on the second main game side.

In addition, in the change example 2 from the second embodiment, since the second main game hold cannot be the trigger hold in the non-time shortened game state, the second main game is set in the non-time shortened game state. The hold look-ahead effect for the hold on the game side is not executed. Therefore, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the appearance rate of the "special symbol" related to the hold look-ahead effect on the first main game side is compared with the appearance rate of the "special symbol" related to the hold look-ahead effect on the second main game side. However, the appearance rate is different (higher on the first main game side). Furthermore, as described above, whether the lottery probability for temporarily stopping the "special symbol" by the pseudo continuous variation is the symbol variation on the first main game side or the symbol variation on the second main game side. (The "special symbol" is temporarily stopped in response to the symbol change on the 1st main game side), and the ease with which the trigger hold occurs is also the hold on the 1st main game side. , Because it differs depending on whether it is a hold on the 2nd main game side (the hold on the 1st main game side is more likely to be a trigger hold), a trigger hold occurs → a hold that is digested before the trigger hold "Special symbol" is confirmed and displayed at the time of digestion (so-called hold look-ahead effect is executed) → "special symbol" is temporarily stopped at the time of hold digestion of trigger hold (so-called pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed). It is also possible to configure the probability that the flow of the series of effects of the above is generated so that the first main game side has a higher probability than the second main game side. In addition, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the appearance rate of the symbol variation in which the "special symbol" temporarily stops due to the pseudo continuous variation in the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol and the pseudo continuous in the symbol variation related to the second main game symbol. The difference between the appearance rate of the symbol variation in which the "special symbol" temporarily stops due to the fluctuation, the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect in the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol, and the second main game symbol. When comparing the difference with the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect in the symbol variation, the difference related to the pseudo continuous variation (the former difference) is smaller.

Further, in this example, (1) the selection probability (appearance rate) of the "special symbol" may be the same on the first main game side and the second main game side, and (2) a hold that becomes a big hit is held. When it exists in the 2nd main game hold, the "special symbol" related to the look-ahead effect does not appear due to the change of the 2nd main game symbol. (3) The hold that becomes a big hit exists in the 1st main game hold. If so, the "special symbol" related to the look-ahead effect may appear in the fluctuation of the first main game symbol, and (4) the "special symbol" related to the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the case of a change that becomes a big hit of the second main game symbol. (5) In the case of a fluctuation that becomes a big hit of the first main game symbol, a “special symbol” related to the pseudo continuous fluctuation may appear or is likely to appear. Further, in the second embodiment of the change from the second embodiment, the "special symbol" is configured to appear at the time of the look-ahead effect and at the time of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, but the "special symbol A" can appear only at the time of the look-ahead effect. "Special symbol" and "special symbol B" are set as "special symbols" that can appear only during pseudo-continuous fluctuation, and the appearance rates of "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are compared to compare the appearance rates of the second main game symbol. "Special symbol A" may not appear in the variation, "special symbol B" may have a low appearance rate in the variation of the second main game symbol, and so on.

(Example 3 of change from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the background change effect and the hold change effect are configured to be executable as the so-called hold look-ahead effect, but a new playability is created by changing the execution mode of the hold look-ahead effect. It is possible. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a change example 3 from the second embodiment, and the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment to the third modification. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2700 (second variation 3) and step 2750 (second variation 3), that is, after executing the decorative symbol display content determination process in step 2200, step 2700 (2nd variation 3). In the second change 3), the sub-control board S executes the hold display mode change control process described later. Next, in step 2750 (second change 3), the sub-control board S executes the hold digestion transmission image display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2300.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 55 in the second embodiment to the third modification. The change from the second embodiment is step 2130 (second variation 3), the purpose of which is to notify that the hold is being digested (design change) at the time of digestion of the hold. It is to configure the image of the above so that it can be displayed. That is, after subtracting 1 from the drawing hold counter value in step 2112, in step 2130 (second variation 3), the drawing holding information display control means SM22 uses the holding information related to the symbol variation (particularly, the display mode). And the variable mode group information), "hold digestion transmission image information" {the hold display of the hold to be digested related to the start change, during the start change (the start change starts, the hold is Information related to the "pending digestion transmission image" that is continuously displayed after being digested)} Temporarily stored (overwritten and stored) in the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the process proceeds to step 2128 (second). do. In addition, in the change example 3 from the second embodiment, the look-ahead determination process at the time of winning the second main game is deleted (the look-ahead lottery is executed only on the first main game side).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the first main game winning pre-reading determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second variation 3) of FIG. 56 in the modification 3 from the second embodiment. Here, this process will be described separately as a process related to the prohibition condition of the look-ahead lottery and a process related to the look-ahead lottery. In the former process relating to the prohibition condition of the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2580, the hold look-ahead effect execution enablement / non-executability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is the second main game. It is determined whether or not it is a hold (a hold that is digested with priority over the first main game hold). In the case of Yes in step 2580, in step 2582, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2584, in step 2586, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the hold variation mode group before the new hold becomes group 1. It is determined whether or not it is only (there is no hold that becomes a big hit before the new hold, a hold that can have a long fluctuation time, or a trigger hold). If Yes in step 2584, the process proceeds to step 2586.

Next, in the latter process related to the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2586, the hold look-ahead effect execution enablement / non-executability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold variation mode group Determining whether or not it is in group 3 {Variation mode The fluctuation related to the hold in which the group is group 3 is even when the number of holds at the start of the change is large (for example, the number of holds is 2 or 3). , It will be a relatively long fluctuation time}. In the case of Yes in step 2586, in step 2588, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, if the hold is a big hit hold, the probability is 2/3, and if the hold is a loss hold, the probability is 1/8). Execute a look-ahead lottery at the time of winning. Next, in step 2590, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning is won. In the case of Yes in step 2590, in step 2591, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k adds information to the effect that the hold look-ahead effect is "trigger hold" to the new hold winning the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning, and displays the hold. The mode is determined to be "Yellow Zako Hold" and stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has won the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning, and the display mode of the hold may be different from the normal hold. Next, in step 2592, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k is a hold change plan until the trigger hold is exhausted based on the validity of the new hold (trigger hold) and the number of holds at the present time. For example, an execution plan for an effect such as green Zako hold at the start of the next fluctuation, change to red Zako hold at the start of the next fluctuation, etc.) is determined and stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118).

On the other hand, if No in step 2580 (when the new hold is the second main game hold), in step 2596, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k temporarily stores the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. This process is executed while deleting the information indicating that the game is "trigger hold" from the information related to the first main game hold (if the hold having the information that the trigger hold is not present does not exist in the hold). The process proceeds to the next process without the process), the hold display mode is changed to "normal hold" (for example, white hold), and the hold information is stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and step 2594. Move to. If No is set in step 2582, step 2584, step 2586 or 2590, the process proceeds to step 2594.

Next, in step 2594, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k determines the hold display mode of the new hold to be "normal hold" (for example, white hold), and the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The pending information is stored in the temporary storage area, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118). Here, the processes of step 2596 and step 2594 newly occur in the second main game side priority digestion gaming machine as in this example when the hold on the second main game side exists (occurs). Since the hold on the second main game side is exhausted first, the planned change order is not obtained, and the look-ahead effect over multiple changes (for example, the hold display mode change effect based on the hold change plan) is not normally executed. It is a configuration to avoid.

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 55 in the modification 3 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2208 (second variation 3), step 2222 (second variation 3) to step 2226 (second variation 3) and step 2228 (second variation 3), that is, After determining the variation mode of the first decorative symbol in step 2206 (second), in step 2208 (second variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n, reach effect display). The content determination means SM25n) refers to the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol {for example, when the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-time variation, it is not. If the reach is fluctuating for a long time, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined and used as the temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b). Temporarily memorize. Next, in step 2216, the map display content determining means SM21n is the result of whether or not the main game symbol is temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). Based on the variation mode, the decorative design effect content is determined with reference to the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative pattern effect table 1 to the decorative pattern effect table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the pattern variation. The display update timing and display update contents are set, and the information related to the display of the map is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2222 (second variation 3), the map display content determining means SM21n draws and determines the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the change. Here, as shown in the preview content image diagram on the right side of the figure, in this example, the content of the preview effect that can be executed differs depending on the image set as the background effect (so-called stay stage). It should be noted that the content lottery of the advance notice effect to be executed may be executed based on an appropriate random number acquired by the sub-main control unit SM side, the result of winning or failing the change, the winning symbol, the change time, and the like. Here, the content of the advance notice effect marked with a star in the same image diagram is the specific advance notice effect in this example, and is configured so that a different specific advance notice effect can be executed based on the stay stage (specific advance notice effect). Will be described in the process described later). Further, the content of the advance notice effect (in this example, an effect that can be executed before the reach effect, etc.) is not limited to this, and for example, a pseudo continuous effect (an effect in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed) can be executed. It may be configured (in that case, the hold digestion transmission image described later or the display mode of the hold may be changed in the pseudo-ream effect, or the hold digestion transmission image described later may be changed by the advance notice effect executed during the pseudo-ream effect. Or hold display mode may be changed).

Next, in step 2224 (second variation 3), the map display content determining means SM21n refers to the “holding digestion transmission image information” temporarily stored in the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the change is caused. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation is related to the trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2224 (second variation 3), in step 2226 (second variation 3), the map display display content determining means SM21n uses the map holding information temporary storage means SM22b (or the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b). ), And based on the "hold digestion transmission image information" related to the validity, fluctuation mode, or notice effect related to the change, the hold digestion transmission image change plan (for example, when the pseudo-ream pattern is stopped: yellow zako hold → green zako The execution plan of the effect such as hold, repeated button presses during reach: change from green Zako hold to red star hold, etc.) is determined, stored in the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the process proceeds to step 2218. Even if No in step 2224 (second change 3), the process proceeds to step 2218.

Next, in step 2218 and step 2228 (second variation 3), the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. , The hold display mode change process execution flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300).

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the hold display mode change control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second variation 3) of FIG. 55 in the modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2702, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the holding display mode change processing execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the map holding information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is not the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 confirms the hold change plan stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2710, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change the hold display mode during the change based on the hold change plan.

In the case of Yes in step 2710, in step 2712, the drawing reservation effect information display control means SM22 refers to the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the specific advance notice effect (see FIG. 49) during the advance notice effect to be executed during the change. ) Is present or not. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is based on the notice mode temporarily stored in the first drawing change time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. , Determine whether or not the execution timing of the specific advance notice effect has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2714, the process proceeds to step 2718 (the display mode of the hold is changed according to the execution of the specific advance notice effect).

Here, FIG. 60 is a pending change image diagram in the specific notice effect. In this example, an example will be described in which the display mode of the hold is changed by the grass unevenness notice in the flat ground zone (particularly, the grassy spot notice in which a snake appears, which is a specific notice effect). First, in the state where the trigger hold exists in the hold, the fluctuation related to the hold before the trigger hold starts {in this example, the display mode of the trigger hold at this point is the normal hold (white hold)}.

Next, the grass spot notice, which is the notice effect during the change, is executed, and an image of searching for something by squeezing the grass spot is displayed.

Next, an image in which a snake (the expectation of a big hit during the fluctuation is "low") appears from behind the grass is displayed.

Here, if there is no plan to change the hold display during the change, an image of the snake appearing from behind the grass is displayed outside the screen, and the advance notice effect ends.

On the other hand, if there is a plan to change the hold display during the change, an image of a snake appearing from behind the grass jumping into hold (trigger hold, which is normally held at this point) is displayed, unlike the above case. To. After that, the display mode of the hold (trigger hold) in which the snake jumps changes, and it is displayed in a hold display mode (in this example, Zako hold) different from the normal hold. It should be noted that the specific advance notice effect may be configured so as to be able to execute an effect (so-called Gase effect) in which the display mode of the hold does not change even if the effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2712 (when the specific advance notice effect is not executed during the change), in step 2716, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 can be executed independently of the general-purpose hold change effect (executable independently of other effects). At the same time, it is an effect that can be executed in any effect stage. For example, a command for displaying a set (an effect that the hold explodes) is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999. Then, the process proceeds to step 2718.

Next, in step 2718, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the trigger hold based on the hold change plan stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and changes the display hold information. It is stored in the temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2720, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns off the holding display mode change processing execution flag in the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and next processing {step 2750. (2nd change 3) processing}. If No in step 2704, 2706 or 2710, the process proceeds to step 2720, and if No in step 2702 or 2714, the next process {process of step 2750 (second variation 3)}. Transition.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the pending digestion transmission image display processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second variation 3) of FIG. 55 in the modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the map holding information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the drawing reservation effect information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and whether or not the hold digestion transmission image display flag is off. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold digestion transmission image based on the hold digestion transmission image information temporarily stored in the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (Initial display mode) is determined. Here, the hold digestion transmission image is an image that continuously displays the hold related to the change even during the change (after the change starts and the hold related to the change is digested). .. By displaying the hold digestion transmission image, the player can easily recognize that the change is related to the Zako hold even during the change related to the hold (for example, Zako hold) whose display mode has changed within the hold. During the fluctuation, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image.

Next, in step 2758, the drawing reservation effect information display control means SM22 turns on the flag for displaying the hold digestion transmission image in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2760. On the other hand, even if No in step 2754, the process proceeds to step 2760.

Next, in step 2760, the drawing reservation effect information display control means SM22 refers to the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and confirms the hold digestion transmission image change plan. Next, in step 2762, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change or delete the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image during the change based on the hold digestion transmission image change plan. do. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the drawing holding information display control means SM22 displays the holding digestion transmission image based on the first drawing change time management timer SM21t-1 and the holding digestion transmission image change plan. It is determined whether or not the change timing (for example, at the start of re-variation after the pseudo-continuous symbol temporary stop display, at the time of executing a predetermined effect, or at a predetermined period during the reach effect) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2764, in step 2766, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is a condition for changing the hold digestion transmission image display mode (for example, pressing the sub input button during a predetermined period, the maximum number of holds, etc.). Is determined whether or not is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 2766, in step 2768 and step 2770, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying a general-purpose hold change effect (for example, an effect that the hold explodes) (transmission of a display command in step 2999). (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process) and change the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image based on the hold digestion transmission image change plan (for example, red star hold, green zako hold, no display, etc.) (Change to the display mode), the information is stored in the temporary storage means SM22b for holding information, and the process proceeds to step 2780. Even if No in step 2762 or 2766, the process proceeds to step 2780.

Here, FIG. 62 is an image diagram of a change in the reserved digestion transmission image. The change in the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image in the change example 3 from the second embodiment is configured to be executed in the flow as shown in the figure. In this example, a pattern in which the battle effect does not end in the first half but shifts (develops) to the battle effect (second half) is illustrated. First, the fluctuation related to the trigger hold (currently, Zako hold) starts, and the Zako hold is displayed as the hold digestion transmission image.

Next, the battle effect (first half) is executed as the effect during the fluctuation. In this example, when the hold digestion transmission image is Zako hold, it is possible to change the display mode of the Zako hold by pressing the sub input button a predetermined number of times during the execution of the battle effect (first half) in the fluctuation. It is configured in. In this example, a predetermined effect can be executed by pressing the sub input button during the execution of the battle effect (first half), but the effect that encourages the player's operation (pressing the sub input button) is Since it is not executed in particular, the operation of the sub input button is the input of a so-called hidden command (back button).

If you press the button repeatedly (press the sub input button a predetermined number of times) during the battle production (first half), every time you press the sub input button, an attack is added to the Zako hold displayed as the hold digestion transmission image. The effect image is displayed.

Next, when the number of times the sub-input button is pressed in the battle effect (first half) reaches a predetermined number, an image in which Zako Hold, which is a hold digestion transmission image, explodes is displayed, and based on the hold digestion transmission image change plan, The display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is changed and displayed (for example, the display mode of the hold is changed to red star hold or no display). Even after shifting to the battle effect (second half), the hold digestion transmission image will be displayed (or not displayed) in the display mode after the display mode is changed. Since there is an intention to predict the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation depending on the display mode of the transmission image, the hold digestion transmission image will continue to be displayed in the display mode after the display mode is changed even after the transition to the battle production (second half). }.

On the other hand, if the button is not repeatedly hit in the battle production (first half) (or the number of repeated hits is less than the predetermined number), the Zako hold, which is a hold digestion transmission image, automatically explodes at the timing of shifting to the battle production (second half). The image is displayed and the display of the hold digestion transmission image is deleted (By not hitting the button repeatedly, the hold digestion transmission image change plan is taken into consideration for the player who enjoys not predicting the big hit expectation of the fluctuation. The display is erased regardless of the contents of). In this example, the jackpot expectation of Zako hold is medium, and the jackpot expectation of Akaboshi hold is high expectation. In addition, when the battle effect (second half) is executed, the jackpot expectation level rises at a stretch as compared with the case where the battle effect (first half) is executed. Here, in the situation where the jackpot expectation has risen due to the transition to the battle production (second half), if the display of the Zako hold, which has a medium jackpot expectation, is continued, the battle production is a production with a high jackpot expectation. Although it may spoil the interest of (second half), the production with high expectation {in this example, Zako hold) is performed at the timing when the production of high expectation {this example, battle production (second half)} starts. By erasing it, such a situation can be avoided. Although not particularly shown in this example, even if the number of times the sub-input button is pressed is less than a predetermined number of times, it is based on the hold digestion transmission image change plan at the timing of changing the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image. It may be configured so that the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image can be automatically changed. In such a configuration, for example, the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image is automatically changed only when a change to a display mode suggesting that the expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation is high is planned. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the button is not repeatedly hit (or the number of repeated hits is less than the predetermined number of times), the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is automatically changed at the predetermined timing only when the fluctuation becomes a big hit or a probable change big hit. It may be configured so that the so-called correct effect can be executed.

In addition, when shifting to the battle effect (second half) without going through the battle effect (first half) {For example, the start of change in the drawing (all rows) → notice effect 1, temporary stop display of the drawing (left column) → temporary drawing Stop display (right column) → Reach development fan → Battle reach (second half) Image display → Temporary stop display of the drawing (middle row) → Perform production according to the result → Production that confirms the drawing (all columns) In the case of executing}, that is, when the period of repeated button presses {in this example, the battle effect (first half)} does not exist and the battle effect (second half) is entered, the timing of the transition to the battle effect (second half) Then, the Zako hold, which is a hold digestion transmission image, automatically explodes, and the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is changed and displayed based on the hold digestion transmission image change plan. Although not particularly shown in this example, the number of times the sub-input button is pressed required to change the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image has a high expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation (a hold display mode with a high expectation). (If it can change to hold), it may be configured so that a larger number of times is more likely to be selected. Further, although not particularly shown in this example, when the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image changes, in addition to the general-purpose hold change effect, an effect suggesting the content of the change (for example, when the Zako hold explodes). It may be configured to be able to execute the end-of-life notice) that issues a line to. The content suggested by the end-of-life notice is the expected degree of jackpot of the fluctuation and the content of the production scheduled to be executed (for example, "Achichii!" = Expectation of jackpot 60% or more, "Congratulations!" = The jackpot is confirmed, "Boss!" = Battle reach development with the boss character, etc.), but if the player does not press the sub-input button, the jackpot expectation related to the change is calculated. Assuming that the player does not want to make a prediction, it is preferable to configure so that the end-of-life notice related to the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation is not executed (only the end-of-life notice related to the production content to be executed can be executed). .. That is, only when the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is changed by the operation of the player, the advance notice effect related to the jackpot expectation degree of the change may be executed based on the result of the success or failure of the change. The effect of the battle effect (first half) can be executed at "a4" and "b4", which is a variation time of 30 seconds.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if No in step 2764 (when it is not the timing to change the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image), in step 2772, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold digestion transmission image. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to erase. In the case of Yes in step 2772, in step 2774, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is a condition for erasing the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image (for example, no sub-input button is pressed during a predetermined period, and the number of times the sub-input button is pressed. Is less than the specified number of times, etc.) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2774, in step 2776 and step 2778, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying a general-purpose hold change effect (for example, an effect that the hold explodes) (transmission of a display command in step 2999). (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process) and changed the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image to "no display" (changed to "no display" regardless of the contents of the hold digestion transmission image change plan. ), It is temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2780.

Next, in step 2780, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying the hold digestion transmission image based on the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 2752, in step 2782, the map display holding information display control means SM22 turns off the flag for holding digestion transmission image display in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. .. Next, in step 2784, the drawing reservation holding information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the holding digestion transmission image to "no display" and temporarily stores the drawing holding information display control means SM22b. Next, in step 2786, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the holding digestion transmission image based on the display mode of the holding digestion transmission image temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (the process). Then, a command (which will hide the pending digestion transmission image) is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and the next process (process in step 2300). Move to.

In the third modification from the second embodiment, the reserved digestion transmission image is configured to be able to be displayed, but the reserved digestion transmission image does not have to be always displayed. For example, the reserved display mode is usually reserved. The hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the hold that has been digested as it is may not be displayed, and the hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the hold whose hold display mode has changed from the normal hold may be displayed. With such a configuration, the player confirms the hold digestion transmission image at the timing when he / she wants to know the jackpot expectation of the symbol change, and if the hold digestion transmission image is displayed, the expectation is relatively high. If it is not displayed, it can be easily recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively low.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 46 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are from step 2524 (second variation 3) to step 2534 (second variation 3), that is, if the angel zone flag is off in step 2502, step 2524 (second variation 3). In the second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 changes the decorative symbol based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the first map variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Determine if the start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2524 (second change 3), in step 2526 (second change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and holds the trigger in the hold {described above. It is determined whether or not there is a hold that was won in the look-ahead lottery at the time of winning the first main game. In the case of Yes in step 2526 (second variation 3), in step 2528 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an angel zone transition lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example). do. Next, in step 2530 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result of step 2528 (second variation 3) and determines whether or not the angel zone transition lottery has been won. .. In the case of Yes in step 2530 (second change 3), in step 2532 (second change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets the angel zone flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Turn it on and move to step 2504.

Further, after setting the "angel zone background" as the background effect in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the drawing reservation information in step 2534 (second variation 3). With reference to the storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the symbol change related to the trigger hold is completed. In the case of Yes in step 2534 (second change 3), the process proceeds to step 2508, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 2520.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment, the sub-main control is performed for the highly expected hold (particularly, the hold on the first main game side) which is a big hit. When the display mode of the hold on the SM side can be changed and displayed, and a predetermined advance notice effect (in this example, a specific advance notice effect, particularly a low-expected advance notice effect) is executed, the predetermined advance notice effect is performed. It is configured so that the display mode of the hold can be changed and displayed according to the advance notice effect and the movement of the displayed image. As a result, even if the notice effect has a low expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation, the display mode of the hold may be changed, so that the player's interest in the notice effect can be increased and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible. In addition, when the big hit expectation rises after shifting to the battle production (second half), if the display of the Zako hold, which has a medium big hit expectation, is continued, the battle production is a production with a high big hit expectation. Since the interest of (second half) may be impaired, even if there is no operation by the player, the production with high expectation {example, battle production (second half)} is not high expectation at the start (second half). In this example, it is possible to hide the Zako hold) and prevent the entertainment of the production from being impaired. Further, it is a condition that the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the sub input button SB a predetermined number of times) while the predetermined effect {for example, battle reach (first half)} during the symbol change is being executed. As a result, since the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image can be changed, the player can participate in the effect, and the player who does not want to know the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation by the effect can perform the predetermined operation. By not doing so, it is possible to provide a game in which the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image can be selected to be an effect that does not suggest a jackpot expectation (for example, deletion of the reserved digestion transmission image).

In addition, in the change example 3 from the second embodiment, the background change effect and the hold change effect are provided as the look-ahead effect, and only the hold change effect is configured to be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the look-ahead effect. Is not limited, and the background change effect may be configured to be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the look-ahead effect (for example, the background may change to the "true angel zone background" even after the change to the "angel zone background"). In addition, in such a configuration, the more the background change effect is executed (the more times the execution is performed), the higher the expectation that the fluctuation related to the pre-reading effect during execution will be a big hit (rank). It is desirable to configure it so that it will be up). It should be noted that the background change effect does not change (ranks up) during the execution of the symbol change related to the trigger hold.

(Third Embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to start and stop changing almost at the same time as the main game symbol, but the variation mode of the decorative symbol is not limited to this. .. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a third embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the third embodiment, the inside of the second large winning opening C20 has a specific region C22 which is a region that triggers a transition of the probability fluctuation gaming state by entering the ball.

First, FIGS. 64 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) show the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-B) and the first in the third embodiment. This is an example of the main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). The difference from this embodiment is that the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is low, and the short-open jackpot and the long-open jackpot are provided as jackpots. Here, the short open big hit means that the second big winning opening C20 is short-time (for example, 0.1) in the distribution game execution round (the round in which the second big winning opening C20 is opened) during the big hit. It is a big hit that opens only (seconds), and a long open big hit is a round in which the second big winning opening C20 is opened for a long time in the distribution game execution round (the round in which the second big winning opening C20 is opened). It is a big hit that can be opened (for example, 30 seconds). In the third embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the above-mentioned distribution game execution round, the game property shifts to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game being executed. It has become (so-called ball confirmation machine).

Next, FIGS. 65 and 66 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). The difference from this embodiment is that both the first main game side and the second main game side are tables that are referred to in the game state when the game is lost and the time is shortened, and the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation is "0". "And" 1 to 3 "are configured so that the contents of the table are different. In the third embodiment, among the variation modes of the second main game symbol selected in the time-reduced gaming state, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and the other variation modes are long variations. The method of determining the variation mode of the decorative symbol (particularly the first decorative symbol) differs depending on whether the variation mode of the second main game symbol is a short variation or a long variation (details will be described later). .. In the time-reduced game state, the game is mainly advanced on the second main game side (since the game is advanced by right-handed, only the symbol change on the second main game side is executed. Alternatively, the variation of the second main game symbol is easier to execute than the variation of the first main game symbol).

Further, although details will be described later, in the time-reduced gaming state, the variation time of the second decorative symbol is configured to be the same as the variation time of the second main game symbol, so that the time-reduced gaming state is the first. 2 The variation time of the decorative symbol is also determined depending on the number of reservations at the start of the symbol variation (it may differ depending on the number of reservations).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time-shortened game state, the game is mainly advanced on the second main game side (since the game is advanced by right-handed hitting, the second main game is performed). (Only the symbol change on the game side is executed), since the first main game hold basically does not occur, the content of the change mode determination table related to the first main game symbol in the time-reduced game state is lost. In the case of a short-time (for example, 3 seconds) variation time, only one type of content may be used, and in the case of a big hit, a long-term (for example, 30 seconds) variation time may be included in only one type (time). Since the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the shortened gaming state is an irregular symbol variation, there is no problem even if the content of the variation mode determination table has a simple configuration). In addition, in order to cause the second main game hold during irregular symbol changes, the contents of the change mode determination table related to the first main game symbol related to the loss of the time shortened game state can be set for a short time regardless of the number of holds. It may be configured so that the variation mode of is not selected (for example, the variation time is 5 seconds or more). The number of holds shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game hold and the second main game hold, but the first main game in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode. It is the number of game reservations, and in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode, it is the number of second main game reservations.

Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1454 (third) to step 1464 (third), the purpose of which is to end the stochastic variable gaming state by the number of changes of the main game symbol (to the non-probable variable gaming state). To migrate). That is, in step 1454 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1454 (third), in step 1456 (third), the specific game control means MP50 decrements by 1 from the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1458 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1458 (third), in step 1460 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1462 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1464 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1470. In addition, even if No in step 1454 (third) or step 1458 (third), the process proceeds to step 1470. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the symbol variation is executed in the probability variation gaming state, and the probability variation game state ends when the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c becomes 0 (so-called ST). Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, and for example, it is configured so that the probability fluctuation game state does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations (it may end when the special game is won), and the jackpot related to the first main game Even if the ratio of the jackpot related to the second main game to the long opening jackpot is higher than the percentage of the jackpot related to the second main game, and the jackpot related to the second main game also has a short opening jackpot. good.

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1611 (third), step 1700 (third) and step 1650 (third), that is, after setting the special game start display instruction command in step 1608, or. When the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1610, in step 1611 (third), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the currently executing round is a distribution game. It is determined whether or not it is an execution round (a round in which the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, 2R / 4R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (third), in step 1700 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes the distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (third), the process proceeds to step 1612. Further, after setting the special game end display instruction command in step 1638, in step 1650 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and next The process proceeds to the process (process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1702, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, the process proceeds to step 1716. On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1704, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (7A, 4B, ... It is 5B and 7B, and all the second main game jackpot symbols are long open symbols). In the case of Yes in step 1704, in step 1706, the distribution game execution control means MP36 has a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 30 seconds, as an opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. An open pattern designed so that the ball entering the specific region C22 is substantially deterministic) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1710. If No in step 1704, in step 1708, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens a short opening pattern (for example, opening for 0.1 second) as an opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. An open pattern designed so that the non-ball entering the specific region C22 is substantially definite) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1710.

Next, in step 1710, the distribution game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1712, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1714, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second special winning opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1716.

Next, in step 1716, the distribution game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have won in the second large winning opening C20. do. If Yes in step 1716, the process proceeds to step 1720. On the other hand, if No in step 1716, in step 1718, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1718, the process proceeds to step 1720. Next, in step 1720, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1724, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round. In the case of Yes in step 1724, in step 1726, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1728. .. Even if No in step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. Next, in step 1728, the distribution game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the distribution game execution round), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1634). Even if No in step 1718, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634).

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1662, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1662, in step 1664, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1666, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) in the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1668, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1672. On the other hand, if No in step 1662, in step 1670, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1672.

Next, in step 1672, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1674, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2010 (third) and step 2850 (third), that is, after executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol display content determination process in step 2200, step 2010 (third). Then, the sub-control board S refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2010 (third), the process proceeds to step 2300, and in the case of No, in step 2850 (third), the sub-control board S performs the time-saving and medium-time decorative symbol display control process described later. Execute and move to step 2400.

Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2230 (third) and step 2800 (third), that is, in step 2204, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2230 (third). The map display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2230 (third), the process proceeds to step 2206, and in the case of No, in step 2800 (third), the map display content determining means SM21n is the first device in a short time, which will be described later. The figure content determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2208. The process of step 2218 is not executed in the third embodiment (the symbol content determination flag does not exist). In the third embodiment, the first decorative symbol is composed of three columns, a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and an effective line (a line that becomes effective when the same numerical symbols are lined up) is 1. It is a line, and if the same number symbols are aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it is a loss). In addition, only numerical symbols can be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column, middle column, and right column (or in the middle column) (the above-mentioned "special symbol" does not stop, or the appearance frequency itself is extremely high. (Low probability), and it is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped (or the probability of temporary stop is extremely low) during the symbol change. The second decorative symbol is composed of three columns, a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and one effective line (a line in which the same symbol is valid to be lined up) is one and is the same as the effective line. If the number symbols of are aligned, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the valid line, it will be a loss). In addition, only numerical symbols can be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column, middle column, and right column (or in the middle column) (the above-mentioned "special symbol" does not stop), and during the symbol change. It is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the first drawing content determination process in the time saving and medium according to the subroutine of step 2800 (third) of FIG. 72 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2802, the map display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the first decorative symbol is currently stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the marking display content determining means SM21n has the second main game hold content (particularly, the winning / failing result and the variation time) related to the symbol variation (change in the main game symbol), and Check the contents of the second main game hold (especially the variable time), which is the order of digestion of the first and second items, that is, the contents of the second main game hold (especially the result of winning / failing and the variable time) excluding the third hold. .. Next, in step 2806, the marking display content determining means SM21n has or does not have a hold (including the symbol change) having a fluctuation time of a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) or more related to the confirmed hold. , Based on the digestion order of the hold (including the symbol variation) that has a variation time of a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) or more, refer to the table for determining the first design variation mode during the time reduction, and refer to the first decorative symbol. Determine the variation mode.

Here, the right part of the figure is an example of the first table for determining the variation mode of the first drawing in the time saving in the third embodiment. As shown in this table, in the third embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is stopped (timing of step 2806), the number of reserved second main games, the change of the second main game symbol, and the second main game are shown. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the fluctuation time related to the game hold. As described above, among the variation modes of the second main game symbol, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and other than "b0 (1 second)" is a long variation.

Specifically, when there are two or more second main game holds, it is determined whether or not there is a hold that causes a long change in the symbol change, the first hold, and the second hold. If there is no hold that becomes a long fluctuation, the fluctuation time for the three fluctuations of the second main game symbol becomes the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the number of 2nd main game hold is 3 and the number of 2nd main game hold is "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, 1st: 1 second, 2". In the case of "eyes: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the change time of the first decorative symbol when the number of 2nd main game hold is maintained at "1 to 3" is "the change" and "the change". The total of "1st" and "2nd" is 3 seconds, and the 1st decorative symbol is also stopped at the same time (or almost at the same time) as the fluctuation stop of the main game symbol related to the 2nd hold. .. The second decorative symbol is configured to stop at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the fluctuation stop of the main game symbol in each variation.

On the other hand, if there are two or more second main game holds, and if there is a hold that becomes a long change in any of the symbol change, the first hold, and the second hold, the first is the first. The variation time until the variation of the main game symbol related to the hold, which is a long variation of the digestion order, is the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the number of 2nd main game hold is 3 and the number of 2nd main game hold is "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, 1st: 10 seconds, 2". In the case of "eyes: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the change time of the first decorative symbol when the number of 2nd main game hold is maintained at "1 to 3" is "the change" and "the change". The total of 11 seconds with the "first" is 11 seconds, and the first decorative symbol is also stopped at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the first hold, which is a long fluctuation, is stopped.

In addition, when the number of the second main game hold is 1 or less, it is determined whether or not there is a hold that becomes a long change until the hold that becomes the final digestion order (including the symbol change), and the long change. If there is no hold, the change time obtained by adding the change of the symbol of the second main game symbol and all the holds is the change time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when there is one second main game hold and the number of second main game holds is "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, 1st: 1 second". In the case where the number of reserved second main games is maintained at "1 to 3", the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol is 2 seconds, which is the total of "the fluctuation" and "the first". The first decorative symbol will also stop at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the fluctuation stop of the main game symbol related to the eye hold.

On the other hand, if there is one or less second main game hold, and if there is a hold that has a long fluctuation until the hold that is the final digestion order (including the symbol change), the first digestion order The fluctuation time until the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the hold, which is a long fluctuation, is the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the second main game hold is one and the number of second main game hold is "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, the first: 10 seconds". The fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of reserved second main games is maintained at "1 to 3" is 11 seconds, which is the total of "the fluctuation" and "the first", which is a long fluctuation. At the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the fluctuation stop of the main game symbol related to the first hold, the first decorative symbol is also stopped.

In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol is determined at the timing of step 2806, that is, the timing after the pending digestion, but the variation time is not limited to this, and before the pending digestion. At the timing, the second main game hold information may be confirmed, and the variation time of the first decorative symbol may be determined.

Next, in step 2808, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the hold information confirmed in step 2804, and determines whether or not there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the confirmed second main game hold. In the case of Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the hold that is the big hit, and steps. Move to 2814. On the other hand, if No in step 2808, in step 2812, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol to be lost, and proceeds to step 2814. In the process of step 2812, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is reached according to the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol (the stop symbols in the left column and the right column are the same, for example, "4.6. It may be configured to determine whether the pattern is 4 ”) or a random pattern (the stop symbols in the left column and the right column are not the same, for example,“ 4/6/3 ”). Next, in step 2814, the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the first symbol content determination flag in the time saving medium first symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and next processing (step 2208). Process). Even if No in step 2802, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2208).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time-shortened game state, the game is mainly advanced on the second main game side (since the game is advanced by right-handed hitting, the second). Since only the symbol change on the main game side is executed), the first main game hold basically does not occur, but the first main game hold occurs because the player executes a left-handed strike. In this case, it is desirable that the first decorative symbol has the same variation time as the main game symbol until the variation related to the first main game hold is completed.

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the time-saving and medium-time decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (third) of FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2852, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the change of the main game symbol has started. In the case of Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2856, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2858. On the other hand, if No in step 2852, the process proceeds to step 2858.

Next, in step 2858, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2858, in step 2860, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer values of the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2862, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first decorative symbol is stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2862, in step 2864, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and proceeds to step 2866. On the other hand, if No in step 2862, in step 2865, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and proceeds to step 2866.

Next, in step 2866, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 variablely displays the second decorative symbol. Next, in step 2868, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 appropriately executes image display such as temporary stop display, notice image display, reach image display, etc. related to the change of the main game symbol, which has been determined. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed as a temporary stop in the time-reduced gaming state, but are configured not to be temporarily stopped in a stop mode such as a "special symbol" or a pseudo-continuous symbol. As a specific example of the temporary stop, the first decorative symbol is the reach (the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped) due to the symbol variation which is the reach variation for a long time (for example, 30 seconds or more). The second decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the period (), or the first decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous variation before the first decorative symbol reaches reach. ..

Next, in step 2870, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol has stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2870, in step 2872, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the stop timing of the first decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2872, in step 2874, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms and displays the first decorative symbol. Next, in step 2876, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2880. On the other hand, if No in step 2872, in step 2878, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and proceeds to step 2880.

Next, in step 2880, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms and displays the second decorative symbol. Next, in step 2882, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Even if No in step 2858 or step 2870, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Here, the upper part of the figure is a time-saving and medium-time decorative symbol variation image diagram, and exemplifies an example of the action related to the variation of the decorative symbol in the third embodiment. First, the "main game symbol change start state" means that the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) start to change at the timing when the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol) starts to change. Whether or not it is displayed. The part indicated by the diagonal line indicates that the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is changing. In addition, it is displayed whether or not the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) stop changing at the timing when the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol) stops changing. The part indicated by the diagonal line indicates that the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is changing. In this way, the second decorative symbol starts and stops fluctuating at the same timing (or substantially the same) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol) (according to the fluctuation of the main game symbol). The second decorative symbol is configured to start and stop fluctuating every three fluctuations of the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol). That is, the first decorative symbol is configured so that one symbol variation can be executed over a plurality of variation periods of the main game symbol (and the second decorative symbol).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the variation time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the reserved number and the variation time of the second main game hold. By configuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol to be the value of the variation time of the second main game symbol multiple times, the game is played as if the variation of the main game symbol multiple times is one variation. It can be shown to a person, and even when the number of changes of the main game symbol, which is the end condition of the probability fluctuation game state, is large (200 times in this example) as in the third embodiment, the number of times is small (200 times in this example). For example, it can be shown to the player as if it is 100 times), and it is possible to reduce the continuous loss fluctuation during the probability fluctuation game state from boring the progress of the game, and also to reduce the probability fluctuation game. It is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot probability in the state is higher than it actually is.

In the third embodiment, the second decorative symbol can be fixedly stopped three times during the period when the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped once, but the number of fixed stops of the second decorative symbol is The maximum number of 3 times is smaller than the 4 times, which is the upper limit of the 2nd main game hold (if the 2nd main game hold upper limit is exceeded, the 1st decorative symbol is in the process of changing. Because there may be a situation where all the second main game hold is exhausted).

The board configuration of the third embodiment may be changed. For example, the game ball almost certainly passes through the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10 when right-handed. Arranged so as to vertically overlap on the route (the auxiliary game start port H10 is placed on the upper side when viewed from the player), and almost all of the game balls that have flowed down the route and passed through the auxiliary game start port H10 are It may be configured so that the ball can enter the second main game start port B10. In such a configuration, in the time-reduced game state, during the period from when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10 to when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the "auxiliary game symbol" is used. Since it is desirable that it can be "start of fluctuation-> end of fluctuation of auxiliary game symbol-> opening of second main game start port electric accessory B11d", "variation time of auxiliary game symbol is 0.2 seconds, second main game start port electric It is preferable that the opening mode of the accessory B11d is such that the opening mode is 6 seconds open → closed. In such a configuration, in order to prevent a large amount of game balls from entering the second main game start port B10 when right-handed is executed in the time-reduced game state, the second main game It is desirable that the number of prize balls in the starting port B10 is one (the number of prize balls in the first main game starting port A10 is three).

In the third embodiment, the contents of the second main game hold are confirmed while the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the fluctuation time related to the next variation of the first decorative symbol is determined. If there is a hold that is a long change of the main game symbol by the second digestion order, the first decorative symbol is also configured to stop at the same time when the symbol change related to the hold that is the long change is stopped. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol may not depend on the number of holds at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol, and the hold that occurs during the change of the first decorative symbol causes the first change of the next change. The variation time of the decorative pattern is configured to be different.

In the third embodiment, as described above, when there are two or more second main game holds, and there is a long change in either the symbol change, the first hold, or the second hold. If there is a hold that becomes, the change time until the change of the main game symbol related to the hold, which is the longest change in the digestion order, is configured to be the change time of the first decorative symbol. If there is no long-term hold in any of the symbol change and the first hold and the second hold, the change time of the third change of the second main game symbol is the change of the first decorative symbol. Although it is configured to be a time, for example, when the number of the second main game hold is 3 and the number of the 2nd main game hold is maintained at "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second". In the case of "1, 1st: 1 second, 2nd: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the first decorative symbol when the number of 2nd main game reservations is maintained at "1 to 3" The fluctuation time is scheduled to be 3 seconds, which is the total of "the fluctuation", "1st" and "2nd", but the 2nd main game hold is not maintained at "1 to 3". For example, when the actual fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, the first: 1 second: the second: 5 seconds", the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol is "the fluctuation" and "the fluctuation". The total of "1st" and "2nd" is 7 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol may differ depending on the presence or absence of additional pending occurrence.

In the third embodiment, the content of the second main game hold is confirmed while the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the fluctuation time related to the next variation of the first decorative symbol is determined. While stopped, the effect related to the first decorative symbol may be determined. For example, when a "lightning running effect" is executed on the effect display device SG at the start of the change due to a certain first decorative symbol change. In addition, while the change of the first decorative symbol is stopped, the change content of the second decorative symbol (or the change content of the second main game symbol) is confirmed, and the next first decorative symbol change is "lightning bolt". You may decide whether or not to execute the "running effect" again. In addition, the more the "lightning running effect" is continuous, the higher the expectation that the first decorative symbol variation (or the main game symbol variation included in the first decorative symbol variation) related to the effect will be a big hit. It is desirable to configure it to be high. The timing for confirming the variation content of the second decorative symbol (or the variation content of the second main game symbol) may be changed, but if it is confirmed at the variation start timing of the first decorative symbol, it is at the timing. When only the change contents related to the second main game hold can be confirmed, but when the change stop timing or the end end timing of the first decorative symbol is confirmed, the first decorative symbol occurs during the period during the change. 2 Since it is possible to confirm the change content of the main game hold, it is desirable that the confirmation timing is after the end of the change of the first decorative symbol.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the effect display device has been described in detail, but such a configuration is described above. It is not limited to the configuration of the form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fourth embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a right-handed instruction display indicating that right-handed hitting should be executed in a gaming situation in which right-handed hitting (a launching mode in which a gaming ball is launched toward the right side of the board) should be executed. It has a right-handed display control means SM27 that controls the display of the slingshot.

First, FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3400 (fourth), that is, when the execution of the iterative processing routine (b) of the sub-main control unit SM is started, in step 3400 (fourth). The sub-control board S executes the right-handed instruction display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2100.

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the right-handed instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 3400 (fourth) of FIG. 75 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3402, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state. In this example, it is determined in step 3402 whether or not the game is in the time-reduced gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the game is in the gaming state in which the right-handed strike should be executed (for example, the probability fluctuation game). It may be configured to determine whether or not it is in a state, whether or not it is a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-shortening gaming state, etc.). If Yes in step 3402, the process proceeds to step 3406.

If No in step 3402, in step 3404, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3404, in step 3406, the right-handed display control means SM27 sets a command for displaying the right-handed instruction display on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). Here, the upper right corner of the figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed instruction display. As shown in the figure, the right-handed instruction display is displayed on the effect display device SG, and is configured to notify the player that the game should be proceeded by right-handed at present. Since it is important for the player to recognize whether or not to hit right, the right-handed instruction display is configured so that the priority of the display priority is increased (details will be described later). In addition, the display basically always displayed on the continuous effect display device SG such as the second decorative symbol and the hold display (including the first hold display and the second hold display), which will be described later, is a right-handed instruction display. It may be configured so as not to overlap.

It should be noted that the right-handed display mode in each game state or situation may always be the same display mode even if the game state or situation (when the special game is being executed and when the special game is not being executed, etc.) is different. The display mode may be different depending on the state or situation (for example, the size may be different). Further, when the display mode is configured to be different, for example, during a big hit, the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be different depending on the opening mode of the big winning opening, for example, the big winning opening. The right-handed instruction display during a big hit where all the opening modes are long open is a relatively large first display pattern, and the right-handed instruction display during a big hit where all the opening modes of the big winning opening are short-open is relatively small. As the second display pattern, the right-handed instruction display during a big hit where long opening and short opening are mixed as the opening mode of the big winning opening is a relatively large first display pattern in the round where the big winning opening is long opening. Therefore, in a round in which the large winning opening is short-opened, it may be configured to proceed while switching the right-handed instruction display so as to have a relatively small second display pattern.

Further, when the first right-handed instruction display having a relatively small display area and the second right-handed instruction display having a relatively large display area can be displayed as the right-handed instruction display, the following is performed. It may be configured.
(1) In a situation where right-handedness should be made (for example, a time-reduced gaming state), the first right-handed instruction display is configured to be displayed, and in the right-handed situation, left-handedness is a game. When the machine detects (for example, when three game balls enter the first main game start port A10 which can be entered by left-handed in the time-reduced game state), the second right-handed instruction is displayed. Is displayed for a predetermined time (the first right-handed instruction display remains displayed).
(2) The first right-handed instruction display is displayed near the four corners (for example, the upper right) of the effect display device SG, and the second right-handed instruction display is displayed near the center of the effect display device SG. Further, the display area of the first right-handed instruction display and the display area of the second right-handed instruction display do not overlap. In addition, the display area of the first right-handed instruction display and the display area of the second right-handed instruction display may be configured to overlap, and in such a configuration, the display priority of the second right-handed instruction display is given. The display priority of the first right-handed instruction display may be higher than the degree.
(3) The display priority in the effect display device SG is "1st right-handed instruction display-> 2nd right-handed instruction display-> notice effect-> changing decorative pattern"("2nd right-handed instruction display". It may be "instruction display-> first right-handed instruction display-> advance notice effect-> changing decorative pattern"), for example, when the display area of the second right-handed instruction display and the display area of the changing decorative symbol overlap. The second right-handed instruction display is displayed on the front side (it becomes visible).
(4) The first right-handed instruction display may overlap with the first decorative symbol during the change during the auxiliary game state {during the change of the main game symbol (during the change of the first decorative symbol, during the change of the second decorative symbol)}. However, it does not overlap with the second decorative symbol (for example, when a "design enlargement effect" in which at least a part of the first decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged occurs). However, the first right-handed instruction display does not overlap with either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol while the fluctuation is stopped. Further, the first right-handed instruction display is a first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) and a second hold on the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, eg, FIG. 87). Further, the first right-handed instruction display may overlap with a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)}, but a specific notice effect {for example, a dialogue notice (character's dialogue). It does not overlap with the notice to be displayed)}.
(5) The second right-handed instruction display may overlap with the first decorative symbol during the change during the auxiliary game state {during the change of the main game symbol (during the change of the first decorative symbol, during the change of the second decorative symbol)}. (For example, not only when the "design enlargement effect" in which at least a part of the first decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged occurs, but also during scrolling from top to bottom). , Does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. Further, the second right-handed instruction display is a first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) and a second hold on the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, eg, FIG. 87). Further, the second right-handed instruction display is a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)} and a specific notice effect {for example, a dialogue notice (a notice for displaying the character's line)}. Both can overlap.
(6) When the first decorative symbol is changing the main game symbol (during the change of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is changing), the first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example). , See FIG. 87) and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87). Further, when the first decorative symbol is changing the main game symbol (+ the first decorative symbol is changing), a predetermined advance notice {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)} and a specific advance notice { For example, it may overlap with the dialogue notice (notice of displaying the character's dialogue)}.
(7) When the second decorative symbol is changing the main game symbol (during the change of the first decorative symbol, during the change of the second decorative symbol), the first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example). , See FIG. 87) and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87). Further, when the second decorative symbol is changing the main game symbol (+ the second decorative symbol is changing), it may overlap with a predetermined advance notice {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)}. It does not overlap with a specific notice effect {for example, a line notice (a notice that displays a character's line)}.
(8) The first hold display (for example, see FIG. 87) of the first main game side and the second main game side overlaps with a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific notice effect {for example, a line notice (a notice that displays a character's line)}.
(9) The second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) overlaps with the predetermined notice effect {for example, the group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific notice effect {for example, a line notice (a notice that displays a character's line)}.

Further, when the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be different depending on the game state or situation, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) During the small hit execution, the right-handed instruction display is relatively small (for example, one arrow or the like), and the display mode is different from the case where the small hit is not executed.
(2) Probability fluctuation game state and non-time reduction game state when the special game is not being executed, non-probability fluctuation game state and non-time reduction game state when the special game is not being executed, and special game execution. Is in a non-time reduction game state.
(3) The time-reduced gaming state includes a non-probability variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state, and a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reducing gaming state.
(4) When the special game is not being executed, the right-handed instruction display is not displayed in the non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game state and the probability fluctuation game state and non-time reduction game state. On the other hand, the right-handed instruction display is displayed during the execution of the special game (the display prompting the left-handed player is not displayed).
(5) In the time-reduced game state, the right-handed instruction display is displayed (the left-handed prompting display is not displayed).
(6) When the above-mentioned first right-handed instruction display and second right-handed instruction display can be displayed regardless of whether the non-time-reduced gaming state or the time-reduced gaming state is set, the non-time-reduced gaming state. The display mode of the first right-handed instruction display is different between the game state and the time-reduced gaming state, but the display mode of the second right-handed instruction display is the same.
(7) The display prompting left-handed is an auxiliary game start port that makes it easy to enter the ball when performing right-handed in a predetermined period (for example, from a situation where right-handed should be made to a left-handed situation for a predetermined period, in a left-handed situation). It is displayed (for a predetermined period from the detection of a right-handed hit such as when a game ball enters the ball) (it will be hidden after the predetermined period has elapsed), while the right-handed instruction display is in a situation where a right-handed hit should be made. The period during which the constant display or the right-handed instruction display is displayed is longer than the predetermined period.

If No in step 3404, in step 3408, the right-handed display control means SM27 sets a command for erasing the right-handed instruction display, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). In step 3408, if the right-handed instruction display is not displayed, the process is not executed.

Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram relating to the display mode and display position of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the display mode and display position of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are illustrated by the combination of the gaming state and the background effect. In addition, all four display examples shown in the figure illustrate the situation where the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) related to "7A", which is the jackpot symbol on the first main game side, are stopped. ing. First, in the upper left of the figure, a case where the gaming state is a non-probability variable gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “daytime stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are arranged in a horizontal straight line. Further, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are lined up in a horizontal straight line. Next, in the upper right corner of the figure, a case where the gaming state is a probability-variable gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “daytime stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777", which is a Chinese numeral, and the display position is such that three numbers are arranged in a convex shape. Further, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are lined up in a horizontal straight line. Further, when the background effect being executed is the "daytime stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "black" in both "777" and "777". The display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" in both the case of "777" and the case of "777".

Next, in the lower left of the figure, a case where the gaming state is a non-probability variable gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “night stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are lined up diagonally in a straight line. Further, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are lined up in a horizontal straight line. Next, in the lower right part of the figure, the case where the gaming state is the probability fluctuation gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “night stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is "777", which is a Chinese numeral, and the display position is a concave shape in which three numbers are arranged. Further, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are lined up in a horizontal straight line. Further, when the background effect being executed is "night stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "white" in both "777" and "777". The display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" in both the case of "777" and the case of "777".

Thus, in the figure,
(1) The display mode of the first decorative symbol is different when the gaming state is different.
(2) The display mode of the first decorative pattern is different when the background effect is different.
(3) The display position of the first decorative symbol is different when the gaming state is different.
(4) The display position of the first decorative pattern is different when the background effect is different.
(5) The display mode of the second decorative symbol does not differ even if the gaming state is different.
(6) The display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effect is different.
(7) The display position of the second decorative symbol does not differ even if the gaming state is different.
(8) The display position of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effect is different.
It is configured as follows.

Further, in the case where the display mode of the first decorative symbol is configured to be different due to the difference in the background effect and the game state, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is set to a pattern such as a number and a character as shown in FIG. 98 described later. When the display mode is configured to be a combination of and, the display mode of the first decorative symbol may be different by differentiating the pattern (for numbers, Chinese numerals and arithmetic numerals may be used. It may be different or the same). Further, the display mode may be different depending on whether or not the pattern is attached. In addition, as a configuration that can suggest the game state after the end of the big hit when the display color of the numbers of the decorative pattern is a big hit, the big hit is started by having three numbers whose display color is green. In that case, it is not certain whether or not the game will be in a probability fluctuation game state after the end of the big hit, but if the big hit is started by having three numbers whose display color is red, after the end of the big hit, It may be configured so that the probability-variable gaming state is substantially definite. For example, in the non-probability-variable gaming state, "3" is green and "7" is red, while in the probability-variable gaming state. May be configured such that "3" and "7" are red (in the stochastic game state, "3" has the same properties as "7"). The difference between the properties of green and red is that when the big hit is started due to the stop of the green decorative symbol, the big hit with 8 rounds (or 8 or more rounds) is started. Therefore, if the jackpot is started due to the stop of the red decorative symbol, the jackpot with 16 execution rounds may be started, or the green decorative symbol becomes the reach. In this case, the ratio of the symbol variation to the big hit is 10%, while the ratio of the red decorative symbol to the reach is 50%. good. In addition, when the reach is "1", the ratio of the symbol fluctuation to the big hit is 10%, while when the reach is "7", the ratio of the symbol fluctuation to the big hit is 10%. It may be configured to be 50%. Further, when the display mode of the first decorative symbol is configured to be different due to the difference in the background effect and the game state, the display mode is different depending on whether or not the number of the first decorative symbol is accompanied by a character. It may be configured, for example, in the non-probability variable gaming state, the character "SUPER" is not attached to the "7" of the first decorative symbol, while in the probabilistic variable gaming state, the first decorative symbol "7" is attached. May be configured so that the character "SUPER" is attached to "". In addition, in the big hit in the first main game symbol (especially in the non-time shortened game state), the character "SUPER" is not attached to "7", and the big hit in the second main game symbol (especially in the time shortened game state). ), The character "SUPER" is attached to "7", or the character "SUPER" is attached to "7" in the big hit in the first main game symbol (especially during the non-time reduction game state). , The probability that the character "SUPER" is attached to "7" in the big hit in the second main game symbol (especially in the time-reduced game state) may be increased. Further, when the character "SUPER" is attached, the big hit of 16R is confirmed (the configuration may be such that the 16R probability variation hit is fixed), but when the character "SUPER" is not attached, the big hit of 16R is confirmed. May not be determined (a configuration in which the 16R probability variation hit is not determined) or a 4R jackpot may be determined. In addition, although the character "SUPER" may be attached to the first decorative design, the character "SUPER" is not always attached to the second decorative design. Further, the first decorative symbol other than "7" (particularly, even-numbered symbol) has a configuration in which the character "SUPER" is not attached even if it is the first decorative symbol.

Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram relating to the display area of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the area where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be displayed on the effect display device SG is illustrated. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the upper left corner of the figure, the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed around the central portion of the display area SG10, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed around the upper left portion of the display area SG10. It is configured to be. As for the range of the display area SG10 in which the decorative symbol considering the execution of the SP reach effect or the execution of the big hit can be displayed, the second decorative symbol is in the range as shown in the upper right of the figure, and the first decorative symbol. Is the range shown in the lower right of the drawing. As shown in the figure, in the fourth embodiment, the area where the first decorative symbol can be displayed is larger than the area where the second decorative symbol can be displayed. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the display does not move during the variable display, while the display of the first decorative symbol moves during the variable display (for example, the upper part of the display area SG10). Since it is configured to move from to the bottom), the moving range of the first decorative symbol is larger than the moving range of the second decorative symbol.

Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to the variable display period of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the display when the SP reach effect is executed are illustrated. First, since the symbol of the main game symbol is changed in the upper left of the figure, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. Next, in the upper right corner of the figure, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are reach display. Next, in the lower left of the figure, a battle effect is executed as an SP reach effect, and while the battle effect is being executed, the player wants to pay attention to the battle effect (whether or not the result of the battle effect is a big hit). The display of the first decorative symbol is erased (hidden). On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is continuously displayed with the reach display, and when the player wants to check the status of the decorative symbol during the battle production, the display of the second decorative symbol is visually recognized to reach. You can recognize that it is inside. After that, the battle effect is won, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol. In this way, while the display of the first decorative symbol is erased (during the execution of the battle effect) while the main game symbol is changing, the display of the second decorative symbol is always displayed, so that the first decoration is displayed. The display period of the second decorative symbol is relatively longer than the display period of the symbol. Even when the first decorative symbol is displayed in reach, the second decorative symbol may be configured not to be displayed in reach. Further, even when the first decorative symbol executes the pseudo continuous variation described above, the second decorative symbol may be configured not to execute the pseudo continuous variation. Further, the second decorative symbol may not always be displayed. For example, the second decorative symbol may be hidden during the period when the first decorative symbol is displayed, or the display area SG10 may be covered as a specific effect. When such an effect having a large display area is executed, the second decorative symbol may be hidden (difficult to see).

Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram relating to the decorative symbol to be used in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the configuration related to the display mode of the decorative pattern applicable to the fourth embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are changed and displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is completed, and the jackpot symbol "7A" is stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. The first decorative symbol uses an arithmetic number that is a common symbol between the first main game side and the second main game side, and "777" is stopped in this example. Further, as the second decorative symbol, when the first main game symbol fluctuates, an arithmetic number is used, and when "7A" stops, "777" stops.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game symbol is changed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. After that, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is completed, and the jackpot symbol "7B" is stopped as the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, so that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. As for the first decorative design, "777" is stopped. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is configured to use the alphabet when the second main game symbol changes, and to stop "AAA" when "7B" stops. In this way, in the first decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol changes and the symbol used when the second main game symbol changes are the same (design of the symbol display area and the symbol). Is the same, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol only by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol). On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol fluctuates and the symbol used when the second main game symbol fluctuates are different (the design of the design of the variable display and the stop display is different). is doing). The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed on the same display device or may be displayed on different display devices. Further, the first hold display and the second hold display, which will be described later, may be displayed on the same display device or may be displayed on different display devices. When displaying on different display devices in both the decorative design and the hold display, any of the display devices may be a liquid crystal display device (having a plurality of liquid crystal display devices) or a liquid crystal display. It may be a device and an LED lamp.

Next, FIG. 81 is an image diagram relating to the stop display mode of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, as in FIG. 80, the configuration related to the display mode of the decorative symbol applicable to the fourth embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are changed and displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is completed, and the jackpot symbol "7A" is stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. The first decorative symbol uses an arithmetic number that is a common symbol between the first main game side and the second main game side, and in this example, "777" is stopped. Further, the second decorative symbol uses an arithmetic number, and "777" is stopped.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the first main game symbol is being changed at a timing different from that of the upper part of the figure, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol was completed, and the jackpot symbol "7A" (the same jackpot symbol as the upper part of the figure) was stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so that the first decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol and The second decorative symbol will be stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. The arithmetic number "333" is stopped in the first decorative symbol, and the arithmetic number "777" is stopped in the second decorative symbol. As described above, even when the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the same, the first decorative symbol has a plurality of types of stop display modes (“777”, “333”, etc.), while the second decorative symbol has. When the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the same, only one type of stop display mode (“777”) exists. As a specific example of the candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, first, in the case of the stop display mode suggesting that the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol is a big hit of 16R. Are "333" and "777", and in the case of a stop display mode suggesting that it is a big hit of 8R (or 8R or more), they are "111" and "555", and 4R (or 4R or more). In the case of the stop display mode suggesting that it is a big hit, it is "222", "444", "666", and "888". Further, the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol is only "333" in the case of the stop display mode suggesting that it is a big hit of 16R, and the stop indicating that it is a big hit of 8R (or 8R or more). In the case of the display mode, it is only "111", and in the case of the stop display mode suggesting that it is a big hit of 4R (or 4R or more), it is only "222". Further, as another specific example, the candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol suggesting that the state shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the big hit (it becomes almost definite to shift to the probability-variable gaming state) is , "111", "333", "555", and "777", and do not suggest that the state shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the big hit (it is not definite to shift to the probability-variable gaming state). Candidates for the stop display mode of the decorative symbol are "222", "444", "666", and "888". In addition, "111" is the only candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol, which suggests that the state will shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the big hit (it is almost definite to shift to the probability-variable gaming state). , "222" is the only candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol that does not suggest the transition to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the big hit (it is not definite to transition to the probability-variable gaming state).

Next, FIG. 82 is an example of the display priority in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed, and those having a high display priority are shown in the upper row, and those having a low display priority are shown in the lower row. When the display content having a high display priority and the display content having a low display priority are displayed in an overlapping manner, specifically, for example, when the right-handed instruction display and the first decorative symbol are displayed in an overlapping manner. For the display of the overlapping part, the right-handed instruction display with high display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer) (displayed so that it can be visually recognized), and the first decorative pattern with low display priority is displayed. Is displayed on the back side (rear layer) (it becomes invisible because it is hidden by the right-handed instruction display). In addition, since the display priority in this example is high, it is "error display-> right-handed instruction display-> power saving display (power saving screen)-> second decorative symbol-> notice effect-> first decorative symbol-> hold display". .. Although the display priority may be changed, the "error display", "right-handed instruction display", and "power saving display (power saving screen)" have a large effect on the profit of the player, so the display priority is given. It is not desirable to change the degree. Further, the order of the display priority of the notice effect, the first decorative symbol, and the hold display may be changed, but the display priority of both the notice effect, the first decorative symbol, and the hold display is the display of the second decorative symbol. It is preferable to configure it so that it is lower than the priority. In addition, it is desirable to display the "right-handed instruction display" in a position that is not hidden by other display objects (including the accessory YK, etc.), and the display content with a higher priority than the "right-handed instruction display" is newly added. When provided, it is preferable that the area where the newly provided display content is displayed does not overlap with the area where the "right-handed instruction display" is displayed. In addition, the "power saving display (power saving screen)" is configured so that it is not displayed during the execution of the symbol change, and the power saving changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine and the sub-input on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine. By operating the button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc., the power saving mode can be switched, and in the non-time-reduced gaming state or the time-reduced gaming state, there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side. It is a display indicating that the power of the gaming machine is in a power saving state during the fluctuation stop and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed from the fluctuation stop. It should be noted that the power saving display (power saving screen) is displayed during the fluctuation stop without the hold of the first main game side and the hold of the second main game side, and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed from the fluctuation stop. An example of being displayed together with the waiting movie at the timing of executing the waiting movie to be executed is shown, but it may be configured as follows.
(1) There is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, and the waiting movie is displayed during the fluctuation stop and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) from the fluctuation stop. After displaying the waiting movie for 20 seconds, the waiting movie is terminated. There is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, and the power saving display (power saving screen) is displayed during the fluctuation stop and 262 seconds after the fluctuation stop (after the standby movie ends). After that, the power saving display (power saving screen) is continuously displayed.
(2) There is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, and the waiting movie is displayed during the fluctuation stop and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) from the fluctuation stop. After displaying the waiting movie for 20 seconds, the waiting movie is terminated. There is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, and the power saving display (power saving screen) is displayed during the fluctuation stop and 262 seconds after the fluctuation stop (after the standby movie ends). After continuously displaying the power saving display (power saving screen) for a predetermined time (for example, 48 seconds), the second standby movie is displayed for 20 seconds. After that, the power saving display (power saving screen) and the standby movie are displayed alternately.
(3) There is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, and the waiting movie is displayed during the fluctuation stop and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) from the fluctuation stop. After displaying the waiting movie for 20 seconds, the waiting movie is terminated. There is neither a hold on the 1st main game side nor a hold on the 2nd main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped, and 272 seconds after the fluctuation stop (10 seconds after the end of the waiting movie), the power saving display (power saving screen). ) Is displayed. After that, the power saving display (power saving screen) is continuously displayed.
(4) There is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, and the waiting movie is displayed during the fluctuation stop and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) from the fluctuation stop. After displaying the waiting movie for 20 seconds, the waiting movie is terminated. There is neither a hold on the 1st main game side nor a hold on the 2nd main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped, and 272 seconds after the fluctuation stop (10 seconds after the end of the waiting movie), the power saving display (power saving screen). ) Is displayed. After continuously displaying the power saving display (power saving screen) for a predetermined time (for example, 38 seconds), the second standby movie is displayed for 20 seconds. After that, the power saving display (power saving screen) and the standby movie are displayed alternately.

Next, FIG. 83 is an image diagram relating to the priority in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that the figure illustrates the configuration related to the display mode of the decorative pattern applicable to the fourth embodiment, and the configuration is different from that of FIG. 77 described above. First, in the upper part of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, and the right-handed instruction display is displayed under the situation that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed (the game state is). It is in a time-reduced game state, and in the time-reduced game state, it is a game that advances the game by hitting right). After that, the area where the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed overlaps with the area where the right-handed instruction display is displayed, and the right-handed instruction display has a higher priority, so that the area is displayed in the foreground. Further, the display area of the second decorative pattern and the right-handed instruction display are configured so as not to overlap.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, and under the situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variablely displayed, a flock of sheep appears as a notice effect. In the notice effect, the display areas of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol overlap, and the priority is "second decorative symbol> notice effect> first decorative symbol", so that the sheep is displayed. When the first decorative symbol overlaps with the sheep display, the sheep display is displayed on the front, and when the sheep display and the second decorative symbol overlap, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the front. Become. When there are a plurality of hold display areas on the effect display device SG (hold display on the first main game side and hold on the second main game side) as in the case of change 1 from the fourth embodiment described later. Even in the case where the display exists, the first hold display and the second hold display exist, etc.), the hold display area SG10 is newly provided at the lower left of the display area SG10 in the figure (illustrated). Even if the right-handed instruction display and the display area SG10 are configured so as not to overlap, such as the hold display in the upper right part of the display area SG10 is set as the first hold display and the newly provided hold display is set as the second hold display. good.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed on the effect display device SG. By configuring the second decorative symbol to be displayed even when the first decorative symbol is erased, the user-friendly gaming machine can be confirmed even when the player wants to confirm the status of the decorative symbol. At the same time, even when it is desired to show the effect to the player such as the SP reach effect, the effect to be shown can be made more conspicuous by erasing the display of the first decorative symbol. Further, by configuring the display priority of the second decorative symbol to be higher than that of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is desired to be confirmed when the first decorative symbol is hidden. It can be configured so that a situation in which the is invisible is unlikely to occur.

In the fourth embodiment, the first decorative symbol may be displayed as a combination of three symbols, while the second decorative symbol may be displayed as one symbol. In addition, there are four types of stop display modes for one symbol in the first decorative symbol, two types of stop display modes for one symbol in the second decorative symbol, and so on. The number of types of display modes may be larger than the number of types of stop display modes for one symbol of the second decorative symbol. With such a configuration, the probability that the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol (display mode of the combination of the three symbols) is continuously the same over a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations is higher than the probability that the second decorative symbol is displayed. It can be configured so that the probability that the stop display mode is continuously the same over a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations is higher. In addition, two display areas of "○" and "×" are provided as the display area of the second decorative symbol, and "○" is lit when the symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed by the big hit (or small hit) symbol. It may be displayed, and if the symbol variation is lost, "x" may be lit and displayed. In addition, in such a configuration, the display of the second decorative symbol does not move on the display area SG10, and "○" or "×" blinks to notify that the symbol is changing. It may be configured as follows. Further, as the display area of the second decorative symbol, two display areas of the shape of "○" and the region of the shape of "☆" are provided, and when the first main game symbol changes, the shape of "○" is provided. The variation display and the stop display are executed in the area of, and when the second main game symbol is changed, the variation display and the stop display are executed in the area of the shape of "☆", and "○" or "○" or By blinking "☆", it is notified that the symbol is changing, and if the symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed on the big hit (or small hit) symbol, "○" or "☆" is lit and displayed, and the symbol is displayed. If the fluctuation is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, "○" or "☆" may be turned off, and if such a configuration is used, the first main decorative symbol may be displayed. The symbol used when the game symbol changes and the symbol used when the second main game symbol changes are the same (the display area of the symbol and the design of the symbol are the same, and the player only visually recognizes the first decorative symbol. Then, it is a symbol in which it is difficult to distinguish between the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol, and may be configured as, for example, “777”). In the second decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol is changed and the symbol used when the second main game symbol is changed are different (the areas for changing and stopping are different). There is a difference in the design of the design for variable display and stop display). Further, as described above, when two display areas of the shape of "○" and the area of the shape of "☆" are provided as the display area of the second decorative symbol, the first main game symbol is used. When the big hit (or small hit) symbol is stopped and displayed, "○" is lit, and when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed by the big hit (or small hit) symbol, "☆" is displayed. Lights up, "○" is turned off when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, and "☆" is displayed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol. When the first decorative symbol is configured to be turned off and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit (or small hit) symbol, "333" is displayed. "," And "777" can be stopped and displayed in a plurality of types of stop display modes, and when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, "326" or "" It may be configured so that the stop display can be performed by a plurality of types of stop display modes such as "761". With such a configuration, the number of types of the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol is stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a big hit (or a small hit). There is only one type of stop display mode that can be obtained, and there is only one type of stop display mode that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is lost, while the first decoration. As for the number of types of stop display modes of symbols, there are a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a big hit (or small hit), and the main There are a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is lost.

(Example 1 of change from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the effect display device has been described in detail, but such a configuration is described above. It is not limited to the configuration of the form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, and the differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 3500 (fourth variation 1), that is, in step 2200, the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display content determination process, and then steps 3500 (fourth variation). In 1), the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2400.

Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 84 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2118-1 (4th variation 1) and step 2118-2 (4th variation 1), that is, in step 2106, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is reserved. After the information is temporarily stored in the hold information temporary storage area, after the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2116, or after the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is turned on in step 2111. If has not received the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main side, in step 2118-1 (4th variation 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the drawing hold counter value as the first hold display. The same number of hold images (holding display of the lamp shape on the effect display device SG) are lit and displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2118-2 (4th variation 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold counter value numerically on the effect display device SG as the second hold display, and next The process proceeds to the process (process of step 2200). The display mode of the second hold display is not limited to the mode of this example, and may be displayed by a combination of lighting and blinking of an LED lamp different from the display on the effect display device SG. It suffices if the hold display and the second hold display are different.

Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 (fourth variation 1) of FIG. 84 in the modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3508, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the map variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 3510. Even if No in step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3510.

Next, in step 3510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3510, in step 3512, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the plot variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the map display variation time management timer SM21t and the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Determine if it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3516, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a variable display command for the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). , Step 3526.

On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is decorated based on the pattern variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side. Is sent to), and the process proceeds to step 3526.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3518, in step 3522, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) has the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Related information Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3522, in step 3524, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3526. Even if No in step 3522, the process proceeds to step 3526.

Next, in step 3526, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the information that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 3526, in step 3528, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the decorative symbol (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Will be). Next, in step 3530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the map variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2400). do. Even if No in step 3510 or step 3526, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 87 is an image diagram relating to a change in the hold display in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in the upper left of the figure, the first hold display and the second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. The number of reservations is 2 on the 1st main game side and 0 on the 2nd main game side. In addition, the decorative design corresponding to the first main game side is stopped and displayed. After that, the hold on the first main game side is exhausted, and the next symbol change starts, so that the first hold display related to the first main game side and the second hold display related to the first main game side change. (The display that the number of reservations on the first main game side is 2 is changed to the display that the number is 1.). After that, due to the same symbol change, a hold on the first main game side occurs (a game ball enters the first main game start opening A10), and the number of holds on the first main game side changes. 1 The 1st hold display on the main game side and the 2nd hold display on the 1st main game side change (the display indicating that the number of holds on the 1st main game side is 1 is changed to 2). To do). In this way, the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed according to the hold digestion timing when the symbol change is started and the hold occurrence timing when the game ball enters the main game start opening. Is configured to change.

Next, in the middle left, the first hold display and the second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. The number of reservations is 2 on the 1st main game side and 0 on the 2nd main game side. In addition, the decorative design corresponding to the first main game side is displayed in a variable manner. After that, a hold change effect (an effect in which the display mode of the hold can be changed) is executed as a hold look-ahead effect during the same fluctuation. It should be noted that the effect mode of the hold change effect shown in the figure is an effect targeting the hold on the first main game side, and whether the display mode of the first hold display changes due to the flame hitting the first hold display. It is a production that incites whether or not. After that, as a result of the effect of the hold change effect, the first hold display on the first main game side changes, while the second hold display on the first main game side does not change. As described above, when the hold look-ahead effect is executed, the hold display can change only in the first hold display, and the second hold display is configured not to change. Even when the hold change effect is executed for the hold on the second main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side may change, while the second hold display on the second main game side is. It is configured so that it does not change. It should be noted that the hold look-ahead effect is executed by the process exemplified in the above-mentioned second embodiment or the like.

As shown in the figure, the features of the first hold display and the second hold display are as follows.
(1) When the number of holds is the same, the display mode of the first hold display may change, while the display mode of the second hold display does not change.
(2) While the display mode of the first hold display can change without an increase or decrease in the number of holds (digestion of the hold or the occurrence of hold), the display mode of the second hold display does not change unless the number of holds is increased or decreased.
(3) When an action is executed for the display related to the hold as the hold change effect and the effect that the display mode of the hold changes is executed, the hold display that is the target of the effect is the first hold display. The hold change effect is not executed for the second hold display.

Next, FIG. 88 is an image diagram relating to the hold display for each gaming state in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the presence / absence and display mode of the first hold display and the second hold display in the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state, which can be applied in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, are shown. A configuration example is shown. First, in << Example 1 >> in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed in both the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state. The display mode of the first hold display differs between the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state (the first hold display related to the first main game side and the first hold display related to the second main game side). Both are different). In << Example 1 >> in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display corresponding to the hold of the first main game side, the first hold display corresponding to the hold of the second main game side, and the first main game side. The second hold display corresponding to the hold of the second main game side and the second hold display corresponding to the hold of the second main game side are displayed respectively, that is, on the first main game side and the second main game side. Neither the first hold display (the area where the first hold display is displayed) nor the second hold display (the area where the second hold display is displayed) is shared.

Next, in << Example 2 >> in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the first main game. The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Further, in the time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the second main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , The first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game is such that the right-handed hit is executed in the time-reduced game state, the second main game symbol is changed (the game ball is inserted into the second main game start port B10), and the game is advanced. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine (especially in the case of a gaming machine in which the hold on the second main game side is preferentially digested over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is the player. Since it is not so important to the player, the first hold display on the first main game side may be hidden. Even in such a configuration, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed because it is not user-friendly if the player is configured so that the number of holds on the first main game side cannot be recognized. It is configured as.

Next, in << Example 3 >> in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second main game The second hold display on the side is displayed, and the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed. Further, in the time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the second main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , The first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game is such that the right-handed hit is executed in the time-reduced game state, the second main game symbol is changed (the game ball is inserted into the second main game start port B10), and the game is advanced. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine (especially in the case of a gaming machine in which the hold on the second main game side is preferentially digested over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is the player. Since it is not so important to the player, the first hold display on the first main game side may be hidden. In addition, the game is such that a left-handed player is executed in a non-time-reduced game state, the first main game symbol is changed (a game ball is inserted into the first main game start port A10), and the game is advanced. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine (especially when the second main game start port B10 does not exist in the flow path of the game ball that has been left-handed), the hold on the second main game side is not very important for the player. , The first hold display on the second main game side may be hidden. Even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. Therefore, the first main game The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are configured to always be displayed. In the figure, an example in which the configuration related to the presence / absence of the hold display differs between the non-time shortened gaming state and the time shortened gaming state is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-probability variable gaming state and the probability fluctuation are shown. The configuration related to the presence / absence of the hold display may be different from that of the game state, or the configuration related to the presence / absence of the hold display may be different due to the difference in the effect mode. In addition, the configuration in which the display mode of the first hold display is different but the display mode of the second hold display is not different due to the difference in the gaming state shown in << Example 1 >> is described in << Example 2 >> and << Example >>. It can also be applied to the configuration of 3 >>. As described above, as shown in << Example 1 >><< Example 2 >><< Example 3 >>,
(1) When the gaming states are different (for example, between the non-time shortened gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, or between the non-probability variable gaming state and the probability variable gaming state, or depending on the type of the limited frequency state). , The display mode of the first hold display is different, but the display mode of the second hold display is the same.
(2) When the effect modes are different (for example, the day stage in FIG. 77 and the night stage in FIG. 77, or a predetermined effect stage indicating that the hold look-ahead effect is being executed and a stage other than the predetermined effect stage. (Or, depending on one of a plurality of types of effect stages that can be manually switched), the display mode of the first hold display is different, but the display mode of the second hold display is the same.
(3) When the gaming states are different (for example, between the non-time shortened gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, or between the non-probability variable gaming state and the probability variable gaming state, or depending on the type of the limited frequency state). , The presence or absence of the display of the first hold display is different, but the second hold display is always displayed regardless of which game state is (however, priority is given to the hold display such as special game state or error state. When the information to be displayed is possessed, neither the first hold display nor the second hold display may be displayed).
(4) When the effect modes are different (for example, the day stage in FIG. 77 and the night stage in FIG. 77, or a predetermined effect stage indicating that the hold look-ahead effect is being executed and a stage other than the predetermined effect stage. (Or, depending on one of the multiple types of production stages that can be switched manually), the presence or absence of the display of the first hold display differs, but the second hold display is displayed regardless of which production mode is used. Is always displayed (however, in the display mode where there is information that you want to display with priority over the hold display such as demo screen display and error display, neither the first hold display nor the second hold display is displayed. May be good).
It has such characteristics. The above features are applicable to both the hold of the first main game side and the hold of the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 89 is an image diagram relating to the erasure of the hold display in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the first hold display and the second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. The number of reservations is 2 on the 1st main game side and 0 on the 2nd main game side. In addition, the decorative design corresponding to the first main game side is displayed in a variable manner. After that, the decorative symbol is displayed in reach with the same fluctuation, and then the battle effect is executed as the SP reach effect with the same variation. While the battle effect is being executed, the first hold display is erased (hidden) from both the first main game side and the second main game side, while the second hold display is the first main game side. Any display with the second main game side is continuously displayed. As described above, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the display area SG10 is displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect in which the player pays attention to whether or not the symbol fluctuation during execution becomes a big hit. It is configured to erase the first hold display in order to occupy it (using most of the display area SG10) and execute the battle effect. Further, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side, so that the first main game is not possible. The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are configured to always be displayed. In the figure, the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden when the SP reach is executed, but the second The configuration in which the hold display (the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) remains displayed is shown, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a big hit is in progress (partially). The first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden even during the period (or always), but the second hold display (second hold display). (1) The second hold display on the main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) may be configured to remain displayed. When the SP reach is executed, the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second hold display (first hold display). The configuration in which the second hold display on the main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) remains displayed may always be applied during the execution period of the SP reach, or may be applied during the execution period of the SP reach. It may be applied for some periods.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the fourth embodiment, two hold displays, a first hold display and a second hold display, are displayed on the effect display device SG. With regard to the first hold display, the display mode changes to suggest the jackpot expectation related to the hold, and the display is deleted when the player wants to pay attention to the SP reach effect. It is possible to enhance the fun of the game by setting the display mode (display / non-display) according to the situation and using it as a part of the production suggesting a big hit or the like. Further, in the second hold display, by configuring the display so as to always display and not to change the display mode, when the player wants to confirm the current hold number, the hold number can be recognized without causing any doubt. It is configured as.

In addition, in the modification 1 from the 4th embodiment, the reserved digestion transmission image as illustrated in the modification 3 from the 2nd embodiment may be displayed. In such a configuration, the hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the first hold display may be displayed, and the hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the second hold display may not be displayed. The hold display corresponding to the first hold display is a display mode in which the hold display mode is the same as or similar to that of the first hold display. For example, the first hold display is a display in the shape of "○". In addition, when the display color is one of "red", "green", "blue", and "white", the hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the first hold display is also "○". ”, And the display color can be any of“ red ”,“ green ”,“ blue ”, and“ white ”. In addition, the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the hold of the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is consumed, and the display mode immediately after the hold of the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is digested. It may be configured so that the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image and the display mode can be the same.

If it is configured so that the reserved digestion transmission image can be displayed, it may be configured as follows. In addition, only one of the following configurations may be adopted, or a plurality of components may be combined. Further, one or more of the configuration in which only one of them is adopted or the configuration in which a plurality of components are combined and the configuration of << Example 1 >>, << Example 2 >>, or << Example 3 >> in FIG. 88 described above. May be combined with.
(1) In the non-time shortened gaming state, the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side can be displayed, but the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side is not displayed.
(2) In the non-time shortened gaming state, both the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side and the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed.
(3) In the time-reduced gaming state, the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed, but the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side is not displayed.
(4) In the time-reduced gaming state, both the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side and the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed.
(5) The reserved digestion transmission image can be displayed in the non-time-reduced gaming state, but the reserved digestion transmission image is not displayed in the time-reduced gaming state.
(6) The ratio of displaying the reserved digestion transmission image in the time-reduced gaming state is higher than the ratio of displaying the reserved digestion transmission image in the non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, the first main game in the non-time-reduced gaming state). Side hold digestion transmission image is always displayed)
(7) The display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state can be changed during the symbol change.
(8) The display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state does not change during the symbol change (when the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed).
(9) The display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side in the time-reduced game state can be changed during the symbol change. However, the hold digestion transmission image of the second main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state changes during the symbol change rather than the rate at which the hold digestion transmission image of the first main game side changes during the symbol change in the non-time shortened game state. The rate of doing is lower.
(10) The display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side in the time-reduced gaming state does not change during the symbol change (when configured so that the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed).
(11) The hold digestion transmission image is different from the above-mentioned hold display having two hold displays such as the first hold display and the second hold display, and the first hold digestion transmission image and the second hold digestion transmission image. It does not have two reserved digestion transmission images such as images, but only one reserved digestion transmission image.
(12) During SP reach, the first hold display is hidden as shown in FIG. 89 described above, but the hold digestion transmission image remains displayed.
It may be configured as described above. Further, in the above, the configuration related to the display of the reserved digestion transmission image in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state is described. May be replaced with "a non-probability variable gaming state and a probabilistic variable gaming state", or a configuration in which "the effect mode A and the effect mode B" are replaced may be applied.

(Fifth Embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be displayed on the effect display device SG as the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to one main game symbol. The configuration for simultaneously displaying two decorative patterns on the effect display device SG is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which two decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed on an effect display device SG different from the above-described configuration is set as the fifth embodiment, and the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 90 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that the distribution start port unit C50 provided with the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 is provided. The details of the distribution start port unit C50 will be described later, but as shown in the figure, the distribution start port unit C50 is provided with a first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10. , The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area is configured to be easily guided to either the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10. Further, the game ball flowing down on the right side of the game area is configured to easily flow down in the vicinity of the second main game start port electric accessory B11 hd attached to the distribution start port unit C50. In the fifth embodiment, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, the second main game start port electric accessory B11 hd is configured to be easily opened, so that the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag is set). By executing a right-handed strike when it is on), the second main game start port electric accessory B11 hd is opened and the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 (second main game). The game ball that has entered the distribution start port unit C50 from the vicinity of the start port electric accessory B11 hd is configured so that it is difficult to enter the first main game start port A10 and it is easy to enter the second main game start port B10. ing).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as the configuration of the display area SG10 in the effect display device SG, the second decorative symbol display area SG14 (hereinafter, sub-region SG14), which is an area in which the second decorative symbol can be variablely displayed, and the second decorative symbol display area SG14. 1 Common to display both the first decorative symbol display area SG15 (hereinafter, main area SG15), which is an area where the decorative symbol can be variablely displayed, and the hold of the first main game side and the hold of the second main game side. It has a hold display unit SG16 and a hold passage route SG17 through which the hold digestion display, which is a display related to the digested hold, passes. Further, on the upper part of the effect display device SG, a movable accessory YK for effect is provided, which is to be driven when an effect is executed that encourages the player to determine whether or not it will be a big hit such as SP reach effect. There is.

Next, FIG. 91 is an overall view and an operation diagram of the distribution start port unit C50 according to the fifth embodiment. First, the distribution start port unit C50 has a common entry port C51 in which a game ball flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a game provided below the common entry port C51 and flowing down from the common entry port C51. It is provided below the starting port distribution member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member that tilts in the left-right direction around the support shaft) and the starting port distribution member C50y that regularly distributes the ball in the left-right direction. It also includes a first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10 provided below the start port distribution member C50y. As shown by the dotted line box in the figure, the distribution start port unit C50 configured in this way tilts the game ball flowing into the common entry port C51 in the left-right direction of the start port distribution member C50y. Is configured to guide to either the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10. For example, the case where the starting port distribution member C50y is tilting to the left is defined as the "first position", and the case where the starting port distribution member C50y is tilting to the right is "second position". In the case of "position", the game ball that has flowed into the common entry port C51 is guided to the first main game start port A10 side under the situation that the start port distribution member C50y is in the "second position". While the starting port distribution member C50y is displaced to the "first position", the game ball flowing into the common entry port C51 under the situation where the starting port distribution member C50y is in the "first position" is the second main. At the same time as being guided to the game start port B10 side, the start port distribution member C50y is displaced to the "second position". In this example, the tilting motion of the starting port distribution member C50y in the left-right direction is configured to be performed by the weight of the game ball, and as a result, the game ball that has flowed into the common entry port C51 is mechanically , The game balls are alternately distributed to either the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 (after distributing one game ball toward one of them, 1 toward the other). It is designed with the intention of repeating the action of distributing individual game balls). In the fifth embodiment, the parallel lottery can be executed, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are configured to be variable at the same time. Therefore, by having the distribution start port unit C50. , The hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side can be caused almost evenly, and can be frequently changed at the same time as the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Has been done.

Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (fifth) of FIG. 5 in the fifth embodiment. First, in steps 1400 (1) (fifth), the game content determining means MN executes the first main game symbol display process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400 (2) (fifth), the game content determining means MN executes the second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). With this configuration, the change of the second main game side can start even when the change of the first main game side, and the change of the first main game side also when the change of the second main game side. Can start (so-called parallel lottery).

Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 92 in the fifth embodiment. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1407-1, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the first (second) fluctuation start condition is satisfied. The fluctuation start condition is not during the special game (or the condition device is operating), and the first main game symbol is not changing (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not changing). ), And there is a hold of the main game symbol, and it is a condition that the small hit game is not in progress. That is, since the parallel lottery can be executed, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol is changed when the process related to the first main game symbol is executed, but the first main game symbol is changing. If so, the fluctuation start condition related to the first main game side is not satisfied.

Next, in step 1407-2, the game content determination means MN reads out the main game side random number. Next, in step 1407-3, the game content determination means MN deletes the read main game side random number from the hold information and shifts (holds digestion) the remaining hold information. Next, in step 1407-4, the game content determination means MN executes the main game symbol winning / failing lottery based on the main game side random number and the game state. Next, in step 1407-5, the game content determination means MN determines a stop symbol related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the winning / failing lottery, and temporarily stores these in the RAM area. Next, in step 1407-6, the game content determination means MN is based on the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number). The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, in step 1407-7, the game content determination means MN is a command related to the determined main game symbol information and game state information (command to the sub-control board S side, symbol variation display start instruction command, etc.). To set. Next, in step 1407-8, the game content determining means MN sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol to the first main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C1 (second main game) based on the variation mode. Set it in the symbol variation management timer MP11t-C2) and start the timer. Next, in step 1407-9, the game content determination means MN uses the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the part B21g), the variable display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is started. Next, in step 1407-10, the game content determining means MN turns on the first (second) changing flag and proceeds to step 1407-12. On the other hand, if No in step 1407-1, in step 1407-11, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the first (second) changing flag is turned on. If Yes in step 1407-11, the process proceeds to step 1407-12.

Next, in step 1407-12, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1407-12, in step 1407-13, the game content determining means MN is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped, the display is controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to step 1407-17. On the other hand, if No in step 1407-12, in step 1407-14, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1407-14, in step 1407-15, the game content determination means MN is the first (second) forced stop execution command (command to the sub side, and the first main game side is a big hit. In that case, the command to send the information that the 2nd main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to loss, and if the 2nd main game side becomes a big hit, the command to send the information that the 1st main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to loss) is set. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1407-16, the game content determination means MN uses the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on the part B21g) is stopped by changing the stop symbol to a lost symbol, the lost symbol is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to step 1407-17. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the changing second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss, and the second main game symbol is a big hit. When stopped at a symbol, the fluctuating first main game symbol is configured to be forcibly stopped due to a loss. Further, when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to loss, a command to forcibly stop to the sub control board S side is set immediately before the forcible stop. (The effect when the sub-control board S side receives the command will be described later).

Next, in step 1407-17, the game content determining means MN sends the information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation ends to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1407-18, the game content determining means MN turns off the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1407-19. Next, in step 1407-19, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1407-19, in step 1407-20, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device operation flag and proceeds to step 1450. On the other hand, if No in step 1407-19, the process proceeds to step 1450 without executing the process of step 1407-20.

Next, in step 1450, the game content determination means MN executes the above-mentioned specific game end determination process, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIGS. 94 and 95 are used when determining the variation mode of the main game table 3 and the second main game symbol used when determining the variation mode of the first main game symbol in the fifth embodiment. It is the main game table 3 to be played. Since the contents of the table are the same as those of the second embodiment, the explanation is omitted. It should be noted that the content of the effect corresponding to the determined variation mode of the main game symbol will be described later.

Next, FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the fifth embodiment. The differences from the second embodiment are step 2050 (fifth), step 2200 (fifth), step 2350 (fifth), step 2500 (fifth) and step 3300 (fifth), that is, sub. When the execution of the iterative processing routine (b) of the main control unit SM is started, in step 2050 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes the symbol standby display control process described later, and in step 2100. Transition. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the hold information management process in step 2100, the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display content determination process described later in step 2200 (fifth), and proceeds to step 2300. do. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the first decorative symbol display control process in step 2300, the sub-control board S executes the second decorative symbol display control process described later in step 2350 (fifth). The process proceeds to step 2400. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process in step 2400, the sub-control board S executes the background effect control process described later in step 2500 (fifth). Next, in step 3300 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes the accessory drive control process described later, and proceeds to step 2999.

Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the symbol standby display control process according to the subroutine of step 2050 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and displays the standby preparation flag (both of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped). (Flag that can be turned on when it is done) is determined to be off. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 newly stops and displays both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). Whether or not the second decorative symbol is newly stopped and displayed in the situation, or the first decorative symbol is newly stopped and displayed in the situation where the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). judge. In the case of Yes in step 2054, in step 2056, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t (which is an increment timer, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed). Start the timer) to measure the elapsed time since then. Next, in step 2058, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2060. Even if No in step 2052, the process proceeds to step 2060.

Next, in step 2060, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t, and the timer value is the standby execution value (the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the main area is set to the standby state. It is a timer value, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it has exceeded 20 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 2060, in step 2062, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the main area in the standby state. The standby state ends when either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol starts the variable display. Here, the right part of the figure is an image diagram of a decorative pattern display area. In the fifth embodiment, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol are used. It is configured so that the decorative pattern and the decorative pattern can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, one of which is displayed in the main area and the other is displayed in the sub area. The main area is configured so that the area that can be displayed is larger than the sub area. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the decorative symbol displayed in the main area is displayed by a pattern and a number, and the decorative symbol displayed in the sub area is configured to be displayed only by a number (number). The first decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral, and the second decorative symbol is a Chinese numeral). Further, as illustrated in the figure, under the situation where the first decorative symbol is displayed as a pattern and a number in the main area, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. When 20 seconds have passed since then, the display of the first decorative symbol in the main area is configured to display only the symbol. The display of only this pattern is called the standby state. The main area and the sub area may be provided in the same liquid crystal display (for example, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG), or may be provided in separate devices. As a specific example provided in the separate devices, for example, the effect display device A and the effect display device B are provided as the effect display device, the effect display device A has a main area, and the effect display device B has a main area. It may have a sub-area, and in such a configuration, the size of the display area of the effect display device B may be smaller than the size of the display area of the effect display device A. good. Further, the number of effect display devices and the number of decorative symbol display areas (main area, sub area, etc.) may be three or more (providing a first area, a second area, a third area, etc.).

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 2064, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 resets the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t and stops. Next, in step 2066, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). .. Even if No in step 2054 or step 2060, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2100).

Next, FIG. 98 is an image diagram of a decorative pattern display mode in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the decorative design displayed in the main area is displayed with a pattern and a number, and the decorative design displayed in the sub area is configured to be displayed only with a number. The display of numbers in the symbol is an arithmetic numeral, and the display of the number in the second decorative symbol is a Chinese numeral. In addition, the number of types of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is four each. Although the details will be described later, the display mode of the decorative symbol when there is a trigger hold which is a hold related to whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed is the first sub-region symbol table or the second sub-region symbol table. Is configured to be determined with reference to, that is, the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the display mode of the second decorative symbol in the sub-region, and the display mode of the first decorative symbol when the trigger hold is present. And the display mode of the second decorative pattern is the same.

Next, FIG. 99 is the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2130 (fifth) to step 2138 (fifth) and step 3050 (fifth), that is, in step 2128 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means. After the SM22 deletes the hold information and shifts the remaining hold information, in step 2130 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 decides that the hold to be digested this time is the hold related to the first main game side. Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2134 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 passes the main route (the hold display that is variablely displayed in the main area in the hold passage route). A command for executing a hold digestion display (a production in which the player can recognize that the hold has been digested) passing through the area, which will be described in detail later) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). On the other hand, if No in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2132 (fifth), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are in the standby state. do. In the case of Yes in step 2132 (fifth), in step 2136 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 passes the sub route (the area through which the hold display that is variablely displayed in the sub area in the hold pass route passes. The command for executing the hold digestion display passing through (details will be described later) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). If No in step 2132 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2134 (fifth). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the hold digestion display on the first main game side, or when the hold is digested in the standby state, the hold digestion display is executed on the main route and waits. When the hold on the second main game side is digested in a situation other than the state, the hold digest display is executed by the sub route.

Next, in step 2138 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not a trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2138 (fifth), in step 3050 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes the hold change display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2116. On the other hand, if No in step 2138 (fifth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to step 2116 without executing the process of step 3050 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the pending change display control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fifth) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3052, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the hold digest is a hold digest that passes through the first main route after the trigger hold occurs. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the trigger hold is a hold that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold change scenario determination table for the jackpot, and based on the number of hold changes at the time of trigger hold occurrence, the hold change scenario (to trigger hold). A scenario for determining when and how the hold display mode related to the trigger hold changes before the symbol change starts) is determined.

Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for a big hit and a table for a loss are shown as a pending change scenario determination table. As shown in the figure, the hold change scenario is related to the number of holds at the time of trigger hold (the number of holds that will be consumed before the trigger hold at the time when the trigger hold occurs) and the trigger hold. It will be determined by the result of the success or failure of the symbol change. Further, the illustrated "before 1 change" is the hold display mode immediately before the trigger hold is exhausted, and the jackpot expectation degree of the hold display mode of the "1 change before" (when the trigger hold is a big hit). The ratio of the case of a big hit to the total of the cases of loss) is "rainbow color-> red-> blue". Further, the hold display mode is configured to change for each symbol change, but as the trigger hold approaches, the hold display mode does not change or changes to a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high. It is configured to go. That is, it is configured so as not to change to the hold display mode in which the expectation of big hit is low as the digestion of the trigger hold approaches, and it is configured so as not to impair the player's expectation for the trigger hold.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 3058, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the hold passage route display color determination table for the big hit, determines the display color of the hold passage route, and performs the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2116). Further, in the case of No in step 3054, in step 3060, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold change scenario determination table for the time of loss, and determines the hold change scenario based on the number of hold changes at the time of trigger hold occurrence. do. Next, in step 3062, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold passage route display color determination table for the time of loss, determines the display color of the hold passage route, and performs the next process (process of step 2116). ). Even if No in step 3052, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2116).

Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for a big hit and a table for a loss are shown as a hold passage route display color determination table. As shown in the figure, the display color of the hold passage route is determined by the result of the symbol change related to the trigger hold. The jackpot expectation of the hold passage route display color (the ratio of the jackpot to the total of the case where the trigger hold is a jackpot and the case where it is lost) is "rainbow color → red → blue → no change" from the highest. It has become. It should be noted that the hold passage route is configured to be determined only by the first hold digestion timing after the trigger hold occurs, but is not limited to this, and is configured to change every time until the trigger hold is digested. May be. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the display mode so that it does not change to a display mode with a low expectation of a big hit as the trigger hold is approached, as in the case of the above-mentioned change in the hold display mode (hold change effect). .. Further, regarding the change in the display mode of the hold display mode and the display mode of the hold passage route display color, although the timing of the change in the symbol change is not specifically shown, the advance notice effect during the symbol change at the start of the symbol change. It may be configured so that the display mode can be changed at various timings according to the execution timing, the hold occurrence, the hold digestion, etc., and the player is always configured to do so. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the hold display mode or the hold passage route display color will change to a display mode in which the expectation for a big hit is high. In the fifth embodiment, the expected degree of jackpot of the trigger hold is suggested by the hold pass route display color which is the display color of the hold pass route SG17 (when the trigger hold is a big hit, the trigger hold is lost. The display color of the hold passage route is more likely to change than in the case, or the display color of the hold passage route is more likely to be the display color with high expectation of big hit), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the hold digestion transmission image is displayed. When the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is displayed and the display mode is configured to indicate the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation related to the hold digestion transmission image, the hold passage route display color is used. , The display mode of the hold digestion transmission image may be different, that is, the jackpot expectation suggested by the hold digestion transmission image may be different, or the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image may change easily. It may be configured to be different. Further, the effect content of the symbol variation related to the digested hold that has passed through the hold passage route SG17 may be different depending on the hold passage route display color (the rate at which the effect with high expectation of big hit is executed may be different). You may.

Next, FIG. 101 is a hold occurrence display image diagram in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, since the parallel lottery is configured to be executable, a situation in which the hold of the first main game side and the hold of the second main game side exist at the same time frequently occurs. However, the hold display is configured to be displayed on the common hold display unit SG16 which is common to the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side. In addition, regardless of whether the hold that occurred is the hold of the first main game side or the hold of the second main game side in the order of the numbers "1 → 2 → 3 ... → 8" shown in the figure. Instead, it is configured to be displayed in the common hold display unit SG16 in the order in which the hold occurred (the most recently generated hold is displayed in the first area, and the hold display already displayed is "1 → 2". It will be displayed by shifting like "." In addition, the hold display mode is also the same display mode for the hold display on the first main game side and the hold display on the second main game side, and the first main game can be obtained simply by visually recognizing the common hold display unit SG16. It is configured so that it cannot be determined whether it is a hold display on the side or a hold display on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 102 is a reserved digestion display image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an example of display in the common hold display unit SG16 when the number of holds is four is shown. As shown in the figure, two holds on the first main game side and two holds on the second main game side are displayed, and "A1", which is the hold on the first main game side, is displayed first. "B1" which is the hold of the 2nd main game side is displayed in the 2nd position, "A2" which is the hold of the 1st main game side in the 3rd place, and "B2" which is the hold of the 2nd main game side in the 4th place. Has been done. Under such circumstances, the hold display when the hold has been exhausted will be described in detail below.

The middle part of the figure is an example of the order of the symbol changes related to the above-mentioned four holds, and the lower part of the figure is an example of how the hold display is erased in the common hold display unit SG16. With reference to these, the state in which the symbol change in the fifth embodiment is executed and the hold display is erased will be described in detail. First, when the symbol change related to A1 which is the hold on the first main game side starts execution, the hold display of the first area which is the hold display related to A1 is deleted, and the remaining hold is shifted and displayed. To. The display on the common hold display unit SG16 is "No. 1: B1, No. 2: A2, No. 3: B2". Although not shown, it is assumed that the symbol change on the second main game side is executed at the symbol change start timing related to A1. After 10 seconds, the symbol change related to B1 which is the hold on the second main game side is started to be executed. The display on the common hold display unit SG16 is "No. 1: A2, No. 2: B2". Then, 20 seconds after the start of the symbol change related to A1, the symbol change related to B1 ends. The symbol change related to A1 is in the process of change. When the symbol change related to B1 is completed, the hold related to B2 is exhausted and the symbol change is started. However, in the display on the common hold display unit SG16, the hold display related to "A2" is displayed. It is configured so that the hold display of the first area that has been used is erased. That is, apparently, from the state where the first and second areas in the common hold display unit SG16 are lit, the display in the first area is turned off, and then the display in the second area is the first area. It will be displayed as a shift to. On the other hand, since the hold actually digested is the hold related to "B2", the display in the first area is the hold display related to "A2". As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the hold display displayed in the first area is displayed regardless of whether the hold actually digested is the first main game side or the second main game side. It will be erased (turned off).

Next, FIG. 103 is a reserved passage route image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the fifth embodiment, the reserved passage route SG17 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area SG10. The hold passage route has a main route which is an area through which the hold display which is variablely displayed in the main area passes, and a subroute which is an area where the hold display which is variablely displayed in the sub area passes. First, the left part of the figure is an example of the case where the hold digestion display when the hold is digested passes through the main route. In a situation where it is not in the standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the first area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the second area). The case where "A1", which is the hold on the first main game side, is digested first will be described. First, when "A1" is digested, the hold display of the first area is erased, and the hold digest display moves toward the hold passage route SG17. After that, since the symbol change on the first main game side related to the hold of "A1" is executed in the main area, the hold digestion display related to "A1" passes through the main route and heads toward the main area. Become. Next, the right part of the figure is an example of the case where the hold digestion display when the hold is digested passes through the subroute. In a situation where it is not in the standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the first area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the second area). The case where "B1", which is the hold on the second main game side, is digested first will be described. First, when "B1" is digested, the hold display of the first area is erased, and the hold digest display moves toward the hold passage route SG17. After that, since the symbol change on the second main game side related to the hold of "B1" is executed in the sub area, the hold digestion display related to "B1" passes through the sub route and goes toward the sub area. .. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the area through which the hold digestion display in the hold pass route SG17 passes is the sub route, which is the main route, depending on whether the symbol variation is executed in the main area or the sub area. Is configured to be determined.

Next, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the first main game winning pre-reading determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that step 2552 and step 2578 have been deleted, that is, in the fifth embodiment, the first main game even when the hold on the second main game side exists. It is configured so that the look-ahead effect related to the hold on the side can be executed. In this example, the look-ahead effect on the first main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time reduction game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is also executed in the time reduction game state. It may be configured to be possible. Further, the pre-reading lottery on the first main game side can be executed only at the time of winning, that is, at the time of pending occurrence, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change start timing of the main game symbol and the change of the main game symbol are not limited to this. It may be configured so that the look-ahead lottery can be executed even at the timing in the middle.

Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the second main game winning pre-reading determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2602 (fifth), step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), that is, in step 2602 (fifth), the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means. The SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current time shortening gaming state is in effect. If Yes in step 2602 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2604, and if No in step 2602 (fifth), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2118).

Further, when the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26 determines in step 2608 that the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit, in step 2610 (fifth), the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability. The pre-reading lottery at the time of winning in (1/3 in this example) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. Further, when the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26 determines in step 2612 that the new hold is a hold of the group C, in step 2616 (fifth), the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability. The pre-reading lottery at the time of winning in (1/10 in this example) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, even when the hold on the first main game side exists, the look-ahead effect related to the hold on the second main game side can be executed. In this example, the pre-reading effect on the second main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time-reduced gaming state, but the pre-reading effect is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect is also executed in the time-reduced gaming state. It may be configured to be possible. Further, the pre-reading lottery on the second main game side can be executed only at the time of winning, that is, at the time of pending occurrence, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change start timing of the main game symbol and the change of the main game symbol are not limited to this. The look-ahead lottery may be executed even at the timing in the middle. Further, in step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), the winning rate is the same as the pre-reading lottery winning rate on the first main game side.

Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2249-1, the map display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the map display-related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2249-1, in step 2249-2, the map display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2249-3, the map display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2249-3, in step 2249-5, the map display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-5, in step 2249-6, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the main area. Next, in step 2249-7, the map display content determining means SM21n refers to the first main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol, and is the first. 1 Determine the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol. Next, in step 2249-8, the map display content determination means SM21n is in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first symbol content determination flag (to change the symbol on the first main game side). A flag that is turned on when the content is determined) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

Further, in the case of No in step 2249-5, in step 2249-10, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol change related to the newly digested hold is a symbol change from the standby state. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2249-10, in step 2249-11, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the main area. Next, in step 2249-12, the map display content determining means SM21n refers to the second main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol, and is the second. 2 The stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-15. In this way, when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate from the standby state, it is variablely displayed in the main area regardless of whether the decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. It is configured as. If the decorative symbol newly changed from the standby state is the second decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol starts to change during the change of the second decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol changes. Previously, the second decorative symbol was variablely displayed in the main area, but when the first decorative symbol started to change, the first decorative symbol was variablely displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol was displayed in the sub area. Even if the first decorative symbol starts to change, the second decorative symbol is continuously varied and displayed in the main area, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area. It may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner. As described above, since the decorative symbol newly changed from the standby state is the second decorative symbol, when the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area, the display of the second decorative symbol is displayed. , The display of the first decorative symbol and the pattern in the main area are the same, and the display of the numbers is different (the first decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral and the second decorative symbol is a Chinese numeral).

If No in step 2249-10, in step 2249-13, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as a sub-area. Next, in step 2249-14, the map display content determining means SM21n refers to the second sub-region symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol, and the second 2 Determine the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol. Next, in step 3100 (fifth), the map display content determining means SM21n executes the main area interrupt process A, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2249-15. Next, in step 2249-15, the map display content determination means SM21n is in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the second symbol content determination flag (to change the symbol on the second main game side). A flag that is turned on when the content is determined) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

Next, in step 3350 (fifth), the map display content determination means SM21n executes the effect content determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). If No in step 2249-3, the look-ahead display control process described later is executed in step 3150 (fifth), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). Even if No in step 2249-1, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). In the fifth embodiment, when the second main game symbol starts to change in the standby state, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is changedly displayed in the main area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in situations other than the case where the interrupt effect is executed, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is always displayed in a variable manner in the main area (even in the standby state). , The second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in the sub area.

Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the effect display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 3350 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n executes reading of the winning / failing lottery result related to the symbol variation based on the command received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 3354, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the first decorative symbol effect content determination table based on the result of the winning / failing lottery and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol, and determines the symbol variation. Determine the content of the production. Next, in step 3358, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines and temporarily stores the first half priority and the second half priority of the symbol change based on the determined effect content related to the symbol change, and then performs the next process. (Processing in step 2300). The first half priority and the second half priority will be described later. Further, in the case of No in step 3354, in other words, when the symbol variation is the symbol variation on the second main game side, in step 3360, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n is the result of the winning / failing lottery and the second decorative symbol. Based on the variation mode, the effect content related to the symbol variation is determined with reference to the second decorative symbol effect content determination table. Next, in step 3362, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines the priority of the symbol variation based on the determined effect content related to the symbol variation, temporarily stores the priority, and performs the next process (process of step 2300). ). The priority will be described later.

Next, FIG. 108 is an example of the first decorative symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect content related to the first decorative symbol is configured to be determined by the hit / fail result of the first main game symbol and the fluctuation time (variation mode), and is interrupted by the determined effect content. It is configured to determine the first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements that determine whether or not to execute the effect. It should be noted that the case where the result of success or failure is a big hit has a relatively higher priority than the case where the result is a loss. In addition, the case where the fluctuation time is long has a relatively higher priority than the case where the fluctuation time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority related to the period before the start of execution of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in the symbol fluctuation, and the second half priority is the priority related to the period after the execution start of the SP reach effect. In the symbol variation (effect content) in which the SP reach effect is not executed, the first half priority is given but the second half priority is not given. The priority is any number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 109 is an example of the second decorative symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect content related to the second decorative symbol is configured to be determined by the hit / fail result of the second main game symbol and the fluctuation time (variation mode), and is interrupted by the determined effect content. It is configured to determine the priority, which is an element that determines whether or not to execute the effect. Note that, unlike the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol does not have two priorities, the first half priority and the second half priority, but has only one priority. It should be noted that the case where the result of success or failure is a big hit has a relatively higher priority than the case where the result is a loss. In addition, the case where the fluctuation time is long has a relatively higher priority than the case where the fluctuation time is short. The priority is any number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or higher. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n has an interruptable flag (a determined second decorative symbol symbol change) in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Turn on the flag that is turned on when the interrupt effect is a feasible variation). Next, in step 3108, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n directs the accessory initialization flag (movable accessory YK toward the initial position) in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (Flag for operating) is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). Even if No in step 3104 or step 3108, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2249-15). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, after it is decided to variablely display the second decorative symbol in the sub-region, the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is varied and displayed in the interrupt effect (sub-region). It is configured to determine whether or not the variation is feasible (the effect of exchanging the display area between the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the main area). Further, when it is determined that the second decorative symbol can be interrupted, the position of the movable accessory YK is confirmed, and when the movable accessory YK is in operation, the movable accessory YK is initially set. It is configured to control to drive to a position. With this configuration, details will be described later, but at the timing of executing the interrupt effect (the first timing of the plurality), the ratio of the movable accessory YK stopped at the initial position is high. can do.

Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the look-ahead display control process according to the subroutine of step 3150 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3152, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the map display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3154, in step 3156, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the first look-ahead area, and proceeds to step 3158. Here, in the fifth embodiment, during the execution of the look-ahead effect (from the start of execution of the first symbol change after the trigger hold exists to the end of the symbol change related to the trigger hold), the first decoration is performed. The display area of the symbol and the second decorative symbol is configured to change, and the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the lower left of the display area SG10 as in the pre-reading effect display device image in the lower part of the figure. One area is provided, and a pre-reading second area in which the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed is provided in the lower right portion of the display area SG10, and the pre-reading first area and the pre-reading second area are configured to have the same display area. Has been done. Further, the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is configured to be displayed only by numbers, which is the same as when displayed in the sub area. As described above, when two effect display devices are provided, one of the effect display devices (for example, the effect display device having the larger display area) has two decorative symbols (first). The decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) may be configured to be variable display (or stop display).

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if No in step 3154, in step 3158, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as “pre-reading first area → expansion at SP reach”, and step 3158. Move to. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the symbol change related to the trigger hold is executed during the pre-reading effect execution, the change of the decorative symbol related to the trigger hold is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display area SG10 to reach the SP. It is configured to perform the production. The decorative symbol that is not enlarged (for example, when the first decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed, the second decorative symbol) is variablely displayed at a position that does not overlap with the enlarged decorative symbol display area. Just do it. Next, in step 3158, the marking display content determining means SM21n refers to the first sub-region symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol, and refers to the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the stop symbol. Determine the variation mode. As described above, since the variation mode of the decorative symbol during the pre-reading effect is determined with reference to the first sub-region symbol table or the second sub-region symbol table, the display mode of the decorative symbol is displayed in the sub-region. Only the numbers similar to are displayed. Next, in step 3160, the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the first symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and next processing (process of step 2300). ).

If No in step 3152, in step 3162, the map display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3162, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the second look-ahead area, and proceeds to step 3168. If No in step 3162, in step 3166, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol to be “look-ahead second area → expansion at SP reach”, and proceeds to step 3168. In the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the trigger hold is the hold related to the first decorative symbol or the hold related to the second decorative symbol, it is enlarged and displayed when the symbol change related to the trigger hold is executed. It is configured as. Next, in step 3168, the marking display content determining means SM21n refers to the second sub-region symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol, and refers to the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol and the stop symbol. Determine the variation mode. Next, in step 3170, the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and next processing (process of step 2300). ).

Next, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2344 (fifth) and step 2346 (fifth), that is, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative symbol in step 2316. After the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol in step 2324, and then the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328. Alternatively, when it is determined in step 2326 that the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has not reached the display timing of the preview image or the reach image, in step 2344 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 uses the main control board M. It is determined whether or not the first forced stop execution command from the side has been received. If Yes in step 2344 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2344 (fifth), in step 2346 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is a variable display area (a main area or a sub area when the look-ahead effect is not being executed). ) Set the stop display command (confirmed display) to stop the first decorative symbol with the forced loss symbol, and the process proceeds to step 2340. The display mode of the forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol will be described in detail in FIG. 114.

Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2366, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in step 2368, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2370, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2372, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2374. Even if No in step 2366, the process proceeds to step 2374.

Next, in step 2374, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2374, in step 2376, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the second drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2378, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 second-decorates based on the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display-related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start timing of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2378, in step 2379, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a variable display command for the second decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). ), And the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2378, in step 2380, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has a variation mode temporarily stored in the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the second decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in step 2381, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the second decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit. It is transmitted to the SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth). On the other hand, if No in step 2380, in step 2382, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) has the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in (and the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2382, in step 2383, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth). Even if No in step 2382, the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth).

Next, in step 3200 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes the main area interrupt process B, which will be described later. Next, in step 2384, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second forced stop execution command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2384, in step 2385, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example,). With reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, it is determined whether or not the information to the effect that the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2385, in step 2386, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the second decorative symbol (sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 3250 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes the main area interrupt process C described later, and proceeds to step 2390.

Further, in the case of No in step 2384, in step 2388, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the second decorative symbol in the variable display area (main area or sub area when the look-ahead effect is not being executed). Set the stop display command (confirmed display) to stop with the forced loss symbol, and proceed to step 2390. The display mode of the forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol will be described in detail in FIG. 114. Next, in step 2390, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2392, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next process (process of step 2400). Move to. Even if No in step 2374 or 2385, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 114 is a symbol display image diagram for stopping at the time of a big hit in the fifth embodiment. First, a case where the first decorative symbol displayed in the main area, which is shown in the upper part of the figure, is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol will be described. First, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variablely displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area. After that, since the first main game symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the main area (“777” in the figure). Further, since the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a forced loss symbol. The forced loss symbol of the second decorative symbol is "giraffe", and the symbol is stopped and displayed only when the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the forced loss symbol, the background effect in the sub area becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced loss symbol is stopped and displayed).

Next, a case where the second decorative symbol displayed in the sub-area shown in the lower part of the figure is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol will be described. First, the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variablely displayed in the main area. After that, since the second main game symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the sub area (“777” in the figure). Further, since the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a forced loss symbol. The forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol is "zoo", and the symbol is stopped and displayed only when the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the forced loss symbol, the background effect in the main area becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced loss symbol is stopped and displayed). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed as a stop when the first main game symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol and the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. And the forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol that will be stopped and displayed when the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to the loss due to the second main game symbol stopping at the jackpot symbol. Is configured to have a different display mode. As shown in the figure, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area is different from the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area. As a specific example of the display mode of the special background effect, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area may be "blue", and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be "red". Further, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may all be the same display mode, or the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be the same. The display mode may be partially the same (only the colors are the same but the patterns are different, etc.).

Next, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3202, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol, and it is configured to determine whether the interrupt effect can be executed at the first interrupt timing. There is. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is turned on when the interrupt enable flag (in the main area interrupt process A described above, the change of the second decorative symbol itself can be interrupted. It is determined whether or not the flag) is on. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the fluctuation state of the first decorative symbol being changed is the first half. In this example, in the variation of the first decorative symbol, the part before the start of SP reach is the first half, and the part after the start of SP reach is the second half, and in the variation in which SP reach is not executed, only the first half is possessed. It is not supposed to be.

In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the priority of the first half of the first decorative symbol changing in the main area and the priority of the second decorative symbol changing in the sub area. Are compared, and the process proceeds to step 3212. On the other hand, if No in step 3206, in step 3210, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 gives priority to the latter half of the first decorative symbol changing in the main region and priority to the second decorative symbol changing in the sub region. The degree is compared, and the process proceeds to step 3212. Next, in step 3212, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the priority of the first decorative symbol. The priority of the first decorative symbol is the priority compared in step 3208 or step 3210. In the case of Yes in step 3212, in step 3214, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3214, in step 3216, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the accessory is not activated (in a state where the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position). , The mode of effecting the interrupt effect when the execution is started) is set, a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3214, in step 3218, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 operates the movable accessory YK with the effect mode of the interrupt effect as the effect mode when the accessory is activated (a trigger other than the interrupt effect). In the state, it is determined in the effect mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started), a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3220. As described above, when the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the first half priority or the second half priority of the first decorative symbol, the interrupt effect can be executed, but the movable accessory YK is in the initial position. It is configured so that the effect mode of the interrupt effect differs depending on whether or not the interrupt effect is stopped at. In the fifth embodiment, the interrupt effect is performed when the expectation of a big hit of the symbol variation is high (the priority of the second decorative symbol is high), so that the player is conspicuous (the player is conspicuous). It is preferable to perform it in a flashy) production mode. Therefore, it is more preferable to execute both the effect display on the liquid crystal display (on the display area SG10) and the operation of the movable accessory than only the effect display on the liquid crystal display (on the display area SG10). In other words, it is preferable to execute the interrupt effect while the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. Therefore, as described above, when the interrupt effect is executed by configuring the movable accessory YK to operate at the initial position when the movable accessory YK is operating at the time of executing the main area interrupt process A. As the effect mode of the above, the effect mode when the movable accessory is not activated can be configured to be selected in a large proportion. The interrupt effect (interrupt effect executed at the first interrupt timing) in steps 3216 and 3218 may be referred to as a first interrupt effect.

Next, in step 3220, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the display of the decorative symbol between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to step 3222. Even if No in step 3202, step 3204, or step 3212, the process proceeds to step 3222. Here, the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub-region, and the second decorative symbol (second main game symbol) is variablely displayed. In the case of a big hit, if the display area of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not changed, the second decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the sub area, which is a smaller area than the main area, is the big hit symbol. It stops at, and the joy of being a big hit for the player is reduced. Therefore, by executing an interrupt effect and setting the variable display of the second decorative symbol, which is a big hit, as the main area, the big hit symbol can be stopped and displayed in the main area, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. ..

Next, in step 3222, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol is being displayed in the sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 3222, in step 3224, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol has been reached. Here, in the fifth embodiment, the second interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol is the timing 5 seconds before the end of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3224, in step 3226, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol being changed is a symbol variation that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3226, in step 3228, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or higher. In the case of Yes in step 3228, in step 3230, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is in operation as the effect during the change of the first decorative symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3230, in step 3232, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the second interrupt effect. Next, in step 3234, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the display of the decorative symbol between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2384). In addition, even if No in step 3222, step 3224, step 3226, step 3228 or step 3230, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2384). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, even if it is not determined at the first interrupt timing that the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the priority of the first decorative symbol, at the second interrupt timing. When the following conditions are satisfied, the interrupt effect is executed as the second interrupt effect.
(1) While the second decorative pattern is changing in the sub area,
(2) The fluctuation of the second decorative pattern is a big hit,
(3) The priority of the second decorative symbol that is changing is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or higher.
(4) The movable accessory YK is not operating as a production during the change of the first decorative pattern.
When the above conditions are satisfied, the interrupt effect is executed.

Although not shown, the second interrupt effect is configured to be executed when the movable accessory YK is not operating. Therefore, the effect mode is such that the movable accessory YK operates. Is preferable. Further, the effect mode of the second interrupt effect may be an effect mode in which the player can determine that the variation of the second decorative symbol becomes a big hit when the movable accessory YK is activated. In the fifth embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub-region, the interrupt effect is executed and the first. The decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area. However, when the interrupt effect is completed, that is, the symbol on the second main game side related to the interrupt effect. If the fluctuation is a loss, the timing at which the change of the second decorative symbol related to the interrupt effect ends, and if the symbol variation on the second main game side related to the interrupt effect is a big hit, the timing at the end of the big hit. The first decorative symbol is varied and displayed in the main area, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area. The details will be described later in FIG. 117, but the third interrupt timing shown in the figure (FIG. 115) may be the symbol variation end timing = symbol variation stop timing, or the symbol variation may be provisional. It may be the timing immediately before the stop or the timing immediately before the fixed stop of the symbol change. Further, if it is the last timing of the interrupt timings that exist in a plurality of times in one symbol change period, the symbol may be changed. Further, when the interrupt effect is executed, or when the display areas of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are exchanged, for example, when the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area, the interrupt effect is generated. When the execution is executed and the first decorative symbol in the variable display is displayed in the sub area and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main area, the variable display of the second decorative symbol displayed in the main area is displayed. Until the end, the display area of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not exchanged (during the change of the second decorative symbol in which the interrupt effect is executed, the next change of the first decorative symbol starts. Even if it is done, it is preferable to keep the second decorative symbol variable in the main area).

Next, FIG. 116 is an interrupt effect execution image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an example of the production mode when the movable accessory is operated is illustrated. First, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variablely displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area. After that, 5 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the second decorative symbol, and when the first interrupt timing is reached, the movable accessory YK is operating as an effect corresponding to the change of the first decorative symbol. In this case, the interrupt effect is executed, but since the movable accessory YK cannot be operated as the interrupt effect, the effect mode of "liquid crystal display only" (the effect mode in which the movable accessory YK does not operate). ) Will execute the interrupt effect. The figure shows how the movable accessory YK, which was operating as an effect related to the first decorative symbol, returns to the initial position.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, an example of the effect mode when the movable accessory is not activated is illustrated. First, under the situation that the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variablely displayed in the main area and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area, the second decorative symbol is displayed. Five seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and when the first interrupt timing is reached, the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In this case, since it is possible to operate the movable accessory YK as an interrupt effect, the interrupt effect is performed in the effect mode of "liquid crystal display + movable accessory operation" (the effect mode in which the movable accessory YK is operated). It will be executed. In the figure, it is shown that the movable accessory YK is operating in the central portion of the effect display device SG as an interrupt effect related to the second decorative symbol.

Next, FIG. 117 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3252, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol being changed is a symbol variation that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is a predetermined value (3 in this example) or higher. In the case of Yes in step 3254, in step 3256, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the third interrupt effect as the interrupt effect. Next, in step 3258, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the display of the decorative symbol between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2390). Even if No in step 3252 or 3254, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2390). In this way, even when the interrupt effect (second interrupt effect) cannot be executed at the second interrupt timing, (1) the pattern variation of the executed second decorative symbol is a variation that becomes a big hit, (2) execution. When both of the two conditions that the priority of the second decorative symbol is the predetermined value (3 in this example) or more are satisfied, the third interrupt effect is performed as an interrupt effect at the stop timing of the second decorative symbol. Is configured to run. The stop timing of the second decorative symbol is referred to as the third interrupt timing. In addition, as the effect mode of the third interrupt effect, since the execution of the third interrupt effect = the start of the big hit, the effect mode for congratulating the player who has confirmed the big hit and the same effect as at the start of the big hit are performed. It may be configured to run. Further, it may be an effect mode in which the movable accessory YK is operated. Further, as the effect content related to the change of the first decorative symbol, the effect mode of the third interrupt effect may be different depending on whether the movable accessory YK is operating or not.

Next, FIG. 118 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2522, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the pre-reading flag (a flag that is turned on when the pre-reading effect is executed) is turned off. Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 2522, in step 2524, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2524, in step 2526, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative symbol in the first main region after the trigger hold occurs has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2626, in step 2528, the background effect display control means SM23 calculates the time until the end of the symbol change related to the trigger hold, and based on the result of whether the trigger hold is correct or not, until the calculated time elapses. The look-ahead notice production scenario is decided. Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the advance notice effect execution during pre-reading. The figure illustrates how the pre-reading advance notice effect scenario is determined and the pre-reading effect is executed. First, at the timing of the change start of the first decorative symbol after the trigger hold occurs (the timing of the change start of the decorative symbol having the earlier change start of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the symbol change related to the trigger hold ends. The time until is calculated, and the pre-reading advance notice production scenario in the relevant period is determined. After that, when 20 seconds have passed from the first symbol change start timing, the display of "hot" is executed as a dialogue notice. After that, when 40 seconds have passed from the first symbol change start timing, the cut-in effect is executed. After that, when 60 seconds have passed from the first symbol change start timing, the effect of operating the movable accessory YK is executed. After that, when 70 seconds have passed from the first symbol change start timing, the symbol change related to the trigger hold ends. In the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variablely displayed at the same time. Therefore, when the advance notice effect is executed based on the fluctuation time of one symbol change, the advance notice effect related to any of the symbol changes is performed. Is executed, that is, there is a risk that it will be recognized which symbol change is related to the trigger hold, and the interest of the symbol change related to the hold other than the trigger hold becomes low. It ends up. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, by managing the execution timing of the advance notice effect according to the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first decorative symbol after the trigger hold occurs, the interest of the entire look-ahead effect is enhanced.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, in step 2530, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the look-ahead flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2532, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the “pre-reading background” as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3300 (fifth)}. As described above, the "look-ahead background" is configured to be set first in the case of Yes in step 2526, that is, at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the first main region after the trigger hold occurs. In other words, the timing of switching from the "normal background" to the "pre-reading background" is the start timing of the symbol change. Further, when the background effect is "pre-reading background", as described above in FIG. 111, a pre-reading first area in which the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed is provided in the lower left of the display area SG10. In the lower right of the display area SG10, a look-ahead second area in which the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed is provided, and the look-ahead first area and the look-ahead second area are variablely displayed side by side in the same display area. It will be. If No in step 2522, in step 2534, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the symbol change related to the trigger hold is completed. In the case of Yes in step 2534, in step 2536, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the look-ahead flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2538. Even if No in step 2524 or step 2526, the process proceeds to step 2538. Next, in step 2538, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a "normal background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3300 (fifth)}. If No in step 2534, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "pre-reading background" as the background effect in step 2540, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3300 (fifth)}. It should be noted that there is no problem in any display mode as long as the "pre-reading background" and the "normal background" can be visually distinguished by the player.

Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the accessory drive control process according to the subroutine of step 3300 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3302, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the effect content related to the symbol variation is newly determined. In step 3302, it is determined whether or not the effect content is determined when the pre-reading effect is not being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is scheduled to operate in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3304, in step 3306, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the movable accessory YK based on the variation mode and the effect content of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation, and proceeds to step 3314. Further, if No in step 3302, in step 3308, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect scenario is newly determined. In step 3308, it is determined whether or not the effect content when the look-ahead effect is being executed is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3308, in step 3310, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is scheduled to operate in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3310, in step 3312, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the movable accessory YK based on the pre-reading advance notice effect scenario, and proceeds to step 3314. Even if No in step 3304, step 3308 or step 3310, the process proceeds to step 3314.

Next, in step 3314, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines that the change of the accessory initialization flag (the change of the second decorative symbol is an interruptable change). It is determined whether or not the flag for operating the movable accessory YK to the initial position, which is turned on when the movable accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position at the time of determination, is on. In the case of Yes in step 3314, in step 3316, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the movable accessory YK toward the initial position. Next, in step 3318, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the accessory initialization flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 3320. Even if No in step 3314, the process proceeds to step 3320. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the movable accessory YK is operated from the initial position at the time when the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is determined to be an interruptable variation, the operation is performed. It is configured to execute control to return the movable accessory YK to the initial position. Next, in step 3320, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the interrupt effect. In the case of Yes in step 3320, in step 3322, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the interrupt effect to be executed is an interrupt effect in an effect mode in which the movable accessory YK operates. As the interrupt effect in which the movable accessory YK is activated, for example, the interrupt effect (first interrupt effect), which is an effect mode when the movable accessory is not activated, is executed at the first interrupt timing, the second interrupt effect. Is executed, the third interrupt effect is executed, and so on. In the case of Yes in step 3322, in step 3324, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the movable accessory YK based on the effect mode of the interrupt effect, and shifts to the next process (process in step 2999). Even if No in step 3320 or 3322, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed in parallel on the effect display device. By configuring the lottery to be feasible, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game side is used as the first decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game side is used as the second decorative symbol. It can be configured to display the symbol variation of the above and the symbol variation of the second main game side at the same time. Further, the first decorative symbol is mainly displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is mainly displayed in the sub area smaller than the main area, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area. When the big hit expectation of the symbol variation related to the above is high, the variation display of the decorative symbol to be shown to the player can be displayed by executing the interrupt effect to display the display of the second decorative symbol in the main area. It can be made to look bigger in the main area, and the fun of the game will be enhanced.

(Example 1 of change from the fifth embodiment)
Here, in the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is displayed in the sub area, and the second When the priority of the decorative symbol is high (for example, the expectation of a big hit is high), the interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main area. However, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed. The display mode of is not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as change example 1 from the fifth embodiment, and the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are from step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1) to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), that is, in step 2249-3, the marking display content determining means SM21n is reserved. If it is determined that there is no trigger hold within, in step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation from the standby state. .. In the case of Yes in step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-17 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the main area. Next, in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), the map display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-19 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n provides information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol. Based on this, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined with reference to the first main area symbol table, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-20 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n relates to the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol. Based on the information, the second main area symbol table is referred to, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8.

Further, in the case of No in step 2249-16 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-21 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-21 (fifth change 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n has a newly digested hold on the first main game side. Judge whether or not it is on hold. In the case of Yes in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-22 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n sets the display area of the decorative symbol to the previous first decorative symbol symbol. Determine the same display area as the fluctuation. Next, in step 2249-23 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n uses the first main area symbol table or the first sub based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol. With reference to the area symbol table, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Further, in the case of No in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-24 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n sets the display area of the decorative symbol to the previous second decorative symbol. Determined to be the same display area as the symbol variation of. Next, in step 2249-25 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n uses the second main area symbol table or the second sub based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol. With reference to the area symbol table, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Next, in step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the display area of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation is a sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3100 (fifth), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 2249-15. As described above, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the decorative symbol starts to change when it is not in the standby state, the previous symbol is used in both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. It is configured to fluctuate in the area (either the main area or the sub area) that was displayed as fluctuating due to fluctuations. In addition, when the decorative symbol starts to change in the standby state, it is newly changed from the standby state regardless of whether the decorative symbol that newly starts to change is the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. The decorative symbol that started to change is displayed in a variable manner in the main area, and the decorative symbol that started to change later is displayed in a variable manner in the sub area.

Next, FIG. 121 is an example of the second decorative symbol effect content determination table in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. In the change example 1 from the fifth embodiment, since it is not fixedly determined which of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is mainly displayed in the main area, the first decorative symbol is also used in the second decorative symbol. Similar to the decorative pattern, the determined effect content is configured to determine the first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements that determine whether or not the interrupt effect is executed. It should be noted that the case where the result of success or failure is a big hit has a relatively higher priority than the case where the result is a loss. In addition, the case where the fluctuation time is long has a relatively higher priority than the case where the fluctuation time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority related to the period before the start of execution of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in the symbol fluctuation, and the second half priority is the priority related to the period after the execution start of the SP reach effect. In the symbol variation (effect content) in which the SP reach effect is not executed, the first half priority is given but the second half priority is not given. The priority is any number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 120 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3112 (fifth change 1), step 3102 (fifth change 1), step 3104 (fifth change 1), step 3114 (fifth change 1) and step 3116 (fifth change 1). 5 variation 1), that is, in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the decorative symbol variablely displayed in the sub-region is the second decorative symbol. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), in step 3102 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the first half priority of the confirmed second decorative symbol is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or more. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3104 (fifth change 1), the process proceeds to step 3106, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). Further, in the case of No in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), in step 3114 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the first decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. .. In the case of Yes in step 3114 (fifth variation 1), in step 3116 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n sets the first half priority of the confirmed first decorative symbol to a predetermined value (in this example). 2) Determine whether or not it is equal to or greater than 2). In the case of Yes in step 3116 (fifth change 1), the process proceeds to step 3106, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). As described above, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, both the case where the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub-region and the case where the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub-region are both cases. Since it is configured so that the interrupt effect can be executed even in the case, it is determined whether the variation of the decorative symbol currently displayed in the sub-area is the variation in which the interrupt effect can be executed. Further, since the timing of executing the process is the timing before the start of SP reach (the timing before the start of symbol change), the first half priority is configured to be confirmed as the priority.

Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is step 3200 (fifth variation 1), that is, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative symbol in step 2316, the decoration is performed in step 2324. After the symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328, or in step 2326. When it is determined that the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has not reached the display timing of the preview image or the reach image, in step 3200 (fifth variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 performs the main area interrupt process described later. B is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2344 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth variation 1) of FIG. 123 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3236, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing decorative symbol is changing in the sub-region. In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the main area interrupt process B in the figure is executed by the first decorative symbol display control process, the first decorative symbol is determined and the second decorative symbol is determined. When it is executed by the decorative symbol display control process, it is determined for the second decorative symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3236, in step 3237, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the decorative symbol displayed in the sub-region has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is 5 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the sub-region at the first interrupt timing can execute the interrupt effect. It is configured to determine if it is. In the case of Yes in step 3237, in step 3238, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the interrupt enable flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3238, in step 3239, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the fluctuation status of the decorative symbol being changed in the main region is the first half. In this example, the part before the start of SP reach in the variation of the decorative pattern is the first half, and the part after the start of SP reach is the second half, and in the variation in which SP reach is not executed, only the first half is possessed. It is supposed to be.

In the case of Yes in step 3239, in step 3240, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 compares the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the main area with the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the sub area. , Step 3242-1. On the other hand, if No in step 3239, in step 3241, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the latter half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the main area and the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the sub area. Compare and move to step 3242-1. Next, in step 3242-1, whether or not the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has a higher priority of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the sub-region than the priority of the decorative symbol that is variable in the main region. Is determined. The priority of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the main area is the priority compared in step 3240 or step 3241. In the case of Yes in step 3242-1, in step 3242-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3242-2, in step 3242-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the accessory is not activated (the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position). In this state, it is determined in the effect mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started), a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3242-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3242-2, in step 3242-4, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the movable accessory is activated (the movable accessory YK triggered by a mode other than the interrupt effect). Is determined, the command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3242-5. In this way, when the first half priority of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the sub area is larger than the first half priority or the latter half priority of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the main area, the interrupt effect is executed. Although it is configured to be obtained, it is configured so that the effect mode of the interrupt effect differs depending on whether or not the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position.

Next, in step 3242-5, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the display of the decorative symbol between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to step 3242-6. In addition, even if No in step 3237, step 3238 or step 3242-1, the process proceeds to step 3242-6.

Next, in step 3242-6, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the variation of the decorative symbol is being displayed in the sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 3242-6, in step 3242-7, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3242-7, in step 3242-8, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the decorative symbol being changed in the sub-region is a symbol change that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3242-8, in step 3242-9, whether the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has a predetermined value (2 in this example) or more for the latter half priority of the decorative symbol that is changing in the sub-region. Whether or not it is determined (since the second interrupt timing is later than the SP reach start timing, the latter half priority is determined). In the case of Yes in step 3242-9, in step 3243-1, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is operating as an effect during the change of the decorative symbol that is changing in the main area. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3243-1, in step 3243-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the second interrupt effect. Next, in step 3243-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the display of the decorative symbol between the main area and the sub area, and the next process {process of step 2344 (fifth). }. Even if No in step 3242-6, step 3242-7, step 3242-8, step 3242-9, or step 3243-1, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2344 (fifth)}. In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the interrupt effect is executed and the display of the decorative symbol is exchanged between the main area and the sub area, the decorative symbol newly displayed in the main area is displayed. Even if the symbol variation related to the above is not a big hit, the display area of the decorative symbol after that is configured to be the display area after the execution of the interrupt effect. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area, the interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main area. Even if the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area and the result of the symbol change of the second decorative symbol is lost as a result of executing the interrupt effect, the second decoration is displayed in the main area in the next symbol change. The symbol is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area. The third interrupt timing shown in the figure (FIG. 124) may be the symbol variation end timing = the symbol variation stop timing, or the timing immediately before the temporary stop of the symbol variation or the timing immediately before the fixed stop of the symbol variation. May be. Further, if it is the last timing of the interrupt timings that exist in a plurality of times in one symbol change period, the symbol may be changed.

Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 123 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3260 (fifth variation 1) and step 3262 (fifth variation 1), that is, in step 3260 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 It is determined whether or not the symbol variation of the decorative symbol that is changing in the sub-region is a symbol variation that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3260 (fifth change 1), in step 3262 (fifth change 1), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 sets the latter half priority of the symbol change of the decorative symbol being changed in the sub-region to a predetermined value. (In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3) (since the third interrupt timing is a timing after the SP reach start timing, the latter half priority is determined). If Yes in step 3262 (5th change 1), the process proceeds to step 3256, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2340).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment, the two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed on the effect display device. By configuring the parallel lottery to be feasible, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game side is used as the first decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game side is used as the second decorative symbol. The symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side can be configured to be displayed at the same time. Further, of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol that first started the variable display in the standby state is displayed in the main area, and then the decorative symbol that started the variable display is displayed in the sub area. The value of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be made equal to each other, and the first decorative symbol can be displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol can be displayed in the main area. By frequently switching the display case, the player can pay attention to both the symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side.

(Sixth Embodiment)
Here, although some of the above-described embodiments have been partially described, an example of a configuration further applicable to the above-mentioned embodiments will be described in detail below as the sixth embodiment. For example, a configuration including the first decorative symbol (first effect symbol) and the second decorative symbol (second effect symbol) described in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol (first effect) of the fourth embodiment. It is possible to appropriately provide one or more configurations described in the sixth embodiment in addition to the configuration of the image display overlapping with the symbol) and the second decorative symbol (design for the second effect). Further, the configuration of the image display overlapping with the hold display of the fourth embodiment may be changed to the one or a plurality of configurations described in the sixth embodiment, or one or a plurality of configurations may be added as appropriate. As a supplement, the present invention is not limited to the above-exemplified combinations, and any of the configurations described in the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment may be appropriately applied to one or a plurality of configurations described in the sixth embodiment. It may be changed or a plurality of configurations may be added as appropriate, and may be combined with a configuration of an image display that overlaps with the advance notice effect of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 82.

<< Meaning of terms >>
The meaning of each term in the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configurations and effects related to the following terms can be applied to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Non-time reduction game state>
The non-time shortened gaming state is a gaming state indicating a low probability low base state (normal gaming state). It should be noted that the high-accuracy and low-base state in which the time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state may be set as the non-time-reduced game state.
<Effect of non-time reduction game state>
(1) Mainly, it is possible to enable a game on the first main game side.

<Time reduction game state>
The time-reduced gaming state is a gaming state indicating a high-accuracy high-base state and a low-accuracy high-base state. It should be noted that the high-accuracy and low-base state in which the time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is executed is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state may be set as the time-reduced game state.
<Effect of non-time reduction game state>
(1) Mainly, it is possible to enable a game on the second main game side.

<Decorative design (design for production)>
The decorative symbol is an image controlled by the sub-control board S that suggests or informs the result of the winning / failing lottery on the main game side, and has a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol. After the decorative design starts to change, it temporarily stops, and then it stops fixedly. In addition, the result of the winning / failing lottery on the main game side can be suggested or notified by the stop display mode (stop symbol) when the fixed stop is made.
<Effect of decorative design>
(1) The decorative design makes it easier for the player to recognize that the player is changing, waiting for the change, the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the like.

<1st decorative design (1st production design)>
The first decorative symbol is a decorative symbol displayed so that the player can easily see it, and is a card-type or character-type image object as the first element, and numbers (including Chinese numerals), alphabets, and alphabets as the second element. It is a decorative pattern composed of image objects such as characters, symbols, and patterns. In addition, as the third element in the first decorative pattern, the color effect of the character-type image object itself such as the character-type image object (first element), the color effect attached to the outside of the character-type image object, and the image of numbers. A color effect of the numerical image object itself such as an object (second element) or a color effect incidental to the outside of the numerical image object may be provided. Further, the first decorative symbol displays only the first element or the second element depending on the gaming state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy high base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state). It may be an embodiment. Further, the mode of each element may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, in the first decorative pattern of "7", the image object of the lion facing the front in the low probability low base state ( Although it is the first element), it can be used as a sideways lion image object (first element) in other gaming states (for example, high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state), or in a low accuracy low base state. The image object of the number "7" (second element), but in other gaming states (for example, the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state), the image object of the kanji "seven" (second element). Or, in the low accuracy low base state, the effect around the "7" image object or the "7" image object is red (third element), but in another gaming state (for example, high accuracy high base state or In the low accuracy high base state), the effect around the "7" image object or the "7" image object is gold (third element), and in the low accuracy low base state, the lion image object is yellow (third element). However, in other gaming states (for example, high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state), the image object of the lion may be golden (third element). Further, the presence or absence of each element may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the first decorative symbol of the "7" symbol, the image object of the lion (first element) in the low probability low base state. ), But does not have a lion image object (first element) in other gaming states (eg, high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state) (ie, only the second and third elements, or , 2nd element only), or has a color effect (3rd element) attached to the outside of the image object of "7" or the character type image object in the low accuracy low base state, but in other gaming states (3rd element). For example, the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state) does not have a color effect (third element) incidental to the outside of the image object of "7" or the character type image object (that is, the first element and the first element). It may be configured to have only two elements or only the second element). As in the game state, the mode and presence / absence of each element may be different depending on the stage or mode.
<Effect of the first decorative pattern>
(1) The first decorative pattern can improve the interest of the effect during the change.
(2) The first decorative symbol can be notified of the result of the game by deterministically stopping and displaying it.

<Second decorative design (second production design)>
The second decorative symbol is a decorative symbol indicating that the first decorative symbol is changing at all times, when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is used. It is a decorative pattern composed of image objects such as numbers (including Chinese numerals), alphabets, letters, symbols, and patterns that are the same as or similar to the second element of the above, and is smaller than the second element of the first decorative pattern. ing. The second decorative symbol is composed of only the second element, and the first element and the third element are not attached to the embodiment, but the same as or similar to the first element of the first decorative symbol. However, a first element smaller than the first element of the first decorative pattern may be attached. Further, a third element that is the same as or similar to the third element of the first decorative pattern may be attached.
<Effect of the second decorative pattern>
(1) When always displaying: The second decorative symbol can be notified of the result of the game by deterministically stopping and displaying.
(2) When the first decorative symbol is difficult or invisible 1: When the first decorative symbol is definitively stopped and displayed, the second decorative symbol may also be deterministically stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed. It is preferable to display (temporarily stop) only when the first decorative symbol is difficult to see or the first decorative symbol cannot be visually recognized without deterministically stopping and displaying. In this case, the game is played with this temporary stop display. The result of can be notified.
(3) When the first decorative symbol is difficult to see or cannot be visually recognized 2: The second decorative symbol is only a variable display without performing a temporary stop display and a definite stop display, and the first decorative symbol is difficult to see or visually recognized. Even if it cannot be done, it can be clearly notified that it is changing.

<Design variation of the first decorative design>
The first decorative symbol has a shape that is time-synchronized with the fluctuation of the main game symbol (first main game symbol, second main game symbol), and is more than the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The variation is performed in the display area SG10 in a manner that is easy to see. The fluctuation from the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol or the start of re-variation to the elapse of a predetermined time is called an accelerated fluctuation, and the fluctuation after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol or the start of re-variation. Is called high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation from high-speed fluctuation to temporary stop or fixed stop is called deceleration fluctuation. When fluctuating at high speed, the first decorative symbol is in a transparent state (for example, the transparency of the first decorative symbol is set to 50, which is translucent from 0 to 100, and is displayed on the rear surface of the first decorative symbol. In addition, the background image of the effect stage, which has a lower display priority than the first decorative symbol, can be visually recognized through the first decorative symbol), which is difficult or invisible to the player, and accelerates. When fluctuating and decelerating, the first decorative symbol is in a non-transparent state (for example, the transparency of the first decorative symbol is set to 0, which is completely opaque out of 0 to 100, and the first decorative symbol is in a non-transparent state. The background image of the effect stage, which is displayed on the rear surface and has a lower display priority than the first decorative symbol, cannot be visually recognized through the first decorative symbol), and is easy for the player to see. As a modification, the decorative symbol may be hidden during the period during the high-speed fluctuation described above, and in this case, since it is not substantially changed, it may be referred to as a “non-display state”.
<Effect of pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern>
(1) The first decorative symbol makes it easier for the player to recognize that the pattern is changing.

<Design variation of the second decorative pattern>
The second decorative symbol changes in a time-synchronized manner with the fluctuations of the main game symbol (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) and the first decorative symbol. The second decorative symbol is displayed in a constant speed without acceleration or deceleration so that the player can confirm that the main game symbol and the first decorative symbol are constantly changing during the change, and the second decorative symbol is in a transparent state. Although it is configured so as not to be, acceleration fluctuation, high speed fluctuation, deceleration fluctuation may be performed, and a transmission state may be achieved, as in the case of the first decorative symbol.
<Effect of pattern fluctuation of the second decorative pattern>
(1) The second decorative symbol can clearly notify that the first decorative symbol is changing even if it is difficult to see or cannot be seen, and the player recognizes that the first decorative symbol is changing. It can be made easier.

<Main area>
The main area is a display area for displaying the first decorative symbol (first decorative symbol display area SG15). The first decorative symbol is variable or stopped in the main area.
<Effect of main area>
(1) The first decorative pattern can be displayed.
(2) It is possible to display variations with rich color rendering.

<Sub area>
The sub area is a display area for displaying the second decorative symbol (second decorative symbol display area SG14). The second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner or stopped in the sub area.
<Effect of sub-area>
(1) The second decorative pattern can be displayed.

<Waiting for fluctuation>
The variable standby is a state in which the main game symbol and the decorative symbol have not changed. During the fluctuation stop, it may be referred to as the fluctuation stop state.
<Effect of waiting for fluctuation>
(1) While waiting for fluctuation, it is possible to notify that the game is not in progress.

<Waiting movie (standby demo screen)>
The waiting movie is a display of a moving image indicating to the player that the movie is not changing.
<Effect of waiting movie>
(1) By displaying the waiting movie, it can be suggested that the table is vacant and the game is possible.

<Hold display>
The hold display is an image showing the number of fluctuations controlled by the sub-control board S and not executed on the main game side.
<Effect of hold display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the unvariable number.

<First hold display>
The first hold display is a hold display displayed so that the player can easily see it.
<Effect of the first hold display>
(1) The player can recognize the unchanged number.
(2) By changing the display mode of the first hold display, it is possible to suggest the possibility of winning.

<Second hold display>
The second hold display is a hold display that is visually displayed by the player at all times, when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first hold display, or when the player cannot visually recognize the first hold display.
<Effect of the second hold display>
(1) The player can recognize the unchanged number.

<First hold display area>
The first hold display area SG12 is an area for displaying the first hold display. In some cases, a display indicating the upper limit of the first hold display may be performed.
<Effect of the first hold display area>
(1) The first hold display can be displayed.
(2) A display indicating the upper limit of the first hold display can be performed.

<Second hold display area>
The second hold display area SG13 is an area for displaying the second hold display.
<Effect of the second hold display area>
(1) The second hold display can be displayed.

<Shift display (shift animation)>
The shift display (shift animation) is a display of a moving image when moving the first hold display displayed when the number of holds decreases.
<Effect of shift display (shift animation)>
(1) It is possible to easily recognize that the number of reservations has decreased.

<Holding occurrence display (holding occurrence animation)>
The hold occurrence display (holding occurrence animation) is a display of a moving image when displaying a new first hold occurrence display when the number of holds increases.
<Effect of occurrence display (holding occurrence animation)>
(1) It is possible to easily recognize that the number of reservations has increased.

<Holding display for directing the fluctuation (holding digestion transmission image, fluctuation-compatible image)>
The hold display for effect of the fluctuation is also referred to as a hold digestion transmission image and a change correspondence image, and is an image displayed when a certain hold is digested.
<Effect of hold display for directing the change>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a hit with respect to the fluctuation that is currently fluctuating.

<Holding display area for directing the fluctuation>
The hold display area for effect of the variation is an area for displaying an image to be displayed when a certain hold is exhausted.
<Effect of the hold display area for directing the fluctuation>
(1) It is possible to display the hold display for the effect of the change.
(2) It can be suggested that the hold display for the effect of the change is displayed.

<Display priority>
The display priority indicates the priority of the image and the moving image to be displayed on the effect display device (the order of displaying from the front side of the effect display device).
<Effect of display priority>
(1) When a plurality of images or moving images are displayed in duplicate, it can be configured so that the player can easily see the images or moving images.

<Volume adjustment screen display>
The volume adjustment screen display is a screen display indicating that the volume can be adjusted and displays an image showing the currently set volume, the volume adjustment method, and the like.
<Effect of volume adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the volume can be adjusted.
(2) The volume can be easily adjusted by the player.

<Light intensity adjustment screen display>
The light amount adjustment screen display is a screen display that indicates that the light amount can be adjusted and displays an image showing the currently set light amount, the light amount adjustment method, and the like.
<Effect of light intensity adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the amount of light can be adjusted.
(2) The amount of light can be easily adjusted by the player.

<Stage (directing stage)>
The stage (effect stage) is also referred to as a mode (effect mode), and is an effect mode shown by a background image.
<Effect of stage (directing stage)>
(1) Display corresponding to the stage (first decorative design, notice, etc.) can be displayed.

<Hidden mode (hidden stage)>
The latent mode (latent stage) is an effect stage (effect mode) in which it is unknown whether the game is in a probability-variable gaming state or a non-probability-variable gaming state.
<Effect of latent mode>
(1) Probability fluctuation It is possible to incite whether or not the game is in a gaming state.

<Tempai>
Tempai is also called reach or reach state, and among multiple symbol rows, the symbol rows other than the symbol row scheduled to be stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end are the same decorative symbol, and are scheduled to be stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end. The symbol sequence of is fluctuating.
<Effect of Tenpai>
(1) It can be shown that it is a hit when the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol stopped in the other symbol row is stopped in one more symbol row.

<Reach production>
The reach effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the fluctuation, and is an effect that occurs mainly after the tempai. Reach production includes normal reach (normal reach production), super reach (super reach production, SP reach, SP reach production, first half of super reach, second half of super reach) and the like. Mainly, the period from the time when the reach is established to the time when it develops into super reach (or when it does not become super reach, the period from after the reach is established until all the symbol rows are stopped (temporarily stopped)) is called normal reach, and it develops after the reach is established. The production is called super reach (also called post-reach development production).
<Effect of reach production>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of hitting the fluctuation.

<Notice (notice display, production)>
The notice (notice display, effect) mainly suggests the expected degree of hit of the fluctuation, but it is used as a suggestion that there is a hit in the hold (example: look-ahead notice, look-ahead effect, etc.). There is also.
<Effect of notice (notice display, production)>
(1) It is possible to instigate whether or not the fluctuation is a hit.
(2) It is possible to instigate whether or not there is a hit in the hold.

<Temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
Temporary stop (temporary stop display) means that the decorative design starts to fluctuate and appears to have stopped once, but in reality, the decorative design is slightly moving (also called shaking fluctuation). There is) state.
<Effect of temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
(1) It can be made to appear that the fluctuation is executed a plurality of times.
(2) Whether or not to make a definite stop (in other words, whether it fluctuates again without a definite stop, or whether it is a hit without a definite stop, etc.) can be fueled.

<Pseudo-ren>
Pseudo-ren is sometimes referred to as re-variation in a broad sense, and is an effect that makes it appear that the decorative pattern is changed multiple times in one change.
<Effect of pseudo-ren>
(1) It is possible to make it appear that the decorative pattern is changed multiple times within one change.

<Pseudo-ream suggestion pattern>
The pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is one of the special decorative symbols displayed when inciting whether or not a pseudo-ream occurs.
<Effect of pseudo-ream suggestion symbol>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not a pseudo-ream occurs.

<Pseudo-ream (re-variation) design>
The pseudo-ream (re-variation) symbol is one of the special decorative symbols indicating that the pseudo-ream (re-variation) occurs.
<Effect of pseudo-ream (re-variation) symbol>
(1) It is possible to deterministically notify that a pseudo-ream (re-variation) will occur.

<Development pattern>
The development pattern is one of the special decorative patterns indicating that the reach effect is generated.
<Effect of development pattern>
(1) It is possible to deterministically notify that a reach effect will occur.

<Look-ahead production>
The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that there is a hit in the hold. The look-ahead effect is executed on condition that the trigger hold has occurred (when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect for the caused hold).
<Effect of look-ahead effect>
(1) It is possible to instigate whether or not there is a hit in the hold.

<Trigger hold>
The trigger hold is a hold that triggered the execution of the look-ahead effect (determined to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold that occurred).
<Effect of trigger hold>
(1) It becomes possible to execute a look-ahead effect.
(2) It is possible to suggest the possibility of winning due to fluctuations in trigger hold.

<Right-handed instruction display>
The right-handed instruction display is based on the premise that the second main game start opening or the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the board, but the right-handed hitting that is mainly displayed in the time-reduced game state should be executed. It is a display of.
<Effect of right-handed instruction display>
(1) In the time-reduced gaming state, the player can be urged to perform a right-handed strike.

<How to hit warning display (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display)>
The hitting method warning display is a display showing the recommended hitting method when the hitting method is different from the recommended hitting method in the current gaming state.
(1) It is possible to urge the player to execute a striking method corresponding to the game state.

<Default display>
The default display is a display mode that is predetermined as an initial state.
<Effect of default display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the display is in the initial state.

<Effect display>
The effect display is a special effect displayed on the effect display device for the image itself, the movement of the character in the moving image, the movement of the movable accessory, and the like.
<Effect of effect display>
(1) It is possible to emphasize the target image itself, the movement of the character in the moving image, the movement of the movable accessory, and the like.

<Full rotation production>
The full rotation effect is a state in which the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol is scrolling at a low speed while the symbols are aligned.
<Effect of full rotation effect>
(1) It is possible to deterministically notify that the fluctuation is a hit.

<Promotion production>
The promotion effect is an effect that encourages whether or not a non-probable variation symbol is changed to a probabilistic symbol, or an effect that encourages whether or not it is changed from a low round (for example, per 4R) to a high round (for example, per 16R). It is a production. Promotional effects can occur not only during fluctuations, but also during jackpots. The promotion effect that incites whether or not the non-probable variation symbol is changed to the probabilistic pattern is also called the probabilistic promotion effect, and the promotion effect that incites whether or not the change is made from a low round hit to a high round hit is sometimes called a round promotion effect.
<Effect of promotion effect>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not the non-probable variation symbol is changed to the probabilistic variation symbol.
(2) It is possible to fuel whether or not the change is made from a low round hit to a high round hit.

<Reach Voice>
The reach voice is a notice that suggests a hit expectation or the like by a sound generated when the reach is established or after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the reach is established.
<Effect of reach voice>
(1) When it reaches the reach, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of hitting by combining it with the image display and the movement of the movable accessory.

<Action at the start of fluctuation (operation at the start)>
The first decorative symbol is a special symbol action (first element such as a character, second element such as a number, third element such as a color effect, etc.) for any of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column. , These combinations or any one or more elements are enlarged, reduced, rotated, or emit light compared to immediately before the start of fluctuation (when the fluctuation stop is displayed), or one or more elements are added to any one or more elements. Or an operation such as deleting one or more elements from a combination of a plurality of elements), and then the symbol variation can be started. The action at the start of the fluctuation is a more flashy symbol action than the action A at the start of the fluctuation and the action A at the start of the fluctuation (the action execution time is long, the display area used in the action is large, the enlargement ratio is high, and the rotation is high. There are multiple types such as action B at the start of fluctuation, which is (fast, strong light emission, etc.), and the one with high expectations such as pseudo-ream and reach production is the normal with low expectation that does not become pseudo-ream and reach production. It is configured so that the action B at the start of the fluctuation is more likely to occur than the symbol fluctuation. That is, the fluctuation start action B is configured as an action with a higher expectation than the fluctuation start action A. Further, in the time-reduced gaming state, it is preferable to start without an action at the start of fluctuation, but an action at the start of fluctuation may be accompanied, and in such a configuration, the time-reduced gaming state can be smoothly performed. It is preferable to configure the game so that it is less likely to be accompanied by an action at the start of fluctuation than in a non-time shortened gaming state. In addition, the first decorations in the left column, middle column, and right column are used when the symbol change that becomes a pseudo-ream or reach effect is started, or when the normal symbol change of the loss before the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect is started. It is configured so that the symbol starts to fluctuate with the action at the start of fluctuation, and in the normal symbol fluctuation of the pseudo-ream or the loss of the reach effect, which does not become the pseudo-ream or the reach effect, or the loss without the look-ahead effect. May be configured so that when the symbol change is started, the action at the start of the change is not accompanied. Although it is preferable not to execute the change start action for the second decorative symbol, the change start action similar to the first decorative symbol may be executed.
<Effect of action at the start of fluctuation (action at the start)>
(1) It is possible to clearly indicate the fluctuation start timing by starting the fluctuation with the action at the start of the fluctuation. In addition, it is possible to suggest the degree of hit expectation and the like at the timing of the start of fluctuation.

Further, a specific example of adding one or more elements to any one or more elements as an action at the start of fluctuation is as follows.
(1) The first decorative symbol immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of only the first element, but when the fluctuation starts, the second element is added, and the first decorative symbol composed of the first element and the second element. Executes the action at the start of fluctuation with.
(2) The first decorative symbol immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of only the first element, but when the fluctuation starts, the third element is added, and the first decorative symbol composed of the first element and the third element. Executes the action at the start of fluctuation with.
(3) The first decorative symbol immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of only the second element, but when the fluctuation starts, the first element is added and the first decorative symbol composed of the first element and the second element. Executes the action at the start of fluctuation with.
(4) The first decorative symbol immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of only the second element, but when the fluctuation starts, the third element is added, and the first decorative symbol composed of the second element and the third element. Executes the action at the start of fluctuation with.
(5) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the first element and the second element, but when the fluctuation starts, the third element is added, and the first element, the second element, and the third element are added. The first decorative symbol composed of is executed the action at the start of fluctuation.
(6) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the first element and the third element, but when the fluctuation starts, the second element is added, and the first element, the second element, and the third element are added. The first decorative symbol composed of is executed the action at the start of fluctuation.
(7) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the second element and the third element, but when the fluctuation starts, the first element is added, and the first element, the second element, and the third element are added. The first decorative symbol composed of is executed the action at the start of fluctuation.
The above (1) to (7) may be actions at the start of fluctuation by all the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column, or any one of the left column, the middle column, and the right column. It may be an action at the start of fluctuation by one column, or it may be an action at the start of fluctuation by any two columns of the left column, the middle column, and the right column.

<Fixed position action (fixed position operation)>
The first decorative symbol is special for any of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column when the temporary stop is performed after the symbol change is started (at the timing of the temporary stop immediately after the temporary stop). You can perform symbol actions. The fixed-position action is a more flashy symbol action than the fixed-position action A and the fixed-position action A (the action execution time is long, the display area used in the action is large, the enlargement ratio is high, the rotation is fast, and the light is emitted. There are multiple types such as fixed position action B, which is (strong, etc.), and the one with high expectation such as pseudo-ream or reach effect is more than the normal symbol variation with low expectation that does not become pseudo-ream or reach effect. , It is configured so that the fixed position action B is likely to occur. That is, the fixed position action B is configured as an action with a higher degree of expectation than the fixed position action A. The fixed position action may be executed at a timing different from the action at the start of fluctuation, and the action may be the same action as the action at the start of fluctuation, a similar action, or a different action. In the case of an action different from the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action may be such that the first decorative symbol is enlarged at a position lower than the first decorative symbol of the action at the start of fluctuation and then returned to the upper position. Further, as for the fixed position action, different fixed position actions may be executed according to the symbol string of the first decorative symbol, or the type of the first decorative symbol (for example, the type of the first element + the second element). , The type of the first element, the type of the second element) may be configured to execute a fixed position action. When performing a positional action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the type of the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), if the first element is a lion , An example is that a lion performs an attacking action, and if the first element is a chick, the chick performs an action of waving both hands. Further, a fixed position action dedicated to the chance look-ahead effect may be provided, which is used when the symbol combination of the chance eye in the chance look-ahead effect is fixedly stopped. As an example of the fixed position action dedicated to this chance look-ahead effect, there is an example of executing an action of expanding after performing an action such that the first decorative symbol bounces. Further, in the time-reduced gaming state, it is preferable to temporarily stop without a fixed-position action, but a fixed-position action may be accompanied, and in such a configuration, the time-reduced gaming state progresses smoothly. It is preferable to configure the game so that it is less likely to be accompanied by a fixed position action than in a non-time shortened gaming state. In addition, when the first decorative symbol of the symbol change that becomes a pseudo-ream or reach effect is temporarily stopped, or when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped due to the loss of the symbol before the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect, the left column and the right In the display area (display area at a fixed position) where the first decorative symbol in the row temporarily stops, it is configured to temporarily stop with a fixed position action, and it is a pseudo-ream or reach effect that does not become a pseudo-ream or reach effect. In the normal symbol variation of the loss without the symbol variation of the loss or the look-ahead effect, the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column may be configured so as not to be accompanied by the fixed position action. Although it is preferable not to execute the fixed position action for the second decorative symbol, the same fixed position action as the first decorative symbol may be executed. In the pseudo-ream pattern fluctuation, if the first decorative symbol in the middle row temporarily stops and then re-changes, the first decorative symbol in the middle row may also perform a fixed position action in the fixed position display area. ..
<Effect of fixed position action (fixed position operation)>
(1) By temporarily stopping the first decorative symbol with a fixed position action, the temporary stop timing can be clearly indicated. In addition, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of hitting.

<Swaying action (swaying motion)>
The first decorative symbol can execute a shaking action, which is a special symbol action, while the symbol is changing or is in a change standby state (fixed stop state). The state in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped and neither the hold on the first main game side nor the hold on the second main game side exists is referred to as a variable standby state. For example, if the symbol is changing, the shaking action (also called shaking fluctuation) is executed after the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column is temporarily stopped, and if it is in the fluctuation standby state, the left column, The shaking action is executed when a predetermined time elapses after the first decorative symbol in the middle column and the right column is fixedly stopped. The shaking action may be executed at a timing different from the fluctuation start action and the fixed position action, and the action may be the same action as the fluctuation start action and the fixed position action, may be a similar action, or may be a different action. But it may be. Further, the shaking action may be a different action depending on the symbol sequence of the first decorative symbol, or the type of the first decorative symbol (for example, the type of the first element + the type of the second element, the type of the first element, the first). It may be configured to execute an action corresponding to (two types of elements). When performing a shaking action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the type of the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), if the first element is a lion, An example is that a lion performs an action of shaking its head up and down, and if the first element is a chick, the chick performs an action of shaking its head left and right. Further, the shaking action during the super reach effect or the battle reach effect may be configured to be different from the shaking action during the normal reach effect. For example, the swaying action during the super reach production or the battle reach production has a smaller first decorative pattern than the swaying action during the normal reach production. There is an example in which the swing width is small and the swing motion is slow (the cycle of one swing is longer than that of the normal reach effect). Although it is preferable not to execute the shaking action for the second decorative symbol, the same shaking action as the first decorative symbol may be executed. Further, in the acceleration fluctuation, the high speed fluctuation, and the deceleration fluctuation, which are the states before the temporary stop, this shaking action is not accompanied (the fluctuation is displayed without performing any symbol action). Further, in the time-reduced game state, the shaking action is executed during the symbol change, but the shaking action is not executed during the change waiting state (fixed stop state). In addition, the shaking action is a shaking action A, a shaking action B that is a more flashy pattern action than the shaking action A (large display area used in the action, high enlargement ratio, fast rotation, strong light emission, etc.), etc. Multiple types may be provided. When configured in this way, it is better to have a symbol variation with a high expectation such as a symbol variation with a large number of pseudo-reams or a super reach effect, and a symbol with a low expectation such as a symbol variation with a small number of pseudo-reams or a normal reach effect. It is configured so that the shaking action B is more likely to occur than the fluctuation. That is, the shaking action B is configured as an action with a higher degree of expectation than the shaking action A.
<Effect of shaking action>
(1) By executing the shaking action, it can be shown that the temporary stop is in progress, in other words, the situation before the fixed stop (the situation where the hit or the loss is not yet fixed in the production). In addition, it is possible to execute the effect on the first decorative symbol not only during the fluctuation but also after the fixed stop.

<Tempai action (special action)>
The first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped (for example, the first decorative symbol in the left column) and the first decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped (for example, the first decorative symbol in the right column), or When the first decorative symbols temporarily stopped at the same time (for example, the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column) are tempai (a state in which a reach state is formed) that are the same symbol, a special symbol action is taken. You can perform a tempai action that is. The tempai action may be executed at a timing different from the fluctuation start action, the fixed position action, and the shaking action, and the action may be the same action as the fluctuation starting action, the fixed position action, and the shaking action, or a similar action. It may be a different action. Further, regarding the tempai action, different tempai actions may be executed according to the symbol string of the first decorative symbol, or the type of the first decorative symbol (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the first). It may be configured to execute the action corresponding to the type of one element and the type of the second element). When performing a tempai action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the type of the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), if the first element is a lion, For example, if the lion performs a barking action and the first element is a chick, the chick performs an action that blows off the upper and lower shells. Further, in the time-reduced gaming state, it is preferable to execute the tempai action when the tempai (the state in which the reach state is formed) is executed, but it is not necessary to execute the tempai action. Here, in the case of configuring to execute the tempai action when the tempai (the state where the reach state is formed) is executed in the time-reduced gaming state, the tempai when the tempai (the state where the reach state is formed) is performed in the non-time-reduced gaming state. It is preferable to configure the tenpai (a state in which the reach state is formed) so that the possibility of the tempai action is lower than when the action is executed. In addition, Tempai Action is a flashier pattern action than Tempai Action A and Tempai Action A (the action execution time is long, the display area used in the action is large, the enlargement ratio is high, the rotation is fast, the light emission is strong, etc. ) May be provided in a plurality of types such as Tempai Action B. When configured in this way, it is better to have a symbol variation with a high expectation such as a symbol variation with a large number of pseudo-reams or a super reach effect, and a symbol with a low expectation such as a symbol variation with a small number of pseudo-reams or a normal reach effect. It is configured so that the tempai action B is more likely to occur than the fluctuation. That is, Tempai Action B is configured as an action with a higher degree of expectation than Tempai Action A. As for the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to execute the tempai action during the fluctuation, but the same tempai action as the first decorative symbol may be executed.
<Effect of Tempai action (special action)>
(1) The type of the first decorative pattern that is tempted can be highlighted to the player.

<Decision action (decision action)>
The first decorative symbol is a decision action that is a special symbol action by the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column when displaying the jackpot symbol via the reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, etc.). Can be executed. The deciding action may be executed at a timing different from the fluctuation start action, fixed position action, shaking action, and tempai action, and the action may be the same as the fluctuation starting action, fixed position action, shaking action, and tempai action. It may be a similar action, or it may be a different action. Further, in the time-reduced gaming state, it is preferable to execute the deciding action, but it is not necessary to execute the deciding action. Here, in the case of configuring to execute the determined action when displaying the jackpot symbol via the reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, etc.) in the time-reduced game state, the reach effect (reach effect) in the non-time-reduced game state. When displaying a jackpot symbol via a reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, etc.), rather than when executing a decision action when displaying a jackpot symbol via a normal reach effect, super reach effect, etc.) It is preferable to configure it so that it is less likely to be accompanied by a deciding action. In addition, the deciding action is a more flashy pattern action than the deciding action A and the deciding action A (the action execution time is long, the display area used in the action is large, the enlargement ratio is high, the rotation is fast, the light emission is strong, etc. ) May be provided in multiple types such as decision action B. When configured in this way, it stops at a symbol combination (or a symbol combination corresponding to a special game with a relatively large number of rounds) that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state or a time-shortening gaming state after a big hit such as "777". When displaying, a symbol combination (or a symbol combination corresponding to a special game with a relatively small number of rounds) that shifts to a non-probability variable gaming state or a non-time shortening gaming state after a big hit such as "222"). It is configured so that the decision action B is more likely to occur than the case where the stop display is displayed with. In addition, when the stop display is performed with a symbol combination (or a symbol combination corresponding to a special game with a relatively large number of rounds) that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state or a time-shortening gaming state after a big hit such as "777". A deciding action occurs, but a symbol combination that shifts to a non-probability variable gaming state or a non-time shortening gaming state after a big hit such as "222" (or a symbol combination corresponding to a special game with a relatively small number of rounds) When the stop display is displayed with, the decision action may be configured so as not to occur. Although it is preferable not to execute the deciding action for the second decorative symbol, the same deciding action as the first decorative symbol may be executed.
<Effect of decision action (decision action)>
(1) When displaying the jackpot symbol, it is possible to highlight to the player that the jackpot will be a jackpot.

FIG. 126 shows the display screen and the display priority displayed on the effect display device SG during the fluctuation standby. The broken line in the figure shows the situation where the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time shortened gaming state will be described. Currently, the fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed from the fluctuation stop (before the transition to the waiting movie described later), "437" is displayed as the first decorative symbol in a stopped state. , The second decorative symbol is also displayed in the state of being stopped at "437", the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second hold display on the second main game side is "0". It is displayed and is displayed on hold for the effect of the change (it is displayed when the change starts, triggered by the deletion of the first hold display, and is displayed at the end or halfway of the change (). If the next change starts even after the display ends, the hold display for the effect of the change corresponding to the next change is displayed)), the first hold display on the first main game side, and the second main game side. The first hold display of is not displayed. It should be noted that the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side are different, and the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side is different. The number indicating the number of holdings is hollowed out, and the number indicating the number of holdings is not hollowed out in the display mode of the second holding display on the second main game side. The display priority is 2nd decorative symbol> 2nd reserved display> 1st decorative symbol. The display priority may be 2nd reserved display> 2nd decorative symbol> 1st decorative symbol, and since the 2nd decorative symbol and the 2nd reserved display do not overlap with each other, the second decoration The design may be = 2nd hold display> 1st decorative design.

Next, the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time shortened gaming state will be described. Currently, there is no hold on the 1st main game side and no hold on the 2nd main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped, and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds as a specific time) has elapsed from the fluctuation stop, the non-time is shortened. The first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side, which were displayed on the variable standby screen display 1 in the game state, are not displayed. .. In addition, similarly to the change waiting screen display 1 in the non-time shortened game state, the hold display for effect of the change, the first hold display on the first main game side, and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Not. Here, a waiting movie indicating that the variable standby (variable stop) is in progress is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the variable stop, and a part of the reach effect is used for the standby movie. The information on the rights of the character (first element) used in the first decorative pattern is displayed. There are multiple types of characters displayed in this waiting movie, and they are the same characters as the characters (first element) used in each first decorative symbol, but they are specific first decorative symbols and the second element. Is the first decorative symbol of "7" (for this "7", for example, the first decorative symbol indicating that a special game that triggers the transition to the high accuracy and high base state is executed by becoming a number Zoro. , The character (second element) corresponding to (the first decorative symbol indicating that the special game with the largest number of rounds is executed by becoming a number Zoro) is the other first decorative symbol and the first. The first decorative symbol whose two elements are "6" (for this "6", for example, the first indicating that a special game that triggers the transition to the low accuracy and high base state is executed by becoming a number Zoro. A waiting movie rather than the character (second element) corresponding to the decorative symbol (which is the first decorative symbol indicating that a special game other than the special game with the largest number of rounds is executed by becoming a number zorome). (Or, the character corresponding to the first decorative symbol whose second element is "6" may be configured not to be displayed in the waiting movie at all).

In the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-time shortened gaming state or the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-time shortened gaming state, the change effect hold display area (the place where the change effect hold is displayed) is displayed. Although the configuration in which the display) and the first hold display area (display for indicating the place where the hold is displayed) on the first main game side are hidden has been described, the configuration may be such that these are displayed. For example, each display area may be divided and displayed as a hold display area for producing the variation and a first hold display area on the first main game side. Thereby, it can be suggested that the display showing the upper limit number of the first hold display and the hold display for effect of the change are displayed even during the change standby (variation stop). Further, in the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-time shortened gaming state, the second decorative symbol and the second hold display (first) are the same as in the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-time shortened gaming state (at the same position). The main game side, the second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first hold display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the unchanged number in the first hold display, but can recognize that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not changing in addition to the waiting movie, and the second hold. It can be configured so that the unvariable number can be recognized on the display.

Next, the variable standby screen display 1 in the time-reduced gaming state will be described. Currently, there is no hold on the 1st main game side and no hold on the 2nd main game side, the fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed from the fluctuation stop (before the transition to the waiting movie). The first decorative symbol is displayed in the state of being stopped at "437", the second decorative symbol is also displayed in the state of being stopped at "437", and the second hold display on the first main game side is "0". Display, the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and "→→ right-handed →→" is displayed as the right-handed instruction display. The first hold display on the side and the first hold display on the second main game side are not displayed. As with the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-time shortened gaming state, the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side are different. In the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side, the number indicating the number of holds is omitted, and in the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side, the number indicating the number of holds is shown. It's not hollow. The display priority is right-handed instruction display> second decorative symbol> second hold display> first decorative symbol. The display priority may be right-handed instruction display> second hold display> second decorative symbol> first decorative symbol, and the right-handed instruction display may be the second decorative symbol and the second hold display. Since it does not overlap, right-handed instruction display> second decorative symbol = second hold display> first decorative symbol may be used.

Next, the variable standby screen display 2 in the time-reduced gaming state will be described. The first decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol, which is currently stopped in fluctuation and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds as a specific time) has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation and is displayed in the fluctuation waiting screen display 1 in the time-reduced gaming state. 2 The decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed. In addition, similarly to the change waiting screen display 1 in the non-time shortened game state, the hold display for effect of the change, the first hold display on the first main game side, and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Not. Further, as in the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time shortened gaming state, a waiting movie indicating that the variable standby (variable stop) is in progress is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the variable stop. The waiting movie is the same as the waiting movie displayed on the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-time shortened gaming state.

In addition, in the variable waiting screen display 1 in the time-reduced gaming state or the variable waiting screen display 2 in the time-reduced gaming state, the effect holding display area of the variation (to indicate the place where the effect holding of the variation is displayed). Although the configuration in which the display) and the first hold display area (display for indicating the place where the hold is displayed) on the second main game side are hidden has been described, the configuration may be such that these are displayed. For example, each display area may be divided into a display as a hold display area for producing the variation and a first hold display area on the second main game side. This suggests that the hold display for the effect of the fluctuation is displayed even during the time-reduced game, and it is possible to easily recognize the number of the first hold display on the second main game side. Further, in the variable standby screen display 2 in the time-reduced game state, the second decorative symbol and the second hold display (first main game) are the same as the variable standby screen display 1 in the time-reduced game state (at the same position). The side, the second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first hold display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the unchanged number in the first hold display, but in addition to the waiting movie, it can recognize that the second decorative symbol is not changing, and the second hold display does not change. It can be configured so that the number can be recognized.

In addition to the above-mentioned screen display configuration, various screen display configurations can be used. For example, the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-time shortened gaming state and the variable waiting screen display in the time shortened gaming state. In 1, the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed, or in the non-time reduction game state, the hold and the second main game on the first main game side are not displayed. If there is no hold on the side and a predetermined period has elapsed, the variable waiting screen display 1 may shift to the variable waiting screen display 2, but in the time-reduced gaming state, the variable waiting screen display 1 is displayed. , Even if there is no hold on the 1st main game side and no hold on the 2nd main game side and a predetermined period has elapsed, the variable waiting screen display 1 is configured so as not to shift to the variable waiting screen display 2. May be good.

Next, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display will be described with reference to FIG. 127. The broken line in the figure shows the situation where the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the volume adjustment in the non-time reduction gaming state will be described. In the non-time reduction gaming state, the volume can be adjusted during fluctuation standby (variation stop) or fluctuation. The volume is adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the cross-shaped button SB-2. While the volume adjustment screen (display indicating the volume, displaying the cross button indicating the volume adjustment method, displaying the sub input button indicating that the volume adjustment screen is to be terminated, and displaying the image that makes the screen semi-transparent) is displayed. When the operation of the sub input button SB is performed, the display of the volume adjustment screen ends. If the non-time shortened gaming state is in variable standby (variable stop), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. The volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with all of them, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative symbol, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol. As a result, the volume adjustment screens can be duplicated, except for the display for which visibility is particularly desired. If it is changing in the non-time shortened gaming state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for directing the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the volume adjustment screen smaller than during the change standby (change stop) during fluctuations. For example, the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) is simply reduced (display indicating the volume, display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method, sub-input indicating that the volume adjustment screen is terminated. The display of the button SB and the display of the image that makes the screen translucent may be reduced), or only the display indicating the volume, or the display indicating the volume and the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method may be displayed. It may be only a combination of the two. If only the display indicating the volume or the combination of the display indicating the volume and the display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method is used, the display mode may be the same as that during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). , May be different (for example, different shapes or the same shape may be reduced). Further, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative symbol may be configured so as not to overlap. Further, the volume adjustment screen displayed small may not overlap with the changing second decorative symbol, but may be configured to overlap with the changing first decorative symbol. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative symbol. It should be noted that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during the fluctuation, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up / down buttons of the cross-shaped button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is 2nd decorative symbol> 2nd hold display> volume adjustment screen> 1st decorative symbol> 1st hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). Even if the display priority is 2nd decorative symbol = 2nd hold display, 2nd decorative symbol <2nd hold display, 1st decorative symbol <1st hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). good. If a button operation related to volume adjustment (operation of the up / down buttons of the cross-shaped button SB-2) is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the display of the standby movie is terminated and the volume adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, the volume adjustment in the time-reduced gaming state will be described. In the time-reduced gaming state, the volume can be adjusted during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) or fluctuation. If the game is in a time-reduced game state and is in variable standby (variable stop), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and right-handed An instruction display may be displayed, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative symbol, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol. As a result, the volume adjustment screens can be duplicated, except for the display for which visibility is particularly desired. If the time is changing in the game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold display for the effect of the change. , If there is a hold, the first hold display on the second main game side and the right-handed instruction display are displayed, and although not shown, the volume adjustment screen is displayed smaller than during the change standby (change stop) during fluctuations. For example, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative symbol may be configured so as not to overlap with each other. For example, the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) is simply reduced (display indicating the volume, display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method, and sub-input button indicating that the volume adjustment screen is terminated. The SB display and the image display that makes the screen translucent can be reduced in size), or only the volume display can be used, or the volume display and the cross-shaped button SB-2 display that indicates the volume adjustment method can be displayed. Only a combination of the two may be used. If only the display indicating the volume or the combination of the display indicating the volume and the display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method is used, the display mode may be the same as that during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). , May be different (for example, different shapes or the same shape may be reduced). Further, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative symbol may be configured so as not to overlap. Further, the volume adjustment screen displayed small may not overlap with the changing second decorative symbol, but may be configured to overlap with the changing first decorative symbol. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative symbol. It should be noted that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during the fluctuation, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up / down buttons of the cross-shaped button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is right-handed instruction display> second decorative symbol> second hold display> volume adjustment screen> first decorative symbol> first hold display (and hold display for producing the variation). The display priority is right-handed instruction display> second hold display> second decorative symbol, second decorative symbol> second hold display> right-handed instruction display, second hold display> second decorative symbol> right-handed instruction display. , Further, the second decorative symbol = the second hold display, the first decorative symbol <the first hold display (and the hold display for the effect of the variation) may be used.

Next, the light amount adjustment in the non-time reduction gaming state will be described. In the non-time reduction gaming state, the amount of light can be adjusted during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). The amount of light is adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross-shaped button SB-2. During the display of the light amount adjustment screen (display showing the amount of light, displaying a cross button indicating the amount of light adjustment method, displaying a sub-input button indicating that the light amount adjustment screen is terminated, displaying an image that makes the screen semi-transparent). When the operation of the sub input button SB is performed, the display of the light intensity adjustment screen ends. If the variable standby (variable stop) is in progress in the non-time shortened gaming state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. The light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap with all of them, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. If it is changing in the non-time shortened gaming state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for directing the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the light amount adjustment screen smaller than during the change standby (variation stop) during fluctuations. For example, a simply reduced version of the light amount adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display indicating the light amount, display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the light amount adjustment method, sub-input indicating that the light amount adjustment screen is terminated). The display of the button SB and the display of the image that makes the screen translucent may be reduced), or only the display indicating the amount of light may be displayed, or the display indicating the amount of light and the display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light It may be only a combination of the two. When only the display showing the amount of light or the combination of the display showing the amount of light and the display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the light amount adjustment method are used, the display mode may be the same as that during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). , May be different (for example, different shapes or the same shape may be reduced). Further, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative symbol may be configured so as not to overlap with each other. Further, the light amount adjustment screen displayed small may not overlap with the changing second decorative symbol, but may be configured to overlap with the changing first decorative symbol. As a result, the light intensity adjustment screens can be duplicated, except for the display for which visibility is particularly desired to be ensured. If it is changing in the non-time shortened gaming state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for directing the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. The light intensity may be adjusted so that the light intensity can be adjusted even during the fluctuation. When the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed during the fluctuation and the left and right buttons of the cross-shaped button SB-2 are operated, the light intensity is adjusted. It may be configured to display the adjustment screen. The display priority is 2nd decorative symbol> 2nd hold display> light intensity adjustment screen> 1st decorative symbol> 1st hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). Even if the display priority is 2nd decorative symbol = 2nd hold display, 2nd decorative symbol <2nd hold display, 1st decorative symbol <1st hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). good. If a button operation related to light intensity adjustment (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross-shaped button SB-2) is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the display of the standby movie is terminated and the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, the light amount adjustment in the time-reduced gaming state will be described. In the time-reduced gaming state, the amount of light can be adjusted during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). If the time is in the variable standby (variable stop) state in the game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and right-handed An instruction display may be displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap all of these, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the light amount adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative symbol, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol. For example, a simply reduced version of the light intensity adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display indicating the light intensity, display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the light intensity adjustment method, sub-input button indicating that the light intensity adjustment screen is terminated). The display of the SB and the display of the image that makes the screen translucent can be reduced. Only a combination of the two may be used. When only the display showing the amount of light or the combination of the display showing the amount of light and the display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the light amount adjustment method are used, the display mode may be the same as that during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). , May be different (for example, different shapes or the same shape may be reduced). Further, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative symbol may be configured so as not to overlap with each other. Further, the light amount adjustment screen displayed small may not overlap with the changing second decorative symbol, but may be configured to overlap with the changing first decorative symbol. As a result, the light intensity adjustment screens can be duplicated, except for the display for which visibility is particularly desired to be ensured. If the time is changing in the game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold display for directing the change. If there is a hold, the first hold display on the second main game side and the right-handed instruction display are displayed, and the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed. The light intensity may be adjusted so that the light intensity can be adjusted even during the fluctuation. When the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed during the fluctuation and the left and right buttons of the cross-shaped button SB-2 are operated, the light intensity is adjusted. It may be configured to display the adjustment screen. The display priority is right-handed instruction display> second decorative symbol> second hold display> light intensity adjustment screen> first decorative symbol> first hold display (and hold display for producing the variation). The display priority is right-handed instruction display> second hold display> second decorative symbol, second decorative symbol> second hold display> right-handed instruction display, second hold display> second decorative symbol> right-handed instruction display. , Further, the second decorative symbol = the second hold display, the first decorative symbol <the first hold display (and the hold display for the effect of the variation) may be used.

Next, the screen display during normal fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 128. The broken line in the figure shows the situation where the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the screen display during normal fluctuation in the non-time reduction gaming state will be described. Currently changing, the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area, the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, the second hold display "2" on the first main game side, and the second on the second main game side. 2 Hold display "0", hold display for directing the fluctuation, first hold display (2 pieces) on the first main game side, and first hold display on the second main game side are displayed. do not have. In the normal fluctuation screen display in the non-time shortened game state, when the ball enters the second main game start port B10, the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second on the second main game side is displayed. When the hold display is counted up (added) and the fluctuation related to the hold on the second main game side is started, the first hold display on the second main game side is decremented by one, and the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed. Is configured to be counted down (subtracted). Specifically, at present, there are two holds on the first main game side, two first hold displays on the first main game side, and "2" on the second hold display on the first main game side. The first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed, the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and a new ball enters the second main game start port B10. If there is, one first hold display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second hold display on the second main game side is updated and displayed from "0" to "1". The display priority is sub-area (variable display of the second decorative symbol)> second hold display> main area (variable display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol)> hold display for the effect of the change> The first hold display on the first main game side> the first hold display on the second main game side. The display priority may be a sub area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) <second hold display, a sub area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) = second hold display, and the main area. The display priority of (variable display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to the lowest of these, and the first hold display on the first main game side <second main game The first hold display on the side, the first hold display on the first main game side = the first hold display on the second main game side may be used.

Next, the screen display during normal fluctuation in the time-reduced gaming state will be described. Currently changing, the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area, the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, the second hold display "0" on the first main game side, and the second on the second main game side. 2 Hold display "2", hold display for directing the change, first hold display (2 pieces) on the second main game side, right-handed instruction display, and first hold on the first main game side are displayed. The display is not displayed. In the normal fluctuation screen display in the time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed even when the ball enters the first main game start port A10, but the first main game side The second hold display is configured to be counted up. The display priority is right-handed instruction display> sub-area (variable display of the second decorative symbol)> second hold display> main area (variable display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol)> Hold display for production> 1st hold display on the 2nd main game side. The display priority may be a sub area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) <second hold display, a sub area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) = second hold display, and the main area. The display priority of (variable display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to the lowest of these, and the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed. , 1st hold display for the effect of the change> 1st hold display on the 1st main game side> 1st hold display on the 2nd main game side, or 1st hold display for the effect of the change> 1st hold on the 2nd main game side Display> The first hold display on the first main game side may be used.

Here, the characteristic configuration shown with reference to FIG. 128 will be supplemented.

In the non-time shortened gaming state (state not accompanied by the electric support state), the hold display on the first main game side is displayed as the first hold display in the display mode of “●”. On the other hand, in the time-reduced game state (state accompanied by the electric support state), the hold display on the second main game side is displayed as the first hold display in the display mode of "heart (filled)". Further, the second hold display is the same regardless of whether it is in the non-time reduction game state or the time reduction game state, but the second hold display on the first main game side is a "number without a blank". It is a display mode, and the second hold display on the second main game side is a display mode of "filled numbers". It should be noted that the difference between the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side is shown not only by hollowing out or filling, but also by different colors of numbers. It may be configured.

When the configuration of the starting port (see the fifth embodiment) in which the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 alternately (see the fifth embodiment), the first hold on the first main game side is made. The display mode of the display and the display mode of the first hold display on the second main game side may be the same. It may be configured to display the first hold display on the second main game side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the ball has entered the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10.

In the main area, the first decorative symbol uses the entire effect display device SG in the left column, middle column, and right column, from top to bottom (or bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc.). The moving scroll display (specifically, the first decorative symbol displayed in the main area is switched in sequence while scrolling in the order of 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → ... 1 → ... In the sub-area, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the left column, middle column, and right column at the lower right of the effect display device SG. It is displayed as if it is fluctuating on the spot (that is, scroll display that moves from top to bottom (or bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc.) using the entire effect display device SG). Variable display that appears to move from top to bottom or bottom to top, left to right, right to left only in some display areas, or horizontal or vertical rotation only in some display areas Then, by making a half turn or one turn, the display of the second decorative symbol recognized by the player in the partial display area is switched (variable display of the switching display mode). The first decorative symbol may be not only a scroll display but also a horizontal rotation or vertical rotation display that fluctuates on the spot. Further, the first decorative symbol having a role of enlivening the effect is configured so that the type of variable display differs depending on the game state and the effect stage (for example, the first decorative symbol has a low accuracy low base state and the effect mode A). Although it is a scroll display in the above, it is a rotating display in the high-accuracy high-base state and the production mode B), while realizing the variety of production, the second decorative design has the role of grasping the fluctuation status and the stop status. The type of variable display is the same regardless of the game state and the effect stage (for example, the second decorative symbol is in the low accuracy low base state and the effect mode A, and in the high accuracy high base state and the effect mode B). Also, it is preferable to use only scroll display or only rotation display).

Further, as shown in FIG. 128, in the non-time reduction game state, the effect hold display for the effect and the first hold display on the first main game side are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and in the time reduction game state, the effect display device SG is displayed. It is configured to display the effect hold display for the effect and the first hold display on the second main game side at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and the player is currently mainly playing the game by any starting port. (In the non-time shortened game state, the first main game start port A10 is the main, and in the time shortened game state, the second main game start port B10 is the main). "Or" heart (fill) "), or the display position of the first hold display on the first main game side or the first hold display on the second main game side (in the non-time shortened gaming state, the first on the first main game side) 1 The hold display is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and in the time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG). ing. The display mode and display position of the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are the same regardless of whether the game is in the non-time reduction game state or the time reduction game state. Is.

Here, the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the second on the first main game side that can be displayed during the fluctuation in the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state. The display patterns of the hold display and the second hold display on the second main game side will be described in detail below, including changes.
(1) 1st hold display (1-1) In the non-time reduction game state, only the 1st hold display on the 1st main game side is displayed (the 1st hold display on the 2nd main game side is not displayed), and the time is shortened. In the gaming state, only the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed (the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-2) In the non-time shortened gaming state, the first hold display on the first main game side and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed, and in the time shortened game state, the second main game side is displayed. Only 1 hold display is displayed (the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-3) In the non-time reduction game state, only the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed (the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed), and in the time reduction game state, the first main player is displayed. The first hold display on the game side and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed.
(2) Second hold display In both the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state, the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. ..

The area where the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the hold display for the effect of the variation are displayed is collectively referred to as the first hold display area, and the first main game side The area where the second hold display and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed may be collectively referred to as the second hold display area. As a supplement, unlike the first hold display area, the second hold display area does not display the change corresponding to the change display such as the hold display for the effect of the change. That is, the second hold display for indicating that the change is in progress is not additionally displayed, and only the number of holds (the number of unchanged numbers) is displayed until it gets tired.

The effect-holding display of the variation has the same display mode regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side. Specifically, in the non-time shortened gaming state, whether the fluctuation is on the first main game side or the second main game side, it is larger than the first hold display on the first main game side. If it is displayed as "●" and the time is shortened, whether it is a change on the first main game side or a change on the second main game side, it is displayed from the first hold display on the second main game side. It is displayed as a large "heart (fill)". It should be noted that the hold display for effect of the variation can be displayed only in the variation of the first main game side (when the variation start condition of the first main game side is satisfied) in the non-time shortened gaming state {that is, It is configured so that it is not displayed when the change on the 2nd main game side (when the change start condition on the 2nd main game side is satisfied)}, and if the time is shortened, the change on the 2nd main game side (2nd main game side). It is configured so that it can be displayed only when the variation start condition of the game side is satisfied (that is, it is not displayed when the variation of the first main game side (when the variation start condition of the first main game side is satisfied)}. May be good. In addition, as an effect according to the degree of expectation of the change, the display mode of the hold display for the effect of the change may be changed, for example, the color changes (default color (here, filled black) → red, Etc.) or the shape may change (default shape (here, "circle" for the first main game, "heart" for the second main game) → ☆, etc.), and the number of patterns in the display mode In the non-time-reduced gaming state, the number of patterns in the variation on the first main game side (for example, a total of 6 patterns of default color, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color) is provided. The default color <blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color) includes the number of patterns in the variation on the second main game side (for example, a total of three patterns of default color, red, and rainbow color). The degree of expectation is higher than the default color <red <rainbow color.), And in the time-reduced gaming state, the number of patterns in the variation on the second main game side (for example, the default color, blue, yellow, It has a total of 6 patterns of green, red, and rainbow colors. The default color <blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color) is the number of patterns in the fluctuation of the first main game side (the hit expectation degree). For example, it has a pattern of a total of three colors of default color, red, and rainbow color. The hit expectation is higher than the default color <red <rainbow color.). It should be noted that the same relationship of the number of patterns may be adopted for the undigested hold (first hold display).

The display priority of the 1st hold display and the 2nd hold display is 2nd hold display> 1st hold display, and if both hold displays are displayed even during non-normal fluctuations, The display priority of the second hold display is set higher than the display priority of the first hold display. For example, when a notice image (displayed on the entire screen such as the next notice), SP reach, first decorative symbol, etc. is displayed, the second hold display> notice image (or SP reach, first decorative symbol, etc.) > The first hold display is displayed.

Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be duplicated and whether or not the first reserved display and the second reserved display can be duplicated are as follows, including changes (if necessary, FIGS. 126, 128, etc.). See).
(1) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol overlap (1-1) The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol overlap during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) (due to the display priority, the overlapping portion is , The second decorative symbol is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol), the stop display position of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is determined (not shown).
(1-2) The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol do not overlap during the fluctuation standby (variation stop), and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol overlap during the fluctuation (duplicate due to the display priority). In the portion, the stop display position of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is determined so that the second decorative symbol is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol).
For example, if it is a non-time-reduced gaming state, the configuration may be (1-1), if it is a time-reduced gaming state, it may be configured as (1-2), or if it is a non-time-reduced gaming state, it may be configured as (1-1-). The configuration of 2) may be used, and the configuration of (1-1) may be used regardless of the time-reduced gaming state.
(2) Whether or not the first hold display and the second hold display can be duplicated The first hold display (first hold display on the first main game side, second The first hold display and the second hold display so that the first hold display on the main game side) and the second hold display (the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) do not overlap. The display position with the hold display is defined. It can be applied even during the fixed stop.

Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first reserved display can be duplicated, whether or not the second decorative symbol and the second reserved display can be duplicated, whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second reserved display can be duplicated, and whether or not the second decorative symbol and the first reserved display can be duplicated. The possibility of duplication is as follows.
(A) Non-time shortening gaming state (1) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first hold display can overlap The first decorative symbol and the first hold display are displayed in both the variable standby (variation stop) state and the variable state. The display positions of the first decorative symbol and the first reserved display are determined so as to overlap (the first decorative symbol is displayed before the first reserved display in the overlapping portion due to the display priority).
(2) Whether or not the second decorative symbol and the second hold display can be duplicated The second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are arranged so that the second decorative symbol and the second hold display do not overlap during both the variable standby (variation stop) and the variable. The display position of the second hold display is defined.
(3) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second hold display can be duplicated The first decorative symbol and the second hold display overlap both during the variable standby (variation stop) and the variable (duplicate portion due to the display priority). The display position of the first decorative symbol and the second reserved display is determined so that the second reserved display is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol).
(4) Whether or not the second decorative symbol and the first hold display can be duplicated The second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are arranged so that the second decorative symbol and the first hold display do not overlap during both the variable standby (variation stop) and the variable. The display position of the first hold display is defined. In the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol and the first hold display are defined to overlap at least during the fluctuation, and also in the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol and the second hold display are It is set to overlap at least during fluctuations, and may be set to overlap or not to overlap while waiting for fluctuations.
(B) Time reduction game state (1) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first hold display can be duplicated The first decorative symbol and the first hold display overlap in both the variable standby (variation stop) and the variable. The display position of the first decorative pattern and the first hold display is defined so as not to prevent it. In addition, it may be configured to overlap rarely (less frequently than the non-time reduction gaming state) during the fluctuation.
(2) Whether or not the second decorative symbol and the second hold display can be duplicated The second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are arranged so that the second decorative symbol and the second hold display do not overlap during both the variable standby (variation stop) and the variable. The display position of the second hold display is defined.
(3) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second reserved display can be duplicated The first decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol are arranged so that the first decorative symbol and the second reserved display do not overlap during both the variable standby (variation stop) and the variable. The display position of the second hold display is defined. In addition, it may be configured to overlap rarely (less frequently than the non-time reduction gaming state) during the fluctuation.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative symbol and the first hold display can be duplicated The second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are arranged so that the second decorative symbol and the first hold display do not overlap during both the variable standby (variation stop) and the variable. The display position of the first hold display is defined.

Next, the screen display during SP reach will be described with reference to FIG. 129. First, the screen display 1 during SP reach in the non-time reduction gaming state will be described. Currently in SP reach, the change display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, the second hold display "2" on the first main game side, the second hold display "0" on the second main game side, and the change The hold display for production is displayed, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are not displayed. Needless to say, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (however, up to hold 4), and the second main game start port B10. When the game ball enters the ball, the second hold display on the second main game side is updated (however, up to hold 4). The first hold display can be displayed when returning to the normal stage screen (flat ground stage screen, etc.), which is a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state after the end of SP reach. At this time, the SP can be displayed. The first hold display will be displayed including the amount of the ball entered during the reach. Specifically, when the number of holds increases from 2 to 3 during SP reach, the first hold display is not displayed during SP reach, but when returning to the normal stage screen, three first hold displays are displayed. It is. The display priority is sub-area (variation display of the second decorative symbol)> second hold display> hold display for effect of the change> SP reach effect.

Next, the screen display 2 during SP reach in the non-time reduction gaming state will be described. Currently, SP reach is in progress, the movable accessory YK has moved to the front of the effect display device SG, the variation display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, and the second hold display "2" on the first main game side. , The second hold display "0" on the second main game side, the hold display for the effect of the change is displayed, and the change display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are Not displayed. It should be noted that the hold display for the effect of the change may be configured not to be displayed.

In this way, under specific circumstances {during SP reach, while the movable accessory is operating, promotion effect (effect that encourages whether or not to promote from an even numbered symbol that is a non-probable variable symbol to an odd numbered symbol that is a probabilistic variable symbol), error screen display In the middle}, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the SP reach by configuring the configuration so that the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are not displayed. .. Even during SP reach, the configuration may be such that the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are displayed. In this case, the first decoration in the main area may be displayed. It is preferable that the variable display of the symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner of the effect display device SG (almost the same size as the variable display of the second decorative symbol or the variable display of the first decorative symbol is slightly larger), and the main area. By displaying the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the above, it is possible to show the player the reach mode (for example, "4 ↓ 4") and the reach symbol (for example, displaying only one "4"). Become. The display priority is sub-area (variable display of the second decorative symbol)> second hold display> hold display for the effect of the change> liquid crystal display {effect display (in Fig. 129, the star-shaped movable accessory YK falls. When this is done, it is an effect on the effect display device SG that makes it appear as if it is shining upwards with respect to the fall position)}.

Next, the update of the first hold display and the second hold display will be described with reference to FIG. 130. First, the fluctuation is completed, and the fluctuation is stopped with two holds on the first main game side. Next, a new change on the first main game side has just started, the first hold display on the first main game side begins to shift the display position (shift animation starts), and the second on the first main game side. The hold display is subtracted from "2" to "1" immediately after the start of fluctuation. Next, before the shift of the first hold display on the first main game side is completed, the game ball is newly entered into the first main game start opening A10, and the first ball is corresponding to the new entry. The hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) that increases the first hold display on the main game side by one is performed, and the second hold display on the first main game side changes from "1" to "1" immediately after a new ball is entered. It is 2 ".

Here, the characteristic configuration shown with reference to FIG. 130 will be supplemented.

When a new hold occurs (when a game ball newly enters the start port), the execution time of the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) of the first hold display (for example, 1000 ms) {from the lower part of the effect display device SG It is an effect that the hold gradually appears and is displayed in a fixed position (the place where the Nth hold is displayed), and the time from the start of appearance to the completion of the display is 1000 ms} is the update time of the second hold display (the update time of the second hold display). It is an addition time and a subtraction time, and is configured to be longer than, for example, 100 ms). Further, the execution time of the shift display (shift animation) of the first hold display (for example, 1500 ms) {the hold displayed at the place where the Nth hold is displayed is moved, and the N-1th hold is displayed. It is a production that moves to the place where the hold is displayed, and then fits in the fixed position (the place where the N-1th hold is displayed) and displays it, and the time from the start of the move to the completion of the display (movement completion) is 1500 ms}. Is configured to be longer than the update time of the second hold display. Further, the update time of the second hold display is shorter than the variable fixed time (for example, the variable fixed time of the first main game symbol is 500 ms and the variable fixed time of the second main game symbol is 300 ms), and further, the shortest variation. It is configured to be shorter than the time (3000 ms in this embodiment).

Regarding the variable fixed time, the variable fixed time of the first main game symbol was set to 500 ms, and the variable fixed time of the second main game symbol was set to 300 ms, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation of the first main game symbol is not limited to this. The fixed time and the variable fixed time of the second main game symbol may be the same time, and each variable fixed time (for example, the non-time shortened game state is 500 ms and the time shortened game state is 300 ms) is predetermined according to the game state. It may have been. Further, the fluctuation fixed time of the symbol fluctuation may be set to be different according to the number of holds. In this case, when the symbol change is started in the situation where there are 2 to 4 holds, or when the fixed stop is performed, the first main game side The variable fixed time is 500 ms when there is a hold or a hold on the second main game side, and when a symbol change is started in a situation where there is one hold or when a fixed stop occurs, the hold on the first main game side is also the second main game. It is preferable to set the variable fixed time to 0 ms when there is no hold on the side, but the variable fixed time is not limited to this time. Further, it is preferable that the variable fixed time of the first decorative symbol and the variable fixed time of the second decorative symbol are set so as to match the variable fixed time of the first main game symbol and the variable fixed time of the second main game symbol. However, it may be a variable fixed time different from the variable fixed time of the first main game symbol and the variable fixed time of the second main game symbol.

Immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the first hold display can display the shift display (shift animation) and the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) at the same time (overlapping) {that is, the first hold display is on hold. When the shift display (shift animation) starts to be executed during the execution of the occurrence display (hold occurrence animation), the pending occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) and the pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) are performed without interrupting the running pending occurrence display (holding occurrence animation). When the shift display (shift animation) can be executed at the same time and the execution of the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) is started during the execution of the shift display (shift animation), the shift display (shift animation) being executed is started. ) Can be executed at the same time without interrupting the shift display (shift animation) and the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation). } However, in the second hold display, it is impossible to display subtraction and addition at the same time, and after performing the subtraction display (due to the start of fluctuation), the addition is displayed (due to the entry into the starting port). It will be. When the number of holds increases immediately before the start of fluctuation and the start of fluctuation occurs, the second hold display is to display the addition (due to the start of fluctuation) and then the subtraction (due to the start of fluctuation). In both subtraction and addition, the time required for this update display (for example, updating from "2" to "1" or updating from "1" to "2") (because the number display is switched). The time required) is 100 ms.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the relationship between the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of "(1) Blue hold change" will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with four holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the hold is four due to the new ball entry, and the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the new ball entry is the blue hold. Next, the fluctuation immediately before the blue hold is completed, and the fluctuation immediately before is lost (“861”) and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation corresponding to the blue hold is started, and the blue hold is displayed as the effect hold display (blue) of the change. In addition, when the fluctuation starts in the blue hold, it is easier to select a shorter fluctuation time than in the case where the fluctuation starts in the red hold (in other words, it is easier to select the fluctuation time with a low expectation of hitting). Next, the first decorative symbol has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach, and 7 reach has a higher expectation of big hit than other reach (eg, 2 reach)) (first). 2 Decorative symbols do not have a specific reach mode and continue to display fluctuations), but when the fluctuation starts with blue hold, it is a specific reach mode than when the fluctuation starts with red hold, which will be described later. The probability of becoming is low. Next, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) are hit, but if the fluctuation starts in the blue hold, the fluctuation starts in the red hold. The probability of a particular final display mode is lower than when it is started. Next, the case of "(2) Red hold change" will be described. The basic flow is the same as "(1) Blue hold change effect", but the display mode of the look-ahead effect (hold change effect) is different. First, it is in a variable stop state with four holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the hold is four due to the new ball entry, and the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the new ball entry is the red hold. Next, the fluctuation immediately before the red hold is completed, and the fluctuation immediately before is lost (“861”) and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the variation corresponding to the red hold is started, and the red hold is displayed as the effect hold display (red) of the change. In addition, when the fluctuation starts in the red hold, it is easy to select a longer fluctuation time than in the case where the fluctuation starts in the blue hold (in other words, it is easy to select the fluctuation time with a high expectation of hitting). Next, the first decorative symbol has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative symbol does not have a specific reach mode and continues to be displayed in a variable manner), but it is on hold in red. When the fluctuation starts, the probability of becoming a specific reach mode is higher than when the fluctuation starts with the blue hold. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are hits are displayed, but if the fluctuation starts with the red hold, the fluctuation starts with the blue hold. There is a higher probability that a particular final display mode will be achieved than when it is started. As an example, the probability of reaching reach with blue hold is 90% of the fluctuations related to blue hold, and the probability of reaching reach with red hold is 99% of the fluctuations related to red hold, the difference being 9%. Is. In addition, the probability of reaching a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) with blue hold is 5% when reaching with a fluctuation related to blue hold, and a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) with red hold. The probability of becoming is 30% when it reaches the reach due to the fluctuation related to the red hold. The difference is 25%. In this way, the probability of reaching is high in both blue hold and red hold, and the difference is set not to be large, and the probability of reaching a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) is set not to be so high. Moreover, it is desirable that the difference be large as it is. As a result, while the expectation of reaching by changing the hold is guaranteed to some extent, by setting a difference in the expectation for the subsequent development (which number will reach), the first hold display will be displayed. The content suggested by the difference in display mode can be complicated. These numerical values (percentages) are examples and can be changed as appropriate, but it is desirable to have such a magnitude relationship.

When the first decorative symbol is in the reach mode, the second decorative symbol may also be configured in the reach mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of "(1) Number of pending numbers 1" will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with one hold. Next, the fluctuation has started. When the fluctuation starts with the number of holds 1, it is easier to select a longer fluctuation time than when the fluctuation starts with the number of holds 4, which will be described later. Next, the first decorative symbol has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative symbol does not have a specific reach mode and continues to be variablely displayed), but has a specific reach. The probabilities of the embodiments are the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are hits are displayed, but the probability of becoming the specific final display mode is irrespective of the number of reservations. Same or slightly different. Next, the case of "(2) Number of holds 4" will be described. The flow at the time of fluctuation is the same as "(1) Number of holdings 1", so it is omitted. However, when the number of holdings is 4, the fluctuation start is selected. Easy to do. Further, as described in the explanation of "(1) Number of reservations 1", the first decorative symbol has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (if the second decorative symbol has a specific reach mode). However, the probability of becoming a specific reach mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are hits. Although the final display mode (here, 7 sets) is displayed, the probability of becoming a specific final display mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations.

When the first decorative symbol is in the reach mode, the second decorative symbol may also be configured in the reach mode.

Next, the relationship between the gaming state and the final display mode will be described with reference to FIG. 133. First, the non-time reduction gaming state will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with one hold. Next, the fluctuation is started, the first decorative symbol becomes the reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the variable display is continued), and finally, the first decoration. The symbol and the second decorative symbol are the final display modes showing the hitting mode, but as the final display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, in addition to the symbol alignment (for example, "777"), a latent mode is used. It is configured so that a mode transition symbol (eg, a "latent" symbol) indicating transition to may be displayed. Next, the time-reduced gaming state will be described. The explanation of the flow of fluctuation is omitted because it is the same as the non-time reduction gaming state. In the time-reduced gaming state, the final display mode in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol indicate the hitting mode is only the symbol alignment (for example, "777"), and the mode transition symbol indicating the transition to the latent mode is performed. Is configured not to be displayed. That is, as for the number of candidates for the final display mode, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are provided in the non-time-reduced gaming state more than in the time-reduced gaming state. With this configuration, when hitting from the non-time shortened gaming state, the transition to the latent mode is included to make various game features, and when hitting from the time shortened gaming state, the transition to the latent mode is not included. , The game state can be recognized by the player, that is, the game can be made simple and clear during the consecutive villas. Furthermore, after a specific reach mode (again, 7 reach with high expectation is desirable), there are "767", "787", and "777" in the non-time reduction gaming state, and each appears 1/3 as an example. On the other hand, there are "787" and "777" in the time-reduced game state, and as an example, each of them appears by 1/2, and in the time-reduced game state, the probability of being off is reduced to reach 7 reach. In such a case, it is possible to limit the fact that the middle symbol comes off without reaching 7, and it is possible to raise the degree of expectation as compared with the non-time reduction gaming state.

In the non-time shortened gaming state, as the final display mode indicating the hit mode, the mode transition symbol indicating the transition to the latent mode may be displayed in the first decorative symbol, but the first decorative symbol may be displayed in the second decorative symbol. The mode transition symbol displayed on the symbol may not be displayed, and may be configured to indicate the transition to the latent mode in a different final display mode. For example, in the second decorative symbol, "357" or "246" may be used. In addition, a combination of odd-numbered symbols or a combination of even-numbered symbols may be displayed, and the combination of odd-numbered symbols may be configured so that the probability of being in a probability fluctuation state in the latent mode is higher than that of the combination of even-numbered symbols. ..

Next, the relationship between the game state and the hitting warning display (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display) will be described with reference to FIG. 134. First, the hitting warning display in the non-time reduction gaming state will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with one hold on the first main game side. Here, there is no display indicating how to hit the player. Next, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are updated, and a left-handed warning is given. The display is performed until the end condition (for example, 10 seconds, entering the first main game start port A10, etc.) is satisfied, and a warning is given by voice together with the left-handed warning display (for example, "left-handed"). Please do it "x 3 times). The left-handed warning display may be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed at a position easily recognized by the player, but overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the first hold display, and the second hold display. Is configured not to be displayed. Even if the ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the non-time shortened game state and the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side are updated, the ball is left-handed. No warning is displayed. Next, the hitting warning display in the time-reduced gaming state will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with one hold on the second main game side. Here, a right-handed instruction display (“→→ right-handed →→”), which is a display indicating how to hit the player, is displayed. The right-handed instruction display (“→→ right-handed →→”) is displayed in the time-reduced gaming state, and does not depend on the update display of the number of holds (for example, the addition of the second hold display), and the time is shortened. If it is in the game state, it will be displayed continuously. Next, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed), and further. , The right-handed warning display is continued until the end condition (for example, entering the second main game start opening B10, etc.) is satisfied, and the right-handed warning display and the voice warning are given (for example, "right-handed". please"). The right-handed warning display may be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed at a position easily recognized by the player, but overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the first hold display, and the second hold display. Is configured not to be displayed. Even if the ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time-reduced game state and the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are updated, a right-handed warning is given. No display is done. In addition, a voice warning ("Please hit right", "Please hit left") is output without displaying the hitting warning display (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display) on the effect display device SG. It may be configured to be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability (re-variation probability) that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed will be described. First, the flow of the production will be explained using the case of "blue hold change-> re-variation (pseudo-ream)". First, there are three holds on the first main game side, and the first hold display is displayed in blue hold, which is a variable stop state. Next, the fluctuation due to the blue hold is started (blue is displayed as the hold display for the effect of the fluctuation), and "6" is displayed in the left column and "7" is displayed in the right column. As a notice, a pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol (here, translucent "NEXT") in which the pseudo-continuous symbol (here, the non-transparent "NEXT") described later is translucent is displayed from the top to the bottom of the effect display device SG. It is scrolled to. Next, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is scrolled to the substantially center of the effect display device SG, and the pseudo-ream symbol indicating that the pseudo-ream is generated is displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-link symbol has stopped, next, re-variation is performed so that the symbol is in a fluctuating state in all the symbol columns, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column. ing. As the first decorative symbol, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol may be displayed, but as the second decorative symbol, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol are not displayed. Next, the display mode (in this example, the blue hold change and the red hold change) of the look-ahead effect (hold change effect) and the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed will be described. As described above, when the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed, a pseudo-ream that becomes a re-variation occurs, but the probability that the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed is configured to differ depending on the display mode of the look-ahead effect (pending change effect). For example, in the case of blue hold with low hit expectation, the probability of re-variation (probability of occurrence of pseudo-ream) is low, and in the case of red hold with high hit expectation, the probability of re-variation is high (that is,). The probability of re-variation may be configured as red hold> blue hold). In the above, the case where the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol are displayed from the display in which the left symbol and the right symbol are not the same (not reach) is not limited to this, but the left symbol and the right symbol are Not only is the configuration in which the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol are displayed from the same reach display, and the first decorative symbol is revariable (pseudo-ream), but the second decorative symbol is also revariable (pseudo-ream). ) Possible configuration, the pseudo-ream symbol may be a specific symbol (for example, "7"), and the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the symbol string in which the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed are in the left column or the right column. There may be. Furthermore, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is displayed at a predetermined position without scrolling (for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (substantially in the center of the effect display device SG), in the vicinity of the hold display, etc.). It may be suggested that re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed, and in this case, the pseudo-ream symbol is configured to scroll and fluctuate and be displayed in the center portion of the middle symbol sequence (substantially center of the effect display device SG). You may.

Next, using FIG. 136, the pseudo-ream during the fluctuation of the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed during the look-ahead effect display (re-variation probability) and the trigger variation (variation related to the hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect). The relationship between the probability of displaying a symbol (probability of re-variation) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with two holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, and the background is displayed in translucent black, which is a display mode of high expectation of the look-ahead effect. In this way, when the display mode of the high expectation of the look-ahead effect is displayed, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol may be configured not to be displayed, and the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol may be displayed. May be displayed, but with a low probability. Next, the background is continuously displayed in translucent black, and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the trigger fluctuation is started, and the background is a normal background (not translucent black). Next, with "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is scrolled from the top to the bottom of the effect display device SG. Next, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is scrolled to the substantially center of the effect display device SG, and the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed at the substantially center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-link symbol has stopped, next, re-variation is performed so that the symbol is in a fluctuating state in all the symbol columns, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column. ing. In this way, in the fluctuation related to the hold prior to the fluctuation related to the hold that triggered the occurrence of the look-ahead effect (so-called trigger fluctuation), the display mode of the look-ahead effect is a display mode with a high degree of expectation (here, translucent). A black background) can be displayed, but the pseudo-ream pattern is not displayed and re-variation (pseudo-ream) does not occur, or when the display mode of the look-ahead effect is a display mode with a high degree of expectation, the look-ahead effect is displayed. It may be configured so that the probability that the pseudo-ream pattern is displayed and re-variation (pseudo-ream) occurs is lower than when the display mode of is low expectation, and in the trigger fluctuation, the high expectation of the look-ahead effect is high. Since the display mode of the degree cannot be displayed and the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol can be displayed, re-variation (pseudo-ream) may occur, or the pseudo-ream is larger than the fluctuation related to the hold before the trigger fluctuation. It may be configured so that the symbol is displayed and the probability that re-variation (pseudo-ream) occurs is high. Furthermore, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is displayed at a predetermined position without scrolling (for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (substantially in the center of the effect display device SG), in the vicinity of the hold display, etc.). It may be suggested that re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed, and in this case, the pseudo-ream symbol is configured to scroll and fluctuate and be displayed in the center portion of the middle symbol sequence (substantially center of the effect display device SG). You may.

Next, using FIG. 137, the decorative symbol after the power is turned off and the power is turned off (when the RAM is not cleared, that is, when S1002 → S1008 → S1010 → S1012 → S1014 → ... In FIG. 5). The relationship between the two will be explained. First, (A) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage A (stopping fluctuation), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". .. The second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, stage A, which is set as the default stage after recovering from the power off, is displayed, and "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed as before the power was turned off. There is. The display mode of the second decorative symbol is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before and after the power is turned off, etc., and is displayed here as "861". Next, (B) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage B (stopping fluctuation), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and is displayed as "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)". .. The second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, stage A, which is set as the default stage after recovering from the power off, is displayed, and unlike before the power off, "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed. There is. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Next, (C), which is a modification of (A), will be described. First, the player is staying in stage A (the fluctuation is stopped), and the first decorative pattern is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". The second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, the stage A, which is set as the default stage after returning from the power off, is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is different from the one before the power off, which is the default display when the power is turned off. 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe) "is displayed. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Here, only the first decorative symbol has been changed, but if the power is cut off during the stay in stage B and the power is restored, the default stage, stage A, is the first decoration when the power is turned off and restored. It returns with "2 (friend), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)" which is the default display of the symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the relationship between the decorative symbols after the power is turned off and after the power is turned off (when the RAM is cleared; when S1002 → S1004 → S1006 → ... In FIG. 5) will be described. First, (A) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage A (stopping fluctuation), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". .. The second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, when the RAM is cleared, the stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed after the power is turned off. , 3 (penguins), 1 (chicks) ”. The display mode of the second decorative symbol is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before and after the power is turned off, etc., and is displayed here as "331". Next, (B) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage B (stopping fluctuation), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and is displayed as "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)". .. The second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, when the RAM is cleared, the stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed after the power is turned off. ), 3 (penguins), 1 (chicks) ”. The display mode of the second decorative symbol is numerically displayed as "331".

In this way, when the RAM is cleared (RAM is cleared and the power is turned off and restored), a predetermined display mode (here, stage A) is displayed regardless of the effect state (stage, etc.) before the power is turned off and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. , The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are both configured to be "331"), so that the player, the game clerk, and the like can easily grasp that the RAM has been cleared.

The default display of the first decorative symbol when the RAM is cleared, "3 (penguins), 3 (penguins), 1 (chicks)" may be a display mode that can be displayed only when the RAM is cleared, or during normal gaming. However, for example, it may be configured to be displayed as a premier effect in which a big hit is almost confirmed. Further, the display mode when the RAM is cleared is the same as the default display mode when the power is turned off and restored (the display mode is the same as (C) in FIG. 137), and when the RAM is cleared, the first decorative symbol is "2 ( It may be displayed as "Friend), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)", and the second decorative symbol may be displayed as "246" by a number.

Next, using FIG. 139, the probability that the reach voice (a notice that suggests the hit expectation degree etc. by the sound generated when the reach is established) and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed (re-variation probability), which is the effect at the time of reach. The relationship between the two is explained. The hit expectation of the reach voice is reach <chance <development <super hot. In addition, it should be added in advance that this figure explains the probability of re-variation due to the reach voice at the time of reach establishment in the fluctuation that develops to a predetermined SP reach after the reach is established. First, (A) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "reach" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo-ream symbol "NEXT" is displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device SG (middle row of the first decorative symbol), and is re-variable (pseudo-ream). In this way, when the reach voice of "reach" is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is set to high. Next, (B) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "chance" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo-ream symbol "NEXT" is displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device SG (middle row of the first decorative symbol), and is re-variable (pseudo-ream). In this way, when the reach voice of "chance" is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is set to the middle. Next, (C) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "development" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" is not displayed on the effect display device SG, but develops into a super reach effect, and the super reach effect is displayed. In this way, when the reach voice of "development" is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is 0, and the super reach effect is directly developed without re-variation. Next, (D) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "super hot" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo-ream symbol "NEXT" is displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device SG (middle row of the first decorative symbol), and is re-variable (pseudo-ream). In this way, when the reach voice of "super hot" is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is set to low.

In this way, the probability of re-variation (pseudo-ream) decreases as the reach voice with high hit expectation occurs, but some reach voices occur among the reach voices with high hit expectation. In this case (here, the reach voice of "development"), it is configured so that re-variation (pseudo-ream) does not occur. It should be noted that, among the reach voices with high hit expectations, even if some reach voices (for example, "development" reach voices) occur, re-variation (pseudo-ream) is configured to occur. When some reach voices (for example, "development" reach voices) occur, the re-variation probability is set to high (for example, the re-variation probability is higher than that of "chance"). You may.

In other words, the hit expectation by reach voice is reach <chance <development <super hot, and the probability of re-variation (pseudo-ream) by reach voice is
(1) Development (including non-occurrence) <super hot <chance <reach (2) super hot <chance <development ≤ reach, and so on, it is possible to configure the order different from the hit expectation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, a display mode of the decorative symbol in the full rotation effect will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Next, the fluctuation has started and is reaching. Next, the characters "full rotation" are displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device SG, and the symbols are aligned in the left column, middle column, and right column of the first decorative symbol (for example, "777" and "888". "Etc.), and the scroll display is slower than the normal fluctuation (for example, the state of the second figure). As described above, the first decorative symbol can be scrolled and displayed with the symbols aligned, but the first decorative symbol can be scrolled and displayed even when the symbols are aligned. Is displayed in a variable manner individually in the left column, middle column, and right column in a state where the symbols are not aligned, and it does not become low speed (= keeps a constant speed). Next, substantially at the same time as the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a state where the symbols are aligned only with numbers. The second decorative symbol may also be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the symbols are aligned (for example, "777", "888", etc.) so as to be synchronized with the first decorative symbol.

Next, the variation mode of the decorative design for each stage will be described with reference to FIG. 141. First, stage A will be described. In stage A, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a scroll display that moves the display area of the effect display device SG from top to bottom, and the second decorative symbol is displayed on the spot (second). The variable display is performed by the scroll display that seems to move from the top to the bottom in the display area of the decorative pattern). Next, stage B will be described. In stage B, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative symbol is horizontally rotated on the spot to change the symbol, and the second decorative symbol is displayed on the spot (second) as in the stage A. The variable display is performed by the scroll display that seems to move from the top to the bottom in the display area of the decorative pattern). In this way, since the first decorative symbol is a symbol that is easy for the player to see, the player does not get bored by changing the variation mode depending on the stage, and the second decorative symbol is difficult for the player to see. Since it is a design, it is displayed in the same variation mode without changing the variation mode depending on the stage. Here, the stage A is a stage corresponding to the non-time shortened gaming state (or the non-time shortened gaming state and the non-probability variable gaming state), and the stage B is the time shortened gaming state (or the time shortened gaming state and). It may be a stage corresponding to a probabilistic variable gaming state), or both stages A and B are stages corresponding to a non-time shortening gaming state (or a non-time shortening gaming state and a non-probability fluctuating gaming state). It may be configured so that the transition from stage A to stage B is possible. In addition, the stage may be referred to as an effect mode.

In addition, a scroll display that moves the display area of the effect display device SG from top to bottom, a scroll display that moves the display area of the effect display device SG from right to left, and a variable display in which the design is changed by rotating horizontally on the spot. , Etc. may be referred to as a variable display format, that is, a variable display format in which the display area of the effect display device SG is scrolled to move from top to bottom, and a variable display in which the design is changed by rotating horizontally on the spot. The variable display format is different from the variable display format in which the above is executed.

Next, the details of the display contents of the decorative symbol during the change will be described with reference to FIG. 142. First, (A) will be described. (A) is a figure regarding the display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the variation pattern that becomes the reach. First, the fluctuation is stopped at stage B. Next, the variation is started, and in each of the left column, middle column, and right column of the first decorative symbol, the variation is changed in a variation mode in which the symbol is changed by rotating horizontally, and the second decorative symbol is changed. In each of the left column, middle column, and right column, the fluctuation mode is such that vertical scrolling is performed on the spot. In each symbol row of the first decorative symbol, the symbols are changed in a regular order as "1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → ...", and in the second decorative symbol, Regardless of the variation of the first decorative symbol, a predetermined pattern variation is uniformly performed, and "275"-> "864"-> "387"-> "641"-> "728"-> "413". → "156" → "532" → "275" → ... The symbols are scrolled and switched. Next, at the timing when the reach is established with "7" in the first decorative symbol, and at the timing when the changing "6" is located in the central part of the middle symbol row (substantially the center of the effect display device SG). In the changing second decorative symbol, "275" is located in the sub-region, and thus the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol at a predetermined timing when the reach is established is different. Further, in the second decorative symbol, the symbols in the left column and the right column are different, and the reach is not established.

Next, (B) will be described. (B) is a diagram relating to the display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in a variable pattern that is lost without reaching. First, the fluctuation is stopped at stage B. Next, the fluctuation is started, and in each of the left column, middle column, and right column of the first decorative symbol, the fluctuation is changed in a variation mode in which the symbol is changed by rotating horizontally (high-speed fluctuation). 2 In each of the left column, middle column, and right column of the decorative symbols, the fluctuation mode is such that vertical scrolling is performed on the spot. Next, it is the timing immediately before the stop of the left column, the left column of the first decorative symbol is in a low-speed fluctuation state, "8" is displayed, and the middle column and the right column are in a high-speed fluctuation. At this time (for a moment), "868" is displayed (however, the symbol on the right is not reach because it is changing at high speed). The second decorative symbol is fluctuating at a normal speed (the second decorative symbol fluctuates only at a substantially normal speed. It may be configured to fluctuate at a low speed during a full rotation effect), and at this time (for a moment). However, "864" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing of the left column, the left column of the first decorative symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), the middle column and the right column of the first decorative symbol are changing at high speed, and at this time (in an instant). However, "168" is displayed. The second decorative symbol is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "387" is displayed. Next, it is the timing just before the stop of the right column, "1" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column of the first decorative symbol, and "5" is displayed in the right column during low speed fluctuation. Yes, the middle row is changing at high speed, and at this time (for a moment), "165" is displayed. The second decorative symbol is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "641" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing of the right symbol. In the left column of the first decorative symbol, "1" is stopped (temporary stop), and in the right column, "6" is stopped (temporary stop). The middle row is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and at this time (for a moment), "166" is displayed. The second decorative symbol is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "728" is displayed. Next, at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time, "1" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column of the first decorative symbol, and "6" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right column. The middle column is changing at low speed, and "116" is displayed. The second decorative symbol is changing at a normal speed, and "413" is displayed. Next, it is the timing at which the fluctuation time ends, and a fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the fluctuation time (also to stop and display the fluctuation of the decorative symbol) is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. Both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have stopped fluctuating (fixed stop) at "126".

In the first decorative symbol, in the left column and the right column from immediately before the stop (temporary stop) to the stop (temporary stop), or from immediately before the variable stop (fixed stop) to the variable stop (fixed stop). The symbols are changed in the order in which they are arranged consecutively in advance, resulting in a variable stop (fixed stop). The symbol displayed immediately before the stop (fixed stop) is changed to the final stop symbol in an instant, resulting in a variable stop (fixed stop). In this example, in the first decorative symbol, the left column is changed to "8 → 1" from immediately before the stop (temporary stop) in the left column to the stop (temporary stop) in the left column, and the stop in the right column (temporary stop). From immediately before the temporary stop) to the stop (temporary stop) in the right column, the right column is changed to "5 → 6", and from immediately before the variable stop (fixed stop) to the variable stop (fixed stop), the middle The column has been changed from "1 to 2". In the second decorative symbol, since it continues to fluctuate at the normal speed until the fluctuation stop, the symbol displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) is changed to "126", which is the final stop symbol, in an instant. , The left column is changed to "3 → 1", the middle column is changed to "6 → 2", and the right column is changed to "2 → 6". However, since the symbols are randomly displayed during the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol, the symbol displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) and the final stop symbol may accidentally continue.

Further, the symbol arrangement pattern of the second decorative symbol may be regularly continuous. For example, as in the case of the first decorative symbol, "1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → ... "." May be displayed, but in this case, the symbols displayed in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are displayed differently. Specifically, if the specifications are such that the display is shifted by one, the left column starts with "1" and "1 → 2 → 3 → ...", and the middle column starts with "2" and "2 → 3 → 4". → ... ”, the right column starts with“ 3 ”and is changed to“ 3 → 4 → 5 → ... ”, and is changed to the final stop symbol at the time of variable stop (fixed stop).

In this way, in the first decorative symbol, the symbol displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the symbol displayed at the time of the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) (final stop symbol) are continuous or continuous. In many cases, in the second decorative symbol, the symbol displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the symbol displayed at the time of the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) (final stop symbol) are not continuous or continuous. There are many things.

Next, the pseudo-continuous symbol, the developed symbol, and the relationship between the pseudo-continuous symbol and the developed symbol will be described. In the following description, the configuration for displaying the first decorative symbol, the first hold display, etc. during the super reach, etc. will be shown, but as described above, the first decorative symbol, the first hold display, etc. will be displayed during the super reach, etc. A configuration that does not display may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing a display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol when the revariation is executed. First, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at "861". The first decorative symbol is composed of a character and a numerical symbol, and the second decorative symbol is composed of only a numerical symbol. Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start the symbol variation. Next, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed with "6" on the left symbol and the right symbol to form a reach, and further, re-variation (for example, pseudo continuous variation) is executed in the main area. A semi-transparent "NEXT" symbol ("revariation suggestion symbol", "pseudo-ream suggestion symbol (pseudo-ream suggestion effect)") that suggests whether or not to move is displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the liquid crystal screen. Next, when re-variation is executed, a non-transparent "NEXT" symbol (also referred to as "re-variation symbol" or "pseudo-continuous symbol") is placed in the center of the LCD screen instead of the translucent "NEXT" symbol. Is displayed. At this time, no symbol suggesting re-variation is displayed in the sub-region. After the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed in the main area, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start the symbol variation again (the first decorative symbol before the symbol variation is started again). The stop status is also called "temporary stop"). At this time, since the number of holdings is still 3, it can be seen that it appears as if the symbol is changed a plurality of times in one symbol change. Next, in the symbol change performed again, the reach was formed again with "7" by the left symbol and the right symbol, and then the super reach effect was executed. Since the change was a loss, the first decorative symbol and the second Both decorative patterns have been confirmed and stopped with reach-missing patterns ("717") that are not doublet. During the super reach effect, the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed in the center of the LCD screen, so even if it is the first decorative pattern, only the number symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner of the screen ( (Also referred to as "display mode at the time of evacuation"), the player is made to pay attention to the battle effect, and after the end of the battle effect, it is displayed with a decorative symbol composed of a character and a numerical symbol as in the case of the start of the fluctuation. It should be noted that the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is displayed at a predetermined position without scrolling (for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (substantially in the center of the effect display device SG), in the vicinity of the hold display, etc.). It may be suggested that re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed, and in this case, the pseudo-ream symbol is configured to scroll and fluctuate and be displayed in the center portion of the middle symbol sequence (substantially center of the effect display device SG). You may.

Next, FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific symbol is displayed and a super reach effect is obtained. First, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start the symbol variation. Next, in both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, "6" is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol to form a reach, and further, in the main area, a specific symbol indicating that the super reach effect is developed ( After "development" or "development !!!", which is also called a development pattern), is displayed, the super reach effect is executed. When the specific symbol is displayed in the main area, the symbol indicating that the super reach effect is developed is not displayed in the sub area. Further, although "development" and "development !!!" are different symbols, the super reach effect which is the same development destination can be executed regardless of which one is displayed. Furthermore, the expectation of hitting is different between "development" and "development !!!", and when "development !!!" is displayed, the big hit expectation is higher than when "development" is displayed. The degree is high. In addition, there are multiple types of super reach effects, for example, super reach effects with different characters and different expectations for hitting, and super reach effects such as the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach are configured in multiple stages. As a development pattern for super reach production, it has not only a pattern that becomes the super reach second half via the first half of the super reach, but also a pattern that the second half of the super reach is displayed without going through the first half of the super reach. May be good. Therefore, when "development" or "development !!!" is displayed, for example, the super reach effect A (character A) may be displayed together. At this time, the super reach effect A may be displayed. It is possible to configure the jackpot expectations to be different (“development” → super reach effect A and “development !!!” → super reach effect A have different jackpot expectations). Also, in the case of being composed of the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach, the same super reach first half is displayed when "development" is displayed and when "development !!!" is displayed. Even so, it is possible to configure the ratio to be different in the latter half of the super reach. Of course, depending on the type of development symbol (“development”, “development !!!”, etc.), the possibility of developing into a super reach with a high expectation of a big hit among a plurality of types of super reach may be different. In addition, a low expectation super reach with a relatively low jackpot expectation (for example, a super reach production by a giraffe described later) and a high expectation super reach with a relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, a battle production with a super reach production). ) May be provided.

As a supplement, here, the first decorative symbol is composed of a second element (for example, a number) and a first element (for example, a character, etc.) at the start of fluctuation, at the stop of fluctuation, and before the development of super reach. However, under certain circumstances caused by the effect pattern (for example, during super reach, during movable accessory movement, during probabilistic promotion effect, error screen display. Here, super reach), only the second element (number) It is composed of.

Next, FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the development symbol is displayed corresponding to the notice type and the super reach effect is achieved. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, a notice is displayed during the symbol change (a "comment notice" that suggests the jackpot expectation with characters in an oval frame, and a "timer" that displays the time until the effect suggesting the jackpot expectation is displayed. "Notice" and "next notice" indicating that the change will result in super reach) will be given. First, when the "chance" which is the "comment notice" is displayed, the "development" which is a specific symbol indicating that the super reach effect is developed is displayed, and the super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when "00: 10:00" (a display indicating that some kind of effect will occur after 10 seconds), which is a "timer notice", is displayed, it is a specific symbol indicating that the super reach effect is developed. After "Development !!!" is displayed, the super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when the "next SP reach" which is the "next notice" is displayed, the specific symbol is not displayed and the super reach effect is executed. In this way, "development" is displayed after "comment notice", "development !!!" is displayed after "timer notice", and a specific symbol is not displayed after "next notice". Has been done. Here, it is assumed that "development" is displayed after "comment notice" and "development !!!" is displayed after "timer notice", but this is not the only case. Instead, "Development !!!" can be displayed after "Comment Notice", and "Development" can be displayed after "Timer Notice", and "Development !!!" is displayed after "Comment Notice". The percentage of "Development !!!" displayed after "Timer notice" may be higher than the percentage of "Timer notice", and "Comment notice" is displayed rather than "Development" displayed after "Timer notice". The percentage of "development" displayed after is may be high. In addition, there is a difference in the jackpot expectation between "development" and "development !!!" mentioned above (big hit expectation: development <development !!!), and "comment notice", "timer notice" and "next notice". There is also a difference in the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is comment notice <timer notice <next notice.

Further, a game adopting a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol described above in FIG. 32. In the machine, the configuration shown in the figure may be adopted. In such a configuration, in all the gaming states (including all the gaming states), the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is more than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. ) May be adopted, or in a predetermined gaming state of 1 or more, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol) is larger than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for (symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach effect is obtained when different display modes are used among the same notice types. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, a notice display {"Comment notice" ("Chance" and "Gekijou !!" are both comment notices), which suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit with letters in an oval frame, is displayed during the pattern change. Will be. First, when "chance" is displayed, "development", which is a specific symbol indicating that the super reach effect is developed, is displayed, and the super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when the display of "super heat !!" is displayed, the super reach effect is executed after the specific symbol "development !!!" indicating that the super reach effect is developed is displayed. In this way, "development" is displayed after "chance", and "development !!!" is displayed after "heat !!". In this case, it is assumed that "development" is displayed after "chance" and "development !!!" is displayed after "heat !!". Not limited, "development !!!" can be displayed after "chance", and "development" can be displayed after "heat !!", and "development !!!" is displayed after "chance". The rate at which "development !!!" is displayed after "heat !!" may be higher than the rate at which "development" is displayed, and the rate at which "development" is displayed after "heat !!" The rate at which "development" is displayed after "chance" may be higher than that. As mentioned above, just as there is a difference in jackpot expectations between "development" and "development !!!", there is also a difference in jackpot expectations between "chance" and "super heat !!" "!" Has a higher expectation of a big hit than "chance".

Further, a game adopting a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol described above in FIG. 32. The configuration shown in the figure may be adopted in the machine. In such a configuration, in all the gaming states (including all the gaming states), the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is more than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. ) May be adopted, or in a predetermined gaming state of 1 or more, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol) is larger than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for (symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition when different look-ahead effects are performed to obtain a super reach effect. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Next, the first hold display changes to blue and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, "development" is displayed in the symbol change related to the trigger hold (hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect. Here, the blue hold display), and the super reach effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when a continuous roll (here, "123"), which is a chance look-ahead for the combination of decorative symbols when the fluctuation is stopped, occurs, "Development !!!" is displayed in the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger hold. , A super reach effect (not shown) is executed. When the chance pre-reading occurs, a special effect is generated around the first decorative symbol that has been confirmed and stopped, making it easier to recognize that the chance pre-reading has occurred, and the special effect is generated for the second decorative symbol. It may be configured so that it does not occur. In this way, "development" is displayed after the hold change effect is displayed as the look-ahead effect, and "development !!!" is displayed after the chance eye is displayed as the look-ahead effect. There is. In this case, it is assumed that "development" is displayed after the pending change effect and "development !!!" is displayed after the chance look-ahead, but this is not limited to this. "Development !!!" is displayed after the hold change effect, and "Development !!!" is displayed after the chance look-ahead rather than "Development !!!" is displayed after the hold change effect. In this case, "development" may be displayed after the chance look-ahead, and "development" is displayed after the chance look-ahead, rather than the ratio of "development" after the hold change effect. The percentage of "development" displayed may be high. As mentioned above, just as there is a difference in jackpot expectation between "development" and "development !!!", there is also a difference in jackpot expectation between the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead, and the chance look-ahead is more than the hold change effect. Expectations for big hits are high. In this example, the explanation was made using the correspondence between the pending change effect and the development pattern (“development” and “development !!!”) in the chance look-ahead, but if it is a look-ahead effect, it may be another effect. Often, for example, it can also be applied to the "angel zone" and the "true angel zone", which are background change effects. Further, in this example, the explanation is made using the difference in the jackpot expectation in one look-ahead effect (hold change effect or chance look-ahead), but whether or not a plurality of types of look-ahead effects are executed at the same time or is executed at the same time. Depending on the number of look-ahead effects (composite number of look-ahead effects), the correspondence with the development symbols (“development” and “development !!!”) may be different. For example, when the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead (two types of look-ahead effect) are executed than when only the hold change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the development symbol in the trigger fluctuation Is easy to display, or when only the hold change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the ratio of "development !!!" is displayed, the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead (look-ahead effect is 2). It may be configured so that the ratio of "development !!!" is displayed is higher when the type) is executed. In this case, there are two types of hold change effect and chance look-ahead effect (two types of look-ahead effect). ) Is displayed, even if the rate of displaying "development" is higher than the rate of displaying "development" when only the hold change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed. good. Similarly to the developed symbol, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also a pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT”” depending on whether or not a plurality of types of look-ahead effects are executed at the same time or the number of look-ahead effects (complex number of look-ahead effects) executed at the same time. It may be configured so that the correspondence with "NEXT !!!") is different. For example, when the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead (two types of look-ahead effect) are executed than when only the hold change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the trigger fluctuation is pseudo-ream. When the design is easy to display, or when only the hold change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the ratio of "NEXT !!!" is displayed, the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead (look-ahead effect). When (2 types) are executed, the ratio of "NEXT !!!" is displayed may be higher. In this case, the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead (look-ahead effect is 2). The rate at which "NEXT" is displayed is higher than the rate at which "NEXT" is displayed when only the hold change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed. May be good.

Further, a game adopting a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol described above in FIG. 32. The configuration shown in the figure may be adopted in the machine. In such a configuration, in all the gaming states (including all the gaming states), the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is more than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. ) May be adopted, or in a predetermined gaming state of 1 or more, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol) is larger than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for (symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition when different display modes of the same look-ahead effect type are performed to obtain a super reach effect. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts the symbol fluctuation. Here, a new hold display (“trigger hold”) is created by newly entering the first main game start opening A10 during the symbol change and winning the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning (the hold is also referred to as “trigger hold”). "Display") is displayed in blue (that is, blue is determined in the hold change effect, which is one of the look-ahead effects). Next, when the trigger hold display remains blue and does not change, "development" is displayed in the symbol change related to the trigger hold, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when the trigger hold display changes from blue to red, "development !!!" is displayed in the symbol change related to the trigger hold, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. In this way, "development" is displayed after the blue color is displayed in the hold change effect, and "development !!!" is displayed after the red color is displayed in the hold change effect. .. Here, it is assumed that "development" is displayed after blue and "development !!!" is displayed after red, but this is not limited to this, and even after blue. "Development !!!" may be displayed, and the ratio of "Development !!!" displayed after red may be higher than the ratio of "Development !!!" displayed after blue, in this case. In some cases, "development" is displayed after red, and "development" may be displayed after blue at a higher rate than "development" is displayed after red. It should be noted that there is a difference in the jackpot expectation between blue and red, which are display modes of the pending change effect, and red has a higher jackpot expectation than blue. In this example, the explanation is made using the correspondence between the display mode in the hold change effect and the development pattern (“development”, “development !!!”), but if it is a look-ahead effect, it does not have to be the hold change effect. For example, it can be applied to the "angel zone" and the "true angel zone" which are background change effects.

Next, FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing a display transition when developing into the same super reach effect via different displays. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts the symbol fluctuation. Next, after "development" or "development !!!", which is a specific symbol indicating that the super reach effect is developed, is displayed, a low expectation super reach effect (first half of the super reach) in which the jackpot expectation is relatively low is displayed. ), The effect that the giraffe destroys the middle symbol is executed, and the symbol combination (“656”) of the reach loss is displayed in the low expectation super reach effect. Although only the numerical symbol is displayed during the low expectation super reach, the first decorative symbol may be the first decorative symbol composed of the numerical symbol and the character symbol. Next, a high-expectation super reach production (the latter half of the super reach), in which the expectation of a big hit is relatively high, is executed. Here, it is shown that it is possible to develop into a super reach production regardless of whether "development" or "development !!!" is displayed, but "development" and "development !!" In "!", The rate of development to the high expectation super reach effect is different, and when "development" is displayed, the high expectation super reach effect is executed at a rate of 10%, and "development !!!". Is displayed, the high expectation super reach effect is executed at a rate of 50%. In addition, 90% when "development" is displayed and 50% when "development !!!" is displayed develops into another high-expectation super reach production (not shown), or high-expectation super. It will return to the normal screen without developing into reach production.

Next, FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing a display transition when developing into a super reach effect via a button effect. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are changing. Next, the decorative symbol forms a reach, and a button effect that enables the player to operate the sub-input button SB is executed. At the time of the button effect, the first decorative symbol is only a number, the left symbol is displayed at the left end of the LCD screen, and the right symbol is displayed at the right end of the LCD screen. The design of is displayed in a circle. The multiple symbols include "6", which is a winning symbol, "development" and "development !!!", which indicates that it will be a super reach effect, "5", which is a lost symbol, and "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol. It is displayed. When a plurality of symbols rotate in a circle and the sub input button SB can be operated, a button image described as "PUSH" is displayed in the substantially center of the LCD screen, and the sub input button SB is operated. With this as an opportunity, one symbol is displayed. Here, a predetermined "development" is displayed, and after that, a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. If the sub-input button SB is not operated, "development" is displayed after the valid period of the sub-input button SB has elapsed, and the super reach effect is executed. The symbol displayed when the operation of the sub input button SB is performed is determined in advance by the advance notice lottery of the sub control board S performed at the start of the fluctuation.

In the production in this example, the following changes may be made.
(1) Before developing into a super reach effect (= until the stage where the illustrated development symbol is displayed), the first decorative symbol is not displayed only by the number symbol, but is composed of the number symbol and the character symbol. The configuration may be such that the first decorative pattern is displayed.
(2) Depending on the type of button image (for example, large button image, small button image, default color, red color, rainbow color, etc.), the ratio of the stopped symbols may be different, for example, a large button image. When is displayed, the ratio of displaying symbols other than lost symbols such as "NEXT", "development", "development !!!", and hit symbols is higher than when a small button image is displayed. You may.
(3) Depending on the type of button image (for example, large button image, small button image, default color, red color, rainbow color, etc.), the ratio of the displayed development symbol or pseudo-continuous symbol may be different. For example, when a large button image is displayed, the ratio of displaying the development symbol is higher than when the small button image is displayed, the ratio of displaying "development !!!" is higher, and the pseudo-ream. The ratio of displaying the symbol may be high, the ratio of displaying "NEXT !!!" may be high, and the like.
(4) Any image may be displayed at a predetermined timing without displaying the button image. Further, the configuration includes a pattern in which the button image is displayed (a pattern in which the player can operate the button) and a pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (a pattern in which the player cannot operate the button). Often, in this case, the pattern in which the button image is displayed is configured to have a higher expectation of a big hit than the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing, or a symbol other than the lost symbol ("NEXT", It may be configured so that the ratio of displaying "development", "development !!!", winning symbol, etc.) is high. Further, even if the ratio of the displayed development symbols is different between the pattern in which the button image is displayed and the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the pattern in which the button image is displayed). However, you may increase the percentage of "Development !!!" displayed).
(5) Pseudo-continuous symbols may be provided not only with "NEXT" but also with multiple types such as "NEXT !!!", and when multiple types are provided, "NEXT !!" rather than "NEXT"! "!" May be configured so that the expectation of a big hit is higher, "NEXT !!!" may be displayed in an array pattern in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circle, and further, "NEXT" may be displayed. It may have an arrangement pattern in which "NEXT !!!" is displayed at the same time.
(6) The arrangement pattern in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circle may be provided with a plurality of types, and if a plurality of types are provided, the fluctuation with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a big hit fluctuation and a super reach effect) will be obtained. In the case of fluctuation (variation, etc.), even if the arrangement pattern with high jackpot expectation is displayed at a higher rate than in the case of fluctuation with low jackpot expectation (for example, lossless fluctuation without reach). good. For example, as an arrangement pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, an arrangement pattern without a lost symbol (for example, an arrangement pattern displayed as "6 (big hit symbol) / development / development / NEXT / development !!!") or "development""Development!!!" is displayed without "" (for example, "6 ・ Development !!! ・ 5 ・ NEXT ・ Development !!!", "6 ・ Development !!! ・ Development !!! ・ NEXT"・ Arrangement pattern in which "Development !!!" is displayed, etc.).

As in (3), the rate at which the development symbol is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the notice of the change (button effect, comment notice, timer notice, etc.), or the display mode of the notice of the change. By configuring the ratio of the pseudo-ream symbols to be displayed differently according to the situation, if the display mode of the notice of the change is highly expected, the development symbol or the pseudo-ream symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the player. Can be configured so that the degree of expectation of a big hit can be easily grasped.

Next, FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach effect is achieved in different effect stages (also referred to as effect modes). First, the production stage A will be described in detail. On the effect stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts the symbol fluctuation. Next, after the "development", which is a specific symbol indicating that the reach is formed and the super reach effect is developed, is displayed, the super reach effect is executed. Next, the production stage B will be described in detail. On the production stage B, a first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts the symbol fluctuation. Next, after the reach is formed, the super reach effect is executed as it is (that is, "development" which is a specific symbol indicating the development of the super reach effect is not displayed), or when the reach is formed, the effect stage. After displaying "development (a mode in which the inside of the Chinese character as shown is hollowed out)" different from A, the super reach effect is executed. That is, in this example, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is different depending on the production stage, but the display mode of the second decorative symbol is not different (similar), and the first decoration is different depending on the production stage. The developed symbol may be displayed in the symbol, but the developed symbol is not displayed in the second decorative symbol.

Next, FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the revariation is executed in different production stages. First, the production stage A will be described in detail. On the effect stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts the symbol fluctuation. Next, after the "NEXT" symbol that forms a reach and indicates that the re-variation is executed is displayed, the symbol variation is started again. Next, the production stage B will be described in detail. On the production stage B, a first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts the symbol fluctuation. Next, after the symbol combination "678" (order) indicating that the re-variation is executed in the first decorative symbol is displayed (temporarily stopped), the symbol variation is started again or the reach is reached. After displaying the "NEXT (a mode in which the inside of the alphabet as shown is hollowed out)" which is different from the effect stage A, the symbol variation is started again. In addition, when the re-variation is executed twice depending on which production stage the re-variation is executed, {variation start → temporary stop → re-variation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re-reach) The jackpot expectation of (variation)} and when the re-variation is executed three times {variation start → temporary stop → re-variation → temporary stop → re-variation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re-variation)} The difference from the big hit expectation may be different. For example, in the production stage A (for example, the daytime stage or the non-look-ahead stage other than the angel zone), the jackpot expectation when the re-variation is executed twice is 5% on average, and the re-variation is executed three times. The average jackpot expectation is 25%, and the difference is 20% (5 times difference), but it fluctuates again in the production stage B (for example, the night stage or the look-ahead stage such as the angel zone). The jackpot expectation when is executed twice is 40% on average, and the jackpot expectation when revariation is executed three times is 50%, and the difference is 10% (1.25 times difference). ). The difference in the jackpot expectation degree (execution expectation degree of the special game) is the one subtracted by the percentage display, the one obtained by dividing the jackpot expectation degree (1 / N), and the like. Further, although the display mode of the first decorative symbol differs depending on the effect stage (effect stage A, effect stage B), the display mode of the second decorative symbol is the same, and the "NEXT" symbol is used for the first decorative symbol. Although it can be displayed, the second decorative symbol may be configured so that the "NEXT" symbol is not displayed. It should be noted that it has been mainly explained that both the effect stage A and the effect stage B are non-look-ahead stages in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state (the same gaming state as the above-mentioned daytime stage), but the present invention is not limited to this. , The effect stage A is a non-pre-reading stage in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (for example, the above-mentioned daytime stage), and the production stage B is a look-ahead stage in a non-probability variation game state and a non-time reduction gaming state (for example,). Both the effect stage A and the effect stage B, which are configured as the above-mentioned night stage), are configured as a look-ahead stage in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state, and both the effect stage A and the effect stage B are in the probability variation game state. It is also possible to configure the stage as a non-look-ahead stage in a time-reduced gaming state, and if a plurality of production stages are provided, the production mode shown in this example can be applied regardless of the game state or the like.

In addition, in FIG. 152, the configuration relating to the “NEXT” symbol, which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is illustrated, but the development symbol may be configured in the same manner as in FIG. 152. That is, (1) the development symbol temporarily stops as the first decorative symbol in the effect stage A, while the development symbol does not temporarily stop as the first decorative symbol in the effect stage B, and (2) the development symbol does not temporarily stop as the first decorative symbol in the effect stage B. Temporarily stops in the display mode A as the first decorative symbol, while the developed symbol temporarily stops in the display mode B as the first decorative symbol in the effect stage B (the display mode is different from that of the effect stage A). It may be configured.

Next, FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo-continuous symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Next, a translucent "NEXT" symbol, which forms a reach and suggests that the revariation is performed, is displayed. When the translucent "NEXT" symbol is moved from the upper part to the lower part of the liquid crystal screen and re-variation is executed, the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed and then the symbol variation is started again. The symbol is changed again, the reach is formed again, and this time, instead of the pseudo-continuous symbol, "development" indicating that the super reach effect is executed is displayed. After that, the super reach effect is executed, and since the fluctuation is a loss, the determination is stopped with the reach loss symbol (“717”). As shown in this figure, it is possible to display a specific symbol (for example, "development") after displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, "NEXT"), while displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol after displaying a specific symbol. It may be configured so that it cannot be displayed. In addition, the ratio at which the specific symbol is displayed according to whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed (= whether or not the re-variation is executed), the number of times the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed (= the number of re-variations), and the like. May be different. For example, the larger the number of re-variations, the easier it is to display the specific symbol (= the ratio of the specific symbol being displayed without displaying the lost symbol) may be configured, and the larger the number of re-variations, the easier it is to display. , Even if a specific symbol is displayed, the ratio of "development !!!", which has a high expectation for a big hit, may be high.

As shown in FIG. 154, even when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (when the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, when the developed symbol is displayed), the second decorative symbol is in the left column, the middle column, and the right column. The variable display is continued in all cases, and the variable display may be continued in all of the left column, the middle column, and the right column of the second decorative symbol even during the super reach.

Next, FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the first decorative symbols are overlapped and displayed. First, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "861", but the left symbol (elephant) and the middle symbol (giraffe), and the middle symbol (giraffe) and the right symbol (chick) are displayed in duplicate. At this time, the middle symbol (giraffe) is placed behind the LCD screen (the player side is in front) from the left symbol (elephant) and the right symbol (chick), and part of it is divided by the left symbol (elephant) and the right symbol (chick). It is hidden. Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol starts the symbol fluctuation. Next, a reach is formed, and the middle symbol becomes a low-speed variable display. At this time, the middle symbol is arranged in front of the LCD screen with respect to the left symbol and the right symbol forming the reach. In this figure, the chick (“1”) is displayed in a fluctuating manner at a low speed as the middle symbol and does not stop, and then the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) is fluctuated and displayed at a low speed and stops at the center of the LCD screen. ing. After that, although not shown, after the re-variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is executed, the super reach effect is executed, and since the variation is a loss, the determination is stopped by the reach loss symbol (“717”). When displaying the reach loss symbol, the middle symbol (chick) is placed behind the LCD screen from the left symbol (lion) and the right symbol (lion) as before the fluctuation started, and is a part of the middle symbol (chick). Is hidden. In the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are not displayed in duplicate at any timing. Even when the development symbol ("development" or "development !!!") is displayed instead of the pseudo-ream symbol, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as the relationship between the display of the left and right symbols and the middle symbol. It can be the same as the case where. The display mode may be a display mode in stage C or a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (variation with high expectation of hitting). That is, the display mode in this figure may be a display mode that is not displayed in the stage A or the stage B but can be displayed in the stage C, or is a normal fluctuation (comparison in which the product stops due to loss without reaching). It may be a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (variation with high expectation per reach) instead of (variation in a short period of time).

Next, FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed between the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. First, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start the symbol variation. At this time, the speed of the first decorative symbol gradually increases from low speed to high speed (low speed → medium speed → high speed). On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol, the speed of the symbol variation is constant, and the symbol variation is always high speed. Next, when the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are both high-speed and the reach is formed by the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, in the first decorative symbol, the middle symbol becomes a low-speed symbol variation, and the first is 2 In the decorative symbol, the medium symbol is a high-speed symbol change. After that, during the execution of the super reach effect, the left and right symbols, of which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol both form a reach, are stopped (or temporarily stopped), and only the middle symbol is at high speed. The design is fluctuating. After the super reach effect was completed, the fluctuation was a loss, so the decision was stopped with the reach loss symbol (“686”). In this figure, during the execution of the super reach effect, only the middle symbol is changed while the reach is formed in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the execution of the super reach effect is not limited to this. During the execution of the medium or specific super reach effect, all the first decorative symbols and all the second decorative symbols may be changed. The second decorative symbol may also have a plurality of fluctuation speeds, and in this case, it is preferable that the second decorative symbol is less likely to change the fluctuation speed than the first decorative symbol. For example, the second decorative symbol does not use low speed but uses medium speed (note that the first decorative symbol uses low speed, medium speed, and high speed). Further, the second decorative symbol can be configured so as not to be temporarily stopped in the middle. Specifically, the configuration is always set to high speed or stop (fixed stop), or high speed and medium speed and stop (fixed stop). It is a configuration etc.

Here, the pseudo-continuous symbol and the developed symbol in the time-reduced gaming state will be supplemented. In the time-reduced gaming state, it may be configured so that the pseudo-continuous symbol or the developed symbol can be displayed, but it is more preferable to configure it so that the pseudo-continuous symbol or the developed symbol cannot be displayed. This is because, in the time-reduced gaming state, the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than in the normal state (non-time-reduced gaming state), and the effect of suggesting a big hit within one fluctuation is reduced. When displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol or a developed symbol, the one with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected, so the jackpot interval (the period from the end of one jackpot to the start of the next jackpot) is extended. Therefore, the speed at which the number of balls will increase during the consecutive villas will slow down. Further, in the time-reduced gaming state, it is easy to select a short variation time and the amount of effect is small. Therefore, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol itself or the first decorative symbol may be simple, and the second. It is preferable that it is composed of only elements (numbers).

Next, FIG. 157 is an image diagram relating to the case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the loss fluctuation. First, (a) in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the number of reservations is 4, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed on the effect display device SG. In the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is "number + character", and the display mode of the second decorative symbol is only "number". .. (B) After that, the hold is digested, and the hold digestion transmission image (sometimes referred to as the hold image, the hold display, the hold, etc.) corresponding to the digested hold is displayed, and the symbol change that becomes a loss starts. Will be done. In addition, the hold display (sometimes referred to as a hold image) and the hold digestion transmission image may be collectively referred to as a variable right image. Further, the first hold display and the second hold display may be collectively referred to as a hold display, and a plurality or all of the first hold display, the second hold display, and the hold digestion transmission image are referred to as variable right images. Sometimes.

<When the power is not cut off>
After that, (c) the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "817" of the "number + character" which is a lost symbol, and the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "817" of the "number" which is a lost symbol. When the next change starts, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "817" of "number + character", and the second decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "817" of "number". Scrolling will start). Here, as a modification, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may not be variablely displayed, but only the first decorative symbol may be variablely displayed and the second decorative symbol may be hidden.

<When power is generated>
After the above-mentioned (b), the power supply is cut off in the middle of the symbol change (d). (E) After that, the power is restored and the fluctuation of the main game symbol is resumed, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not variablely displayed (hidden) while the symbol variation is being executed. If the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is 50 seconds and the power is cut off at a timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (may be the case where the power cutoff process is executed), after the power is restored, the power is turned off. It is configured to perform fluctuations for the remaining 40 seconds.

(F) After that, the changed symbol that has been executed is completed, and the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by "number + character" which is "711", which is a stop mode dedicated to when the power is turned off, and "711". The second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the "number" that becomes. The stop display here may be a definite display or a temporary stop display (the same applies to other configurations), but it is preferable to apply it only to the first decorative symbol. It is desirable that the second decorative symbol has only a fixed stop (no temporary stop). (G) After that, the hold is exhausted and the next symbol change starts. Here, as a modification, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be configured not to go through the stop display, that is, the variable display (variable display period) of the main game symbol restarted after the power is restored. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are hidden until the stop display (variation fixed time, which is the period for maintaining the stop display) after the variation display ends, and the variation display of the next main game symbol starts. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be redisplayed in the wake of this.

As described above, in the figure, when the power is turned off, "711" of "number + character" is displayed in the first decorative symbol as a stop symbol dedicated to the power restoration after the power is restored, and the second decoration is displayed. "711" of "number" is displayed in the design. That is, except after the power is restored, "711" is not stopped and displayed as a lost symbol in both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol (it is not selected as the stop symbol). As a modification, the lost symbol "711" may be configured to be stopped and displayed even after the power is restored. However, in any case, it is desirable that up to two of the three digits of the lost symbol displayed after the power failure is restored are the same number, or each of the three digits is a different number, and the reach mode (for example, the reach mode). It is desirable that the left symbol such as "727" and "232" and the right symbol are not the same number) and the hit mode (for example, the three symbols such as "777" and "222" are the same number).

Further, as the timing at which "711" of "number + character" is displayed in the first decorative symbol and the timing at which "711" of "number" is displayed in the second decorative symbol, the fixed stop timing of the main game symbol ( The timing when the fixed stop starts). In this case, at the timing when the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. Further, as described above, the main game symbol is determined as the timing at which the "number + character" "711" is displayed in the first decorative symbol and the timing at which the "number" "711" is displayed in the second decorative symbol. It may be the timing when the next symbol change starts after the stop (the timing when the first decorative symbol starts changing). In this case, at the timing when the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started to change (without going through the stop display).

It should be noted that the stop mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is planned to be "817" in both the case where the power cut is not generated and the case where the power cut is generated, which is described in detail in the figure. However, when the power is cut off, "711" dedicated to when the power is turned off is displayed. That is, the planned stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are different depending on whether the power is cut off during the fluctuation and when the power is not cut off (the main game symbol is different). It is configured so that the display mode after stopping) can be displayed.

The stop symbol of the main game symbol is the same stop symbol regardless of whether or not the power is cut off. With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the symbol change due to a power outage in the game hall, the stop symbol of the main game symbol is not changed, so the result of the game is not affected. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol as a symbol dedicated to when the power is turned off, it is possible to appropriately notify the player and the manager that the power is cut off.

As described in FIG. 157 (a), the figure illustrates a case where the symbol change starts in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state, but the case is limited to this. However, the configuration illustrated in the figure can be applied even in other gaming states. Similarly, even when the gaming state is described in a figure other than FIG. 157, it is only an example, and it should be added that it can be applied to other gaming states.

Next, FIG. 158 is an image diagram regarding a case where a power failure occurs during execution of a jackpot fluctuation. First, (a) in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the number of reservations is 4, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed on the effect display device SG. In the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the display mode of the first decorative symbol (sometimes referred to as a display format) is "number + character", and the display mode of the second decorative symbol. (Sometimes called display format) is only "number". (B) After that, the hold is digested, the hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the digested hold is displayed, and the symbol change that becomes a big hit is started.

Here, the display format of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol is "number", "number + character", etc., and the display format of "777" of "number" and "666" of "number". Are the same, and the display format is different between "777" of "number", "number + character", and "777".

<When the power is not cut off>
(C) After that, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "777" of the "number + character" which is the jackpot symbol, and the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "777" of the "number" which is the jackpot symbol. .. (D) After that, the big hit is started. During the big hit, the display position of the first decorative symbol is changed to the upper left of the effect display device SG, the size of the display area becomes smaller, and only "number + character" becomes "number". As a modification, instead of a three-digit number, a one-digit number (for example, only "7" when a big hit with "777", only "2" when a big hit with "222", etc.) may be used. In addition, the second decorative pattern is hidden. (E) After that, when the jackpot ends, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed as "777" with only the "number" which is the jackpot symbol, and then the hold is exhausted and the next symbol change starts. It will be. When the next fluctuation starts, the decorative symbol of "777" (may be only the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol) starts to change. After the end of the big hit, the game state is changed from the non-probability variable game state and the non-time shortened game state, which is the game state before the big hit start, to the probability variable game state and the time shortened game state, and the probability variable game state and the time shortened game state. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the above are both composed of only "numbers" (the display format is only "numbers"). It should be noted that the gaming state that shifts after the big hit is just an example, and the same configuration can be applied if it is different from the gaming state before the start of the big hit.

<When the power is cut off>
(F) After that, the power supply is cut off in the middle of the symbol change. (G) After that, the power is restored and the fluctuation of the main game symbol is resumed, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not variablely displayed (hidden) while the symbol variation is being executed.

(H) After that, the symbol change that becomes the big hit that has been executed ends, and the big hit is executed. When the big hit is started, the first decorative symbol is displayed in "711", which is a stop mode dedicated to when the power is turned off. During the big hit, the display position of the first decorative symbol is changed to the upper left of the effect display device SG, the size of the display area is reduced, and the display format is changed from "number + character" to "number" only. As a modification, instead of a three-digit number, a symbol (for example, "?" Or "???") may be used, or the first decorative pattern or "?" ("???"), etc. May be specified so that is not displayed at all. In addition, the second decorative pattern is hidden. (G) After that, the jackpot ends, the hold is exhausted, and the next symbol change starts. When the next fluctuation starts, the decorative symbol of "711" having only "numbers" will start to change between the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol (only the first decorative symbol). May be good). After the end of the big hit, the game state is changed from the non-probability variable game state and the non-time shortened game state, which is the game state before the big hit start, to the probability variable game state and the time shortened game state, and the probability variable game state and the time shortened game state. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the above are both composed of only "numbers". It should be noted that the gaming state that shifts after the big hit is just an example, and the same configuration can be applied if it is different from the gaming state before the start of the big hit. In addition, regarding the effect during the big hit (big hit effect), if the power cutoff does not occur, the effect differs depending on the big hit type (whether it is a 16R big hit or a 4R big hit) (power cutoff occurs). If there is no 16R jackpot, it will be a jackpot effect A, and if the power is not cut off, the 4R jackpot will be a jackpot effect B), but if a power failure occurs, it will be a jackpot type (may be a jackpot symbol). It is preferable that the big hit effect is the same regardless of the fact (the 16R big hit when the power is cut off and the 4R big hit when the power is cut off are the big hit effect C).

As described above, in the figure, when the power is cut off, "711" is displayed as a stop symbol dedicated to the power return between the big hit after the power is restored and the decorative symbol after the big hit is completed (No. 1). Although the configuration in which both the 1-decorative symbol and the 2nd decorative symbol are displayed is illustrated, only the 1-decorative symbol may be used). In this way, even when the power is cut off during the big hit symbol change, the "711", which is a dedicated stop symbol after the power is restored, is the same as when the power supply is cut off during the lost symbol change. It is configured to be displayed.

Further, in the figure, the first decorative symbol is displayed during the jackpot and the second decorative symbol is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol is also the second decorative symbol during the jackpot. May be configured to be hidden, or both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol may be hidden and the second decorative symbol may be displayed during the big hit. Further, even in the configuration in which the first decorative symbol is displayed during the jackpot and the second decorative symbol is hidden, as described above, only one "7" symbol, which is aligned before the start of the jackpot, is displayed in the jackpot. It may be configured to be displayed. In the embodiment in which the first decorative symbol is displayed during the big hit, as a modification, the third decorative symbol (for example, the "number" of the first decorative symbol is displayed in a new display mode (display format) instead of the first decorative symbol. "Is an Arabic numeral, whereas the" number "of the third decorative symbol is a Roman numeral) may be displayed.

Further, the timing at which "711" is displayed may be the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the jackpot end, immediately after the start of the time-reduced gaming state), or the first symbol change after the jackpot end. It may be the timing to start (the timing when the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start the variable display).

It should be noted that the stop mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is scheduled to be "777" in both the case where the power cut is not generated and the case where the power cut is generated, which is described in detail in the figure. However, when the power is cut off, "711" dedicated to when the power is turned off is configured to be displayed during the big hit and / or after the big hit is finished. That is, the planned stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are different depending on whether the power is cut off during the fluctuation and when the power is not cut off (the main game symbol is different). The display mode after stopping) is configured to be displayed.

As described in detail in FIGS. 157 and 158, when a power failure occurs during execution of a symbol variation executed in a predetermined gaming state (for example, a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state). Is when the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol change that becomes a big hit, and when the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol change that becomes a loss, and when the next change starts (or next time) after the power is restored. The same symbol combination (combination of numbers) is displayed in both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol (immediately before the start of fluctuation and immediately before the pending digestion) (“711” in the same figure). However, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is configured to be different. More specifically, when a power failure occurs during the execution of a symbol change that causes a loss, a display mode composed of "number + character" as shown in (f) and (g) of FIG. 157. (Display format) When a power failure occurs during execution of a symbol change that is a big hit, a display mode (display format) consisting only of "numbers" as shown in (j) of FIG. 158. It has become. Regarding the second decorative symbol, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol change that is a loss, or if the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol change that is a big hit, the power supply is supplied. The display mode (display format) and the symbol combination (combination of numbers) of the second decorative symbol after the restoration (at the time of the next fluctuation start after the power restoration, immediately before the next fluctuation start, immediately before the hold digestion, etc.) are the same.

In this way, even in the symbol variation started in the same gaming state, the power is cut off during the symbol variation depending on whether the symbol variation is a loss variation or a jackpot variation, and then the power is restored. (1) By configuring the decorative symbols so that the display mode (display format) can be different, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the game situation even after the power is cut off. Here, the combination of the "numbers" of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is configured to be "711" regardless of whether the symbol variation is a loss variation or a jackpot variation. After the power is restored, the player decides whether the symbol fluctuation that caused the power outage was a jackpot fluctuation or a loss fluctuation, and if it was a jackpot fluctuation, which "numbers" were all in the jackpot. Information that cannot be known by the player can be displayed uniformly and fairly, and is displayed in a manner indicating a loss, so that the player who visually recognizes the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol has lost. It can be configured to be hard to feel.

The same gaming state described in detail in FIGS. 157 and 158 is any one controlled by the main control board M such as a time-shortened gaming state, a probability-variable gaming state, and a limited frequency state (game state related to a variation pattern). It may be applied to a state, or may be applied to any state controlled by the sub-control board S such as an effect mode.

Next, FIG. 159 is an image diagram relating to the case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation. First, (a) in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the number of reservations is 3, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variablely displayed on the effect display device SG. The look-ahead effect is not executed, in other words, the trigger hold does not exist in the hold. (B) After that, a big hit confirmation effect is executed as a notice effect during the symbol change at a predetermined timing. The advance notice effect in the figure is an effect different from the look-ahead effect, and is an effect that suggests the result of the pattern change during execution. Further, the big hit confirmation effect is an effect of notifying that the big hit schedule is definite, and in the figure, "rainbow!" Is displayed. That is, when the big hit confirmation effect is executed as the advance notice effect during the symbol change, it is definite that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the symbol change. In addition, when the big hit confirmation effect is executed, it may be deterministic that the big hit will be a big hit at 1000/1000 after that, and when the big hit confirmation effect is executed, it is subsequently approximated to 999/1000 (infinitely close to 1). Probability) may be definite to be a big hit. Further, the advance notice effect in the figure may be referred to as the change advance notice effect, the non-look-ahead advance notice effect, or the like.

(C) After that, the power is cut off during the symbol change in which the jackpot confirmation effect is executed as the advance notice effect during the symbol change. (D) After that, the power is restored and the fluctuation of the main game symbol resumes, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not displayed in a variable manner (becomes hidden and the characters being restored to the screen are displayed) while the symbol variation is being executed. Is displayed). (E) After that, the main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol (“7A” corresponding to the 16R jackpot), and the jackpot is started to be executed. When the jackpot starts (or the jackpot start demo time starts), the effect display device SG erases the characters being returned to the screen and switches to the screen display during the jackpot. Further, during the big hit, "711" dedicated to power recovery is displayed as the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be hidden during the jackpot, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. It may be configured. Further, the first decorative symbol may be hidden and the second decorative symbol may be displayed during the big hit. Further, even in the configuration in which the first decorative symbol is displayed during the jackpot and the second decorative symbol is hidden, as described above, "?" And "???" are configured to be displayed during the jackpot. Alternatively, the specification may be such that the first decorative pattern or "?" ("???") is not displayed at all. In addition, regarding the effect during the big hit (big hit effect), if the power cutoff does not occur, the effect differs depending on the big hit type (whether it is a 16R big hit or a 4R big hit) (power cutoff occurs). If there is no 16R jackpot, the jackpot effect A will be applied, and if the power supply is not cut off, the 4R jackpot effect will be the jackpot effect B). (The 16R jackpot when the power is cut off and the 4R jackpot when the power is cut off are the jackpot effect C).

(F) After that, the jackpot ends, the hold is newly exhausted, and the next symbol change starts. At the start of the next symbol change (or after the big hit and before the start of the symbol change), "711" dedicated to power recovery is displayed as a "number" for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The Rukoto. It should be noted that the gaming state after the end of the big hit exemplifies the case where the gaming state shifts to the probability-variable gaming state and the time-shortening gaming state.

Next, FIG. 160 is an image diagram relating to the case where the power is cut off during the execution of the look-ahead effect. First, (a) in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, the number of holdings is 2, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variablely displayed on the effect display device SG. A new hold occurs and the number of holds becomes 3, and a jackpot confirmation effect, which is a hold change effect, is executed as a look-ahead effect for the newly generated hold image (“☆” display in the figure). (B) After that, the power supply is cut off during the same symbol fluctuation. When the jackpot confirmation effect is executed as the look-ahead effect, it does not notify that the running symbol change (or the symbol change that has started execution) becomes a big hit, but the symbol change that is the target of the look-ahead effect. In other words, it informs that it is certain that the symbol change related to the trigger hold will be a big hit.

(C) After that, the power is restored and the fluctuation of the main game symbol resumes, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not displayed in a variable manner (becomes hidden and the characters being restored to the screen are displayed) while the symbol variation is being executed. Is displayed). (D) After that, the symbol change that becomes a loss a plurality of times is executed, and the symbol change related to the hold that triggers the execution of the jackpot confirmation effect executed as the look-ahead effect starts. When the hold that triggers the execution of the jackpot confirmation effect executed as the look-ahead effect is exhausted, the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image thereafter is the display mode of the hold image which is the jackpot confirmation effect executed as the look-ahead effect. It is the same as. In this case, the jackpot confirmation effect (displayed with "☆" in the figure), which is a hold change effect, may be configured not to be executed as a look-ahead effect during a symbol change that causes a plurality of losses. It may be configured to restart during any of the symbol changes during the symbol change. Further, the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image may also be a display mode different from the display mode of the hold image which is the jackpot confirmation effect executed as the look-ahead effect (for example, “●” display).

(E) After that, the symbol variation that is the target of the jackpot confirmation effect ends, and the jackpot symbol (“7A” corresponding to the 16R jackpot) is stopped and displayed. Since the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state, "777" is stopped and displayed in the display mode (display format) of "number + character" for the first decorative symbol, and the second is As for the decorative design, "777" is stopped and displayed in the display mode (display format) of "numbers". (F) During the big hit, "777" is displayed as the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be hidden during the jackpot, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. It may be configured. Further, the first decorative symbol may be hidden and the second decorative symbol may be displayed during the big hit. Further, even in the configuration in which the first decorative symbol is displayed during the jackpot and the second decorative symbol is hidden, as described above, only one "7" symbol, which is aligned before the start of the jackpot, is displayed in the jackpot. It may be configured to be displayed.

(G) After that, the big hit ends. After the end of the big hit and before the start of the symbol change, "777" of the big hit symbol related to the executed big hit is displayed as a "number" for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. "777" is displayed as a "number" in order to shift to a probability-variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state after the end of the big hit.

In this way, when the jackpot confirmation effect is executed as the look-ahead effect and the power is cut off during the symbol change in which the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, the stop symbol after the end of the jackpot executed after that is "777". Yes, it is configured so that it is not a combination of symbols dedicated to when the power is restored.

As described in detail in FIGS. 159 and 160, when the power is cut off after the jackpot confirmation effect is executed due to the jackpot fluctuation, the first decorative symbol immediately after the jackpot ends is a number dedicated to power recovery. On the other hand, if the power is cut off after the big hit confirmation effect is executed as the look-ahead effect, the first decorative symbol immediately after the end of the big hit is not compatible with the display dedicated to when the power is restored, but before the start of the big hit. It is configured so that it can be a jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on. With this configuration, if a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation, even if a power outage occurs, the big hit will start immediately, so the power supply will be given priority to notify that the power outage has occurred. The first decorative symbol is displayed with a combination of numbers dedicated to when the power is turned off. Since the period is long, by configuring to display the first decorative symbol with the jackpot symbol immediately after the end of the jackpot, the case of preferentially notifying that the power supply has occurred and the jackpot are executed according to the situation of the game. It is possible to use the case of giving priority to the notification of what has been done.

In FIG. 160, a hold change effect is illustrated as an example of the look-ahead effect, but the look-ahead effect applicable to this example is not limited to this, and the look-ahead zone effect accompanied by a background change (specifically, the background). Normally or "mountain" background is displayed as an effect, but the display may switch to "sky" background or "space" background due to the occurrence of a hold that triggers the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, and "sky". The background has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the "mountain" background, the "space" background has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the "sky" background, and the jackpot on hold that triggered the execution of the look-ahead zone production is confirmed) and , Countdown look-ahead effect in which numbers are subtracted and displayed at the start of symbol fluctuation (specifically, "0" is displayed when the hold that triggered the execution of the countdown look-ahead effect is exhausted. It is an effect that the number is subtracted each time the hold that is digested before the hold that triggered the execution is digested, and the colors of the numbers are "white", "red", "rainbow", and " In the case of "Rainbow", it can be applied to various look-ahead effects such as the effect that the big hit on hold that triggered the execution of the countdown look-ahead effect is confirmed). Further, in the embodiment in which the first decorative symbol is displayed during the big hit, as a modification, the third decorative symbol (for example, the "number" of the first decorative symbol is displayed in a new display mode (display format) instead of the first decorative symbol. "Is an Arabic numeral, whereas the" number "of the third decorative symbol is a Roman numeral) may be displayed. The background effect may be referred to as an effect mode.

Next, FIG. 161 is an image diagram relating to the execution of the accessory effect. First, (a) in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the number of holdings is 3, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variablely displayed on the effect display device SG as a super reach effect. The battle effect is being executed (execution starts 30 seconds after the start of the symbol change). Since the super reach effect is executed, the left symbol and the right symbol are variablely displayed in the tempai state in the upper right corner of the effect display device for the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is tempai. All the symbols are displayed in a variable manner without doing so. (B) After that, as a super reach effect, the main character's attack hits the enemy character, and the character effect (effect accompanied by the drive of the movable character) is executed (execution starts 50 seconds after the start of the symbol change). ). As described above, the character effect in the figure plays a role of deterministically notifying the player that the symbol change during execution becomes a big hit.

Here, the movable accessory (sometimes referred to as a movable accessory YK) at the time of executing the accessory effect in the figure is "initial position-> stop for 5 seconds at a predetermined position in front of the effect display device SG-> initial position". It may be driven as follows, and may be during the entire period of "initial position-> stop for 5 seconds at a predetermined position in front of the effect display device SG-> initial position" during the execution of the character effect, or the effect display device SG. The first decorative symbol is hidden and the second decorative symbol maintains the variable display during the period (which may be a period of being stopped at a predetermined position in front for 5 seconds). Further, the first hold display is hidden, and the second hold display continues to be displayed. The first hold display may be displayed as a super reach effect before the start of the battle effect, but may be hidden after the start of the battle effect execution. In addition, as shown in (b), during the execution of the accessory effect, the movable accessory after operation is driven in front of the second decorative symbol, so that some of the symbols are viewed when the second decorative symbol is viewed from the front. The visibility of (the second decorative symbol in the left column) is reduced, but in order to improve it, as a modification, the display position of the second decorative symbol is being driven even before the movable accessory is driven. However, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed behind the movable accessory (so that the visibility of the second decorative symbol is not obstructed by the movable accessory).

Here, in the figure, an image in which the number of holds is 3 is displayed as the second hold display, that is, the number of holds on the first main game side or the number of holds on the second main game side (for example, non-time). An example is shown in which only one of (the number of holdings on the first main game side in the shortened gaming state and the number of holdings on the second main game side in the shortened gaming state) is displayed, but the first is not limited to this. It may be configured to display both the number of holdings on the main game side and the number of holdings on the second main game side (for example, images of two numbers "3" and "0" are displayed). In such a configuration, both the number of reservations on the first main game side and the number of reservations on the second main game side are displayed regardless of the effect mode or the game state. It may be configured as follows. Further, it should be added that such a configuration is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, and is applicable to all the embodiments or configurations according to this example.

(C) After that, the effect of defeating the enemy character is executed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. Although not shown, after that, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the manner shown in (e) of FIG. 160 (enlarged and in the display format of "number + character"), and the second The display size and display mode (display format) of the decorative symbol do not change, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to be fixedly stopped.

(D) On the other hand, the power is cut off in a situation where there is no hold and the symbol is stopped in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state. (E) After that, the power is restored, and the operation check of the movable accessory is executed as the initial operation after the power is restored.

Here, the movable accessory at the time of the operation check in the figure is driven as "initial position-> stop for 2 seconds at a predetermined position in front of the effect display device SG-> initial position", and the operation check is being executed. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are hidden (displayed on the effect display device SG that the screen is being returned). Further, the time from the start to the end of the operation check is 10 seconds.

(F) After that, a hold occurs during the operation check of the movable accessory (while returning to the initial position), the hold is digested, and the symbol change starts, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed. Will start variable display. The timing for resuming the display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol after the power is restored is (1) the timing when the hold occurs, (2) the timing when the hold is exhausted, and (3) the predetermined time from the time when the power is restored. It may be the timing that has passed, etc.

In this way, when the character effect is executed, the first decorative symbol is hidden and the second decorative symbol is displayed, but when the symbol change starts during the operation check after the power is restored, the second decorative symbol is displayed. Both the 1 decorative symbol and the 2nd decorative symbol will be displayed.

In (d) to (f) in the figure, the case where the power supply is cut off while the symbol is stopped is illustrated, but the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The power is cut off during the symbol change (2) The power is restored (3) The symbol change is restarted based on the power return, and the operation check is executed in which the movable accessory is stopped in front of the effect display device for 2 seconds. However, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the first hold display, and the second hold display are hidden (the screen is displayed with the characters "returning to screen").
(4) Since the symbol change was completed during the execution of the operation check of the movable accessory and the hold occurred, the symbol change is newly started. When the new symbol change starts, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the first hold display, and the second hold display may be displayed as described above. In the case of the above configuration, when the effects as shown in (a) to (c) in FIG. 161 are executed by the new symbol change in (4), the operation check is performed after the new symbol change starts. Since it is completed within 10 seconds (because the power is restored and the operation check is started during the symbol change before the new symbol change), the operation check is not executed in duplicate with the super reach effect (battle effect). Furthermore, the operation check is not executed in duplicate with the character production.

It should be noted that the character effect may be executed when it is deterministically notified that the symbol change becomes a big hit by executing it as shown in the figure, or the running symbol change may be a big hit. It may be configured to be executed in order to notify the player that the possibility of becoming is relatively high. The configuration shown in the figure can be applied regardless of the configuration.

In addition, as shown in the figure, when executing a character effect that deterministically notifies that the symbol change becomes a big hit by executing the character effect, the character effect starts from the start of the symbol change that becomes a big hit. The time from the start to the end of the operation check after the power is restored (10 seconds in the figure) is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation check after the power is restored (50 seconds in the figure). .. In addition to the effect pattern that requires 50 seconds from the start of fluctuation until the start of driving the movable accessory related to the accessory effect, as in the flow of the effect in the figure, the drive start of the movable accessory related to the character effect is started. An effect pattern that requires 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation, an effect pattern that requires 30 seconds from the start of fluctuation to start driving a movable accessory related to the character effect, and a start of driving a movable accessory related to the character effect. A plurality of movable accessory drive effect patterns may be provided, such as an effect pattern that requires 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation, but in any of the effect patterns, the movable character effect is related to the start of change in the symbol variation. It is preferable that the time required to start driving the accessory exceeds 10 seconds, which is the time from the start to the end of the operation check after the power is restored.

By configuring in this way, for example, when a symbol change is executed such as "a symbol change that becomes a loss → a symbol change that becomes a big hit", immediately before the end of the symbol change that becomes a loss (for example, 0 of a fixed stop). Even if the power is cut off 1 second before) and then the power is restored, after the operation check after the power is restored is completed, the character effect that is definitely notified that the symbol fluctuation during execution will be a big hit. Can be executed, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot grasp the situation of the game.

In addition, as shown in the figure, when the character effect that deterministically notifies that the symbol change becomes a big hit is executed as the character effect, the character effect starts from the start of the symbol change that becomes the big hit. The time from the end of driving the movable accessory to the time when the first decorative symbol is displayed again is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation check after the power is restored (10 seconds in the figure). It has become.

Further, in the figure, the case of the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state is illustrated, but the configuration of the figure can be applied to any of the gaming states. Further, a game adopting a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol described above in FIG. 32. In the machine, the configuration shown in the figure may be adopted. In such a configuration, in all the gaming states (including all the gaming states), the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is more than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. ) May be adopted, or in a predetermined gaming state of 1 or more, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol) is larger than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for (symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Further, the gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(1) The first decorative symbol becomes reach (“7 ↓ 7”), and then it is stopped and displayed by reach loss (“787”).
(2) Since the game has not been executed for a predetermined time after that (for example, the game ball has not entered the entrance and the symbol has not been changed), the standby state is set and the waiting movie is displayed. To. While the waiting movie is being displayed, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are hidden (only the first decorative symbol may be hidden).
(3) When the power is turned off while the standby movie is being displayed and then the power is restored, the standby movie is not displayed and the first decorative symbol is a stop symbol dedicated to power restoration (for example, "711"). ) (The second decorative pattern is also displayed as "711").
(4) When the gaming state during the standby movie display is a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, "711" of "number + character" is displayed as the first decorative symbol after the power is restored (the first). 2 As for the decorative symbol, "711" with only "numbers" is displayed), and the game state during the standby movie display is a non-probability variable game state and a game state other than the non-time shortened game state (for example, a probability variable game state and time). In the shortened game state), "711" with only "numbers" is displayed for the first decorative symbol after the power is restored ("711" with only "numbers" is displayed for the second decorative symbol). ..
It may be configured as described above. As described above, when the power is restored, the operation check of the movable accessory may be executed.

Next, FIG. 162 is an image diagram relating to power failure.

<In the case of non-time reduction game state>
(A) It is a non-time reduction game state, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the first decorative symbol, "711" is stopped and displayed by "number + character", and in the second decorative symbol, "711" (only numbers) is stopped and displayed. (B) After that, the power supply is cut off. (C) After that, the power is restored, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed again after a predetermined time has elapsed. The second decorative symbol has the same symbol combination (same number combination) and display mode (display format) as before the power was turned off. On the other hand, the first decorative symbol has the same symbol combination (combination of the same numbers) as before the power was turned off, but the display mode (display format) has been changed to only "numbers". In the figure, when the power is cut off in the situation where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time reduction game state, only the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is changed and the symbol combination is performed. (Combination of numbers) exemplifies the configuration in which they are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol and the combination of symbols (number combinations) are used before the power is turned off and after the power is restored. Both of the combinations) may be configured to be changeable. As an example, if the power is cut off in a situation where the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "283" in "number + character" in the non-time reduction game state, and then the power is restored, the first The decorative design may be configured to be displayed as a "number" and a dedicated "711" when the power is restored. Even when the first decorative symbol is configured so that only the display mode (display format) can be changed before the power is turned off and after the power is restored, the display mode (display format) and the symbol combination (combination of numbers) are changed. Even in the case of being configured to obtain, it may be configured so that it can be displayed only by "numbers" after the power is restored and then displayed by "numbers + characters" at the timing when the symbol fluctuation starts.

<In the case of a time-reduced game state>
(D) The game is in a time-reduced game state, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the first decorative symbol, "711" is stopped and displayed by "number + character", and in the second decorative symbol, "711" (only numbers) is stopped and displayed. (E) After that, the power supply is cut off. (F) After that, the power is restored, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed again after a predetermined time has elapsed. The second decorative symbol has the same symbol combination (same number combination) and display mode (display format) as before the power was turned off. Further, the first decorative symbol is also the same symbol combination (combination of the same numbers) as before the power was turned off, and the display mode (display format) is also displayed with the same "number + character" as before the power was turned off. ..

In the figure, the power is cut off when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time shortened game state, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the time shortened game state. Although the comparison is made with the case where the power is cut off, the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state may be compared with the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, or the non-probability-variable gaming state and the non-probability-reduced gaming state may be compared. A time-reduced gaming state may be compared with a non-probability variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state. In addition, as shown in the figure, when the power is restored after the power is turned off in the situation where the hold has not occurred and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or when the power is restored after the power is turned off in the situation where the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In comparison with the above, the power return screen as shown in FIG. 157 (e) may not be displayed. Alternatively, as shown in the figure, when the power is restored after the power is turned off in a situation where the hold has not occurred and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the power restoration screen as shown in FIG. 157 (e) is displayed. , The display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the power is restored after the power is turned off in the situation where the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner.

Further, in the non-time reduction game state, the configuration in which the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is different before the power is turned off and after the power is restored is illustrated, but only the symbol combination (combination of numbers) is configured to be different. Alternatively, both the symbol combination (combination of numbers) and the display mode (display format) may be configured to be different. Further, "number" and "number + character" are exemplified as configurations having different display modes (display formats), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the design of the character, the type of the character, the color of the number, and the calculation are performed. Differences in display mode, such as whether it is a number or a Chinese numeral, its size, etc., may be different (the same can be applied to other configurations). Further, when the power is cut off in the time-reduced gaming state in the figure, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is the same before the power outage occurs and after the power is restored, but the symbol combination (display format) is the same. (Combination of numbers) may be configured to be different (for example, before power off: "283", after power return: "711).

Further, in the non-time shortened gaming state (and non-probability variable gaming state), a plurality of types of effect stages (also referred to as effect modes) are prepared, and the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is different depending on the effect stage. It may be configured to allow. As an example, as shown in FIG. 141, it may have at least an effect stage A and an effect stage B, and may be configured to be changeable (migratorable) from the effect stage A to the effect stage B. In this case, the effect stage. "Number" is a common format, such as "number + character A" in A and "number + character B" in production stage B, but even if the type (display content) of the "character" is configured to be different. Good ("Character A" means a character corresponding to a "number" to be displayed among a plurality of characters belonging to an animal type of character type A. For example, if "8", "elephant" is Correspondingly, "character B" means a character corresponding to a "number" to be displayed among multiple types of characters belonging to a fruit type which is character type B. For example, "8" means "watermelon". The display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern is the same for both the effect stage A and the effect stage B). On the other hand, in the time-reduced gaming state (and the probability variation gaming state), the effect stage may be one type of the effect stage C, and the effect stage C may be configured to display only "numbers" (display format). Here, if the power is restored after the power is cut off in the non-time shortened gaming state (and the non-probability variable gaming state), the effect stage (after the screen is restored) is configured to be the effect stage A, and the effect stage B is set. If the power is turned off and then the power is restored while the first decorative symbol is "number + character B" and "711" is stopped and displayed, the stage A is set and the first decorative symbol is "number + character". "B" will be stopped and displayed as "711", and the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as "711" only with "numbers" in the production stage C of the time-reduced gaming state (and the probability fluctuation gaming state). If the power is turned off and then the power is restored in the situation, the effect stage C is maintained and the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as "711" with only "numbers". Similarly, when the power is restored after the power is cut off in the non-time shortened gaming state (and the non-probability variable gaming state), if the production stage is configured to be the production stage A without fail, the first decorative symbol on the production stage B becomes ". If the power is turned off and then returned in the situation where "283" is displayed as "Number + Character B", the stage A is set and the first decorative symbol is "Number + Character B" and "711". It will be stopped and displayed, and in the situation where the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as "283" with only "numbers" in the production stage C of the time shortening game state (and the probability fluctuation game state), the power is turned off and thereafter. When the power is restored, the effect stage C is maintained and the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as "711" with only "numbers". It should be added that such a relationship between the gaming state, the effect stage, and the first decorative symbol (and the second decorative symbol) is applicable to all the configurations according to this example. In the case where the power is restored after the power is cut off in the non-time shortened gaming state (and the non-probability variable gaming state), and the production stage is configured to be the production stage A without fail, the first decoration is performed on the production stage B. If the power is turned off and then the power is restored while the symbol is "number + character B" and "283" is stopped and displayed, the stage A is set and the first decorative symbol is "number + character A" and ". 711 "may be displayed as a stop.

In the figure, the case of the non-time shortened gaming state and the case of the time shortened gaming state are compared, but the case is not limited to this, and the case of the non-probability variable gaming state and the case of the probabilistic variable gaming state are compared. It may be applied in the case of comparison, or may be applied in the case of comparing the case of the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state and the case of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. The comparison of applicable gaming states is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, and can be applied to all configurations related to the gaming states described in detail in this example. Similarly, even if the configuration comparing the case of the non-probability variable gaming state and the case of the probabilistic variable gaming state is applied to the case of comparing the case of the non-time reduction gaming state and the case of the time reduction gaming state. Alternatively, it may be applied when comparing the case of the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state with the case of the probability fluctuation fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. Similarly, the configuration comparing the case of the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state and the case of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state is divided into the case of the non-time reduction gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. It may be applied when comparing the cases, or may be applied when comparing the case of the non-probability variable gaming state and the case of the probabilistic variable gaming state.

Next, FIG. 163 is an image diagram regarding the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state. The figure illustrates a case where the game shifts to a non-probability variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state after the end of the big hit, and the number of time reductions is 100 times.

(A) The 99th symbol change in the time-reduced gaming state is completed, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the first decorative symbol, "613" is stopped and displayed by "number", and in the second decorative symbol, "613" (only numbers) is stopped and displayed. Further, there is only one hold, and a right-handed instruction display (an image prompting the player to right-handed) is displayed because the game is in a time-reduced gaming state.

(B) After that, the 100th symbol change starts as the final change in the time-reduced gaming state. (C) After that, the power is cut off in the middle of the final fluctuation in the time-reduced gaming state. (D) After that, the power is restored, and at the first timing after the power is restored, the right-handed instruction display is displayed again, and the display mode is the same as before the power was turned off. In addition, the display of the second decorative symbol is also displayed in the same display mode (display format) as before the power was turned off. As a modification, the right-handed instruction display may be displayed again, but the second decorative symbol may not be displayed again. (E) After that, at the second timing after the power is restored, the first decorative symbol is displayed again in the same display mode (display format) and symbol combination (combination of numbers) as before the power was turned off, that is, "numbers". It is displayed again with a display mode (display format) of only "" and a combination of numbers of "711". The first decorative symbol displayed again is fixedly stopped, and the time shortened gaming state is maintained during the variable fixed time at the fixed stop (when the variable fixed time ends, the non-time shortened gaming state is entered. (Migrate), the right-handed instruction display is still displayed continuously. (F) After that, the variable fixed time ends at the third timing after the power is restored, the game shifts to the non-time shortened gaming state, and the first decorative symbol changes to the display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time shortened gaming state. Is displayed ("number + character" and "711"). As described above, after the power is restored, the right-handed instruction display is displayed again, and then the first decorative symbol is displayed again.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the final fluctuation in the time-reduced gaming state, the stop display of the first decorative symbol after the power is restored can be visually recognized to power the power in any gaming state. It is possible to recognize whether or not a break has occurred. For example, in a gaming machine in which the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state is short, it is difficult to determine when the time-reduced gaming state ends. Therefore, it is particularly suitable.

In addition, since it takes time for the player to launch the game ball by hitting right and the main game symbol starts to fluctuate, if the power is cut off in the time-reduced game state and the power is restored, the power is restored. By configuring the right-handed instruction display to be displayed before the display of the first decorative symbol, it is possible to teach the player the appropriate firing position rather than redisplaying the decorative symbol when the power is cut off. By giving priority, the subsequent game can proceed smoothly.

In FIG. 163, the redisplay timing of the second decorative symbol after the power is restored may be earlier than the redisplay timing of the right-handed instruction display, and is substantially the same as the redisplay timing of the right-handed instruction display. It may be, or it may be substantially the same as the redisplay timing of the first decorative symbol. Further, as described above, the effect mode in the non-time reduction game state and the effect mode in the time reduction game state may be different. With such a configuration, if the power is not cut off, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the time-reduced gaming state is temporarily stopped until the first decorative symbol at the 100th rotation, which is the final fluctuation of the time-reduced gaming state, temporarily stops. Is the display mode (display format) of, and during the temporary stop (the game state during the temporary stop is still the time shortened game state), the time shortened game state, but the non-time shortened game state is supported. 1 The display mode (display format) of the decorative symbol is changed, and then the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, and at the same time, the second decorative symbol that was changing at the time of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol is also fixedly stopped. After that, the game may shift to the non-time shortened gaming state, and the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol may be configured to maintain the display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time shortened gaming state (in this case,). The display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern does not change).

Further, in FIG. 163, after the first decorative symbol is displayed in the display mode (display format) before the power is turned off at the timing of (e), the display mode (display format) does not change over time, and then. When a new hold occurs and the symbol change starts, the first decorative symbol may be displayed in a display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time reduction gaming state.

Further, in FIG. 163, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the display mode (display format) before the power is turned off at the timing of (e) without going through (d) after the timing of (c). It may be configured in. In addition, at the timing after (e) (timing after the lapse of the variable fixed time), the left-handed instruction is displayed based on the fact that the gaming state is switched from the time-shortened gaming state to the non-time-shortening gaming state. The left-handed instruction display is displayed continuously for a predetermined time after the timing of (f), that is, immediately after the first fluctuation starts after the transition to the non-time shortened gaming state, and then erased. May be good. The display priority at that time is configured in the order of left-handed instruction display> second decorative symbol> second hold display> first decorative symbol. The left-handed instruction display is composed of the same or similar image objects as the left-handed warning display shown in FIG. 134. The above describes the left-handed instruction display when the power is turned off and the power is restored. However, unlike FIG. 163, the 99th, 100th, and subsequent times of the time shortening gaming state without the power being turned off are performed. Even if the game progresses to the non-time-reduced gaming state, the fluctuation in the non-time-reduced gaming state, which is the 100th next variation of the time-reduced gaming state (the first fluctuation after shifting to the non-time-reduced gaming state). Immediately after the start of (variation), the left-handed instruction display may be configured. In such a configuration, if the power is cut off at the 100th rotation of the time-reduced gaming state and the power is restored, the time Do not display the left-handed instruction even immediately after the start of the change in the non-time shortened game state (the first change after shifting to the non-time shortened game state), which is the 100th next change in the shortened game state. It may be configured.

Further, the gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(1) No hold has occurred, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed.
(2) The power supply is cut off.
(3) The power is restored, the effect display device displays that the screen is being restored, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are hidden.
(4) In the situation where the screen return is displayed on the effect display device, a new hold occurs and the main game symbol starts to change, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol remain hidden. Will be.
(5-1) A predetermined time has elapsed since the power was restored, the display indicating that the screen is being restored on the effect display device is terminated, and the variable display between the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is resumed.
(5-2) Alternatively, after the power is restored, a predetermined time has elapsed, which is the time during which the display of the effect display device is returning to the screen, but the main game symbol is changing, so that the screen is being restored. Continues to be displayed, and when the change of the main game symbol ends, the display of the screen returning on the effect display device ends, and the change display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol resumes (holding further occurs). (If so) or a stop indication is given (if no hold has occurred, that is, if a new fluctuation cannot be started).
It may be configured as described above.
That is, it may be configured to act as "(1)->(2)->(3)->(4)->(5-1)", or "(1)->(2)->(3)". → (4) → (5-2) ”may be configured to act.

Next, FIG. 164 is a configuration relating to a display priority (display priority) in the effect display device SG when an error occurs. A high display priority means that the display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer) when viewed from the player, and a low display priority means that the display priority is displayed on the rear side (rear layer) when viewed from the player. That is.

First, (a) the saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality is detected, and an error display "Please pull out the ball" is displayed on the effect display device SG. Further, in the error display, the display area overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the display priority is higher in the error display than in the first decorative symbol. Specifically, the error display "Please pull out the ball" is displayed on the front layer rather than the display of the first decorative symbol displayed as "711" in "number + character". Further, the display area of the error display does not overlap with the display area of the second decorative symbol. Specifically, the error display "Please pull out the ball" does not overlap with the display of the second decorative symbol displayed as "711".

After that, (b) the cross-shaped button SB-2 is operated (either the right button or the left button may be operated), so that the volume adjustment screen is displayed. In the operation of the cross-shaped button SB-2 for displaying the volume adjustment screen, the volume is not adjusted (that is, only the volume adjustment screen is displayed) regardless of whether the right button operation or the left button operation is performed. As a modification, when the right button is operated, the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the volume is increased by one step, and when the left button is operated, the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the volume is decreased by one step. It may be configured as follows. When the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted based on the operation of the cross-shaped button SB-2 while the volume adjustment screen is displayed (for example, the operation of the right button of the cross-shaped button SB-2). The volume is increased by one step, and the volume is decreased by one step by operating the left button of the cross-shaped button SB-2). Further, on the volume adjustment screen, the display area overlaps with the first decorative symbol and the error display, and the display area does not overlap with the second decorative symbol. The display priority is "error display-> volume adjustment screen-> first decorative pattern" from the highest. That is, when the volume adjustment screen is displayed, a part of the display of the first decorative symbol displayed as "711" in "number + character" becomes invisible, while "please pull out the ball". All error displays such as "" are configured to be visible. Also, when the volume adjustment screen is displayed, when the volume is increased by one step by operating the right button of the cross button SB-2, or when the volume is increased by one step by operating the left button of the cross button SB-2, the volume is increased by one step. When it becomes low, it may be configured to output a sound from the speaker so that the level of the changed volume can be recognized (it may be output each time the right button or the left button of the cross-shaped button SB-2 is operated).

In this way, in the figure, while the saucer (upper plate) is full, in other words, in the situation where the error display, the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol are displayed, the cross-shaped button SB- The volume adjustment screen is displayed by operating 2, in other words, the volume can be adjusted even when the saucer (upper plate) is full. In the figure, the case where the saucer (upper plate) is full is illustrated, but it is just an example and may be applied to the situation where other errors occur. In addition, it is not necessary to operate as shown in the figure during the occurrence of all errors, and depending on the type of error occurring, the operation differs from that shown in the figure (for example, the cross-shaped button SB-2 is pressed while an error is occurring. Even if it is operated, the volume adjustment screen is not displayed and the volume cannot be adjusted).

With this configuration, it is possible to give priority to information such as an error display that should be notified to the player, and even if the visibility of the first decorative symbol is reduced, the second decorative symbol is visually recognized for the game. The player can grasp the situation of. In addition, the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the error display and the visibility is reduced, but since the volume adjustment screen itself is visible, the player can tell that the volume can be adjusted at present. Since the volume can be recognized and the volume output from the speaker is changed by operating the cross-shaped button SB-2, the player can perform the volume adjustment without any problem. Each time the cross-shaped button SB-2 is operated as a volume adjustment, a confirmation sound may be output from the speaker so that the current volume level can be recognized (the volume of the confirmation sound changes according to the volume level). do).

Although the display conditions, display priority, and volume adjustment operation of the volume adjustment screen have been described in detail in the figure, the display conditions, display priority, and light amount adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment screen can also be applied in the same manner. However, in order to display the light intensity adjustment screen, unlike the volume adjustment screen, it is necessary to operate the up button or the down button of the cross button SB-2, and in order to adjust the light intensity, unlike the volume adjustment, the cross is used. Operation of the upper or lower button of the button SB-2 (when the upper button is operated, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed and the light amount is increased by one step, and when the lower button is operated, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. The difference is that the amount of light is reduced by one step).

The display areas of the error display and the second decorative symbol may be configured to overlap, or the error display may be configured to have a higher display priority than the second decorative symbol.

In addition, the game machine detects a saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality (a saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality occurs), and the game machine detects a saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality (a saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality). Error status A from the time when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the full tank abnormality occurs), and the gaming machine detects the saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality (the saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality). An error occurs when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the game machine detected an abnormality in the saucer (upper plate) full tank (an abnormality occurred in the saucer (upper plate)). In the case of the state B, the configuration may be as follows.

When the first decorative symbol is configured to output a stop sound (sound effect at the time of stop, also referred to as stop SE) when the fixed stop (or temporary stop) is performed, an error display is displayed on the effect display device SG. In the case where the first decorative symbol is displayed and is in the error state A, a stop sound (stop SE) is output when the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (or temporarily stopped), while an error display is displayed on the effect display device SG. In the case of the error state B, the stop sound (stop SE) may not be output when the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (or temporarily stopped).

The time of the fixed stop may be the time of the temporary stop immediately before the fixed stop. Specifically, "the first decorative symbol is changing → the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped → the stop sound is output → Shaking fluctuation is performed → The first decorative symbol acts like "fixed stop". Further, the temporary stop may be applied to the temporary stop of a special symbol related to the pseudo-continuous fluctuation.

It should be noted that the error state A is when a predetermined error is occurring (for example, the saucer (upper plate) is full), and the error state B is when a specific error is occurring (for example, the start opening winning abnormality). You may.

In the figure, an example is shown in which an error display and / or a volume adjustment screen is displayed while the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped, but the first is not limited to this. Even when the error display and / or the volume adjustment screen is displayed while the decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variablely displayed (the first decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped), the same display priority as that of the figure is applied. The configuration may be applied. In other words, the same display priority configuration as in the figure may be applied to any timing during the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.

The configuration shown in the figure can be applied to any gaming state. Further, a game adopting a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol described above in FIG. 32. In the machine, the configuration shown in the figure may be adopted. In such a configuration, in all the gaming states (including all the gaming states), the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is more than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. ) May be adopted, or in a predetermined gaming state of 1 or more, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol) is larger than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for (symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 165 is a configuration relating to a display priority (display priority) in the effect display device SG at the time of executing the button effect. First, (a) the number of reservations is 2, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variable. After that, (b) the button effect is executed at a predetermined timing of the fluctuation, and the operation suggestion image (the button image described as "PUSH" in the substantially center of the liquid crystal screen) is displayed on the effect display device SG. In the operation suggestion image, the display area overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the display priority of the operation instruction image is higher than that of the first decorative symbol. Further, the display areas of the operation suggestion image and the second decorative pattern do not overlap.

<Pattern 1>
After that, since the sub-input button was operated while (c) the operation suggestion image was being displayed (the valid period of the sub-input button SB during the execution of the button effect), the post-operation image in the button effect was "super heat! ! ”Is displayed on the effect display device SG (the operation suggestion image is deleted). The display area of the post-operation image overlaps with the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserved display (sometimes referred to as the second reserved image), and the display priority is "second decorative" from the highest. "Design-> 2nd hold display-> Post-operation image-> 1st decorative design". Further, the post-operation image has a larger display area than the operation suggestion image, and by configuring in this way, the player operates the sub-input button SB in hopes of seeing a more conspicuous post-operation image. The frequency can be increased. Since the second decorative symbol and the second reserved display are configured so as not to be duplicated, the display priority order of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved display may be changed. The display priorities may be the same. Further, in pattern 1 of the figure, the post-operation image is configured to overlap with the second hold display, but the post-operation image may be configured not to overlap with the second hold display.

<Pattern 2>
After the above-mentioned (b), (d) the sub-input button was operated while the operation suggestion image was being displayed (the valid period of the sub-input button SB during the execution of the button effect), so that the image was used as a post-operation image in the button effect. , "CHANGE!" Is displayed on the effect display device SG (the operation suggestion image is deleted). In the post-operation image, the display area overlaps with the first decorative symbol, the first hold display (may be configured to overlap with the hold digestion transmission image), and the display area does not overlap with the second decorative symbol. The display priority is, in descending order, "first hold display-> post-operation image-> first decorative pattern". Further, the post-operation image has a larger display area than the operation suggestion image, and by configuring in this way, the player operates the sub-input button SB in hopes of seeing a more conspicuous post-operation image. The frequency can be increased. In the case of acting as in (d), the display priority of the second decorative symbol may be higher than that of the first hold display. In pattern 2 of the figure, the post-operation image is configured not to overlap with the second hold display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the post-operation image overlaps with the first hold display and the second hold display. It may be configured to do so. Further, in such a configuration, the display priority of the post-operation image may be configured to be lower than the display priority of the first hold display and the second hold display.

It should be noted that the operation suggestion image may be configured to have a plurality of types, for example, the operation suggestion image A having a relatively high frequency of being displayed and the operation suggestion image B having a relatively low frequency of being displayed. If so, only the operation suggestion image A may be configured to act like the pattern 1 or pattern 2, and the operation suggestion image B may be configured not to act like the pattern 1 or pattern 2. As an example, the operation suggestion image A may have a smaller display area than the post-operation image, but the operation suggestion image B may be configured to have a larger display area than the post-operation image.

Further, in the figure, the button effect is configured to start (display an operation suggestion image) in a situation where the reach is not caused by the symbol change, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach effect is being executed. It may be configured to display a button effect (operation suggestion image). In such a configuration, the operation suggestion image and the post-operation image may be configured to have a higher display priority than the image during the super reach effect (for example, the image of the main character and the image of the enemy character). .. The display priority with other elements may be the same as the configuration in the figure.

Next, FIG. 166 is a configuration relating to a display mode (display format) and a variation pattern of the first decorative symbol. In the configuration in the figure, as the above-mentioned limited frequency state, there are a limited frequency state A (a state that refers to the fluctuation pattern table A) and a limited frequency state B (a state that refers to the fluctuation pattern table B). It has a normal state (a state that refers to a normal fluctuation pattern table) as a state related to a fluctuation pattern different from the frequency state.

(A) It is a time-reduced gaming state, the state related to the fluctuation pattern is the limited frequency state A, and "617" is displayed as a "number" for the first decorative symbol. Further, in the limited frequency state A, the fluctuation pattern is configured as follows. In the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state, the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table A) is used regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. It is configured to determine the variation pattern (using). Further, even in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state, the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table) is performed regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. It is configured to determine the variation pattern using A). The limited frequency state A (variable pattern table A) may be provided with a limited frequency state (variable pattern table) according to the number of holdings on the second main game side. For example, when the number of holdings is "1". Limited frequency state A1 (variation pattern table A1) to be used, limited frequency state A2 (variation pattern table A2) to be used when the number of holdings is "2", limited frequency state A3 to be used when the number of holdings is "3". (Variation pattern table A3), limited frequency state A4 (variation pattern table A4) used when the number of holds is "4", etc. may be provided individually, or hold may be provided. Limited frequency state A12 (variation pattern table A12) used when the number is "1" and "2", and limited frequency state A34 (variation pattern table A34) used when the number of holds is "3" and "4". A limited frequency state (variation pattern table) common to some of the reserved numbers may be provided.
<At the time of loss>
Random number: 0 to 499 → Fluctuation time: 3 seconds Random number: 500 to 799 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 800 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds <Hit time>
Random number: 0 to 299 → Fluctuation time: 3 seconds Random number: 300 to 499 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 500 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds

After that, the symbol variation of the main game symbol is executed 50 times without winning the big hit, and the game state remains the time-reduced gaming state, but the state related to the variation pattern is switched from the limited frequency state A to the limited frequency state B. .. In the first decorative pattern, "617" is still displayed as a "number". Further, in the limited frequency state B, the fluctuation pattern is configured as follows. In the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state, the limited frequency state B (variation pattern table B) is set regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. It is configured to use to determine the variation pattern. Further, when the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table A) is not used in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state, the hold on the second main game side. Regardless of the number, the limited frequency state B (variation pattern table B) is used to determine the variation pattern. The limited frequency state B (variable pattern table B) may be provided with a limited frequency state (variable pattern table) according to the number of holdings on the second main game side. For example, when the number of holdings is "1". Limited frequency state B1 to be used (variable pattern table B1), limited frequency state B2 to be used when the number of holds is "2" (variable pattern table B2), limited frequency state B3 to be used when the number of holds is "3" (Variation pattern table B3), limited frequency state B4 (variation pattern table B4) used when the number of holdings is "4", etc. may be provided individually, or a limited frequency state (variation pattern table) may be provided individually. Limited frequency state B12 (variation pattern table B12) used when the number is "1" and "2", and limited frequency state B34 (variation pattern table B34) used when the number of holds is "3" and "4". A limited frequency state (variation pattern table) common to some of the reserved numbers may be provided.
<At the time of loss>
Random number: 0 to 299 → Fluctuation time: 3 seconds Random number: 300 to 499 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 500 to 849 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 850 to 919 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 920 to 979 → Fluctuation time: 60 seconds Random number: 980-999 → Fluctuation time: 120 seconds <Hit time>
Random number: 0 to 99 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 100 to 199 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 200 to 399 → Fluctuation time: 60 seconds Random number: 400 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 120 seconds

After that, without winning the big hit, the symbol change of the main game symbol is executed 50 times, the time shortening game state ends, the game state becomes the non-time reduction game state, and the state related to the change pattern changes from the limited frequency state B. It switches to the normal state (normal fluctuation pattern table which is a normal state related to a fluctuation pattern different from the limited frequency state). As for the first decorative pattern, "617" is displayed by "number + character". Further, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern is configured as follows. As for the normal state (normal fluctuation pattern table), it is preferable to provide a normal state (normal fluctuation pattern table) according to the number of reservations on the first main game side. For example, the normal state 1 (normal fluctuation pattern table 1) used when the number of holdings is "1", the normal state 2 (normal fluctuation pattern table 2) used when the number of holdings is "2", and the number of holdings are "". Normal state 3 (normal fluctuation pattern table 3) used in the case of "3", normal state 4 (normal fluctuation pattern table 4) used when the number of holds is "4", etc. (Pattern table) may be provided, or used when the number of holds is "1" and "2", the normal state 12 (normal variation pattern table 12) is used, and when the number of holds is "3" and "4". A normal state (normal fluctuation pattern table) common to some of the reserved numbers may be provided, such as the normal state 34 (normal fluctuation pattern table 34).
<At the time of loss>
Random number: 0 to 199 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 200 to 699 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 700 to 919 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 920 to 979 → Fluctuation time: 60 seconds Random number: 980 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 120 seconds <hit time>
Random number: 0 to 99 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 100 to 199 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 200 to 399 → Fluctuation time: 60 seconds Random number: 400 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 120 seconds

As described above, in the configuration in the figure, when the game shifts to the time shortened game state after the end of the big hit and the big hit is not won after that, "the time shortened game state and the limited frequency state A is changed by 50 → the time shortened game". The state and the limited frequency state B are configured to transition from 50 fluctuations to a non-time reduction gaming state and a normal state.

Further, in the figure, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is different between the case of the time-reduced gaming state and the case of the non-time-reduced gaming state, but both of them are the time-reducing games. The display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is the same in the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B, which are in the same gaming state in the state. With this configuration, even if the background effect is designed to switch to various effect modes even in the same game state, the game is played by visually recognizing the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern. The state can be grasped, for example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the time-reduced game state (a situation in which the player cannot accurately grasp whether or not the time-reduced game state has ended). Also, by visually recognizing the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol, it is possible to accurately recognize in which game state the big hit was made.

In the figure, the time-reduced gaming state is configured to transition between two limited frequency states, but is not limited to this, and may be configured to transition between three or more limited frequency states. In this case, as in the configuration of the figure, if the gaming states are the same, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol may be the same even if the limited frequency states are different. ..

In the figure, the display mode (display format) of the second decorative symbol is set to a gaming state (whether or not it is a time-reduced gaming state), a state related to a variation pattern (whether or not it is a limited frequency state), and the like. Regardless, they are all "numbers". In addition, it has a special effect that can be displayed in the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B, which is a "time reduction remaining number suggestion effect", and has a specific delimited variation (for example, time reduction) between the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B. It is a variation of the opportunity that the remaining number of times of the gaming state becomes a multiple of 10, and the remaining number of times of the 10th variation, the 20th variation, ..., the 80th variation, the 90th variation) and / or the time shortening gaming state is predetermined. When the number of times (for example, 10 times) or less is reached, a display such as "Time saving number of times remaining XX times!" Is displayed for each fluctuation. This "time reduction remaining number suggestion effect" is not displayed in the non-time reduction gaming state. Further, this "time saving remaining number suggestion effect" is displayed so large that it overlaps with the first decorative symbol but does not overlap with the second decorative symbol. In addition, it is preferable that the display priority is the time saving remaining number of times suggestion effect> the first decorative symbol. However, the display priority may be the first decorative symbol> the time saving remaining number suggestion effect in order to give priority to the notification of the hit / fail determination result.

The time-reduced gaming state in the figure may be a gaming state related to the fluctuation pattern of the main game symbol, or the auxiliary game symbol (probability that the auxiliary game symbol stops at the hit symbol, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol, etc.). The game state may be related to the opening mode of the second main game start port electric accessory, etc.), or both may be combined. Further, this definition is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, and is applicable to all configurations according to this example.

In the figure, (a) the time-reduced gaming state and the limited frequency state A and (b) the time-reduced gaming state and the limited frequency state B have the same background effect (or effect mode), but (c). It is configured to have a different background effect (or effect mode) in the non-time reduction gaming state and the normal state. In this case, until the first decorative symbol of the final variation in the limited frequency state B is temporarily stopped, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the limited frequency state B (time reduction gaming state) is used. During the temporary stop (the game state during the temporary stop is still the limited frequency state B and the time shortened game state), the limited frequency state B (time shortened game state) corresponds to the non-time shortened game state. The display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is changed, and then the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, and at the same time, the second decorative symbol that was changing at the time of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol is also fixedly stopped. After that, the game may shift to the non-time shortened gaming state, and the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol may be configured to maintain the display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time shortened gaming state (in this case). , The display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern does not change). Further, as modification examples, (a) time-reduced gaming state and limited frequency state A, (b) time-reduced gaming state and limited frequency state B, and (c) non-time-reduced gaming state and normal state, respectively. The background effect (or effect mode) may be configured to be different. The effect mode is also referred to as an effect stage, and is an effect mode shown by a background image. As an example, the backgrounds described in the embodiments and modifications such as the day stage and the night stage shown in FIG. 77 and the like, the stage A and the stage B shown in FIG. 142 and the above-mentioned production stages A, B, and C, etc. The stage mode corresponds to the production mode. That is, both the present configuration and the configuration shown in FIG. 142 and the like may be adopted. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if a plurality of configurations related to the effect mode (effect stage, background effect, background image) according to this example are adopted in combination.

Further, a game adopting a configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol described above in FIG. 32. The configuration shown in the figure may be adopted in the machine. In such a configuration, in all the gaming states (including all the gaming states), the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is more than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. ) May be adopted, or in a predetermined gaming state of 1 or more, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol) is larger than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for (symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 167 is a configuration relating to the feature of the first decorative symbol depending on the gaming state.

<A: Time reduction game state>
In the time-reduced gaming state, "787" is not stopped and displayed together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol as a lost stop symbol (combination of numbers) (if it is "232", it can be stopped and displayed). The display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is "number". Further, the display of the hold display and the hold digestion transmission image is only the display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side. That is, even if the hold on the first main game side occurs, the hold display and the hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the hold on the first main game side are not displayed. Further, in the time-reduced gaming state, the special symbol (“continuation” in the figure) is not stopped and displayed as the temporary stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the time shortening game state, when the reach of 7 symbols occurs (“7 ↓ 7”), it becomes a big hit (it does not become a loss), in other words, it is “777” together with the 1st decorative symbol and the 2nd decorative symbol. May be configured so that only "is stopped and displayed." Although this configuration can be applied in a time-reduced gaming state, it is preferable to apply it in a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state.

<B, c: Non-time reduction game state>
(B) In the non-time reduction game state, "787" may be stopped and displayed together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol as a stop symbol (combination of numbers) that is lost (a combination of numbers). "232" may also be stopped and displayed). The display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol is "number + character". Further, the display of the hold display and the hold digestion transmission image is only the display corresponding to the hold on the first main game side. That is, even if the hold on the second main game side occurs, the hold display and the hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the hold on the second main game side are not displayed. In addition, in the non-time reduction game state, even if the reach of 7 symbols occurs (“7 ↓ 7”), it may be lost, in other words, “787” together with the 1st decorative symbol and the 2nd decorative symbol. May be configured to be stopped and displayed. Although this configuration can be applied in the non-time shortened gaming state, it is preferable to apply it in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state.

Further, (c) in the non-time shortening gaming state, a special symbol (“continuation” in the same diagram) can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. Here, the special symbol is a symbol that is not stopped and displayed as a fixed stop symbol, such as a "continuation" symbol that temporarily stops when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, or a "development" symbol that temporarily stops before the super reach effect is executed. It has become.

With such a configuration, in the time-reduced gaming state, the player pays attention to the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, so that the number of types of the stop mode of the first decorative symbol can be reduced or predetermined. While simplifying the display mode (number of display types) of the first decorative symbol, such as preventing the special symbol from being stopped and displayed, in the non-time reduction game state, in order to entertain the process until it becomes a big hit. By diversifying the display mode (number of display types) of the first decorative symbol, such as increasing the number of types of the stop mode of the first decorative symbol and allowing a predetermined special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the game state. It is possible to build an appropriate production environment.

Further, in the figure, the time-reduced gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state are compared, but the probability-variable gaming state and the non-probability-variable gaming state may be compared, and the gaming state related to the variation pattern ( The limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B) may be compared, or the effect mode (effect mode A and effect mode B) controlled by the sub-control board S may be compared. In addition, in the case of comparison in the effect mode, it may be configured in combination with the configuration related to the effect mode (stage A, stage B) described above in FIG. 141. More specifically, the effect mode in the non-time shortened gaming state (which may be a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state) in the figure is set to stage A in FIG. 141, and the time shortening gaming state (probability) in the figure is set. The effect mode in the variable game state and the time-reduced game state) may be set as the stage B in FIG. 141, and both the configuration of the figure and the configuration of FIG. 141 may be adopted.

In the predetermined special symbol, the stop display may be performed as a temporary stop symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state, while the stop display may not be performed as the temporary stop symbol in the time shortened gaming state. It may be configured so that the stop display can be performed as a temporary stop symbol in both the shortened game state and the time shortened game state.

Further, the animation of the first decorative symbol may be stopped when the confirmation of the main game symbol is stopped, while the animation of the first hold display may not be stopped. In the case of the first decorative symbol, the animation means that the symbol such as shaking fluctuation is moving, the pattern in the numbers that make up the symbol is moving, or the character that makes up the symbol is moving. Yes, in the case of the first hold display, the first hold display is rotated, the pattern in the first hold display is accompanied by movement, and the like. As an example of the period during which the animation of the first decorative symbol is stopped, a variable fixed time or the like can be exemplified. Regarding the second decorative symbol and the second hold display, the animation itself is not executed regardless of whether the variable is changing or the variable is fixed (during the stop display or the variable fixed time), and the second decorative symbol is displayed. It is only variable display and variable fixed (stop display), and the second hold display only displays the number of holds (including addition and subtraction).

In addition, the first decorative symbol may be displayed in a variable manner again after all the symbols are temporarily stopped, and may be stopped and displayed with a symbol combination different from that at the time of the temporary stop display. It may be configured so that there is no such case. As a specific example,
(1) The first decorative symbol starts to change → develops into a super reach effect → As a result of the super reach effect, “666” is displayed as a temporary stop → all the symbols start to change again → “777” temporarily stops → shake fluctuation → Confirmed stop (2) The first decorative symbol starts to change → The middle symbol is a temporary stop display in the symbol combination "6 consecutive 6" → All the symbols start to change again → Develop into super reach effect → Super reach effect As a result, "666" may be configured as a temporary stop display-> sway fluctuation-> fixed stop as described above. The second decorative symbol in (1) and (2) is continuously displayed in a variable manner until the shaking of the first decorative symbol is fluctuating (until immediately before the confirmation of the first decorative symbol is stopped), and at the same time as the confirmation of the first decorative symbol is stopped. Confirmed stop.
With this configuration, the first decorative symbol plays a role of executing various effects to excite the game, while the second decorative symbol can accurately notify the result of the game.

Further, the mode of the first decorative symbol may change depending on the operation of the operation member (for example, sub-input button, cross-shaped button, etc.) controlled by the sub-control board S, but the second decorative symbol is controlled by the sub-control board S. The mode does not change depending on the operation of the operating member (for example, sub-input button, cross-shaped button, etc.). Here, the aspect change means that a part or all of the design of the symbol is changed, the first decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped returns and temporarily stops, or the design is advanced (sliding) and temporarily stopped. Changes related to the variation mode such as cases, temporary stop display of special symbols, changes in the speed of variation display of the first decorative symbol, and the like. With this configuration, the first decorative symbol plays a role of executing various effects to excite the game, while the second decorative symbol can accurately notify the result of the game.

Next, FIG. 168 shows a specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state (for example, a reach variation for performing a normal reach effect per A3 in FIG. 12, a super reach effect per A6, and a battle reach). It shows the execution timing of each action etc. in the reach fluctuation that performs the first half and the second half of the production. It should be noted that various variations of the time-reduced gaming state shown in FIG. 13 may be used instead of the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the first half of the normal reach effect, super reach effect, and battle reach effect of the loss shown in FIGS. It may be the reach variation performed in the latter half, or the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. May be. In addition, when targeting the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the loss super reach effect and the battle reach effect, the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect may be held as the variation mode group of the groups 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. It is clear.

In FIG. 168, the execution timing of each action or the like will be described in chronological order, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Since the detailed embodiments of the actions (a) to (n2) shown in FIG. 168 correspond to (a) to (n2) of FIGS. 173 to 176, the details will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. .. First, (a) is a symbol variation of the first main game symbol in a situation where the hold on the first main game side exists and the hold on the second main game side does not exist in the non-time shortened game state. It is the timing when the first decorative symbols in the corresponding left column, middle column, and right column are fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, and (b) is reserved because the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied. Is digested, and it is the timing to execute the change start action 1 when the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol start the variation display. c) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column that started the fluctuation display execute the acceleration fluctuation, and (d) is the left column, the middle column, and the right column that execute the acceleration fluctuation. (E) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the left column that executes the high-speed fluctuation executes the deceleration fluctuation, and (f) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the deceleration fluctuation. The first decorative symbol is the timing when the fixed position action 1 is executed, (g) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the right column where the high-speed fluctuation is executed executes the deceleration fluctuation, and (h) is the timing when the deceleration fluctuation is executed. The first decorative symbol of (i) is the timing to execute the fixed position action 1, (i) is the timing to execute the deceleration fluctuation of the pseudo-continuous symbol, and (j) is the timing to execute the fixed position action 1 of the pseudo-continuous symbol. (K) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes the fixed position action 1, (l) is the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol executes the revariation, and (m). Is the timing to execute the change start action 2 when the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column starts the re-variation (pseudo-ream), and (n) is the left when the re-variation is started. The first decorative symbol in the column, middle column, and right column is the timing to execute the acceleration fluctuation, and in (o), the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column that executed the acceleration fluctuation executes the high-speed fluctuation. (P) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column that has executed the high-speed fluctuation executes the deceleration fluctuation, and (q) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column performs the fixed position action 2. It is the timing to execute, (r) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the right column which executed the high-speed fluctuation executes the deceleration fluctuation, and (s) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the fixed position action 2. (T) is the timing after the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the fixed position action 2, and (u) is the timing after the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column is tempai. Perform action 1 (V) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns execute the shaking action 1, and (w) is the timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbols execute the deceleration fluctuation. x) is the timing when the pseudo-ream symbol executes the fixed position action 2, (y) is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes the fixed position action 2, and (z) is the timing when the pseudo-ream symbol executes the fixed position action 2. The symbol is the timing to execute the re-variation, (a2) is the timing to execute the fluctuation start action 3 when starting the re-variation (pseudo-ream) in the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and (b2). ) Is the timing when the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column that started the re-variation executes the acceleration fluctuation, and (c2) is the timing of the left column, the middle column, and the right column that executed the acceleration fluctuation. The first decorative symbol is the timing at which the high-speed fluctuation is executed, (d2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column that has executed the high-speed fluctuation executes the deceleration fluctuation, and (e2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column is executed. 1 The decorative symbol is the timing at which the fixed position action 3 is executed, (f2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the right column that has executed the high-speed fluctuation executes the deceleration fluctuation, and (g2) is the timing at which the deceleration fluctuation is executed. The first decorative symbol is the timing when the fixed position action 3 is executed, (h2) is the timing after the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the fixed position action 3, and (i2) is the timing after the fixed position action 3 is executed. The first decorative symbol in the right column is the timing to execute the tempai action 2, (j2) is the timing to execute the shaking action 2 by the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column, and (k2) is the middle. The first decorative symbol in the column is the timing to execute the fixed position action 3, (l2) is the timing to execute the determined action by the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and (m2) is the timing to execute the determined action. , The timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column execute the shaking fluctuation, and (n2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column execute the fixed stop. be.

The specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state shown in FIG. 168 starts the symbol variation of the first main game symbol at the timing of (b). Then, the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are temporarily stopped at the timings (f) to (k), and the first revariation (pseudo-ream) is performed at the timing of (l) thereafter. Start. Regarding the first decorative symbol, the second re-variation (pseudo-ream) will be started at the timing of (m). This first re-variation (pseudo-ream) is called a non-reach pseudo-reach (pseudo-ream in a situation other than the tempai state). Then, the reach effect is executed from the timing of the tempai action 1 of (u) of the first re-variation (pseudo-ream) to the fixed position action 2 of (y), and the left column at the timing of (q) to (y). The first decorative symbols in the middle column and the right column are temporarily stopped, respectively, and then the second re-variation (pseudo-ream) is started at the timing of (z). Regarding the first decorative symbol, the second re-variation (pseudo-ream) is started at the timing of (a2). This second re-variation (pseudo-ream) is called a post-reach pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream after a situation in which the tempai state is reached). Then, the reach effect is executed from the timing of the tempai action 2 of (i2) of the second re-variation (pseudo-ream) to the fixed position action 3 of (k2). As for the effect sound (BGM), the stage BGM is output from (a) to (u), the reach BGM is output from (u) to (y), and the stage BGM is output from (z) to (i2). Then, the reach BGM is output from (i2) to (k2), and the jackpot BGM (for example, the effect sound of the determined action) is output from (l2) to (n2). The contents of the stage BGM may be switched with the re-variation (pseudo-ream) as an opportunity. For example, the stages (a) to (k) are the stage BGM1, and the stages (l) to (u) are the stage BGM2 or the pseudo-ream. Dedicated BGM1, (z) to (i2) may output stage BGM3 or pseudo-ream dedicated BGM2, or (a) to (k) are stage BGM1, (l) to (u) are stages. BGM2 or pseudo-ream dedicated BGM, stage BGM2 or pseudo-ream dedicated BGM may be output from (z) to (i2). Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol such as (j) or (x) performs a fixed position action, the BGM dedicated to the pseudo-continuous symbol display may be output.

FIG. 169 shows the execution timing of each action or the like in the variable standby state. FIG. 169 (a3) is a different situation from FIGS. 168 (a) to (n2), and there is a hold on the first main game side and a hold on the second main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state. It shows the timing when the change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol in the non-playing situation is fixedly stopped by the lost symbol. Further, also in (b3) to (f3) after (a3), the first main game symbol in the situation where neither the first main game side hold nor the second main game side hold exists in the non-time shortened game state. It shows a state in which the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the change in the symbol has been fixedly stopped due to a lost symbol (variation standby state). Note that FIG. 169 (a3) corresponds to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists in the non-time shortened gaming state. 1 The timing at which the change in the decorative symbol was fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol was shown, but (a3) in FIG. 169 shows that the first main game side and the second main game side are held in the non-time shortened gaming state. It may be the timing when the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol change of the second main game symbol has stopped due to a lost symbol, or it may be held by the first main game side in the time-reduced gaming state. It may be the timing when the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol change of the second main game symbol has stopped due to the lost symbol in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side. In the shortened game state, the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol change of the first main game symbol in the situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists is confirmed as a lost symbol. It may be the timing when it stopped. Further, also in (b3) to (f3) after (a3), the first main game symbol in the situation where neither the first main game side hold nor the second main game side hold exists in the non-time shortened game state. The state in which the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol change in No. 1 has been fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol (variation standby state) is shown, but (b3) to (f3) are not. In the time-reduced gaming state, the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol change of the second main game symbol in the situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists is a lost symbol. A state in which the fixed stop state (variable standby state) may be continued, or a situation in which neither the first main game side hold nor the second main game side hold exists in the time-reduced game state. The first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol change of the second main game symbol in the above may be in a state where the first decorative symbol has been fixedly stopped due to a lost symbol (variation standby state), or the time is shortened. In the game state, the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol change of the first main game symbol in the situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists is confirmed and stopped as a lost symbol. It may be a state in which the state (variable standby state) is continued. Further, (a3) of FIG. 169 corresponds to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists in the non-time shortened gaming state. 1 The timing when the change of the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped due to the lost symbol is shown, but as (a3) in FIG. In a situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists after the end of the big hit, the timing may be the timing when "777" or the like is displayed as the big hit symbol. When configured in this way, (b3) to (f3) after (a3) are in a situation where neither the hold on the first main game side nor the hold on the second main game side exists after the end of the big hit. The state in which "777" or the like is displayed as the jackpot symbol (variable standby state) continues.

In FIG. 169, the execution timing of each action or the like will be described in chronological order, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Since the detailed embodiments of the actions (a3) to (f3) shown in FIG. 169 correspond to (a3) to (f3) of FIG. 177, the details will be described with reference to FIG. 177. First, in (a3), the symbol changes in response to the symbol change of the first main game symbol in the situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists in the non-time shortened gaming state. The first decorative symbol is the timing when the fixed symbol is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, (b3) is the timing when the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are displayed in the variable standby state, and (c3) is the timing when the variable standby state is displayed. It is the timing when the displayed volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are erased, (d3) is the timing when the first decorative symbol executes the first shaking action in the fluctuation standby state, and (e3) is the timing. , It is a timing to execute the waiting movie in the variable standby state, and (f3) is a timing to execute the second shaking action in the variable standby state by the first decorative symbol. The timing at which the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen displayed in the fluctuation standby state are erased is set to (d3), and the timing at which the first decorative symbol executes the first shaking action during the fluctuation standby state is set to (c3). ) May be used.

As for the BGM (directing sound), the stage BGM is output from (a3) to (d3), and the output of the stage BGM is stopped (the output is set to 0) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the shaking action of (d3). Then, the stage BGM is not output in (e3) and (f3) after the output of the stage BGM is stopped. Here, the timing for stopping the output of the stage BGM (setting the output to 0) is preferably a timing after (d3) and a timing before (e3), but (e3). It may be the same timing as the timing.

Next, FIG. 170 shows a specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state (for example, a reach variation for performing a normal reach effect per A3 in FIG. 12, a super reach effect per A6, and a battle reach). It is a figure which shows the execution timing and execution time of each action of the 1st decorative symbol of the left column, the right column, and the middle column in the reach variation which performs the first half and the second half of the production. It should be noted that various variations of the time-reduced gaming state shown in FIG. 13 may be used instead of the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the second decorative symbol is not the symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. It may be the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the main game symbol. In addition, when targeting the reach fluctuation that performs the normal reach effect per A3, the super reach effect that hits A6, and the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the battle reach effect, group 2 and group 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45 are targeted. It is clear that as a variable mode group of, it can be a trigger hold of the look-ahead effect.

First, when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts a specific symbol variation in the non-time shortened gaming state, the first decorative symbol in the left column sets the action 1 at the start of the variation to H1. Run for seconds. After that, the fixed position action 1 is T1 seconds, the shaking action is Y1 seconds, the fluctuation start action 2 is H4 seconds, the fixed position action 2 is T4 seconds, the shaking action is Y3 seconds, the tempai action 1 is TP1 seconds, and the shaking action 1 is performed. Y4 seconds, fluctuation start action 3 for H7 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T7 seconds, shaking action for Y6 seconds, tempai action 2 for TP3 seconds, shaking action 2 for Y7 seconds, and decision action for K1 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative symbol in the left column is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol is executed over the variable fixed time. The first decorative symbol in the right column is H2 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T2 seconds for fixed position action 1, Y2 seconds for shaking action, H5 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T5 seconds for fixed position action 2, and tempai. Action 1 is executed for TP2 seconds, shaking action 1 is executed for Y5 seconds, fluctuation start action 3 is executed for H8 seconds, fixed position action 3 is executed for T8 seconds, tempai action 2 is executed for TP4 seconds, shaking action 2 is executed for Y8 seconds, and the decision action is executed for K2 seconds. do. After the deciding action, the first decorative symbol in the right column is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol is executed over the variable fixed time. In the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the change start action 1 is H3 seconds, the fixed position action 1 is T3 seconds, the change start action 2 is H6 seconds, the fixed position action 2 is T6 seconds, and the change start action 3 is H9. Second, the fixed position action 3 is executed for T9 seconds, and the determined action is executed for K3 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative symbol in the middle row is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol is executed over the variable fixed time. In addition, when targeting the reach fluctuation that performs the first half and the second half of the hit super reach effect and the hit battle reach effect, the fixed position action 3 in the middle row of the hit case shown in FIG. 170 is not executed. ..

Further, the special symbol (pseudo-ream symbol) used in the first pseudo-ream variation as a provisional display mode is the timing of the fixed position action 1 in the middle row, and the special symbol (pseudo-ream) used in the subsequent pseudo-ream variation. The symbol) is displayed at the timing of the fixed position action 2 in the middle row. At that time, the special symbol may be displayed by executing a fixed position action. Then, the group notice shown in FIG. 83 is predetermined at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing earlier than the middle of Y7 seconds) during the execution of the shaking action 2 after the execution of the tempai action 2 in the left column and the right column. It is configured to be executed for a time, but not executed after the execution of the tempai action 1 in the left column and the right column and during the execution of the shaking action 1. Further, the hold change effect shown in FIG. 87 is after the execution of the action 1 at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column, and up to the fixed position action 1 of the first decorative symbol in the left column. Between (change timing 1), after the execution of the first decorative symbol change start action 2 in the left column, middle column, and right column, and until the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the left column (change timing) 2) Executed after the execution of the first decorative symbol change start action 3 in the left column, middle column, and right column until the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the left column (change timing 3). It is possible, and the hold change effect may be executed at all the timings 1 to 3, or the hold change effect may be executed at any one timing or at two of the timings 1 to 3. May be good.

The execution time and the variable fixed time of each action in FIG. 170 are configured in the following relations.
(1) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (one of H1 to H9 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(1-1) Action H seconds at the start of fluctuation in the left column (one of H1, H4, H7 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) One)
(1-2) Action H seconds at the start of fluctuation in the right column (one of H2, H5, H8 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(2) Fixed position action T seconds (one of T1 to T9 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(2-1) Fixed position action T seconds in the left column (one of T1, T4, T7 seconds) <Swaying action Y seconds in the left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) )
(2-2) Fixed position action T seconds in the right column (one of T2, T5, T8 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(3) Tempai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(3-1) Tempai action TP seconds in the left column (one of TP1, TP3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the left column (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(3-2) Tempai action TP seconds in the right column (one of TP2 and TP4 seconds) <Swaying action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(4) Decisive action K seconds (one of K1 to K3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(4-1) Determining action in the left column K1 seconds <Shaking action in the left column Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(4-2) Right column decision action K2 seconds <Right column shaking action Y seconds (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(5) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(5-1) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(5-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(6-1) Total time of fixed position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(6-2) Total time of fixed position action in the right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(7) Total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(7-1) Total time of tempai action in the left column (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(7-2) Total time of tempai action in the right column (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(8) Total time of determined action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action Y seconds (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(8-1) Determining action in the left column K1 seconds <Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(8-2) Right column decision action K2 seconds <total time of right column shaking action (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(9) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(9-1) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) <Sway action in the left column Y seconds (Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) )
(9-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(10) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(10-1) Total time of fixed position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) <Swaying action in the left column Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(10-2) Total time of fixed position action in the right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(11) Total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(11-1) Total time of tempai action in the left column (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) <Shaking action in the left column Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(11-2) Total time of tempai action in the right column (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(12) Total time of determined action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(13) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + Total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(13-1) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column Total time of Tempai action (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) + decision action K1 seconds in the left column <total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(13-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in the right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column Total time of tempai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) + right column decision action K2 seconds <total time of right column shaking action (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(14) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + Total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(14-1) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column Total time of tempai action (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) + decision action K1 seconds in the left column <sway action Y seconds in the left column (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(14-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in the right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column Total time of tempai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) + right column decision action K2 seconds <right column shaking action Y seconds (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(15) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) <Floating fixed time (16) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) <Floating fixed time (17) Tempai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Floating fixed time (18) Determination action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) <Floating fixed time (19) Shaking action Y seconds (Y1) ~ Y8 seconds)> Fixed fluctuation time (20) Action H seconds at the start of fluctuation (one of H1 to H9 seconds) + Fixed position action T seconds (one of T1 to T9 seconds) + Tempai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + Decisive action K seconds (one of K1 to K3 seconds)> Variable fixed time (21) Total time of actions at the start of fluctuation (H1 to H9) Total time of seconds) + Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + Total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + Total time of determined action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) )> Variable fixed time (22) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + Total time of tempai action (TP1 to TP4) Total time of seconds) + Total time of determined action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(23) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + Total time of deciding action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
Regarding the above (15) to (18), the variable fixed time may be configured to be shorter, that is, "action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds)> fluctuation. Fixed time "," Fixed position action T seconds (one of T1 to T9 seconds)> Variable fixed time "," Tempai action TP seconds (one of TP1 to TP4 seconds)> Variable fixed time "," The fixed action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds)> variable fixed time may be set. It should be noted that "any" here may be satisfied by either one, and it is not necessary to satisfy any of them. For example, in the case of (3-2), at least one of TP2 <Y2, TP2 <Y5, TP2 <Y8, TP4 <Y2, TP4 <Y5, and TP4 <Y8 may be satisfied. The variable fixed time is the variable fixed time of the first main game symbol and the variable fixed time of the second main game symbol, and since there is no concept of totaling, it is set as a single time.

Next, FIG. 171 shows the first half and the second half of the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the battle reach effect of the loss shown in FIGS. It is a figure which shows the execution timing and execution time of each action of the 1st decorative symbol of the left column, the right column, and the middle column in the reach variation to perform). It should be noted that various variations of the time-reduced gaming state shown in FIG. 13 may be used instead of the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the second decorative symbol is not the symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. It may be the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the main game symbol. In addition, when targeting the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the loss super reach effect and the battle reach effect, the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect may be held as the variation mode group of the groups 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. It is clear.

First, when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts a specific symbol variation in the non-time shortened gaming state, the first decorative symbol in the left column sets the action 1 at the start of the variation to H1. Run for seconds. After that, the fixed position action 1 is T1 seconds, the shaking action is Y1 seconds, the fluctuation start action 2 is H4 seconds, the fixed position action 2 is T4 seconds, the shaking action is Y3 seconds, the tempai action 1 is TP1 seconds, and the shaking action 1 is performed. Y4 seconds, fluctuation start action 3 is executed for H7 seconds, fixed position action 3 is executed for T7 seconds, shaking action is executed for Y6 seconds, tempai action 2 is executed for TP3 seconds, and shaking action 2 is executed for Y7 seconds. After the shaking action 2, the first decorative symbol in the left column is shaken and fluctuated by the lost symbol, and then the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol is executed over the variable fixed time. The first decorative symbol in the right column is H2 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T2 seconds for fixed position action 1, Y2 seconds for shaking action, H5 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T5 seconds for fixed position action 2, and tempai. Action 1 is executed for TP2 seconds, shaking action 1 is executed for Y5 seconds, fluctuation start action 3 is executed for H8 seconds, fixed position action 3 is executed for T8 seconds, tempai action 2 is executed for TP4 seconds, and shaking action 2 is executed for Y8 seconds. After the shaking action 2, the first decorative symbol in the right column is shaken and fluctuated by the lost symbol, and then the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol is executed over the variable fixed time. In the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the change start action 1 is H3 seconds, the fixed position action 1 is T3 seconds, the change start action 2 is H6 seconds, the fixed position action 2 is T6 seconds, and the change start action 3 is H9. Run for seconds. Then, the first decorative symbol in the middle row is shaken and fluctuated by the lost symbol according to the fluctuation of the left column and the right column, and then the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol is executed over the variable fixed time. In addition, when targeting the reach fluctuations that perform the first half and the second half of the loss super reach effect and the loss battle reach effect, the fixed position action 3 in the middle row, the left column, the middle row, and the right column in the case of hitting shown in FIG. It is configured not to execute the determination action of the first decorative pattern of.

The execution time and the variable fixed time of each action in FIG. 171 are configured in the following relations.
(1) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (one of H1 to H9 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(1-1) Action H seconds at the start of fluctuation in the left column (one of H1, H4, H7 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) One)
(1-2) Action H seconds at the start of fluctuation in the right column (one of H2, H5, H8 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(2) Fixed position action T seconds (one of T1 to T8 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(2-1) Fixed position action T seconds in the left column (one of T1, T4, T7 seconds) <Swaying action Y seconds in the left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) )
(2-2) Fixed position action T seconds in the right column (one of T2, T5, T8 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(3) Tempai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(3-1) Tempai action TP seconds in the left column (one of TP1, TP3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the left column (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(3-2) Tempai action TP seconds in the right column (one of TP2 and TP4 seconds) <Swaying action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(4) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(4-1) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(4-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(5) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(5-1) Total time of fixed position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(5-2) Total time of fixed position action in the right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(6) Total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(6-1) Total time of tempai action in the left column (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(6-2) Total time of tempai action in the right column (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(7) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(7-1) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) <Sway action in the left column Y seconds (Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds) )
(7-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(8) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(8-1) Total time of fixed position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) <Swaying action in the left column Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(8-2) Total time of fixed position action in the right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(9) Total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(9-1) Total time of tempai action in the left column (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) <Shaking action in the left column Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(9-2) Total time of tempai action in the right column (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(10) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(10-1) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column Total time of Tempai action (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(10-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in the right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column Total time of Tempai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) <Total time of shaking action in the right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(11) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(11-1) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column Total time of tempai action (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the left column (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(11-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in the right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column Total time of tempai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(12) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) <Floating fixed time (13) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T8 seconds) <Floating fixed time (14) Tempai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Fluctuating fixed time (15) Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)> Variable fixed time (16) Action H seconds at the start of fluctuation (One of H1 to H9 seconds) + Fixed position action T seconds (one of T1 to T8 seconds) + Tempai action TP seconds (one of TP1 to TP4 seconds)> Variable fixed time (17) ) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds)> fluctuation Fixed time (18) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + Total time of tempai action (total of TP1 to TP4 seconds) Time) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(19) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
Regarding the above (12) to (14), the variable fixed time may be configured to be shorter, that is, "action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds)> fluctuation. Also as "fixed time", "fixed position action T seconds (one of T1 to T8 seconds)> variable fixed time", "tempai action TP seconds (one of TP1 to TP4 seconds)> variable fixed time" good. It should be noted that "any" here may be satisfied by either one, and it is not necessary to satisfy any of them. For example, in the case of (3-2), at least one of TP2 <Y2, TP2 <Y5, TP2 <Y8, TP4 <Y2, TP4 <Y5, and TP4 <Y8 may be satisfied.

Next, FIG. 172 shows the first of the left, right, and middle columns in the specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state (for example, a normal symbol variation accompanied by a chance look-ahead effect, a reach variation). It is a figure which shows the execution timing and execution time of each action of a decorative pattern. Further, in FIG. 172, a normal symbol variation accompanied by a chance look-ahead effect is executed as a pre-trigger variation, and after the first decorative symbol is deterministically stopped and displayed with a symbol combination indicating a chance eye, the next symbol variation is hit. It is configured to execute the reach variation that performs the reach effect of the above as a trigger variation, and these two symbol variations are the symbol variations before and after being connected in chronological order. It should be noted that the time-reduced gaming state may be used instead of the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is supported instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol. Further, when the normal symbol variation and reach variation are targeted, it is clear that the variation mode of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. 12 can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect.

First, in the first decorative symbol in the left column in the normal symbol variation, the variation start action is executed for H1 seconds, the fixed position action is executed for T1 seconds, and the shaking action is executed for Y1 seconds. After that, the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol in the left column is executed over a variable fixed time. In the first decorative symbol in the right column, the action at the start of fluctuation is executed for H2 seconds, the fixed position action is executed for T2 seconds, and the shaking action is executed for Y2 seconds. After that, the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol in the right column is executed over a variable fixed time. In the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the action at the start of fluctuation is executed for H3 seconds, the fixed position action is executed for T3 seconds, and the shaking action is executed for Y3 seconds. After that, the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol in the middle row is executed over a variable fixed time. The fixed-position action when the chance symbol is fixedly stopped may be a fixed-position action different from the fixed-position action in FIGS. 170 and 171 (for example, at the time of temporary stop in FIGS. 170 and 171). The fixed-position action of is an action that makes the first decorative symbol bounce, and the fixed-position action when the chance eye symbol is fixedly stopped is an action that expands after performing an action that makes the first decorative symbol bounce. The action to take). It should be noted that the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance look-ahead effect of FIG. 172 is executed as the pre-trigger variation, the first decorative symbol is deterministically stopped and displayed with the symbol combination indicating the chance eye, and then the next symbol variation is shown in FIG. 170. It may be configured to execute the reach variation that performs the normal reach effect of the hit, the reach variation that performs the super reach effect of the hit, and the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the battle reach effect of the hit as the trigger variation. Further, the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance look-ahead effect of FIG. 172 is executed as the pre-trigger variation, the first decorative symbol is deterministically stopped and displayed with the symbol combination indicating the chance eye, and then the next symbol variation is shown in FIG. 171. It may be configured to execute the reach variation that performs the normal reach effect of the loss, the reach variation that performs the super reach effect of the loss, and the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the battle reach effect of the loss as the trigger variation. Further, the reach variation shown in FIG. 172 may be set as a trigger hold for the look-ahead effect as a variation mode group of the group 2 or the group 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. In this case, the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance look-ahead effect of FIG. 172 is executed as the pre-trigger variation, the first decorative symbol is deterministically stopped and displayed with the symbol combination indicating the chance eye, and then the next symbol variation is used. It is configured to execute the reach variation that produces the reach effect of 172 as the trigger variation. That is, not only the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance look-ahead effect of FIG. 172 leads to the reach variation of FIG. 172, but also the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance look-ahead effect of FIG. 172 leads to the reach per of FIG. 170. It may be configured so as to lead to fluctuations and reach fluctuations of the loss shown in FIG. 171.

The execution time and the fixed fluctuation time of each action in the normal symbol variation of FIG. 172 are configured in the following relations.
(1) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (one of H1 to H3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(1-1) Action H1 second at the start of fluctuation in the left column <Shaking action Y1 second in the left column (1-2) Action H2 seconds at the start of fluctuation in the right column <Shaking action Y2 seconds in the right column (1-3) At the start of row fluctuation Action H3 seconds <Middle row shaking action Y3 seconds (2) Fixed position action T seconds (one of T1 to T3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds) )
(2-1) Fixed position action T1 second in the left column <Shaking action Y1 second in the left column (2-2) Fixed position action T2 seconds in the right column <Shaking action Y2 seconds in the right column (2-3) Middle row Fixed position action T3 seconds <Middle row shaking action Y3 seconds (3) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds) (4) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(5) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(7) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) <total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(8) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds) )
(8-1) Left column fluctuation start action H1 seconds + left column fixed position action T1 seconds <left column shaking action Y1 seconds (8-2) Right column fluctuation start action H2 seconds + right column fixed Position action T2 seconds <Right column shaking action Y2 seconds (8-3) Middle row fluctuation start action H3 seconds + Middle row fixed position action T3 seconds <Middle row shaking action Y3 seconds (9) Middle row fluctuation start action H seconds (one of H1 to H3 seconds) <Floating fixed time (10) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T3 seconds) <Floating fixed time (11) Shaking action Y seconds (Y1 to Y1 to) Any one of Y3 seconds)> Fixed fluctuation time (12) Action H seconds at the start of fluctuation (one of H1 to H3 seconds) + Fixed position action T seconds (one of T1 to T3 seconds)> Fixed variable time (13) Total time of action at the start of variable (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds)> Fixed variable time In addition, (9), ( Regarding 10), the variable fixed time may be configured to be shorter, that is, "action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H3 seconds)> variable fixed time", "fixed position action". It may be set as "T second (any one of T1 to T3 seconds)> variable fixed time". It should be noted that "any" here may be satisfied by either one, and it is not necessary to satisfy any of them. For example, in the case of (1), at least one of H1 <Y1, H1 <Y2, H1 <Y3, H2 <Y1, H2 <Y2, H2 <Y3, H3 <Y1, H3 <Y2, H3 <Y3. Should be satisfied.

Next, in the first decorative symbol in the left column in the reach fluctuation of the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state, the action at the start of the change is H4 seconds, the fixed position action is T4 seconds, the shaking action is Y4 seconds, and the tempai action. Is executed for TP 1 second, shaking action 1 is executed for Y5 seconds, and the determined action is executed for K1 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative symbol in the left column is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol is executed over the variable fixed time. For the first decorative symbol in the right column, after the first decorative symbol in the left column starts to fluctuate, the action at the start of fluctuation is H5 seconds, the fixed position action is T5 seconds, the tempai action is TP2 seconds, the shaking action is Y6 seconds, and the decision action. Is executed for K2 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative symbol in the right column is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol is executed over the variable fixed time. As for the first decorative symbol in the middle column, after the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column starts to change, the action at the start of the change is executed for H6 seconds, and the determination action is executed for K3 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative symbol in the middle row is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol is executed over the variable fixed time. It should be noted that this reach variation may be in a time-reduced gaming state instead of a non-time-reduced gaming state, and is not a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol, but a second main game symbol. It may be the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of. In the case of this reach variation, the execution timings of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are not the same but different (the timings at which the actions at the start of the variation of each first decorative symbol are different). There is. By differentiating the execution timing of the action at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column in this way, it is possible that the player has started a specific symbol change at the timing at the start of the change. It is possible to suggest that there is, and it is possible to inform the player of the degree of expectation of a big hit. Here, the mode of the action at the start of fluctuation when the execution timing of the action at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column is different, and the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column. The mode of the variable start action when the execution timing of the variable start action is the same may be different from the mode of the variable start action (for example, when the execution timing is different, the first decorative symbol trembles in the vertical direction). If the execution timing is the same, the action is such that the first decorative symbol trembles in the horizontal direction). In the case of this reach variation, the execution timings of the actions at the start of the variation in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are not the same but different (the actions at the start of the variation of each first decorative symbol are executed at different timings). An example is shown, but as shown in the normal symbol variation, the execution timing of the action at the start of the variation in the left column, the middle column, and the right column may be the same. Here, an example is shown in which the first decorative symbol in the middle row does not execute the fixed position action when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the normal reach effect, but the normal reach effect does not develop into the super reach effect and the normal reach is performed. When the effect is continued and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol in the middle row may execute a fixed position action to stop and display the first decorative symbol in the middle row. The mode of the fixed position action in which the first decorative symbol in the middle row is the fixed position action when the normal reach effect is not developed from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed is the aspect of the fixed position action 3 shown in FIG. You may execute the same aspect of the fixed position action as the above, or you may execute a different aspect of the fixed position action. In addition, although the case where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the normal reach effect is illustrated here, the reach variation in which the first half and the second half of the hit super reach effect and the hit battle reach effect are performed may be targeted. It is preferable to configure it so that the fixed position action 3 in the middle row is not executed as in the case of the reach variation per hit shown in FIG. 170.

Further, the execution time and the fixed fluctuation time of each action in the specific symbol variation of FIG. 172 are configured in the following relations.
(1) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (one of H4 to H6 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(1-1) Action H4 seconds at the start of fluctuation in the left column <Shaking action Y seconds in the left column (one of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(1-2) Action H5 seconds at the start of fluctuation in the right column <Shaking action Y6 seconds in the right column (2) Positional action T seconds (one of T4 and T5 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (Y4 to Y6) Any one of the seconds)
(2-1) Fixed position action T4 seconds in the left column <Shaking action Y seconds in the left column (one of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(2-2) Fixed position action T5 seconds in the right column <Shaking action Y6 seconds in the right column (3) Tempai action TP seconds (one of TP1 and TP2 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (Y4 to Y6 seconds) Any one)
(3-1) Tempai action TP 1 second in the left column <Shaking action Y seconds in the left column (one of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(3-2) Tempai action TP 2 seconds in the right column <Shaking action Y6 seconds in the right column (4) Deciding action K seconds (one of K1 to K3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any of Y4 to Y6 seconds) Or one)
(4-1) Determining action in the left column K1 seconds <Shaking action in the left column Y seconds (one of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(4-2) Right column decision action K2 seconds <Right column shaking action Y6 seconds (5) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (Y4 to Y6 seconds) Total time)
(5-1) Action at the start of fluctuation in the left column H4 seconds <Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 to T5 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(7) Total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(8) Total time of determined action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Swaying action Y seconds (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds) (9) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(10) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 and T5 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(11) Total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(12) Total time of determined action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(13) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 and T5 seconds) + total time of tempai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) + Total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(13-1) Left column fluctuation start action H4 seconds + left column fixed position action T4 seconds + left column tempai action TP 1 second + left column decision action K1 second <total time of left column shaking action (Y4) , Y 5 seconds total time)
(13-2) Right column fluctuation start action H5 seconds + right column fixed position action T5 seconds + right column tempai action TP 2 seconds + left column decision action K2 seconds <right column shaking action Y6 seconds (14) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4, T5 seconds) + total time of tempai action (total time of TP1, TP2 seconds) + decision action Total time (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(14-1) Left column fluctuation start action H4 seconds + left column fixed position action T4 seconds + left column tempai action TP 1 second + left column decision action K1 seconds <left column shaking action Y seconds (Y4, Any one of Y5 seconds)
(15) Change start action H seconds (one of H4 to H6 seconds) <Floating fixed time (16) Fixed position action T seconds (one of T4 and T5 seconds) <Floating fixed time (17) Tempai action TP seconds (one of TP1 and TP2 seconds) <Floating fixed time (18) Determining action K seconds (one of K1 to K3 seconds) <Floating fixed time (19) Shaking action Y seconds (Y4) ~ Y6 seconds)> Fixed fluctuation time (20) Action H seconds at the start of fluctuation (one of H4 to H6 seconds) + Fixed position action T seconds (one of T4 and T5 seconds) + Tempai action TP seconds (one of TP1 and TP2 seconds) + Decisive action K seconds (one of K1 to K3 seconds)> Fixed fluctuation time (21) Total time of actions at the start of fluctuation (H4 to H6) Total time of seconds) + Total time of fixed position action (total time of T4, T5 seconds) + Total time of tempai action (total time of TP1, TP2 seconds) + Total time of determined action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) )> Variable fixed time (22) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) + Total time of fixed position action (total time of T4, T5 seconds) + Total time of tempai action (TP1, TP2) Total time of seconds) + Total time of determined action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) <Shaking action Y seconds (one of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
Regarding the above (15) to (18), the variable fixed time may be configured to be shorter, that is, "action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H4 to H6 seconds)> fluctuation. Fixed time ”,“ Fixed position action T seconds (one of T4 and T5 seconds)> Variable fixed time ”,“ Tempai action TP seconds (one of TP1 and TP2 seconds)> Variable fixed time ”,“ The fixed action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds)> variable fixed time may be set. It should be noted that "any" here may be satisfied by either one, and it is not necessary to satisfy any of them. For example, in the case of (1-1), at least one of H4 <Y4 and H4 <Y5 may be satisfied.

Next, FIG. 173 is an image diagram from (a) the definite stop of the lost symbol to (l) the first re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, FIG. 173 shows a specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state (for example, a reach variation for performing a normal reach effect per A3 in FIG. 12, a super reach effect per A6, and a battle reach effect). The actions (b) to (l) in the first half and the second half of the reach fluctuation) are shown. It should be noted that various variations of the time-reduced gaming state shown in FIG. 13 may be used instead of the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the first half of the normal reach effect, super reach effect, and battle reach effect of the loss shown in FIGS. It may be the reach variation performed in the latter half, or the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. May be. In addition, when targeting the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the loss super reach effect and the battle reach effect, the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect may be held as the variation mode group of the groups 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. It is clear.

In (a), in the non-time shortened game state, the hold on the first main game side is 4 and the hold on the second main game side is 0, and the effect display device SG corresponds to the symbol change of the first main game symbol. It is shown that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fixedly stopped at "711", which is a lost symbol. In the non-time shortened gaming state, the display mode of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is "number + character", and the display mode of the second decorative symbol is "number". Only. Then, four first hold displays on the first main game side are displayed, and the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed. Further, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "4", and the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0".

In (b), the hold is digested due to the satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol, and the hold digestion transmission image (for example, the image object of the white circle in the figure) corresponding to the digested hold is displayed. It is displayed and shows the action 1 at the start of fluctuation when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts the variation display. The variation mode of the symbol variation this time is a symbol variation accompanied by pseudo-ream twice, and the variation mode in which the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed after the reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, battle reach effect). When the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts the variation display, the change start action 1 is executed. This change start action 1 is when the loss symbol shown in (a) is fixed and stopped immediately after the change display of the first main game symbol is started (for example, 0.1 seconds later). The action of enlarging the first decorative pattern in the left column, the middle column, and the right column is illustrated. The first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column change. In the display area where action 1 is executed at the start (display area of the operation at the start), the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are fixed and stopped. An example is a display area larger than the displayed display area (display area for fixed stop), but when the variable start action 1 for reducing the first decorative symbol is executed, the display area for the start operation is fixed. The display area is smaller than the stop display area.

(C) shows the acceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column after the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts the variation display. After executing the change start action 1 when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol starts the change display, the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first when the fixed stop is performed. 1 It is configured to be reduced to the size of a decorative pattern and then to execute an acceleration fluctuation that scrolls downward. In addition, it is configured to execute the acceleration fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses.

(D) shows the high-speed fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column after the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts the acceleration fluctuation. After starting the acceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol, a predetermined time (for example, for example) from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. It is configured to perform high-speed fluctuations after 1 second) has elapsed.

(E) shows the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column after the high-speed fluctuation is executed. After executing the high-speed variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol, the deceleration variation of displaying the variation of the first decorative symbol in the left column in a visible state is executed. .. In the state where the first decorative symbol in the left column is executing the deceleration fluctuation, the first decorative symbol in the middle column and the right column is executing the high-speed fluctuation.

In (f), the number "1" in the left column + the first decorative symbol of the chick character is temporarily stopped while executing the deceleration fluctuation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative symbol in the left column is temporarily stopped. It is shown that the fixed position action 1 is executed in the display area (the display area of the fixed position operation in the left column which is the fixed position display area). This fixed position action 1 is a first decorative symbol than the first decorative symbol when the definite stop of the lost symbol shown in (a) is stopped, and the first decorative symbol of the action 1 at the start of fluctuation shown in (b). An example is an action in which the first decorative symbol is enlarged at a position lower than the first decorative symbol of the fluctuation start action 1 shown in (b) and then returned to the upper position. Further, this fixed position action corresponds to the type of the first decorative symbol (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element) as a mode of the different fixed position action. It may be configured to perform a position action to be performed. In this case, if the first element shown in the left column is a chick, there is an example in which the chick performs a fixed position action of waving both hands. In the state where the first decorative symbol in the left column is executing the fixed position action 1, the first decorative symbol in the middle column and the right column is executing high-speed fluctuation.

(G) is to execute the shaking action after the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the fixed position action 1, and to execute the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the right column after executing the high-speed fluctuation. Is shown. The first decorative symbol in the left column is configured to execute the fixed position action 1, then reduce the size, and then execute the shaking action. Further, the first decorative symbol in the right column is configured to execute a deceleration fluctuation that displays fluctuations in a visible state after executing a high-speed fluctuation. In a state where the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the shaking action and the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the deceleration fluctuation, the first decorative symbol in the middle column executes the high-speed fluctuation.

In (h), the first decorative symbol in the left column continuously executes the shaking action, and the number "7" in the right column + the first decorative symbol of the lion character performs deceleration fluctuation. Temporarily stops, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the fixed position action 1 is executed in the display area (the display area of the fixed position operation in the right column, which is the fixed position display area) where the first decorative symbol in the right column temporarily stops. It is shown that. This fixed position action 1 may be the same as or different from the fixed position action 1 executed by the first decorative symbol in the left column. When executing a fixed position action different from that in the left column, a different fixed position action may be executed according to the symbol column of the first decorative symbol, or the type of the first decorative symbol (for example, the first). Actions corresponding to 1 element + type of 2nd element, type of 1st element, type of 2nd element) may be executed. When performing an action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the type of the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), the chick of the first element shown in the left column. Unlike the fixed-position action of waving both hands, the first element is the lion, so there is an example of performing a fixed-position action in which the lion attacks. In the state where the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the shaking action and the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the fixed position action 1, the first decorative symbol in the middle column executes high-speed fluctuation. There is.

(I) indicates that the pseudo-ream symbol is executing the deceleration fluctuation. The first decorative symbol in the right column is configured to execute the fixed position action 1, then reduce the size, and then execute the shaking action. Then, in a state where the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column perform a shaking action, the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) covers the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column. It is configured to decelerate and fluctuate to hide. The first decorative symbol in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(J) indicates that the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed position action 1. The pseudo-ream pattern that fluctuates in deceleration and is displayed in a fluctuating manner at low speed temporarily stops at approximately the center of the LCD screen. At the timing of the temporary stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol executes the fixed position action 1 in the display area (the display area of the fixed position operation of the middle row, which is the fixed position display area) where the first decorative symbol in the middle row temporarily stops. do. The first decorative symbol in the middle row is executing high-speed fluctuation, and the first decorative symbol in the middle row does not execute the temporary stop and the fixed position action when the pseudo-continuous symbol executes the fixed position action 1. It is configured in.

(K) indicates that the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes the fixed position action 1. In the state where the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the number "1" + the first decorative symbol of the chick character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT". Then, at the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the first decorative symbol in the middle row is the display area in which the first decorative symbol in the middle row temporarily stops (the fixed position of the middle row, which is the fixed position display area). It is configured to execute the fixed position action 1 in the position operation display area). In this embodiment, after the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) of (j) executes the fixed position action 1, and the first decorative symbol in the middle row of (k) executes the fixed position action 1, An example of executing the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbol of (l) is shown, but in (1) and (k) after the pseudo-continuous symbol of (j) (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed position action 1. In a state where the first decorative symbol in the row does not execute the fixed position action 1 and the first decorative symbol in the middle row continues to execute the variable display (the state in which the first decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped). (L) Pseudo-continuous symbol revariation may be executed, or (2) Pseudo-continuous symbol is one of the temporary stop candidates in a plurality of first decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in the middle row of symbols. It may be set as one and a temporary stop and a fixed position action may be performed as the first decorative symbol (for example, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → The first decorative symbol displayed in the main area is sequentially switched and displayed while scrolling in the order of ..., and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, but if the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. While scrolling in the order of 1, 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → NEXT → 1 → ..., the first decorative symbol displayed in the main area is sequentially switched and displayed, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. May be configured to do so). It should be noted that the configuration of the pseudo-ream pattern in this way is not limited to the pseudo-relationship symbol in FIG. 173, but the description regarding the pseudo-relationship symbol in FIG. 175 and other pseudo-relationship symbols (the description regarding the "special symbol" in FIG. It is clear that it can be applied to the pseudo-continuous symbols in each embodiment. In addition, as the display area of the fixed position operation, a display area larger than the display area of the start operation and the display area of the fixed stop is used. As an example, when the fixed position action 1 for reducing the first decorative symbol is executed, the display area of the fixed position operation is smaller than the display area of the start operation and the display area of the fixed stop. The pseudo-continuous symbol corresponds to the "special symbol" used in the pseudo-continuous variation as shown in FIG. 20 as a provisional display mode.

(L) shows the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The temporarily stopped pseudo-ream symbol is configured to execute an acceleration fluctuation that scrolls downward when the re-variation (pseudo-ream) is executed. In addition, after the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped, a re-variation (pseudo-ream) is started with an action at the start of fluctuation, or a dedicated action (pseudo-ream symbol is executed after the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped) to create a pseudo-ream symbol. It is an action that suggests that it disappears from the main area, and the pseudo-link symbol may disappear by performing an erase action described later). The execution time can be set longer than the erase action that turns the pseudo-continuous symbol into mist and disappears without any notice, or the action at the start of fluctuation of the other first decorative symbols, or the display area used in the action can be set. Perform actions such as enlarging, increasing the enlargement ratio, speeding up the rotation of the pseudo-continuous pattern, and increasing the light emission such as color effects. Further, in this embodiment, after the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbol of (l) is executed and the change start action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column of (m) is executed, ( An example of executing high-speed fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column of (o) via the accelerated fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column of n) is shown. However, when executing the re-variation of the pseudo-linked symbol of (l) and executing the accelerated fluctuation, or when executing the action at the start of the fluctuation when the pseudo-linked symbol executes the action at the start of the fluctuation, or when executing the action at the start of the fluctuation, or pseudo. When the linked symbol executes the dedicated action, the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column of (m) changes start action 2, and the left column, middle column, and right column of (n). It may be configured to execute the high-speed variation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column of (o) without executing the acceleration variation of the first decorative symbol (in this case, (n). It is preferable to suddenly execute high-speed fluctuation without executing acceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column).

Next, FIG. 174 is a state following FIG. 173, and is an image diagram from (m) action 2 at the start of fluctuation to (x) fixed position action 2 of the pseudo-continuous symbol. First, (m) shows the action 2 at the start of fluctuation when the first re-variation (pseudo-ream) of the first decorative symbol is started. When the first decorative symbol starts to change again, the action 2 at the start of change is executed. This action 2 at the start of the fluctuation expands the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column shown in (k) at the timing immediately after the re-variation is started (for example, 0.1 seconds later). Illustrate the action. The first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column change The first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are fixed and stopped in the display area (display area of the operation at the start) that executes action 2 at the start of fluctuation. An example is a display area larger than the displayed display area (display area for fixed stop), but when the variable start action 2 for reducing the first decorative symbol is executed, the display area for the start operation is fixed. The display area is smaller than the stop display area. An example of executing the action 2 at the start of fluctuation when starting the first re-variation (pseudo-ream) of the first decorative symbol is shown, but when starting the re-variation (pseudo-ream) of the first decorative symbol. It is not necessary to execute the action 2 at the start of the fluctuation.

(N) shows the acceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column after the first decorative symbol starts the first re-variation (pseudo-ream). After executing the action 2 at the start of fluctuation when the first decorative symbol starts re-variation, the enlarged first decorative symbol is reduced to the size of the first decorative symbol when the determination is stopped, and then. , Is configured to perform acceleration fluctuations that scroll downwards. It should be noted that the acceleration variation is configured to be executed until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of the re-variation of the first decorative symbol.

(O) shows the high-speed fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column after the first decorative symbol starts the acceleration fluctuation. After starting the acceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol, a predetermined time from the start of the re-variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol ( For example, it is configured to execute high-speed fluctuation after 1 second) has elapsed.

(P) shows the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column after the high-speed fluctuation is executed. After executing the high-speed fluctuation of the first decorative symbol, the deceleration fluctuation is configured to display the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column in a visible state. In the state where the first decorative symbol in the left column is executing the deceleration fluctuation, the first decorative symbol in the middle column and the right column is executing the high-speed fluctuation.

In (q), the number "1" in the left column + the first decorative symbol of the chick character is temporarily stopped while executing the deceleration fluctuation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative symbol in the left column is temporarily stopped. It is shown that the fixed position action 2 is executed in the display area (the display area of the fixed position operation in the left column which is the fixed position display area). This fixed position action 2 is a first decorative symbol than the first decorative symbol when the definite stop of the lost symbol shown in (a) is stopped, and the first decorative symbol of the action 1 at the start of fluctuation shown in (b). Illustrate the action to expand. In the state where the first decorative symbol in the left column is executing the fixed position action 2, the first decorative symbol in the middle column and the right column is executing high-speed fluctuation.

In (r), the shaking action is executed after the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the fixed position action 2, and the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the right column is executed after the high-speed fluctuation is executed. Is shown. The first decorative symbol in the left column is configured to execute the fixed position action 2, then reduce the size, and then execute the shaking action. Further, the first decorative symbol in the right column is configured to execute a deceleration fluctuation that displays fluctuations in a visible state after executing a high-speed fluctuation. In a state where the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the shaking action and the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the deceleration fluctuation, the first decorative symbol in the middle column executes the high-speed fluctuation.

In (s), the first decorative symbol in the left column continuously executes the shaking action, and the number "1" in the right column + the first decorative symbol of the chick character performs deceleration fluctuation. Temporarily stop, and at the timing of the temporary stop, execute the fixed position action 2 in the display area (the display area of the fixed position operation in the right column, which is the fixed position display area) where the first decorative symbol in the right column temporarily stops. It is shown that. The fixed position action 2 may be the same as or different from the fixed position action 2 executed by the first decorative symbol in the left column. In the state where the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the shaking action and the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the fixed position action 2, the first decorative symbol in the middle column executes high-speed fluctuation. There is.

(T) shows the state after executing the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the right column. After executing the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the right column, the first decorative symbol in the right column is reduced and displayed. The first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column displays the same number "1" + the first decorative symbol of the chick character. At this time, the first decorative symbol in the right column may execute a shaking action. The first decorative symbol in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(U) shows the tempai action 1 in a state where the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column display the same symbol. In (t), after the same number "1" + the first decorative symbol of the chick character is displayed in the left column and the right column, the tempai is displayed in the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column. It is configured to perform action 1. This tempai action 1 executes an action of enlarging the image object of the chick character as the first element of the first decorative pattern more than the action at the start of fluctuation or the fixed position action, and is not shown, but is the first. An example is a fixed position action that executes an action corresponding to a type of decorative pattern (for example, one of a first element + a second element type, a first element type, and a second element type). In the case of this example, since the first element is a chick, the action to blow off the shells above and below the chick is to be executed, but if the first element is a lion, the action to perform the barking action of the lion is to be executed. It has become. As a display area (display area for the tempai action) in which the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column executes the tempai action 1, a display area for fixing and stopping the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column, and an operation at the start. Although the display area of is larger than the display area of the fixed position operation, when the tempai action 1 for reducing the first decorative symbol is executed, the display area of the tempai action is in the left column and the right column. The display area is smaller than the display area for the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol, the display area for the start operation, and the display area for the fixed position operation. The first decorative symbol in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(V) shows the shaking action 1 executed in the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column. This shaking action 1 includes the chick character as the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the right column and the number "1" as the second element after the tempai action 1 of (u) is executed. An example of an action is to reduce the size of the device and then make it sway. The first decorative symbol in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation. It should be noted that, after the tempai action 1 of (u) is executed, the effect mode of the normal reach effect is executed, and the shaking action 1 of (v) is executed during this normal reach effect. Or may be configured to perform a battle reach effect. In the case of such a configuration, the pseudo-ream pattern may be temporarily stopped during the super reach production or the battle reach production, and the shaking action is performed during the super reach production or the battle reach production as in the normal reach production. May be good. Here, it is preferable that the shaking action during the super reach effect or the battle reach effect is configured to be different from the shaking action 1 during the normal reach effect. For example, in the shaking action during the super reach production or the battle reach production, the first decorative pattern is smaller than the shaking action 1 during the normal reach production, the first element is erased and the shaking action is performed only by the second element. It is preferable that the swing width is small and the swing motion is slow (the cycle of one swing is longer than that of the normal reach effect).

(W) indicates that the pseudo-ream symbol is executing the deceleration fluctuation. With the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column performing the shaking action, the pseudo-continuous symbol ("NEXT" symbol) covers the first decorative symbol in the left and right columns. It is configured to decelerate and fluctuate. The first decorative symbol in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(X) indicates that the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed position action 2. The pseudo-ream pattern that fluctuates in deceleration and is displayed in a fluctuating manner at low speed temporarily stops at approximately the center of the LCD screen. At the timing of the temporary stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol executes the fixed position action 2 in the display area (the display area of the fixed position operation of the middle row, which is the fixed position display area) where the first decorative symbol in the middle row temporarily stops. do. The first decorative symbol in the middle row is executing high-speed fluctuation, and the first decorative symbol in the middle row does not execute the temporary stop and the fixed position action when the pseudo-continuous symbol executes the fixed position action 2. It is configured in.

Next, FIG. 175 is a state following FIGS. 173 and 174, and is an image diagram from (y) the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row to (j2) the shaking action 2. First, (y) indicates that the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes the fixed position action 2. In the state where the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped, the number "7" + the first decorative symbol of the lion character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-ream symbol "NEXT". Then, at the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the first decorative symbol in the middle row is the display area in which the first decorative symbol in the middle row temporarily stops (the fixed position of the middle row, which is the fixed position display area). It is configured to execute the fixed position action 2 in the position operation display area). In this embodiment, after the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) of (x) executes the fixed position action 2, the first decorative symbol in the middle row of (y) executes the fixed position action 2. An example of executing the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbol of (z) is shown, but in (1) and (y) after the pseudo-continuous symbol of (x) (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed position action 2. In the state where the first decorative symbol in the row does not execute the fixed position action 2 and the first decorative symbol in the middle row continues to execute the variable display (the state in which the first decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped). (Z) Pseudo-continuous symbol revariation may be executed, or (2) Pseudo-continuous symbol is one of the temporary stop candidates in a plurality of first decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in the middle row of symbols. It may be set as one and a temporary stop and a fixed position action may be performed as the first decorative symbol (for example, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → The first decorative symbol displayed in the main area is sequentially switched and displayed while scrolling in the order of ..., and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, but if the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. While scrolling in the order of 1, 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → NEXT → 1 → ..., the first decorative symbol displayed in the main area is sequentially switched and displayed, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. May be configured to do so). It should be noted that the configuration of the pseudo-ream symbol in this way is not limited to the pseudo-relation symbol in FIG. 173 and the pseudo-relation symbol in FIG. 175, and the description regarding other pseudo-relation symbols (the description regarding the "special symbol" in FIG. It is clear that it can be applied to the pseudo-continuous symbols in each embodiment. In addition, as the display area of the fixed position operation, a display area larger than the display area of the start operation and the display area of the fixed stop is exemplified. However, when the fixed position action 2 for reducing the first decorative symbol is executed, the display area for the fixed position operation is smaller than the display area for the start operation and the display area for the fixed stop. , The pseudo-continuous symbol corresponds to the "special symbol" used in the pseudo-continuous variation as shown in FIG. 20 as a provisional display mode.

(Z) shows the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The temporarily stopped pseudo-ream symbol is configured to execute an acceleration fluctuation that scrolls downward when the re-variation (pseudo-ream) is executed. In addition, after the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped, a re-variation (pseudo-ream) is started with an action at the start of fluctuation, or a dedicated action (pseudo-ream symbol is executed after the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped) to create a pseudo-ream symbol. It is an action that suggests that it disappears from the main area, and the pseudo-link symbol may disappear by performing an erase action described later). The execution time can be set longer than the erase action that turns the pseudo-continuous symbol into mist and disappears without any notice, or the action at the start of fluctuation of the other first decorative symbols, or the display area used in the action can be set. Perform actions such as enlarging, increasing the enlargement ratio, speeding up the rotation of the pseudo-continuous pattern, and increasing the light emission such as color effects. Further, in this embodiment, after the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbol of (z) is executed and the change start action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column of (a2) is executed, ( An example of executing high-speed fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column of (c2) via the accelerated fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column of b2) is shown. However, when the pseudo-link symbol of (z) is re-variated and accelerated fluctuation is executed, or when the pseudo-sequence symbol executes the fluctuation start action, the fluctuation start action is executed, or the pseudo-link symbol is executed. When the linked symbol executes the dedicated action, the action 3 at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column of (a2), and the left column, middle column, and right column of (b2). It may be configured to execute the high-speed variation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column of (c2) without executing the acceleration variation of the first decorative symbol (in this case, (n). It is preferable to suddenly execute high-speed fluctuation without executing acceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column).

(A2) shows the action 3 at the start of fluctuation when the first decorative symbol starts the second re-variation (pseudo-ream). When the first decorative symbol starts to change again, the action 3 at the start of change is executed. This action 3 at the start of the fluctuation expands the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column shown in (y) immediately after the re-variation is started (for example, 0.1 seconds later). Illustrate the action. The first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column change The first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are fixed and stopped in the display area (display area of the start operation) in which the action 3 at the start is executed. An example is a display area larger than the displayed display area (display area for fixed stop), but when the variable start action 3 for reducing the first decorative symbol is executed, the display area for the start operation is fixed. The display area is smaller than the stop display area. An example of executing the action 3 at the start of fluctuation when starting the second re-variation (pseudo-ream) of the first decorative symbol is shown, but when starting the re-variation (pseudo-ream) of the first decorative symbol. It is not necessary to execute the action 3 at the start of the fluctuation.

(B2) shows the acceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column after the first decorative symbol starts the first re-variation (pseudo-ream). After executing the action 3 at the start of fluctuation when the first decorative symbol starts re-variation, the enlarged first decorative symbol is reduced to the size of the first decorative symbol when the determination is stopped, and then. , Is configured to perform acceleration fluctuations that scroll downwards. It should be noted that the acceleration variation is configured to be executed until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of the re-variation of the first decorative symbol.

(C2) shows the high-speed fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column after the first decorative symbol starts the acceleration fluctuation. After starting the acceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol, a predetermined time from the start of the re-variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol ( For example, it is configured to execute high-speed fluctuation after 1 second) has elapsed.

(D2) shows the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column after the high-speed fluctuation is executed. After executing the high-speed fluctuation of the first decorative symbol, the deceleration fluctuation is configured to display the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column in a visible state. In the state where the first decorative symbol in the left column is executing the deceleration fluctuation, the first decorative symbol in the middle column and the right column is executing the high-speed fluctuation.

In (e2), the number "7" in the left column + the first decorative symbol of the lion character is temporarily stopped while executing the deceleration fluctuation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative symbol in the left column is temporarily stopped. It is shown that the fixed position action 3 is executed in the display area (the display area of the fixed position operation in the left column which is the fixed position display area). This fixed position action 3 is a first decorative symbol than the first decorative symbol when the definite stop of the lost symbol shown in (a) is stopped, and the first decorative symbol of the action 1 at the start of fluctuation shown in (b). Illustrate the action to expand. In the state where the first decorative symbol in the left column is executing the fixed position action 3, the first decorative symbol in the middle column and the right column is executing high-speed fluctuation.

In (f2), the shaking action is executed after the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the fixed position action 3, and the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the right column is executed after the high-speed fluctuation is executed. Is shown. The first decorative symbol in the left column is configured to execute the fixed position action 3, then reduce the size, and then execute the shaking action. Further, the first decorative symbol in the right column is configured to execute a deceleration fluctuation that displays fluctuations in a visible state after executing a high-speed fluctuation. In a state where the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the shaking action and the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the deceleration fluctuation, the first decorative symbol in the middle column executes the high-speed fluctuation.

In (g2), the first decorative symbol in the left column is continuously executing the shaking action, and the number "7" in the right column + the first decorative symbol of the lion character is performing deceleration fluctuation. Temporarily stop, and at the timing of the temporary stop, execute the fixed position action 3 in the display area (the display area of the fixed position operation in the right column, which is the fixed position display area) where the first decorative symbol in the right column temporarily stops. It is shown that. The fixed position action 3 may be the same as or different from the fixed position action 3 executed by the first decorative symbol in the left column. In the state where the first decorative symbol in the left column executes the shaking action and the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the fixed position action 3, the first decorative symbol in the middle column executes high-speed fluctuation. There is.

(H2) shows the state after executing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the right column. After executing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the right column, the first decorative symbol in the right column is reduced and displayed. The first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column displays the same number "7" + the first decorative symbol of the lion character. At this time, the first decorative symbol in the right column may execute a shaking action. The first decorative symbol in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(I2) shows the tempai action 2 in a state where the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column display the same symbol. In (h2), after the same number "7" + the first decorative symbol of the lion character is displayed in the left column and the right column, the tempai is displayed in the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column. It is configured to perform action 2. This tempai action 2 exemplifies an action of enlarging an image object of a lion character as a first element of a first decorative pattern rather than a fluctuation start action or a fixed position action. As a display area (display area for the tempai action) in which the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column executes the tempai action 2, a display area for fixing and stopping the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column, and an operation at the start. Although the display area of is larger than the display area of the fixed position operation, when the tempai action 2 for reducing the first decorative symbol is executed, the display area of the tempai action is in the left column and the right column. The display area is smaller than the display area for the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol, the display area for the start operation, and the display area for the fixed position operation. The first decorative symbol in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

(J2) shows the shaking action 2 executed in the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column. This shaking action 2 includes the lion character as the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the number "7" as the second element after the tempai action 2 of (i2) is executed. An example of an action is to reduce the size of the lion and then make it sway. It should be noted that, after the tempai action 2 of (i2) is executed, the effect mode of the normal reach effect is executed, and the shaking action 2 of (j2) is executed during this normal reach effect, and then the normal reach effect is executed. It is configured to develop from to super reach production or battle reach production. Here, after the tempai action 2 of (i2) is executed, the production mode of the normal reach effect is executed, and the shaking action 2 of (j2) is executed during this normal reach effect. It may be configured to perform a reach effect. Further, the normal reach production may be continued without developing from the normal reach production to the super reach production or the battle reach production. The first decorative symbol in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation.

Next, FIG. 176 is a state following FIGS. 173, 174, and 175, and is an image diagram from the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row (k2) to the fixed stop (n2). First, in (k2), while the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are executing the shaking action 2 in (j2), the first decorative symbol in the middle column executes the fixed position action 3. Shows. In the state where the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column is tempered and the shaking action 2 is being executed, the number "7" + the first decorative symbol of the lion character decelerates and fluctuates in the middle column. After that, it is temporarily stopped. At the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the first decorative symbol in the middle row has a display area (a fixed position in the middle row which is a fixed position display area) in which the first decorative symbol in the middle row temporarily stops. It is configured to execute the fixed position action 3 in the operation display area). As the fixed position operation display area, a display area larger than the start operation display area and the fixed stop display area is illustrated, but when the fixed position action 3 for reducing the first decorative symbol is executed, the fixed position action 3 is executed. The display area for the fixed position operation is smaller than the display area for the start operation and the display area for the fixed stop. Here, an example is shown in which the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes the fixed position action 3 when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the super reach effect (or the battle reach effect), but the normal reach effect is shown. If the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed without developing into a super reach effect, the first decorative symbol in the middle row is the first decorative symbol in the middle row without executing the fixed position action 3. 7 ”may be stopped and displayed. With this configuration, when a big hit is achieved in the normal reach effect, the big hit symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed without executing the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the middle row, so the player's surprising effect is executed. It becomes possible to do. Here, an example is shown in which the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes the fixed position action 3 when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the super reach effect (or the battle reach effect). It may be configured not to execute the fixed position action 3 of. For example, when it is decided whether to execute an action or not depending on whether it is a normal background or a reach background (super reach background), in the pattern variation of the super reach effect (or battle reach effect), the super Due to the reach background, the position action is not executed. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the background is changed from the super reach background to the normal background, and then the first decorative symbol is configured to execute a shaking fluctuation (shaking action). By configuring so that the fixed position action is not executed during the super reach effect in this way, the super reach effect can be shown to the player without being disturbed by the fixed position action.

In (l2), the jackpot symbol is displayed after the first decorative symbol in the middle row temporarily stops with the fixed position action 3 while the shaking action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the left and right columns is being executed together with the reach effect. It indicates that the determined action is executed in the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column. This decision action executes an action that erases the card-shaped image object as the first element of the first decorative pattern and enlarges the lion character as the first element, and is not shown. , The first decorative pattern is configured to emit light for a moment. In addition, although the deciding action is configured to be different from the fluctuation start action, the fixed position action, the tempai action, and the shaking action, it is the same as the fluctuation starting action, the fixed position action, the tempai action, and the shaking action. May be. In addition, as a display area (display area for fixed operation) in which each first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column executes a determined action, a fixed stop display area, a start operation display area, and a fixed position operation are displayed. An example is a display area larger than the display area and the display area of the shaking motion, but when the decision action for reducing the first decorative symbol is executed, the display area of the decision action is the display area of the fixed stop and the start time. The display area is smaller than the motion display area, the fixed position motion display area, and the shaking motion display area. An example is shown in which after the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the middle column (k2) is executed, the determined action is executed in the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column of (l2). When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with a super reach effect (may be a battle reach effect), after executing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row of (k2), the super reach effect is terminated and left. The shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the column, the middle column, and the right column may be executed, and then the determination action may be executed in the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column of (l2). In addition to that, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with a super reach effect (or a battle reach effect), the super reach effect is performed without executing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row of (k2). (Switch from the display screen of the super reach effect to the display screen of the normal background), execute the shaking action of the first decorative pattern in the left column, middle column, and right column, and then the left column of (l2), The determined action may be executed in the first decorative symbol in the middle column and the right column.

(M2) indicates that the shaking fluctuation (shaking action) is executed in the state where the jackpot symbol is displayed after the decision action. The shaking fluctuation (swaying action) is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) until the timing of the fixed stop. Then, (n2) indicates a state in which the jackpot symbol has been fixedly stopped. The fixed stop is configured to fixedly stop the first decorative symbol over the time indicated by the variable fixed time.

Further, as described in FIGS. 173 (i) to 174 (m), the number "1" + the first decorative symbol of the chick character is temporarily stopped in the left column, and "7" is displayed in the right column. After the first decorative symbol of the number + lion character is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-sequence symbol ("NEXT" symbol) is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed, temporarily stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen, and the pseudo-sequence symbol is temporarily stopped. In the case where the number "1" + the first decorative symbol of the chick character temporarily stops in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT", when the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT" re-changes. Is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column execute the action at the start of fluctuation, but may be configured not to execute the action at the start of fluctuation. In this case, when the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT" starts re-variation, the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are already configured to execute high-speed fluctuation. With this configuration, the player can emphasize only the first action at the start of the change (action 1 at the start of the change in FIG. 173) in the pattern change of the pseudo-ream in which the timing of the re-change is difficult to understand. It can be easily recognized that it is a specific symbol variation. An example is shown in which the number "1" + the first decorative symbol of the chick character temporarily stops in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT", but behind the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT". The number "1" + the first decorative symbol of the chick character may be a pseudo-ream shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 in which the first decorative symbol of the chick character does not temporarily stop in the middle column.

Further, as described in FIGS. 173 (i) to 174 (m), the number "1" + the first decorative symbol of the chick character is temporarily stopped in the left column, and "7" is displayed in the right column. After the first decorative symbol of the number + lion character is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-sequence symbol ("NEXT" symbol) is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed, temporarily stopped at the center of the liquid crystal screen, and the pseudo-sequence symbol is temporarily stopped. In the case where the number "1" + the first decorative symbol of the chick character temporarily stops in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT", after the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT" re-changes. , The first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column execute the action at the start of fluctuation. In this case, after the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT" has started re-variation, and after the pseudo-continuous symbol has become opaque due to high-speed fluctuation, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column. Executes action 2 at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, for the symbol fluctuation of the pseudo-ream, the hit expectation is different depending on the number of executions of the executed action at the start of the fluctuation (the number of executions of the pseudo-ream is 3 times rather than 2 times). High expectation of hitting). An example is shown in which the number "1" + the first decorative symbol of the chick character temporarily stops in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT", but behind the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT". The number "1" + the first decorative symbol of the chick character may be a pseudo-ream shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 in which the first decorative symbol of the chick character does not temporarily stop in the middle column. In this case, the action at the start of fluctuation may be executed on the two first decorative symbols in the left column and the right column, or the three symbols (2) of the first decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol in the left column and the right column. The variation start action may be executed with only one first decorative symbol and one special symbol), or the variation start action may be executed only with the pseudo-continuous symbol.

In the case of a pseudo-continuous variation using a pseudo-ream symbol, the first decorative symbol re-variates (post-reach pseudo-ream) after the reach state in which the first decorative symbol is in the tempai state is formed. Operation pattern related to the predetermined operation of FIG. 174 {Shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column shown in (w) via (u) Tempai action 1 from (q) fixed position action 2 in FIG. And, an operation pattern related to a predetermined operation when the first decorative symbol re-variates (non-reach pseudo-ream) after the non-reach state in which the first decorative symbol is in the non-tempai state is formed {FIG. 173 (FIG. 173). f) The left column and the right column of the first decorative symbol swaying action shown in (i) from the fixed position action 1 are configured to be different from each other. Here, the operation pattern related to a predetermined operation may be a predetermined number of types and / or a combination of operations. There are three types of predetermined actions: fixed-position action, tempai action, and swaying action when executing a pseudo-reach after reach, and fixed-position action when executing a non-reach pseudo-ream, FIG. 173. There are two types of shaking actions shown in (i), and a predetermined case where the first decorative symbol re-variates (pseudo-reach after reach) after the reach state in which the first decorative symbol is in the tenpai state is formed. Types of movements (3 types) and predetermined movements when the first decorative symbol re-variates (non-reach pseudo-ream) after a non-reach state is formed in which the first decorative symbol is in a non-tempai state. It is configured so that the types (two types) are different. Further, the combination of predetermined actions is a combination of a fixed position action, a tempai action, and a shaking action when executing a pseudo-reach after reach, and a fixed position action when executing a non-reach pseudo-ream, FIG. 173. It is a combination of the shaking actions shown in (i), and is a predetermined operation when the first decorative symbol re-variates (pseudo-reach after reach) after the reach state in which the first decorative symbol is in the tenpai state is formed. (A combination of fixed position action, tempai action, and shaking action) and the first decorative symbol re-changes (non-reach pseudo-ream) after the non-reach state in which the first decorative symbol is in the non-tempai state is formed. It is configured to be different from the combination of predetermined actions (combination of fixed position action and shaking action) when executed. With this configuration, when a popular production such as a pseudo-ream effect is performed in recent years, the first decoration is made according to the production process (the mode of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol) until the pseudo-ream is performed. By making the time-series contents of the action of the symbol different, the flow of the conventional uniform pseudo-ream effect can be diversified by the difference in the mode of the first visual decorative symbol.

Next, FIG. 177 corresponds to (a3) the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists in the non-time shortened gaming state. From the mode in which the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, the display from (f3) the second shaking action, and (a4) the display from the big hit end demo to (f4) the second shaking action. It is an image diagram about.

In (a3), in the non-time reduction gaming state, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fixedly stopped at "711", which is a lost symbol, on the effect display device SG. In the non-time reduction game state, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is "number + character", and the display mode of the second decorative symbol is only "number". Further, neither the first hold display on the first main game side nor the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed. Further, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", that is, after (a3), the first decorative symbol is displayed. It has been fixedly stopped, and is in a variable standby state in which neither the hold on the first main game side nor the hold on the second main game side exists. As (a3), the timing at which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol (if there is a variable fixed time, the timing after the variable fixed time has elapsed) is exemplified, but the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end) is illustrated. As the demo end timing, immediately after the end of the big hit, immediately after the start of the time-reduced game state), in the situation where there is neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side after the end of the big hit, "777" as the big hit symbol. Etc. may be displayed at the timing. In addition, in the non-time shortened game state, the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol change of the second main game symbol in the situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists. It may be the timing when the game is fixedly stopped due to a lost symbol, or the symbol of the second main game symbol changes in a situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists in the time-reduced game state. It may be the timing when the first decorative symbol whose symbol is changed correspondingly stops due to the lost symbol, and there is neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side in the time-reduced gaming state. It may be the timing when the first decorative symbol whose symbol has changed in response to the symbol change of the first main game symbol in the situation has stopped due to the lost symbol.

(B3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set after the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixedly stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). After that, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed. The volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are as described in FIG. 127. In FIG. 177, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are simultaneously executed, and the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen are displayed at a predetermined time. The difference is that the display is erased. In the variable standby state, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display should be executed again on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment settings are completed. It may be configured in. Further, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are performed at a timing prior to the first shaking action in the fluctuation standby state of FIG. 177 (d3) and the standby movie of FIG. 177 (e3). Automatically {in the variable standby state, the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped with a lost symbol (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed) without the need to operate the cross button SB-2. After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, it can be displayed at}.

In (c3), a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display were executed in the variable standby state and the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display were executed without any operation. Then, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are configured to be erased. Even if the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are continued until the standby movie is displayed, and the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are erased when the standby movie is displayed. good. In addition, if it is in a fluctuation standby state after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed without any operation after the volume adjustment screen display and the light intensity adjustment screen display are executed, the volume is until a new fluctuation is started. The adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display may be continued, and the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display may be erased when a new fluctuation is started.

(D3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) is set after the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixedly stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). After that, the first shaking action (second shaking operation) in the variable standby state is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The first shaking action in this variable standby state is a state in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, and exemplifies an action in which only the character as the first element of the first decorative symbol is shaken. The first shaking action in the variable standby state exemplifies an action in which only the first element of the first decorative symbol is shaken, but what if the action is different from the shaking action 1 or the shaking action 2? Action is fine. In addition, in the variable standby state, a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses after the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped due to a lost symbol (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). The first shaking action was executed in the variable standby state, but the condition is that a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed after the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment setting is completed in the variable standby state. It may be configured to execute the first shaking action in the variable standby state. Further, in this case, the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped due to the lost symbol (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed), and then a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds or a variable standby state). When the time (20 seconds, which is the same as the time when the first shaking action starts) elapses, the number as the second element may be erased and only the character as the first element may be displayed. By doing so, the first shaking action in the fluctuation standby state will perform the shaking operation with only the character displayed. The first shaking action in this fluctuation standby state may be performed before the execution of the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display of (n), but this shaking action may be started at any timing. The volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment can be set even while the shaking action is being executed, and even if the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment is set, this shaking action does not end and continues. Further, the first shaking action in the variable standby state is an action that can be started at a timing earlier than the waiting movie of FIG. 177 (e3).

(E3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) is set after the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixedly stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). When it elapses, the waiting movie is executed. As shown in FIG. 177, this waiting movie is executed after the first shaking action in the variable waiting state and includes a part of the reach effect. Further, the waiting movie includes the second decorative symbol. And the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, and the information display related to the character ("1" and The number "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.) are displayed, and the operation is executed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed. If a button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the standby movie display is terminated and the volume adjustment screen or light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed at the timing of executing the standby movie of (e3). In this case, the image object of "power saving" having a higher display priority than the waiting movie is waited for. It is preferable to display it on top of the medium movie. If a button operation (operation of the cross-shaped button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed during the execution of this power saving display, the power saving display is terminated and only the standby movie is displayed. Then, when the button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment is performed again, the display of the standby movie is terminated and the volume adjustment screen or the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. It is configured. That is, the volume adjustment screen or the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed unless the button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment is performed twice while the power saving display is being executed. .. The second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the information display related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie. The magnitude relationship is as follows: 2nd decorative symbol> 2nd hold display on the 1st main game side = 2nd hold display on the 2nd main game side> Information display related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie. It is related to the game by configuring the fact that the second decorative symbol is stopped due to the lost symbol and that the number of holdings is 0, which is easier to see than the information display related to the character as the first element. It is possible to emphasize the display (number) of the symbol and the hold related to the game to the player rather than the information of the waiting movie.

The waiting movie of FIG. 177 (e3) includes a second decorative symbol, a second hold display on the first main game side, a second hold display on the second main game side, and a first included in the waiting movie. An example of displaying a character as an element and information display related to the character (numbers of "1" and "7", information of alphabets such as "super", etc.) was given, but it is displayed as follows. May be good.
(1) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, the second decorative symbol, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, and the information display related to the character are displayed (1). Numbers such as "1" and "7" and alphabetical information such as "super") are displayed, and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed.
(2) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie are displayed. The character as the first element included and the information display related to the character (numbers of "1" and "7", information of alphabets such as "super", etc.) are displayed, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed.
(3) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and the information display related to the character ("1" and "7" , Etc.), and the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed.

(F3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) is set after the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixedly stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). After that, the second shaking action in the variable waiting state (second shaking operation. The second shaking action in this variable waiting state is executed after the display of the waiting movie is finished. Although it is a shaking motion, it may also be referred to as a third shaking motion) for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The second shaking action in this variable standby state is a state in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, and exemplifies an action in which only the character as the first element of the first decorative symbol is shaken. As the second swaying action in the variable standby state, like the first swaying action in the variable standby state, only the first element of the first decorative symbol is swayed, but the swaying action 1 and the swaying are exemplified. Any action may be used as long as it is an action different from action 2. The second shaking action in the variable standby state may be configured to be executed on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed after the setting of the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment is completed. .. The second shaking action in this variable standby state may start the shaking action immediately after the end of the waiting movie. In addition, the second shaking action in this variable standby state is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), but the shaking action is continued until the next (second) waiting movie is displayed. You may. In this case, (a3) → (b3) → (c3) → (d3) → (e3) first waiting movie → (f3) second shaking action → second waiting movie → third The shaking action → the waiting movie may be configured to loop so as to be a shaking action. Further, as described above, the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped due to a lost symbol (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed), and then a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, or in a variable standby state). When the number as the second element is erased and only the character as the first element is displayed when the time (20 seconds, which is the same as the time when the first shaking action starts) elapses, it is waiting. When starting the second shaking action immediately after the end of the movie, the first decorative symbol of only the first element may be displayed immediately after the end of the second waiting movie, but the second waiting movie may be displayed. Immediately after the end of, the display mode of the first decorative symbol including the first element and the second element may be restored. Further, it may be configured to execute the waiting movie and the shaking action in the variable standby state at the same time. In this case, by setting the display priority of the waiting movie to be higher than the shaking action in the variable standby state and making the waiting movie transparent, the shaking action in the variable standby state can be visually recognized behind the waiting movie. It is configured to be. If the waiting movie is not transparent, only the waiting movie can be visually recognized, but behind the scenes, it is configured to execute a shaking action in a variable standby state.

In (a4), as the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the jackpot end, immediately after the start of the time-reduced game state), both the first main game side and the second main game side hold after the jackpot ends. It indicates the timing at which "777" or the like is displayed as a jackpot symbol in the time-reduced gaming state, which is a situation that does not exist. In the time-reduced gaming state, both the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the display mode of the second decorative symbol are only "numbers". However, "number + character" may be used only for the first decorative symbol of a specific type (for example, "number + character" is used only for 7 symbols and 3 symbols, and only "number" is used for other first decorative symbols. May be). Further, neither the first hold display on the first main game side nor the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed. Further, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", that is, after (a4), the first decorative symbol is displayed. It has been fixedly stopped, and is in a variable standby state in which neither the hold on the first main game side nor the hold on the second main game side exists. In addition, (a4) is configured so that the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the display mode of the second decorative symbol are only "numbers" in the time-reduced gaming state, while (a4) is a specific effect stage. In the above, it is applicable even when the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the display mode of the second decorative symbol are configured to be only "numbers". Further, as described above, a third element may be added to the display mode of the first decorative symbol such as "number" only or "number + character". For example, in the case of only "numbers", it may be "numbers + effects", and in the case of "numbers + characters", it may be "numbers + characters + effects".

Although not shown, (b4) is a variable standby state, and is a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the big hit end timing (or the big hit end demo end timing, immediately after the big hit end, immediately after the time shortening game state start). After that, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed. Although not shown, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol "711" in the display of the lost symbol in (b3) become the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol "777" in the display of the jackpot symbol. Is different.

Although not shown in (c4), the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed in the variable standby state, and after the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed, there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example,). After 10 seconds), the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are configured to be erased. Although not shown, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol "711" in the display of the lost symbol in (c3) become the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol "777" in the display of the jackpot symbol. Is different.

Although not shown, (d4) is a variable standby state, and is a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) from the big hit end timing (or the big hit end demo end timing, immediately after the big hit end, immediately after the time shortening game state start). After that, the first shaking action (second shaking operation) in the variable standby state is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Although not shown, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol "711" in the display of the lost symbol (d3) become the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol "777" in the display of the jackpot symbol. Is different. The first shaking action in the variable waiting state is configured so that the shaking action is executed in the variable waiting state in the non-time shortened gaming state, but the shaking action is not executed in the variable waiting state in the time shortened gaming state. You may.

(E4) is after the end of the special game (big hit game), and is in the variable standby state, and the big hit end timing (or the big hit end demo end timing, immediately after the big hit end, immediately after the time shortening game state start) ends. After a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed, the waiting movie is executed. The waiting movie includes a part of the reach effect, and the waiting movie includes the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold on the second main game side. Display, display of the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and information related to the character (numbers of "1" and "7", information of alphabets such as "super", etc.), and the number of times the special game is executed. The display of the number of consecutive villas (for example, "3 consecutive villas"), the display of the number of profits earned in the special game (for example, "GET7200"), and the display of the number of times the time-reduced game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") are displayed. It is displayed and executed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed. If a button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the standby movie display is terminated and the volume adjustment screen or light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. Is displayed. In addition, the power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed at the timing of executing the waiting movie. In this case, the "power saving" image object having a higher display priority than the waiting movie is set as the waiting movie. It is preferable to display them in layers. If a button operation (operation of the cross-shaped button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed during the execution of this power saving display, the power saving display is terminated and only the standby movie is displayed. Then, when the button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment is performed again, the display of the standby movie is terminated and the volume adjustment screen or the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. It is configured. That is, the volume adjustment screen or the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed unless the button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment is performed twice while the power saving display is being executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the information display related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, the sequence. The magnitude relationship between the villa display, the profit number display, and the executeable number display is as follows: executeable number display> consecutive villa display> profit number display> second decorative symbol> second hold display on the first main game side = second main game 2nd hold display on the side> Information display related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, the 2nd decorative symbol is stopped due to the lost symbol, and the number of holds is 0. By configuring the display so that it is easier to see than the information display related to the character as the first element, the display (number) of the design and the hold related to the game is displayed more than the information of the waiting movie not related to the game. It can be highlighted and displayed to the person.

The waiting movie of FIG. 177 (e4) includes a second decorative symbol, a second hold display on the first main game side, a second hold display on the second main game side, and a first included in the waiting movie. Character as an element and information display related to that character (numbers of "1" and "7", information of alphabets such as "super", etc.), consecutive villa display which is the number of executions of special games (for example, "3 consecutive" An example of displaying the number of profits earned in a special game (for example, "GET7200"), and the number of times the time-reduced game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") is displayed. It may be displayed as.
(1) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, the second decorative symbol, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, and the information display related to the character are displayed (1). Numbers of "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super"), consecutive villa display (for example, "3 consecutive villas"), which is the number of times the special game is executed, and display of the number of profits earned in the special game (for example, "3 consecutive villas") For example, "GET7200)" and the display of the number of times the time-reduced game state can be executed (for example, "remaining 100 times") are displayed, and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side. Is not displayed.
(2) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie are displayed. Character as the first element included and information display related to the character (numbers of "1" and "7", alphabet information such as "super", etc.), consecutive villa display which is the number of times the special game is executed (for example) , "3 consecutive villas"), the number of profits earned in the special game (for example, "GET7200"), the number of times the time-reduced game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") are displayed, and the second decorative symbol Is not displayed.
(3) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and the information display related to the character ("1" and "7" ”, Alphabet information such as“ super ”, etc.), consecutive villa display (for example,“ 3 consecutive villas ”), which is the number of times the special game has been executed, and display of the number of profits earned in the special game (for example,“ GET7200 ”). , The display of the number of times the time-reduced game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") is displayed, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side. Is not displayed.
(4) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, the second decorative symbol, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, and the information display related to the character are displayed (4). Numbers such as "1" and "7" and alphabetical information such as "super") are displayed, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and execution of special games. Display of the number of consecutive villas (for example, "3 consecutive villas"), display of the number of profits earned in the special game (for example, "GET7200"), display of the number of times the time-reduced game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") Is not displayed.
(5) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie are displayed. A character as the first element included and information display related to the character (numbers of "1" and "7", information of alphabets such as "super", etc.) are displayed, and a second decorative pattern and execution of a special game are executed. Display of the number of consecutive villas (for example, "3 consecutive villas"), display of the number of profits earned in the special game (for example, "GET7200"), display of the number of times the time-reduced game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") Is not displayed.
(6) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped due to the lost symbol, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and the information display related to the character ("1" and "7" , Etc., etc.) are displayed, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the number of times the special game is executed. The display of the number of consecutive villas (for example, "3 consecutive villas"), the display of the number of profits earned in the special game (for example, "GET7200"), and the display of the number of times the time-reduced game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") are Do not show.
In the situations (a4) to (d4) and (f4) of FIG. 177 (a situation in which the waiting movie is not displayed), a right-handed instruction display is displayed although not shown, and (e4). In the situation (the situation where the waiting movie is displayed), the right-handed instruction display may not be displayed (switched to non-display). In this configuration, even when (e4) in FIG. 177 is displayed as in (1) to (6) above, the right-handed instruction display is not displayed (switched to non-display). May be good. Further, in the situations (a4) to (d4) and (f4) of FIG. 177 (a situation in which the waiting movie is not displayed), a right-handed instruction display is displayed although not shown, and (e4). Even in the situation of (the situation where the waiting movie is displayed), the right-handed instruction display may be displayed (continuously displayed). In this configuration, even when (e4) in FIG. 177 is displayed as in (1) to (6) above, the right-handed instruction display is displayed (continuously displayed). You may.

FIG. 177 (f4) is a variable standby state, and when a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) elapses from the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the jackpot end, immediately after the time shortening game state start). , The second shaking action in the variable standby state (second shaking operation. The second shaking action in this variable waiting state is the second shaking action executed after the display of the standby demo screen is completed. However, the third shaking motion (sometimes referred to as a shaking motion) is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The second shaking action in this variable standby state is a state in which the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, and exemplifies an action in which only the character as the first element of the first decorative symbol is shaken. As the second swaying action in the variable standby state, like the first swaying action in the variable standby state, only the first element of the first decorative symbol is swayed, but the swaying action 1 and the swaying are exemplified. Any action may be used as long as it is an action different from action 2. The second shaking action in the variable standby state may be configured to be executed on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed after the setting of the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment is completed. .. The second shaking action in the variable waiting state is configured so that the shaking action is executed in the variable waiting state in the non-time shortened gaming state, but the shaking action is not executed in the variable waiting state in the time shortened gaming state. You may.

The second shaking action in the variable standby state shown in FIG. 177 (f4) may start the shaking action immediately after the end of the waiting movie. In addition, the second shaking action in this variable standby state is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), but the shaking action is continued until the next (second) waiting movie is displayed. You may. In this case, (a4) → (b4) → (c4) → (d4) → (e4) first waiting movie → (f4) second shaking action → second waiting movie → third The shaking action → the waiting movie may be configured to loop so as to be a shaking action. Further, when the second shaking action is started immediately after the end of the waiting movie, and in the mode of the first decorative symbol that executes the shaking action, the number as the second element is erased, and the character as the first element. When only the first element is displayed, only the first element may be displayed immediately after the end of the second waiting movie. Further, it may be configured to execute the waiting movie and the shaking action in the variable standby state at the same time. In this case, by setting the display priority of the waiting movie to be higher than the shaking action in the variable standby state and making the waiting movie transparent, the shaking action in the variable standby state can be visually recognized behind the waiting movie. It is configured to be. Further, when the waiting movie is not transparent, only the waiting movie can be visually recognized, but behind the scenes, it is configured to execute a shaking action in a variable standby state.

Next, FIG. 178 shows the overlapping relationship between the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns and the first decorative symbol in the middle row in the normal symbol variation and reach variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state. It is an image diagram which shows. First, in the normal symbol variation, for the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column, the first decorative symbol in the middle row and the first overlapping region are at predetermined timings (for example, at the start of the variation and at the time of the shaking variation). Although they overlap (overlap) with each other, the first decorative symbols in the left column and the right column are configured so as not to overlap each other. Further, in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation), for the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column, at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the variation, at the time of the symbol feed variation in the middle row of the reach, at the time of the determination action). , At the time of shaking fluctuation), the first decorative symbol in the middle row and the second decorative symbol overlap in the second overlapping area, but the first decorative symbols in the left column and the right column are configured so as not to overlap each other. Here, as shown in the figure, the specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) is a region in which the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the middle column than the normal symbol variation. Overlapping ratio (= overlapping area where the first decorative symbol in the left and right columns and the first decorative symbol in the middle column overlap / the first decorative symbol in the left and right columns and the first in the middle column The display area of the decorative pattern) is largely configured (first overlapping area <second overlapping area). Further, in the specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation), the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the middle column is larger than that in the normal symbol variation. Here, as shown in the figure, the second overlapping region in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) is configured to be different depending on the type of a predetermined timing, and at the start of the variation (at the time of the action at the start of the variation). The overlap ratio (or overlap area) is larger in the middle row of the reach than when the symbol feed fluctuates, and the overlap ratio (at the time of the change start action) is larger than that at the time of the decision action or the shaking fluctuation. Or the overlapping area) is large. At a predetermined timing, an action (for example, an action at the start of fluctuation, a shaking action, a tempai action, a decision action) occurs, and the card type of the first decorative symbol in the left and right columns and the first decorative symbol in the middle column. The first element of the image object (which may be a character type image object) overlaps with each other, but the second element of the numerical image object does not overlap with each other. In this way, when moving the first decorative pattern, the character as the first element gives a sense of dynamism, so adjacent characters are allowed to overlap, but which number stops is a big hit mode. By constructing so that the numbers as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it becomes It is possible to keep the role of notifying the loss. However, in the situation where the first decorative symbol composed of the first element and the second element is displayed (for example, at the time of action at the start of fluctuation, at the time of tempai action, at the time of shaking action, etc.), the first is as described above. It is appropriate to configure the elements so that they overlap each other and the second elements do not overlap. For example, in the super reach effect or the battle reach effect, the first decorative symbol composed of the second element without the first element In the displayed situation, a timing may be provided so that the second elements overlap each other (for example, it is a timing before returning to the normal background and performing a decision action, and "777" during the super reach production. Display timing, etc.). Further, in the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element, the first element overlaps with each other and the second element does not overlap with each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first elements also overlap with each other. However, the second elements may be configured to overlap each other, and in such a case, the overlap ratio between the first elements (= the first element of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column and the first decoration in the middle column). Overlapping area where the first element of the symbol overlaps / Display area of the first element of the first decorative symbol in the left and right columns and the first element of the first decorative symbol in the middle column) and the second element Overlapping ratio (= Overlapping area where the second element of the first decorative symbol in the left and right columns and the second element of the first decorative symbol in the middle column overlap / the first decorative symbol in the left and right columns The second element and the display area of the second element of the first decorative symbol in the middle row) may be different, and in particular, the overlap ratio between the first elements may be larger than the overlap ratio between the second elements. Suitable. It should be noted that the non-reach effect, the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. It may be a reach fluctuation that performs the first half and the second half of. In addition, in the time-reduced game state and the specific effect mode, unlike the predetermined effect mode other than the non-time-reduced game state and the specific effect mode, the components of the first decorative symbol are being produced in the super reach effect or the battle reach effect. It may be a second element without the first element, and if it is configured as such, in a time-saving game state or a specific production mode, a predetermined timing (at the time of fluctuation start action, at the time of shaking action, tempai action) At times, at the time of a decision action, etc.), the second elements may overlap with each other. In addition, when targeting the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the loss super reach effect and the battle reach effect, the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect may be held as the variation mode group of the groups 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. It is clear.

In FIG. 178, in the situation where the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are tempered when the symbols in the middle row are fed in the reach variation, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are the first in the middle row. Although the display priority is higher than that of the decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol in the middle column may have a higher display priority than the first decorative symbol in the right column and the left column. With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the first decorative symbol in the middle row is a combination of jackpot symbols (whether it is doublet). Further, in FIG. 178, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are enlarged during the tempai of the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns in the reach variation, and then the first decorative symbols in the middle column are left and right. In addition to this example, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns do not expand or shrink during tempai, and then the middle column. The first decorative symbol may be enlarged and displayed in a larger size than the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column while overlapping with the first element of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column. In that case, it is preferable to give the first decorative symbol in the middle row a higher display priority than the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column so that the first decorative symbol in the middle row is watched. The display priority of the first decorative symbol in the row may be higher than that of the first decorative symbol in the middle row. In the case of such a configuration, in the normal symbol variation (non-reach variation), it is preferable that the first decorative symbol does not expand or contract and is difficult to expand or contract as compared with the reach variation. Further, in the normal symbol variation (non-reach variation), the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column is the first decorative symbol in the middle row and the first decorative symbol at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation or at the time of the shaking fluctuation). It may be configured so as not to overlap in the overlapping area of.

Further, in a normal symbol variation, the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the middle column in a predetermined action (for example, an action at the start of variation, a shaking action, etc.). In a specific symbol variation (eg, reach variation) rather than the first time overlapping in the region, the first decorative symbol in the left and right columns has a predetermined action (eg, variation start action, shaking action, deciding action). Etc.), the second time overlapping the first decorative symbol in the middle row and the second overlapping area is longer (first time <second time). In such a reach variation with high expectation of a big hit, the first decoration by making the time that the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the middle column longer than the normal symbol variation. It is possible to make the player watch each action while diversifying the movement of the symbol itself.

Further, in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation), for the first decorative symbol in the left column, a predetermined action (for example, an action at the start of variation, a tempai action, a shaking action, a decision action, etc.) is performed in the right column. It may overlap with the first decorative pattern. In this case, in the normal symbol variation, the first decorative symbol in the left column is replaced with the first decorative symbol in the right column by a predetermined action (for example, an action at the start of fluctuation, a tempai action, a shaking action, a decision action, etc.). , It is configured to overlap (overlap) in the third overlapping region, and in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation), a predetermined action (for example, variation start) is applied to the first decorative symbol in the left column. It is configured to overlap the first decorative symbol in the right column and the fourth overlapping area in the time action, tempai action, shaking action, decision action, etc.). The specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) is the overlap ratio (= the second in the left column), which is the ratio of the area where the first decorative symbol in the left column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the right column, than the normal symbol variation. 1 The overlapping area where the decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol in the right column overlap / the display area of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column) is largely configured (third overlapping area <third). 4 overlapping areas). Further, in the specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation), the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the right column is higher than that in the normal symbol variation. Here, the fourth overlapping region in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) is configured to be different according to a predetermined action, and the action at the start of variation is the time when the symbol feed variation in the middle row of reach is performed. The overlapping ratio (or overlapping area) is larger than that at the time of the shaking action, and the overlapping ratio (or overlapping area) is larger at the decision action and the shaking action than at the time of the fluctuation start action. However, in the situation where the first decorative symbol composed of the first element and the second element is displayed (for example, at the time of action at the start of fluctuation, at the time of tempai action, at the time of shaking action, etc.), the first in the left column. The first element of the decorative symbol overlaps with the first element of the first decorative symbol in the right column, and the second element of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the second element of the first decorative symbol in the right column do not overlap. However, for example, in a situation where the first decorative symbol composed of the second element without the first element is displayed during the super reach effect or the battle reach effect, the second elements are connected to each other. Actions may be provided such that the two overlap (for example, a decision action). Further, in the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element, the first element overlaps with each other and the second element does not overlap with each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first elements also overlap with each other. However, the second elements may also be configured to overlap each other. In such a case, the overlapping ratio of the first elements (= the first element of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column) Overlapping area where one element overlaps / Overlapping ratio between the first element of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the display area of the first element of the first decorative symbol in the right column (= left column) Overlapping area where the second element of the first decorative symbol in the right column and the second element of the first decorative symbol in the right column overlap / the second element of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column It is preferable to make it different from the display area of the second element), and in particular, it is preferable that the overlap ratio between the first elements is larger than the overlap ratio between the second elements. It should be noted that the non-reach effect, the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. It may be a reach fluctuation that performs the first half and the second half of. In addition, in the time-reduced game state and the specific effect mode, unlike the predetermined effect mode other than the non-time-reduced game state and the specific effect mode, the components of the first decorative symbol are being produced in the super reach effect or the battle reach effect. It may be a second element without the first element, and if it is configured as such, a predetermined action (action at the start of fluctuation, shaking action, tempai action, determination) is performed in a time-saving game state or a specific production mode. In actions, etc.), the second elements may overlap with each other. In addition, when targeting the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the loss super reach effect and the battle reach effect, the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect may be held as the variation mode group of the groups 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. It is clear. Further, the specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) is longer than the time when the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column overlap in the third overlapping area, rather than the normal symbol variation. In the fourth overlapping area, the time during which the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column overlap is longer. Although the first element of the card-type image object (which may be a character-type image object) of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column overlaps with each other, the second element of the numerical image object It is preferable that they are configured so as not to overlap each other. In this way, when moving the first decorative pattern, the character as the first element gives a sense of dynamism, so adjacent characters are allowed to overlap, but which number stops is a big hit mode. By constructing so that the numbers as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it becomes It is possible to keep the role of notifying the loss. In addition, in the reach fluctuation with high expectation of big hit, the time when the first decorative symbol in the left column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the right column is made longer than the normal symbol variation, so that the player pays attention to each action. Can be made to. In addition, in FIG. 178, the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the middle row at the start of fluctuation, at the time of shaking fluctuation, at the time of the symbol feed fluctuation in the middle row of reach, and at the time of the decision action. An example is shown, but other than these timings (including the timing of definite stop), the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column may overlap with the first decorative symbol in the middle column (for example, definite). It does not have to be duplicated (duplicate in the stopped state).

Further, in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state, a predetermined timing (for example, FIG. 168, FIGS. 173 to 176, FIG. 178) in which the reach state is formed is formed. Tempai action 2 using the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns as shown in is performed, and then the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are swaying and fluctuating while tempai ( (At the timing when the first decorative symbol in the middle row is enlarged and displayed in a downward variation) at the time of the symbol feed fluctuation in the middle row of the reach in FIG. 178), the variable display is continued for a predetermined effect. The first element of the card-type image object (which may be a character-type image object) of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol row (for example, the middle row) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the shaking action 2 is executed. The first element of the card-type image object (which may be a character-type image object) of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the effect symbol string other than the predetermined effect symbol string (for example, the left column and the right column) is It is configured to overlap (overlap) in the second overlapping area. Further, in the normal symbol variation in which the non-reach state on the first main game side is formed in the non-time shortened gaming state, the predetermined timing in which the non-reach state is formed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 172 and 178). , The first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the shaking action is being executed. After that, the first decorative symbol in the middle column as shown in FIG. 179 (d) is displayed. At the timing of provisionally stopping and displaying with the execution of the fixed position action 3), the first one corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row (for example, the middle row) that temporarily stops and displays and performs the fixed position action 3. Other than the first element of the card-shaped image object (which may be a character-shaped image object) of the decorative symbol and the predetermined effect symbol string which is temporarily stopped and displayed and the shaking action is executed (for example, the left column, The first element of the card-type image object (which may be a character-type image object) of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the effect pattern row in the right column) is configured to overlap (overlap) in the first overlapping area. Has been done. Then, tentatively, the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the middle row in which the variation display is continued at a predetermined timing when the reach state in the specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) is formed. The second overlapping area where the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the left column and the right column corresponding to the stop display and the shaking action 2 overlaps (overlaps) is the non-overlapping area in the normal symbol variation. At a predetermined timing when the reach state is formed, the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the middle row that temporarily displays the stop and performs the fixed position action 3, and the temporary stop display and the shaking action are displayed. The configuration is larger than the first overlapping area where the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the executed left column and right column overlaps (overlaps) (second overlapping area> first overlapping area). Has been done. That is, the specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) has a larger proportion (overlap ratio) of the region where the first elements of the first decorative symbol overlap each other than the normal symbol variation (second overlap). Region> first overlapping region). At a predetermined timing, the first elements of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column and the first decorative symbol in the middle column overlap each other, but the second elements do not overlap each other. In this way, when moving the first decorative pattern, the character as the first element gives a sense of dynamism, so adjacent characters are allowed to overlap, but which number stops is a big hit mode. By constructing so that the numbers as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it becomes It is possible to keep the role of notifying the loss. It should be noted that the non-reach effect, the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. It may be a reach fluctuation that performs the first half and the second half of. In addition, when targeting the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the loss super reach effect and the battle reach effect, the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect may be held as the variation mode group of the groups 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. It is clear.

Further, in a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state, a predetermined timing (for example, FIG. 168, FIGS. 173 to 176, FIG. 178) in which the reach state is formed is formed. Tempai action 2 is performed using the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns as shown in the above, and then the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are swaying and fluctuating while being tempted. , At the timing when the first decorative symbol in the middle row is enlarged and variablely displayed downward), the first decoration corresponding to the predetermined production symbol row (for example, the middle row) in which the variable display is continued. Other than the first element of the card-type image object of the symbol (which may be a character-type image object) and the predetermined effect symbol string which is temporarily stopped and displayed and the shaking action 2 is executed (for example, the left column, The first element of the card-type image object (which may be a character-type image object) of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the effect pattern row in the right column) overlaps (overlaps) for a fifth time in the second overlapping area. ). Further, in the normal symbol variation in which the non-reach state on the first main game side is formed in the non-time shortened gaming state, the predetermined timing in which the non-reach state is formed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 172 and 178). , The first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the shaking action is being executed. After that, the first decorative symbol in the middle column as shown in FIG. 179 (d) is displayed. At the timing of provisionally stopping and displaying with the execution of the fixed position action 3), the first one corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row (for example, the middle row) that temporarily stops and displays and performs the fixed position action 3. Other than the first element of the card-shaped image object (which may be a character-shaped image object) of the decorative symbol and the predetermined effect symbol string which is temporarily stopped and displayed and the shaking action is executed (for example, the left column, The first element of the card-type image object (which may be a character-type image object) of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the effect pattern row in the right column) overlaps (overlaps) for a sixth time in the first overlapping area. ). Then, tentatively, the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the middle row in which the variation display is continued at a predetermined timing when the reach state in the specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) is formed. The fifth time when the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the left column and the right column corresponding to the stop display and the shaking action 2 overlaps (overlaps) is the non-reach in the normal symbol variation. Temporarily stop display and perform shaking action with the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the middle row that temporarily stops and displays and performs the fixed position action 3 at a predetermined timing when the state is formed. It is configured to be longer (fifth time> sixth time) than the sixth time in which the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the left column and the right column overlaps (overlaps). That is, a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) has a larger ratio of time (overlap ratio) in which the first elements of the first decorative symbol overlap each other than the normal symbol variation (the first elements overlap each other). The overlapping time is long) (fifth time> sixth time). At a predetermined timing, the first elements of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column and the first decorative symbol in the middle column overlap each other, but the second elements do not overlap each other. In such a reach variation with high expectation of a big hit, the first decoration by making the time that the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column overlaps with the first decorative symbol in the middle column longer than the normal symbol variation. It is possible to make the player watch each action while diversifying the movement of the symbol itself. It should be noted that the non-reach effect, the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, and the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. It may be a reach fluctuation that performs the first half and the second half of. In addition, when targeting the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the loss super reach effect and the battle reach effect, the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect may be held as the variation mode group of the groups 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 41 and 45. It is clear.

Next, FIG. 179 shows a fixed-position action (a mode of producing the chance pre-reading effect) when the chance pre-reading effect is executed by the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state. ) Is an image diagram. The effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect is an effect mode in which a color effect such as red, green, or blue as a third element is added to the first decorative symbol when the fixed position action is executed. In addition, as a fixed-position action when the chance look-ahead effect is executed, an action of enlarging the first decorative symbol rather than the first decorative symbol when the definite stop of the lost symbol as described above may be executed may be executed. , In this case, the enlargement action is when the chance look-ahead effect is not executed, such as the first decorative symbol is enlarged or enlarged while rotating, compared to the fixed position action when the chance look-ahead effect is not executed. It is desirable to differentiate it from the mode of fixed-position action. First, in FIG. 179 (a), in the non-time shortened gaming state, the hold on the first main game side is 2 and the hold on the second main game side is 0. The second decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped at "711", which is a lost symbol. In the non-time reduction game state, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is "number + character", and the display mode of the second decorative symbol is only "number". The first hold display on the first main game side is displayed as two, and the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed. Further, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "2", the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed. Trigger hold is displayed in hold 2. Here, for FIGS. 179 and later, in order to make it easier to understand whether or not the trigger is on hold, the first hold display that is not the trigger hold is marked with "●", and the first hold display that is the trigger hold is marked with "▲". In the actual first hold display, (1) the first hold display in the same display mode regardless of whether the trigger is held or not, for example, all may be "●". (2) As shown in the figure, "▲" may be used instead of "●" so that the player is clearly informed that the trigger is on hold (if the trigger is not on hold, "●" is used). In this configuration, the trigger hold may be displayed as shown in (1) but may be displayed as shown in (2) by lottery when the trigger hold occurs. In this case, (b) execute a loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds, and add a blue color effect in addition to the fixed position action 1 (for example, the enlargement action) of the first decorative symbol of "1" in the left column. The production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is executed. It is clear that the loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation mode of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. Next, (c) the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative symbol of "7" in the right column (for example, the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect of adding a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action) is executed, and then (c) is executed. , (D) Execute the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol of "1" in the middle row (for example, the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect of adding the blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action). In (d), an example of executing the fixed position action 3 of only the first decorative symbol in the middle row (for example, an effect mode of a chance look-ahead effect of adding a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action) is shown. However, at the timing of (d), the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column may simultaneously execute the chance look-ahead effect of the blue color effect, in which case the blue color effect is not accompanied. Regarding the normal fixed position action (action in which the first decorative symbol is enlarged), the left column is executed at the timing of (b), the middle column is executed at the timing of (c), and the left column is executed at the timing of (d). The blue color effect may be added at the same time to the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column, which are executed at the timing of (d) and temporarily stopped at the timing of (d). Further, the time-reduced gaming state may be used instead of the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is supported instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol.

Next, (e) of FIG. 179 is a state different from (a) to (d) of FIG. The hold on the main game side is 0, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fixedly stopped at "711", which is a lost symbol, on the effect display device SG. The first hold display on the first main game side is displayed four times, and the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed. Further, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "4", the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed. Trigger hold is displayed in hold 4. In this case, (f) the fixed position action 4 (for example, the left column, the middle column, When the first decorative symbol in the right column temporarily stops at the same time, the first decorative symbol in each column performs an enlargement action at the same time, and a chance to add a blue color effect to the first decorative symbol in each column at the same time. Production mode) is executed. It is clear that the loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation mode of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. In this way, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the timing of occurrence of the fixed position action and the time-series flow differ depending on the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol ( It is configured so that the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect is different). In addition, even if the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect of the same blue color effect appears, the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is held in the situation where the trigger hold exists on the first main game side 4 → If the fluctuation is 3, all the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle row, and right column are temporarily stopped at the same time due to the shortened fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds, and the left column and middle row are set as the fixed position action 4. , The 1st decorative symbol in the right column performs the enlargement action at the same time and the chance to add the blue color effect. If the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1, the change time is 10 seconds, which is a normal change of loss, so the left column, middle column, and right column are in order, that is, the fixed position action 1. , The fixed position action 2 and the fixed position action 3 are performed in this order, and the chance to add the blue color effect in that order is configured to execute the effect mode of the look-ahead effect (or as described above). , The magnifying action is done in that order, but the blue color effect may be done at the same time). Further, even if the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect of the same combination of the first decorative symbols (for example, "117") appears, the trigger hold is held in the situation where the trigger hold exists on the first main game side. If the hold that is digested earlier is a change of hold 4 → 3, all the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are temporarily stopped at the same time due to the shortened change of the change time of 5 seconds. As the fixed position action 4, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column simultaneously perform an enlargement action and a chance to add a blue color effect. If the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1 in the situation where the trigger hold exists in, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds, which is the normal fluctuation of the loss, so the left column, middle column, and right. Perform the expansion action in the order of the columns, that is, the fixed position action 1, the fixed position action 2, and the fixed position action 3, and execute the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect to add the blue color effect in that order. (Or, as mentioned above, the magnifying action is performed in that order, but the blue color effect may be performed at the same time). In other words, the chance look-ahead effect of the same type (the same color effect and the same combination of the first decorative symbols), but the timing of occurrence of the fixed position action and the time-series flow are different (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect is different). It is configured as follows. Up to this point, we have shown an example in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action and execute a production mode of a pre-reading effect of chance to add a blue color effect. You may add a green or red color effect instead of the color effect of. The green color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue and green color effects. Then, when the chance look-ahead effect is executed, the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is held. In the fluctuation of hold 4 → 3, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are expanded at the same time as the fixed position action. Chance to take action and add a blue color effect Perform a look-ahead effect. In the next change from Hold 3 to 2, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance to add a green color effect. do. Furthermore, in the next change from Hold 2 to 1, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance to add a red color effect. Execute. Furthermore, in the next change from Hold 2 to 1, the expansion action is performed in the order of the left column, the middle column, and the right column as the fixed position action, that is, the fixed position action 1, the fixed position action 2, and the fixed position action 3. Moreover, the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect of adding the red color effect is executed in that order. In such a chance look-ahead effect, as the hold is exhausted, the blue color effect (low hit expectation) changes to the green color effect (medium hit expectation), and then the green color effect (hit expectation). It is configured so that the hit expectation increases as the color effect increases, so that the color effect changes from medium) to red color effect (high hit expectation).

Next, FIG. 180 shows a fixed position action (a mode of producing the chance look-ahead effect) according to the trigger hold when executing the chance look-ahead effect in the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol. It is an image diagram which shows. The effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect is an effect mode in which a color effect such as red, green, or blue as a third element is added to the first decorative symbol when the fixed position action is executed. In addition, as a fixed-position action when the chance look-ahead effect is executed, an action of enlarging the first decorative symbol rather than the first decorative symbol when the definite stop of the lost symbol as described above may be executed may be executed. , In this case, the enlargement action is when the chance look-ahead effect is not executed, such as the first decorative symbol is enlarged or enlarged while rotating, compared to the fixed position action when the chance look-ahead effect is not executed. It is desirable to differentiate it from the mode of fixed-position action. First, in FIG. 180 (a), in the non-time shortened gaming state, the hold on which neither the first main game side hold nor the second main game side hold exists is 0, and the effect display device SG has the first hold. 1 The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the main game symbol indicate that the symbol is changing. Then, if (b) four holds on the first main game side occur during the symbol change, (c) the next change in which the symbol change is stopped executes a loss change with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds, and the left column. , A fixed position action 4 in which the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time (for example, an enlarged action executed at the same time when the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are temporarily stopped at the same time. Chance to add a blue color effect. It is clear that the loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation mode of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. The fixed position action 4 may be the same action as that shown in FIG. 179 (f), or may be a different action. Further, the time-reduced gaming state may be used instead of the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is supported instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol.

In addition, if (d) two holds on the first main game side occur during the symbol change, (e) a loss change with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is executed in the next change in which the symbol change is stopped, and the change is performed. In the first decorative symbol in the left column, the fixed position action 1 of the symbol of "1" (for example, an effect mode of a chance look-ahead effect of adding a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action) is executed. It is clear that the loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation mode of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. Next, (f) the fixed position action 2 of the symbol "7" (for example, the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect of adding a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action) is executed in the first decorative symbol in the right column. Then, in (g) the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the fixed position action 3 of the symbol "1" (for example, a chance to add a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action) is produced. Aspect) is executed. The fixed position actions 1, 2, and 3 may be the same actions as those shown in FIGS. 179 (b), (c), and (d), or may be different actions. Further, at the timing of (g), the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column may simultaneously execute the chance look-ahead effect of the blue color effect, in which case the blue color effect is not accompanied. Regarding the normal fixed position action (action in which the first decorative symbol is enlarged), the left column is executed at the timing of (e), the right column is executed at the timing of (f), and the middle column is executed at (g). The blue color effect may be added at the same time to the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column, which are executed at the timing of (g) and temporarily stopped at the timing of (g).

In this way, when the trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the starting port during the symbol change in the situation where neither the hold on the first main game side nor the hold on the second main game side exists, this symbol is used. Depending on whether there are holds that are digested before the trigger hold during the fluctuation and / or how many holds are digested before the trigger hold during this symbol change. , The fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is configured to be different. With this configuration, the player can select whether or not to save the hold at the timing when the player can recognize or infer that the trigger hold has occurred when the chance look-ahead effect using the first decorative symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel playability such as making a difference in the subsequent production mode. In addition, even if the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect of the same blue color effect appears, the start during the symbol change in the situation where neither the hold of the first main game side nor the hold of the second main game side exists. Trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the mouth, and if the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 4 → 3, the fluctuation time is shortened by 5 seconds. Opportunity to temporarily stop all the first decorative symbols in the column and right column at the same time, and as the fixed position action 4, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column simultaneously perform the enlargement action and add a blue color effect. The effect mode of the look-ahead effect is executed, but the trigger is suspended when the ball enters the starting port during the symbol change in the situation where neither the hold on the first main game side nor the hold on the second main game side exists. If the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1, it is executed in the order of the left column, middle column, and right column due to the normal fluctuation of the loss of 10 seconds. That is, it is configured to perform the expansion action in the order of the fixed position action 1, the fixed position action 2, and the fixed position action 3, and execute the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect to add the blue color effect in that order. (Alternatively, as mentioned above, the magnifying action is performed in that order, but the blue color effect may be performed at the same time). Further, even if an effect mode of a chance look-ahead effect appears in which the combination of the first decorative symbols is the same (for example, "117"), there is a hold on the first main game side and a hold on the second main game side. Trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the starting port during the symbol change in the situation where it is not, and if the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is the change of hold 4 → 3, the change time is 5 seconds. Due to the shortening fluctuation of the loss, all the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are temporarily stopped at the same time, and the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are expanded at the same time as the fixed position action 4. And the chance to add a blue color effect. Trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the start port, and if the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds, which is the normal fluctuation of the loss, so the left column, Opportunity to perform expansion actions in the order of the middle column and the right column, that is, in the order of fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, and fixed position action 3, and add a blue color effect in that order. (Or, as mentioned above, the magnifying actions are performed in that order, but the blue color effects may be performed at the same time), that is, the same type (same color effect or same first decorative pattern). Although it is a chance look-ahead effect (combination of), it is configured so that the timing of occurrence of the fixed position action and the flow in time series are different (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect is different). If a trigger hold occurs during a certain symbol change, it is preferable to configure it so that the chance look-ahead effect can be executed from the next symbol change onward without executing the chance look-ahead effect from the certain symbol change. Is. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 180, there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side. When the hold is 0, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol is lost by 10 seconds. Even if the trigger hold occurs in the situation where the fluctuation is being executed and the remaining time of the fluctuation time is 3 seconds or more (the situation where the fluctuation time in which the chance look-ahead effect can be executed remains), the chance look-ahead effect is displayed. Although the situation is such that sufficient time is secured for execution, the chance pre-reading effect is not executed due to the certain symbol change, and the chance pre-reading effect can be executed from the next symbol change onward. Up to this point, we have shown an example in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action and execute a production mode of a pre-reading effect of chance to add a blue color effect. You may add a green or red color effect instead of the color effect of. The green color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue and green color effects. Then, when the chance look-ahead effect is executed, the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is held. In the fluctuation of hold 4 → 3, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are expanded at the same time as the fixed position action. Chance to take action and add a blue color effect Perform a look-ahead effect. In the next change from Hold 3 to 2, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance to add a green color effect. do. Furthermore, in the next change from Hold 2 to 1, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance to add a red color effect. Execute. Furthermore, in the next change of hold 2 → 1, the expansion action is performed in the order of the left column, the middle column, and the right column as the fixed position action, that is, the fixed position action 1, the fixed position action 2, and the fixed position action 3. Moreover, the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect of adding the red color effect is executed in that order. In such a chance look-ahead effect, as the hold is exhausted, the blue color effect (low hit expectation) changes to the green color effect (medium hit expectation), and then the green color effect (hit expectation). It is configured so that the hit expectation increases as the color effect increases, so that the color effect changes from medium) to red color effect (high hit expectation).

Next, FIG. 181 is an image diagram showing a fixed position action when the chance pre-reading effect is executed by the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state. Although not shown, FIG. 181 displays a right-handed instruction display. First, in FIG. 181 (a), in the time-reduced game state, the hold on the first main game side is 0, the hold on the second main game side is 2, and the effect display device SG has the first decorative symbol and the first. 2 The decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped at "711", which is a lost symbol. In the time-reduced gaming state, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is only "numbers", and the display mode of the second decorative symbol is also only "numbers". The first hold display on the second main game side is displayed as two, and the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. Further, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "2", and the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed. Trigger hold is displayed in hold 2. In this case, (b) a loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is executed, and a fixed position action 5 is executed in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are temporarily stopped at the same time. In this fixed position action, the first decorative symbol performs an enlargement action and adds a blue color effect as in the non-time reduction game state, but the fixed position in the chance look-ahead effect in the non-time reduction game state. The mode may be different from the position action, in which case, for example, the first decorative symbol may perform a reduction action and add a blue color effect. It is clear that the loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation mode of b1 to b4 shown in FIG. Further, it may be in a non-time-reduced gaming state instead of the time-reduced gaming state, and it corresponds to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol. Up to this point, we have shown an example in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action and execute a production mode of a pre-reading effect of chance to add a blue color effect. You may add a green or red color effect instead of the color effect of. The green color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue and green color effects. Then, when executing the chance look-ahead effect using the blue, green, and red color effects, the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is held. , The first decorative symbol in the right column performs an enlargement action at the same time, and a chance to add a blue color effect. In the next change from Hold 3 to 2, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance to add a green color effect. do. Furthermore, in the next change from Hold 2 to 1, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column simultaneously perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance to add a red color effect. Execute. In such a chance look-ahead effect, as the hold is exhausted, the blue color effect (low hit expectation) changes to the green color effect (medium hit expectation), and then the green color effect (hit expectation). It is configured so that the hit expectation increases as the color effect increases, so that the color effect changes from medium) to red color effect (high hit expectation).

Next, in FIG. 181 (c), in the time-reduced game state, the hold on the first main game side is 0, the hold on the second main game side is 4, and the effect display device SG has the first decorative symbol. The second decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped at "711", which is a lost symbol. The first hold display on the second main game side is displayed as four, and the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. Further, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "4", and the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed. Trigger hold is displayed in hold 4. In this case, (d) a loss variation with a variation time of 3 seconds is executed, and a fixed position action 5 is executed in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are temporarily stopped at the same time. In this fixed position action, the first decorative symbol performs an enlargement action and adds a blue color effect as in the non-time reduction game state, but the fixed position in the chance look-ahead effect in the non-time reduction game state. The mode may be different from the position action, in which case, for example, the first decorative symbol may perform a reduction action and add a blue color effect. It is clear that the loss variation with a variation time of 3 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation mode of b1 to b4 shown in FIG. In this way, in the time-reduced gaming state, the fixed-position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the same according to the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol. It is configured in. Although the fixed position action 5 is set as the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect, it may be configured to display the effect dedicated to the look-ahead in the time-saving game state. In that case, the look-ahead-only effect is configured to be different according to the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol.

Further, as shown by (a) to (d) in FIG. 179 and (e) to (f) in FIG. The fluctuation time on the main game side is different, and the order of temporary stop (order of fixed position action) of the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column of the chance look-ahead effect is different. On the other hand, as shown by (a) and (b) in FIG. 181 and (c) and (d) in FIG. Although the fluctuation time of is different, the order of temporary stop (order of fixed position action) of the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column of the chance look-ahead effect is configured to be the same. With this configuration, the fluctuation time differs depending on the number of holdings in any of the game states, but the non-time reduction game state in which the production is more important than the fluctuation efficiency and the time reduction game state in which the fluctuation efficiency is emphasized are different. By differentiating the appearance of the first decorative symbol, the player can recognize in which state the change is made, and at the same time, the mode of the symbol change of the first decorative symbol suitable for each game state. can do. In addition, it can be divided into a game state in which the mode of the fixed position action can be enjoyed due to the difference in the number of holds, and a game state in which the mode of the fixed position action is unified by the difference in the number of holds to realize seamless production progress. It is possible to enjoy the tendency of the aspect of the chance eye according to the game state. The order of temporary stops during the chance look-ahead effect is not limited to the order of temporary stops in the normal symbol variation in the non-time shortened gaming state and the time shortened gaming state. When the above configuration is applied in the order of temporary stop in the normal symbol change in the non-time shortened gaming state and the time shortened gaming state, the fixed position action in the normal symbol change in the non-time shortened gaming state and the time shortened gaming state is performed. There is no need to add a color effect as a third element or a look-ahead-only effect.

In addition, regarding the order of the start of fluctuation, the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column should start the symbol variation at the same time (substantially at the same time) in both the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state. It is configured in. Further, regarding the action at the start of fluctuation, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the action at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is performed regardless of the number of holdings, but in the time-reduced gaming state, the action at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is not performed. Or it is configured so that the probability of doing it is low. Specifically, regardless of whether the hold on the first main game side is 1 to 4 in the non-time shortened game state, the action at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol is executed. However, in the time-reduced game state, even if the hold on the second main game side is any of 1 to 4, the action at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the second main game symbol is not executed. Or, at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the second main game symbol only when the hold of the second main game side is 1 (the hold becomes 2 → 1) in the time shortened game state. It is configured to perform an action. The chance look-ahead effect is configured to be feasible in a symbol change in which the hold is 4 → 3, a symbol change in which the hold is 3 → 2, and a symbol change in which the hold is 2 → 1. The chance look-ahead effect when the look-ahead is won is configured so that the chance look-ahead effect corresponding to the trigger hold is not executed when the power is turned off and restored. That is, a trigger hold occurs during a certain change in a state where the hold of the first main game side (or the second main game side) is 1 or more, and the chance look-ahead effect is executed from the next change of the certain change. Even if it was planned, if the power is turned off during the certain fluctuation, even if it is restored, the chance look-ahead effect is not executed in the next fluctuation of the certain fluctuation, and the first main game side ( Or, a trigger hold occurs during a certain change in a state where the hold of the second main game side) is 3 or more, and a chance look-ahead effect is executed from the next change of the certain change, and the change of the certain change one after another. However, even if the chance look-ahead effect is planned to be executed, the chance look-ahead effect will not be executed in the next change of the next change even if the power is turned off during the change. In, since the power return screen is displayed, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, that is, the chance look-ahead effect is not executed even in the successive fluctuations).

Further, in the normal symbol variation in the non-time shortened gaming state, the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol may be different depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, but a specific symbol variation (for example, for example). In (reach fluctuation), there is a low probability that the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol will not be different or the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol will be different depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side. It is configured in. For example, the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3, is left column, middle column, and right. The first decorative symbol in the row is configured to temporarily stop at the same time (substantially at the same time), but the hold on the first main game side is changed from 2 to 1, which is a normal one corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol. The order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the symbol variation is configured to temporarily stop in the order of the left column, the right column, and the middle column. On the other hand, the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the reach variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3, is in the left column, right column, and middle column. It is configured to temporarily stop in order, and the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol is also in the reach variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side is 2 → 1. , Left column, right column, and middle column are configured to temporarily stop in this order.

Further, a fixed position action (a mode of producing a chance look-ahead effect) may be executed at the time of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol. In, there may be a difference in the order of the fixed position actions of the first decorative symbol (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, but a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) may occur. In), there is no difference in the order of the fixed-position actions of the first decorative symbol (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, or the fixed-position action of the first decorative symbol (). It is configured so that there is a low probability that a difference in the order of the chance pre-reading effect) will occur. For example, the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3 (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect). The order is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column simultaneously (substantially simultaneously) perform a fixed position action (a mode of producing a chance look-ahead effect), but on the first main game side. The order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol whose hold is 2 → 1 is the left column and the right column. , It is configured to perform a fixed position action (a mode of producing a chance look-ahead effect) in the order of the middle row. On the other hand, the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) in the reach variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3. , The left column, the right column, and the middle column are configured to perform fixed-position actions (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect), and the hold of the first main game side is 2 → 1. Even in the reach variation corresponding to the symbol variation of, the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the fixed position action (chance look-ahead effect) in the order of the left column, the right column, and the middle column. It is configured to be the effect mode).

In addition, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the non-time shortened game state, or when the game state is switched from the time shortened game state to the non-time shortened game state, the first main game side is held. When there is a hold on the second main game side regardless of the presence or absence of, the symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the second main game symbol is changed in the non-time shortened gaming state. The first decorative symbol uses the same symbol as the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state (even if the symbol of the first main game symbol is varied, the second main game symbol is used. Since the common first decorative symbol is used even for the symbol variation of, for example, when the order of variation is the order of the second main game symbol → the first main game symbol, first, the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is performed. The first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the corresponding first decorative symbol is changed, and the symbol change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol is started from the state of the stop display. Will be). Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach-gase and pseudo-ream-gase) is reserved on the second main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Further, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the order of the change start and the temporary stop of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Here, the same (substantially the same) variation time tendency means a limited frequency state when selecting a variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state. As (a game state or a fluctuation pattern table relating to a fluctuation pattern), one fluctuation pattern table (for example, the fluctuation pattern selection tendency does not differ depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side as shown in FIG. 13, but is shown in FIG. 166. A table in which a variation pattern selection state that does not depend on the number of holdings, such as the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B, is applied to the non-time shortened gaming state, and the limited frequency state A or the limited frequency state B) shown in FIG. It is shown that it is used regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order of the change start is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column start the symbol change at the same time (substantially at the same time), and the order of temporary stop is also the left column and the middle. The first decorative symbols in the columns and the right column are configured to temporarily stop at the same time (substantially at the same time). By configuring in this way, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second main game side after the end of the non-time shortened gaming state or the time shortened gaming state is originally configured to be immediately digested. Since it is possible to return to the game on the side of the first main game, which is the main game in the non-time reduction game state, which is the game nature of the game, the mode of the first decorative symbol is simple, but the non-time reduction game state is supported. By performing each minimum action, it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably shift to the first main game.

Further, a fixed position action (a mode of producing a chance look-ahead effect) may be executed when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side is temporarily stopped in the non-time shortened gaming state, and is configured as such. In that case, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the non-time shortened game state, or when the game state is switched from the time shortened game state to the non-time shortened game state, the first main game side is held. When there is a hold on the second main game side regardless of the presence or absence of, the symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the second main game symbol is changed in the non-time shortened gaming state. The first decorative symbol uses the same symbol as the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state (even if the symbol of the first main game symbol is varied, the second main game symbol is used. Since the common first decorative symbol is used even for the symbol variation of, for example, when the order of variation is the order of the second main game symbol → the first main game symbol, first, the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is performed. The first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the corresponding first decorative symbol is changed, and the symbol change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol is started from the state of the stop display. Will be). Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach-gase and pseudo-ream-gase) is reserved on the second main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the order of the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column and the order of the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) are the same (the order of the effect of the chance look-ahead effect). Approximately the same). Here, the same (substantially the same) variation time tendency means a limited frequency state when selecting a variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state. As (a game state or a fluctuation pattern table relating to a fluctuation pattern), one fluctuation pattern table (for example, the fluctuation pattern selection tendency does not differ depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side as shown in FIG. 13, but is shown in FIG. 166. A table in which a variation pattern selection state that does not depend on the number of holdings, such as the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B, is applied to the non-time shortened gaming state, and the limited frequency state A or the limited frequency state B) shown in FIG. It is shown that it is used regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. In addition, the order of the change start is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column start the symbol change at the same time (almost at the same time), and the fixed position action (directing the chance look-ahead effect). The order of the aspect) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time). By configuring in this way, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second main game side after the end of the non-time shortened gaming state or the time shortened gaming state is originally configured to be immediately digested. Since it is possible to return to the game on the side of the first main game, which is the main game in the non-time reduction game state, which is the game nature of the game, the mode of the first decorative symbol is simple, but the non-time reduction game state is supported. By performing each minimum action, it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably shift to the first main game.

Further, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the non-time shortened game state, the symbol change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol is performed in the non-time shortened game state. The first decorative pattern is used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach-gase and pseudo-ream-gase) is reserved on the first main game side. As shown in FIG. 12, the fluctuation time tendency is configured to be changed according to the number. The order in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column start to change is the same (substantially the same) according to the number of reservations on the first main game side, but the order of temporary stop is the first. It is configured to differ depending on the number of holdings on the main game side. Here, the change in the variation time tendency means that the normal state (normal variation) when selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state. As the pattern table), it is shown that the normal states 1 to 4 (normal fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 4) according to the number of reservations on the first main game side are used. In addition, the order of the change start is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column start the symbol change at the same time (substantially at the same time), and the order of temporary stop has a large number of reservations. In the case (hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2), the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are temporarily stopped at the same time (almost at the same time), and when there are few cases (hold 2 → 1, hold 1 →). In 0), the first decorative symbols in the left column, the right column, and the middle column are configured to be in the order of temporary stop.

Further, the action at the start of the change may be executed at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol, and the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) may be executed at the time of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol. In the non-time reduction game state, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the time is shortened to the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. The first decorative symbol in the game state is used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach-gase and pseudo-ream-gase) is reserved on the first main game side. As shown in FIG. 12, the fluctuation time tendency is configured to be changed according to the number. It should be noted that the order of the actions at the start of the change of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column is the same (substantially the same) according to the number of reservations on the first main game side, but the fixed position action (chance eye). The order of the effect mode of the look-ahead effect) is configured to be different depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side. Here, the change in the variation time tendency means that the normal state (normal variation) when selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state. As the pattern table), it is shown that the normal states 1 to 4 (normal fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 4) according to the number of reservations on the first main game side are used. In addition, the order of the actions at the start of the change is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column start the symbol change at the same time (almost at the same time), and the fixed position action (chance look-ahead effect) When the number of holds is large (hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2), the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time). When the number is small (hold 2 → 1, hold 1 → 0), the first decorative symbols in the left column, the right column, and the middle column are configured to be in the order of performing the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect). ing.

In addition, in the non-time shortened game state, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss, etc.) If a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 and the hold on the first main game side is accumulated up to the upper limit (“4”) during (non-reach pattern fluctuation such as pseudo-reach), the first main game start port A10. 1 The order of starting the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the main game symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneously (substantially simultaneous). On the other hand, the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol is the temporary stop in the order in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are different (for example, the temporary stop in the order of the left column, the right column, and the middle column). It is configured to do. Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold of the first main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss or pseudo sequence). In the non-reach pattern variation such as Gase)}, the order of the change start of the first decorative symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous), and the first decorative symbol. The order of temporary stop of is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous). However, in the non-time shortened game state, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss, etc.) When a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 and only "1" is reserved on the first main game side during a non-reach pattern change such as a pseudo-continuous game), the first main game The order of the change start of the first decorative symbol in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous), while the other The order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol is such that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are temporarily stopped in a different order (for example, temporary stop in the order of left column, right column, and middle column). It is configured. Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss or pseudo sequence). In the non-reach pattern variation such as Gase)}, the order of the change start of the first decorative symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are simultaneous (almost simultaneously), while the first decorative symbol. The order of temporary stop is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are temporarily stopped in a different order (for example, temporary stop in the order of left column, right column, and middle column). ..

Further, the action at the start of the change may be executed at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol, and the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) may be executed at the time of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol. In the non-time shortened gaming state, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss). , When a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 and the hold on the first main game side is accumulated up to the upper limit (“4”) during non-reach pattern fluctuations such as reach and pseudo-reach. , The order of the actions at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol in the symbol change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneously ( On the other hand, the order of the fixed-position actions of the first decorative symbol (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the fixed-position action (the order in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are different). It is configured to execute (for example, execute in the order of the left column, the right column, and the middle column) (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect). Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold of the first main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss or pseudo sequence). In the non-reach pattern variation such as Gase)}, the order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous), and the first. The order of the fixed-position actions of the decorative symbols (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous). However, in the non-time shortened game state, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss, etc.) When a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 and only "1" is reserved on the first main game side during a non-reach pattern change such as a pseudo-continuous game), the first main game The order of the actions at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol in the symbol change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous). On the other hand, the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the fixed position action (the effect of the chance look-ahead effect) in the order in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are different. Aspects) are configured to be executed (eg, in the order of left column, right column, middle column). Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss or pseudo sequence). The order of the actions at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol in (non-reach symbol variation such as Gase)} is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous), while the first. As for the order of the fixed position action of the decorative symbol (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect), the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is executed in the order in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are different. (For example, it is configured to execute in the order of the left column, the right column, and the middle column).

In addition, in the non-time shortened game state, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss, etc.) If a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 and the hold on the second main game side is accumulated up to the upper limit (“4”) during a non-reach pattern change such as a pseudo-reach. 1 The order of starting the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the main game symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneously (substantially simultaneous). On the other hand, the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol is the temporary stop in the order in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are different (for example, the temporary stop in the order of the left column, the right column, and the middle column). It is configured to do. Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in which the hold of the second main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss or pseudo sequence). In the non-reach pattern variation such as Gase)}, the order of the change start of the first decorative symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous), and the first decorative symbol. The order of temporary stop of is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous). In addition, in the non-time shortened game state, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss, etc.) When a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 and only "1" is reserved on the second main game side during a non-reach pattern change such as a pseudo-continuous game), the first main game The order of the change start of the first decorative symbol in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous), while the other The order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol is such that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are temporarily stopped in a different order (for example, temporary stop in the order of left column, right column, and middle column). It is configured. Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in which the hold on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss or pseudo sequence). In the non-reach pattern variation such as Gase)}, the order of the change start of the first decorative symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous), and the first decorative symbol. The order of temporary stop of is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous).

In addition, the action at the start of the change when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side starts to change in the non-time shortened gaming state, and the fixed position action (chance) when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side is temporarily stopped. The effect mode of the look-ahead effect) may be executed, and in such a configuration, the symbol of the first main game symbol whose hold on the first main game side is 1 → 0 in the non-time shortened game state. During the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the variation (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach gap and pseudo-continuous gap), the game ball enters the second main game start opening B10. When the hold on the second main game side is accumulated up to the upper limit (“4”), the order of actions at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol in the symbol change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol. The first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are simultaneous (almost simultaneously), while the order of the fixed position actions of the first decorative symbols (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the left column. The first decorative symbols in the middle column and the right column are configured to execute the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) in a different order (for example, the execution in the order of the left column, the right column, and the middle column). There is. Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in which the hold of the second main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss or pseudo sequence). In the non-reach pattern variation such as Gase)}, the order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous), and the first. The order of the fixed-position actions of the decorative symbols (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous). In addition, in the non-time shortened game state, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in which the hold on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss, etc.) When a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 and only "1" is reserved on the second main game side during a non-reach pattern change such as a pseudo-continuous game), the first main game The order of the actions at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol in the symbol change of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous). On the other hand, the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the fixed position action (the effect of the chance look-ahead effect) in the order in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are different. Aspects) are configured to be executed (eg, in the order of left column, right column, middle column). Then, the next symbol variation {the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in which the hold on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 (normal symbol variation of loss, reach loss or pseudo sequence). In the non-reach pattern variation such as Gase)}, the order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneous), and the first. The order of the fixed-position actions of the decorative symbols (the mode of producing the chance look-ahead effect) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneously (substantially simultaneous).

In addition, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the time-reduced game state, or when the game state is switched from the non-time-reduced game state to the time-reduced game state, the second main game side is put on hold. When the hold on the first main game side exists in the non-existing state, the symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol is changed, but the first decorative symbol is in the time-reduced gaming state. The same symbol as the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in is used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach-gase and pseudo-ream-gase) is reserved on the first main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Further, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of the change start and the temporary stop of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Here, the same (substantially the same) variation time tendency means a normal state (normal) when selecting a variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the time-shortened gaming state. As the variation pattern table), it is shown that one variation pattern table (for example, the normal variation pattern table in the normal state shown in FIG. 166) is used regardless of the number of reservations. In addition, the order of the fluctuation start is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column start the symbol variation at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side. The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time).

In addition, when the first decorative symbol on the first main game side starts to change in the time-reduced game state, the action at the start of the change, and when the first decorative symbol on the first main game side is temporarily stopped, the fixed position action (chance eye). The effect mode of the look-ahead effect) may be executed, and in such a configuration, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the time-reduced game state, or the time from the non-time-reduced game state. Corresponds to the symbol change of the first main game symbol when the hold of the first main game side exists while the hold of the second main game side does not exist when the game state is switched to the shortened game state. The symbol of the first decorative symbol is changed, but the first decorative symbol uses the same symbol as the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach-gase and pseudo-ream-gase) is reserved on the first main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of the actions at the start of the change of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column and the order of the fixed position actions (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) are It is configured to be the same (substantially the same). Here, the same (substantially the same) variation time tendency means a normal state (normal) when selecting a variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the time-shortened gaming state. As the variation pattern table), it is shown that one variation pattern table (for example, the normal variation pattern table in the normal state shown in FIG. 166) is used regardless of the number of reservations. The order of actions at the start of fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side. The order of the fixed-position actions (the mode of effect of the chance look-ahead effect) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time).

Further, pattern 1 which is one of the variation mode patterns of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start opening B10 in the time-reduced game state will be described. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach gap and pseudo-continuous gap) is reserved on the second main game side. It is configured so that the fluctuation time tendency is changed according to the number, but the order of the fluctuation start and the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column is the second main game side. It is configured to be the same (almost the same) regardless of the number of reservations. Here, the change in the variation time tendency means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern) when selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-shortened game state. As the table), it is shown that the limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variable pattern tables A1 to A4) according to the number of holds and the limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variable pattern tables B1 to B4) according to the number of holds are used. The order of starting the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column start the symbol variation at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time).

In addition, the action at the start of the change when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side starts to change in the time-reduced game state, and the fixed position action (chance eye) when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side is temporarily stopped. The effect mode of the look-ahead effect) may be executed, and in such a configuration, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time-reduced game state. Pattern 1, which is one of the patterns, will be described. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach gap and pseudo-continuous gap) is reserved on the second main game side. It is configured so that the fluctuation time tendency is changed according to the number, but the order of actions at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, middle column, and right column and the fixed position action (chance look-ahead effect) The order of the effect mode) is configured to be the same (substantially the same) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the change in the variation time tendency means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern) when selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-shortened game state. As the table), it is shown that the limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variable pattern tables A1 to A4) according to the number of holds and the limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variable pattern tables B1 to B4) according to the number of holds are used. The order of the actions at the start of the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. , The order of the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time).

Further, pattern 2 (a pattern different from pattern 1), which is one of the variation mode patterns of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start opening B10 in the time-reduced game state, will be described. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach gap and pseudo-continuous gap) is reserved on the second main game side. It is configured so that the fluctuation time tendency is changed according to the number, but the order of the fluctuation start of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column is regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. However, they are configured to be the same (substantially the same). The order of temporary stops is configured to differ depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the change in the variation time tendency means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern) when selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time shortening game state. As the table), it is shown that the limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variable pattern tables A1 to A4) according to the number of holds and the limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variable pattern tables B1 to B4) according to the number of holds are used. In addition, the order of the fluctuation start is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column start the symbol variation at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. As for the order of temporary stop, when the number of holds is large (hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2), the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are temporarily stopped at the same time (almost at the same time), and the number is small. In the case (hold 2 → 1, hold 1 → 0), the order is configured to be the left column, the right column, and the middle column.

In addition, the action at the start of the change when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side starts to change in the time-reduced gaming state, and the fixed position action (chance eye) when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side is temporarily stopped. The effect mode of the look-ahead effect) may be executed, and in such a configuration, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time-reduced game state. Pattern 2 (a pattern different from pattern 1), which is one of the patterns, will be described. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach gap and pseudo-continuous gap) is reserved on the second main game side. It is configured so that the fluctuation time tendency is changed according to the number, but the order of the action at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column is the number of reservations on the second main game side. Regardless of, they are configured to be the same (substantially the same). It should be noted that the order of the fixed position actions (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is configured to be different according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the change in the variation time tendency means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern) when selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time shortening game state. As the table), it is shown that the limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variable pattern tables A1 to A4) according to the number of holds and the limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variable pattern tables B1 to B4) according to the number of holds are used. In addition, the order of the actions at the start of fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. , The order of the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is that when the number of holds is large (hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2), the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are simultaneously placed (hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2). It is configured to execute in the order of the left column, the right column, and the middle column when the number is small (hold 2 → 1, hold 1 → 0).

Further, a pattern 3 (a pattern different from the pattern 1 and the pattern 2), which is one of the variation mode patterns of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time-reduced game state, will be described. do. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach-gase and pseudo-ream-gase) is reserved on the second main game side. It is configured so that the fluctuation time tendency is changed according to the number, but the order of temporary stops is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order in which the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column start to change is configured to be different depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the change in the variation time tendency means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern) when selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time shortening game state. As the table), it is shown that the limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variable pattern tables A1 to A4) according to the number of holds and the limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variable pattern tables B1 to B4) according to the number of holds are used. The order of the change start of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column is, for example, in the case of a large number of holds (hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2), the order of the left column, middle column, and right column. The first decorative symbol is configured to start changing at the same time (substantially at the same time), and when the number is small (hold 2 → 1, hold 1 → 0), the order is set to the left column, the middle column, and the right column. However, this explanation is an example, and it may be configured so that the order of the fluctuation start is different according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order of temporary stop is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. Any one of these patterns (patterns 1 to 3) is adopted as the variation mode pattern of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start opening B10 in the time-reduced game state.

In addition, the action at the start of the change when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side starts to change in the time-reduced gaming state, and the fixed position action (chance eye) when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side is temporarily stopped. The effect mode of the look-ahead effect) may be executed, and in such a configuration, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time-reduced game state. Pattern 3 (a pattern different from both pattern 1 and pattern 2), which is one of the patterns, will be described. The symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state uses the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (normal symbol variation of loss, non-reach symbol variation such as reach-gase and pseudo-ream-gase) is reserved on the second main game side. It is configured so that the fluctuation time tendency is changed according to the number, but the order of the fixed position actions (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the same regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side (omitted). Same). It should be noted that the order of the actions at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column is configured to be different according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the change in the variation time tendency means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern) when selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time shortening game state. As the table), it is shown that the limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variable pattern tables A1 to A4) according to the number of holds and the limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variable pattern tables B1 to B4) according to the number of holds are used. The order of the actions at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol in the left column, the middle column, and the right column is, for example, the left column, the middle column, and the right when the number of holds is large (hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2). The first decorative symbols in the column are configured to be executed at the same time (substantially at the same time), and when the number is small (hold 2 → 1, hold 1 → 1), the order is set to the left column, the middle column, and the right column. However, this explanation is an example, and it may be configured so that the order of the actions at the start of fluctuation is different according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. In addition, the order of the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneously (substantially simultaneous) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. It is configured to run. Any one of these patterns (patterns 1 to 3) is adopted as the variation mode pattern of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start opening B10 in the time-reduced game state.

The first decorative pattern is configured as follows.
(1) It is preferable that the first decorative symbol is in a non-transparent state and does not perform any action during the variable fixed time. The display mode of the first decorative symbol during the variable fixed time is a mode in which the first element and the second element are displayed (however, in the time-reduced gaming state, only the second element may be displayed). Further, the third element may be attached to the first decorative pattern. Further, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is only the first element or the second element depending on the gaming state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy high base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state). May be displayed. Further, the mode of each element may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, in the first decorative pattern of "7", an image of a lion facing the front in a low probability low base state (No. 1). 1 element), but in other gaming states it is an image of a lion facing sideways (1st element), and in a low probability low base state it is an image of the number "7" (2nd element), but other In the game state of, the image of the Chinese character "seven" (second element) is used, and in the low accuracy low base state, the image of "7" is red (third element), but in other game states, the image is "7". The image is gold (third element), or the image of the lion is yellow (third element) in the low accuracy low base state, but the image of the lion is gold (third element) in other gaming states. May be good. As in the game state, the mode of each element may be configured to be different depending on the stage or mode.
(2) It is preferable that the first decorative symbol is in a non-transparent state and does not perform any action during the deceleration fluctuation. It is preferable that the display mode of the first decorative symbol during the deceleration fluctuation is the same as the display mode of the first decorative symbol during the variable fixed time.

The second decorative pattern is configured as follows.
(1) For the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to perform the action at the start of fluctuation.
(2) As for the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to perform the tempai action during the change of the main game symbol and the first decorative symbol.
(3) Since the second decorative symbol can always be displayed, it is preferable that the second decorative symbol does not pass through during the fluctuation of the main game symbol and the first decorative symbol.
(4) As shown in FIG. 178, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the second decorative symbol in the left column and the right column and the second decorative symbol in the middle column do not overlap, and the second decorative symbol in the left column is formed. It is preferable that the second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the right column are configured so as not to overlap.
(5) Regarding the second decorative symbol, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side (or regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side), the order of fluctuation start and stop is the same (substantially the same). It is preferable that it is configured in.
(6) Regarding the second decorative symbol, it is preferable that the order of the fluctuation start and the order of the stop are the same (substantially the same) regardless of the gaming state (non-time shortening gaming state, time shortening gaming state). ..
(7) Regarding the second decorative symbol, regardless of whether the symbol is changed on the first main game side or the second main game side, regardless of the number of holdings, regardless of the presence or absence of the time-reduced gaming state. , It is preferable that the order of fluctuation start and the order of stop are the same (substantially the same).
(8) As for the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to perform a shaking action during the fluctuation of the main game symbol and the first decorative symbol.
(9) Regarding the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to perform a shaking action during the fluctuation standby state.
(10) Regarding the second decorative symbol, the decoration that is always displayed regardless of whether the main game symbol and the first decorative symbol are changing or in the variable standby state (including the running of the waiting movie). It is a design.
(11) Regarding the second decorative symbol, only the second element is displayed regardless of the game state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy high base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state). It is a mode to be displayed, and it is preferable that the shape (for example, the outline, color, and type (Roman numeral or Chinese numeral) of each number) is the same regardless of the gaming state. As in the game state, only the second element is displayed regardless of the stage or mode, and the shape (for example, the outline, color, type (Roman numeral or Chinese numeral) of each number) is also the stage or mode. It may be configured to be the same regardless of the above.

The shaking action is configured as follows.
(1) In the shaking action (first shaking motion) of the first decorative symbol during symbol change (including temporary stop), both the first element and the second element are shaking, but the state of fixed stop. The shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the variable standby state (the first second shaking action in the variable standby state, the second second shaking action in the variable standby state. Note that 2 in the variable standby state. The second swaying motion is the second swaying motion executed after the display of the standby demo screen is finished, but it may also be called the third swaying motion.) In the swaying motion, only the first element is swaying, and the first one. The two elements are configured so that they do not shake. That is, the mode of the swaying action during the symbol change and the swaying action during the change waiting state are different. However, regarding the shaking action of the first element, the shaking action of the first element of the first decorative symbol during the symbol change (including temporary stop) and the shake of the first element of the first decorative symbol in the change standby state. It is preferable that the action is the same. By applying the shaking action of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation (including temporary stop) even during the variable standby state in which the first decorative symbol is in the fixed stop, it is dull even in the variable standby state. It is possible to avoid making the screen (the screen where the first decorative pattern is only stopped), it is possible to give movement on the LCD screen, and only the second element (number) is fixed without performing a shaking action. It is possible to provide an effect that does not cause the player to misunderstand that the design is changing.
(2) The image object of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element) and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state (the image object of the first element). Since the image object and the image object of the second element) are different, the mode of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state and the mode of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state are different. It is configured as follows.
(3) Regarding the execution time of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol during the symbol change, not only the execution time of the reach effect but also the first column (for example, the left column) and the second column (for example, the right column). 1 Includes the time of shaking action from the temporary stop of each decorative symbol to the final stop.
(4) In the shaking action, an action of performing one action in a predetermined time (for example, an action of 0.5 seconds in which the first decorative symbol is moved upward and then moved downward) is executed multiple times. It is configured to display (continuous display, loop display). On the other hand, regarding the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action, the tempai action, and the decision action, one action is performed once in a predetermined time (for example, an action of 1.0 second in which the first decorative symbol is gradually enlarged). It is only executed once and displayed (single-shot display, non-loop display). The predetermined time of the shaking action, the predetermined time of the fluctuation start action, the predetermined time of the fixed position action, the predetermined time of the tempai action, and the predetermined time of the determined action may be the same time or different times. You may.
(5) Regarding the shaking action during the variable standby state, the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is fixedly stopped due to a lost symbol (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed), it is determined. After a lapse of time (for example, 20 seconds), the first shaking action (second shaking operation) in the fluctuation standby state is configured to be executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and further, the first When a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) elapses from the fixed stop of the main game symbol or the second main game symbol (after the lapse of the variable fixed time, if there is a variable fixed time), 2 in the variable standby state. The second swaying action (second swaying motion. The second swaying action in this variable standby state is the second swaying motion executed after the display of the standby demo screen is finished, but the third swaying motion. It is configured to execute an operation for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). As described above, the swaying action in the fluctuation standby state is configured to be able to execute the swaying action at a plurality of timings as in the swaying action during the fluctuation. At the start of the first shaking action in the variable standby state, the stage BGM is output (continuous output after the fixed stop), but after executing the waiting movie, it is in the variable standby state. The stage BGM is not output at the start of the second shaking action and during the shaking action in.
(6) The shaking action of the first decorative symbol during the symbol change (including temporary stop) in the non-time shortened game state, and the first decorative symbol during the symbol change (including temporary stop) in the time shortened game state. The mode is different from the shaking action. That is, the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element) and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state (the image of the first element). Since the object and the image object of the second element) are different, the mode of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol during the symbol change in the non-time reduction game state (including the temporary stop) and the symbol change in the time reduction game state are in progress. It is configured to be different from the mode of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol (including during temporary stop).
(7) The mode of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the variable waiting state of the non-time shortened gaming state and the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the variable waiting state of the time shortened gaming state are different. That is, the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element) and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state (the image of the first element). Since the object and the image object of the second element) are different, the mode of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the variable standby state of the non-time shortened gaming state and the first decorative symbol in the variable standby state of the time shortened gaming state. It is configured to be different from the mode of the shaking action of.
(8) When the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state is composed of only the second element (number), it is preferable not to perform the shaking action in the variable standby state of the time-reduced gaming state. That is, when the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced gaming state is composed of only the second element (number), the shaking action (first shaking motion) of the first decorative symbol during the symbol change (including temporary stop) is Executes, but the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the variable standby state, which is the fixed stop state (the first second shaking operation in the variable standby state, and the second second shaking operation in the variable standby state. The second shaking operation in the variable standby state is the second shaking operation executed after the display of the standby demo screen is finished, but it may also be called the third shaking operation). Is preferable.

In addition, the fixed position action is configured as follows.
(1) In the super reach effect of loss, when the first decorative symbol of loss is temporarily stopped in the third row (for example, the middle row) as the final row, the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol of the third row is performed. It is preferable not to do this. With this configuration, if it is a normal symbol fluctuation of loss or a normal reach fluctuation of loss, it is shown that the first decorative symbol in the middle row is temporarily stopped by performing a fixed position action, while a super reach effect of loss is produced. As for, it is redundant to return to the normal screen and perform a fixed position action from the super reach effect of the loss, so by omitting the action, the seamless movement of the first decorative pattern is made according to the transit effect at the time of the loss. realizable. On the other hand, when temporarily stopping the first decorative symbol of loss in the third row (for example, the middle row) as the final row in the normal reach, it is preferable to perform the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the third row. , It is not necessary to perform the fixed position action in the third column. With this configuration, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the reach effect and perform a fixed position action for the normal reach effect of the loss as well as the super reach effect. It is possible to realize the seamless movement of the first decorative pattern according to the transit effect of. Here, in the case of a loss in which reach is not established (for example, when stopping at a random number such as "247" or "183"), it is preferable to perform the fixed position action in the third row. In addition, the tempai with the first decorative symbol of "7" has a higher expectation of hitting than the first decorative symbol of other numbers, and is configured so that there is no loss in normal reach, or it does not become normal reach and is always super. When the first decorative symbol is "7" and becomes a tempai because it is configured to develop into a reach effect (or it is easier to develop into a super reach effect than the first decorative symbol of other numbers is tempai). , Do not perform a positional action on the first decorative symbol in the third column (eg, middle row) as the last column, or the third as the final column than the first decorative symbol with other numbers is tempted. It is preferable to reduce the probability of performing the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the row (for example, the middle row), and in the tempai of the first decorative symbol with other numbers, the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the third row. Or it is preferable to increase the probability of performing the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the third row (eg, middle row) as the final row rather than the "7" tempaiing. ..

The tempai action is configured as follows.
(1) The tempai action of the first decorative symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol in the first column (for example, the left column) and the second column (for example, the right column), but is performed in the third column (for example, the final column). , Middle row) 1st decorative pattern is not used. By configuring in this way, by preparing an action that may be performed only by the first decorative symbol in the left column and the right column, which is the first decorative symbol other than the last column of the most attention, the final Notable tempai can be visually notified in the process until the first decorative symbol in the row is stopped. On the other hand, actions other than the tempai action of the first decorative symbol are performed in the first decorative symbol in the first column (for example, the left column) and the second column (for example, the right column), and further, the third as the final column. It is also possible to execute the first decorative symbol in a row (for example, a middle row).
(2) It is configured to perform the same tempai action regardless of whether the non-tempai is pseudo-ream (non-reach pseudo-ream) or the tempai is pseudo-ream (pseudo-reach after reach). Specifically, in FIG. 168, a case where the tempai action 2 of (i2) is performed without performing the post-reach pseudo-ream after performing the non-reach pseudo-ream, and a case where the non-reach pseudo-ream is performed and the post-reach pseudo-ream is performed. It means that the tempai action 2 is the same (common) as in the case where the tempai action 2 of (i2) is performed after the execution. Further, in FIG. 168, there are a case where the tempai action 2 of (i2) is performed without performing the post-reach pseudo-ream after performing the non-reach pseudo-ream, and a case where the post-reach pseudo-ream is performed without performing the non-reach pseudo-ream. It may be said that the mode of the tempai action 2 and the mode of the tempai action 1 are the same as in the case of performing the tempai action 1 of (u). It should be noted that even if a specific advance notice effect (for example, a advance notice effect of red dialogue in the dialogue advance notice) that is determined to reach is generated in the pseudo change in the symbol variation of the pseudo-ream, the pseudo advance notice effect that the specific advance notice effect occurs. When it fluctuates, it may become non-tempai, or it may become tempai, and when it becomes non-tempai, it is configured to become tempai in the subsequent pseudo-variation.

The decision action is configured as follows.
(1) In a specific symbol variation (for example, super reach variation) that is a single symbol variation and is a big hit, the first decorative symbol and the second column (for example, "7" in the left column) of the first column (for example, "7" in the left column). , The first decorative symbol in the right column "7") becomes the same symbol, and after performing the tempai action, the reach effect is performed, and then the super reach effect, which is the post-reach development effect, is executed. There is. Then, in the super reach effect, the first decorative symbol in the third row (for example, "7" in the middle row) temporarily stops at the jackpot symbol, and the success pattern of displaying the jackpot symbol combination "777" and the first. The first decorative symbol in the third row (for example, "8" in the middle row) temporarily stops at the lost symbol, displays the lost symbol combination "787", and then re-variates to form a jackpot symbol combination. It is equipped with a resurrection pattern that displays "777", and whether or not to execute a decision action is determined according to whether the jackpot is a big hit via a success pattern or a jackpot via a resurrection pattern. It has become like. Further, depending on whether the jackpot is achieved via the success pattern or the resurrection pattern, the mode of the decision action (for example, the decision action A or the decision action B) is selected and executed. ) May be configured differently. Further, in the case of a big hit via the resurrection pattern, the decision action may not be executed, or the resurrection-only decision action different from the normal decision action may be executed.

In the normal symbol change of the loss of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol in the non-time reduction game state, the change start action, the fixed position action, and the shaking action are configured to be performed. In this non-time shortened gaming state, it depends on the number of holdings on the first main game side (the tendency of variation selection differs depending on the number of holdings on the first main game side). It is preferable to be configured to perform an action, a fixed position action, and a shaking action. In addition, in the normal symbol change of the loss of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state, at least one of the action at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol and the fixed position action. On the other hand, the shaking action of the first decorative symbol is configured to be performed, and in this time-reduced gaming state, it depends on the number of holdings on the second main game side (the number of holdings on the second main game side). It is preferable that the normal symbol fluctuation of the loss is configured so that at least one of the movement start action and the fixed position action is not performed, while the shaking action is performed. Is. For example, if the first main game symbol in the non-time shortened game state executes a normal symbol change of loss (particularly, hold 1 → 0), the change start action and the fixed position action are performed, but the time is shortened. If the second main game symbol in the game state is a normal symbol change of loss (particularly, hold 1 → 0), at least one of the change start action and the fixed position action may not be performed.

In the normal symbol change of the loss of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol change of the first main game symbol in the non-time reduction game state, the change start action, the fixed position action, and the shaking action are configured to be performed. In this non-time shortened gaming state, it depends on the number of holdings on the first main game side (the tendency of variation selection differs depending on the number of holdings on the first main game side). It is preferable to be configured to perform an action, a fixed position action, and a shaking action. Further, in the normal symbol variation of the loss of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time shortened gaming state, the symbol variation of the first main game symbol corresponding to the non-time shortened gaming state is supported. Compared to the normal symbol variation of 1 decorative symbol loss, the probability of executing at least one of the first decorative symbol variation start action and the fixed position action is configured to be lower, while the first decorative symbol shaking action is performed. In this time-reduced gaming state, it depends on the number of holdings on the second main game side (the variation selection tendency differs depending on the number of holdings on the second main game side). Therefore, it is preferable to configure the execution probability of at least one of the fluctuation start action and the fixed position action to be low, while the shaking action is configured to be performed. For example, if the first main game symbol in the non-time shortened game state executes a normal symbol change of loss (particularly, hold 1 → 0), the change start action and the fixed position action are performed, but the time is shortened. If the second main game symbol in the game state is a normal symbol variation of loss (particularly, hold 1 → 0), the execution probability of at least one of the variation start action and the fixed position action is configured to be low (for example, a pattern). 1: Change start action = 50%, fixed position action = 100%, pattern 2: change start action = 100%, fixed position action = 80%).

In the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state, at least one of the action at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol, the fixed position action, the tempai action, and the decision action. Is not performed, while the shaking action of the first decorative pattern is configured to be performed. Further, in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time shortened gaming state, the symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortened gaming state. Compared to the fluctuation, the execution probability of at least one of the fluctuation start action, the fixed position action, the tempai action, and the decision action of the first decorative symbol is set to be lower, while the shaking action of the first decorative symbol is configured to be performed. Has been done.

The variable fixed time and the execution time of each action are configured as follows.
(1) Predetermined time until the shaking action in the variable standby state is executed rather than the variable fixed time of the first decorative symbol (for example, 500 ms) {The first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a lost symbol (variable fixed time) In some cases, the predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds)} after the lapse of the variable fixed time is set longer. By setting in this way, the time for showing the definite stop display of the first decorative symbol is secured as the variable fixed time, and the shaking action of the first decorative symbol during the symbol change (including the temporary stop) is secured. Is also applied to the variable standby state in which the first decorative symbol is in the fixed stop state, so that the screen is dull even in the game standby state after the lapse of the variable fixed time (only the first decorative symbol is stopped). When configured to avoid (screen on the LCD screen), the next fluctuation starts by configuring to start the shaking action after at least a fixed time of fluctuation. It is possible to prevent the person from being mistaken for having done so.
(2) In a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation, normal symbol variation of hold 1 → 0 loss, etc.), which is one symbol variation, the execution time of one action other than the shaking action to be executed is It is preferably configured to be shorter than the execution time of the shaking action.
(3) In a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation, normal symbol variation of hold 1 → 0 loss, etc.), which is one symbol variation, the total execution time of each action other than the shaking action is shaking. It is preferably configured to be shorter than the total time of action execution.
(4) In a specific symbol variation that is one symbol variation (for example, reach variation, normal symbol variation of hold 1 → 0 loss, etc.), the execution time of one action other than the shaking action is the variable fixed time. It is preferably configured to be shorter than, but may be configured to be longer than the variable fixed time.
(5) In a specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation, normal symbol variation of hold 1 → 0 loss, etc.), which is one symbol variation, the total execution time of each action other than the shaking action varies. It is preferably configured longer than the fixed time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the BGM (effect sound) is configured to output the stage BGM during the symbol change and the change standby state, and the stage BGM is output during the symbol change and the reach effect. It is configured to output reach BGM. Then, at the start of the first shaking action in the variable waiting state, the stage BGM is output (continuous output after the fixed stop), but the shaking action in the variable waiting state after executing the waiting movie is performed. The stage BGM is not output at the start and during the shaking action. For example, the stage BGM is output at the timing when the first decorative symbol of (a3) in FIGS. 169 and 177 is a lost symbol and is fixedly stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). , (D3) is in the variable standby state after a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the first decorative symbol was lost and stopped (after the variable fixed time, if there is a variable fixed time). The stage BGM is continuously output even at the start of the first shaking action of (d3), but the timing after the shaking action of (d3) is executed {The first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixedly stopped (variable fixed). If there is time, the stage BGM is not output after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the lapse of the variable fixed time. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed from the fixed stop of the lost symbol (after the lapse of the variable fixed time, if there is a variable fixed time), the second (f3) shaking action in the variable standby state is performed. It is configured to be executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), but at that time, the stage BGM is not output. It should be noted that the timing after the shaking action of (d3) is executed {the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixedly stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed), and then a predetermined time (for example, for example). When 30 seconds) has elapsed}, the stage BGM is not output, but if it is configured so that the stage BGM is not output when the standby movie of (e3) is executed. good. Further, the power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed at the timing of executing the standby movie of (e3). In this case, the image object of "power saving" having a higher display priority than the waiting movie is waited for. It is configured so that it is displayed overlaid on the middle movie and the stage BGM is not output. If an error is detected during the variable standby state, an error will occur regardless of whether the first shaking action in the variable standby state is started or the second shaking action in the variable standby state is started. The error sound based on the detection of is output. By applying the shaking action of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation (including temporary stop) even during the variable standby state in which the first decorative symbol is in the fixed stop, it is dull even in the variable standby state. It is possible to avoid making the screen (the screen where the first decorative symbol is only stopped), it is possible to give movement on the LCD screen, and when the shaking action is started for the first time in the variable standby state, the game is played. While continuing the output of the stage BGM to appeal to the machine, the output of the stage BGM is stopped (silenced) to save power when the standby movie is displayed, which is an appropriate production output according to the variable standby state. It can be an embodiment.

The reach voice is configured as follows.
(1) A reach voice is generated when a tempai action occurs.
(2) Even if the tempai action at the time of pseudo-ream after reach and the tempai action after that are the same action, the reach voice may be different. For example, "chance" is output in the tempai action when pseudo-reaming after reach, and "gekiatsu" is output in the subsequent tempai action.
(3) Even if there are a plurality of types of tempai actions and the tempai action at the time of pseudo-repeating after reach and the subsequent tempai action are different, the reach voice may be the same. For example, there are tempai action A and tempai action B, and the reach voice corresponding to tempai action A and tempai action B is only "chance".

Further, as for the waiting movie, as described with reference to FIG. 126, the waiting movie can be displayed regardless of whether it is in the non-time shortened gaming state or the time shortened gaming state, and the display condition (variable standby) thereof. In the state, the first decorative symbol seems to be the same for a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) after the definite stop (after the lapse of the variable fixed time if there is a variable fixed time) due to the lost symbol. It is configured in.

The volume adjustment screen is configured as follows.
(1) The volume adjustment screen is displayed on the player's screen during any of the action at the start of change of the first decorative symbol, the fixed position action, the tempai action, the shaking action (during the change, the state of waiting for the change), and the decision action. It can be displayed by the operation of the cross-shaped button SB-2. In this case, each action and the volume adjustment screen can be displayed simultaneously in the display area SG10 (in other words, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed even when each action is being executed). During the variable fixed time, the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed even if the cross-shaped button SB-2 is operated.
(2) Operate the cross-shaped button SB-2 during any of the action at the start of change of the first decorative symbol, the fixed position action, the tempai action, the shaking action (during the change, the state of waiting for the change), and the decision action. The volume adjustment screen is configured to be displayed in the display area SG10. The displayed volume adjustment screen and the first decorative symbol are displayed in an overlapping manner, and the display priority is set higher on the volume adjustment screen than on the first decorative symbol. However, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate.
(3) When the action of the first decorative symbol is an action during fluctuation, the second decorative symbol is changing but no action is performed, and the action of the first decorative symbol is in the fixed stop state (variable standby state). In the case of a shaking action of an action, the second decorative symbol is in a fixed stop state (variable standby state) and is configured not to perform an action. However, the overlapping relationship between the volume adjustment screen and the first decorative symbol is configured so as not to overlap with at least one or more first decorative symbols (for example, the first decorative symbol in the left column). Further, during the fluctuation, the display time of the volume adjustment screen (time corresponding to one operation of the cross button SB-2, for example, 5 seconds) is the time of the shaking action (execution time of the shaking action of 1 and shaking). The total time of the actions, which is shorter than, for example, the execution time of the shaking action executed from the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the left column to the fixed stop), while the time of other actions (1). It is configured to be longer than the execution time of the action and the total time of the action. However, the display time of the volume adjustment screen can be extended (the timer of the display time is restarted or reset) by operating the cross-shaped button SB-2 again during the display. Therefore, by operating the cross-shaped button SB-2 multiple times while the first decorative symbol in the left column is performing the shaking action while the symbol of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is changing, the shaking action is performed. The volume adjustment screen is configured to be displayed simultaneously for all the time (period) in the middle or from the shaking action to the transition to other actions or super reach.

The light intensity adjustment screen is configured as follows.
(1) The light intensity adjustment screen is displayed on the player's screen during any of the action at the start of change of the first decorative symbol, the fixed position action, the tempai action, the shaking action (during the change, the state of waiting for the change), and the decision action. It can be displayed by the operation of the cross-shaped button SB-2. In this case, each action and the light amount adjustment screen can be displayed simultaneously in the display area SG10 (in other words, the light amount adjustment screen can be displayed even when each action is being executed). During the variable fixed time, the light amount adjustment screen may not be displayed even if the cross-shaped button SB-2 is operated.
(2) Operate the cross-shaped button SB-2 during any of the action at the start of change of the first decorative symbol, the fixed position action, the tempai action, the shaking action (during the change, the state of waiting for the change), and the decision action. The light intensity adjustment screen is configured to be displayed in the display area SG10. The displayed light amount adjustment screen and the first decorative symbol are displayed in an overlapping manner, and the display priority is set higher on the light amount adjustment screen than on the first decorative symbol. However, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate.
(3) When the action of the first decorative symbol is an action during fluctuation, the second decorative symbol is changing but no action is performed, and the action of the first decorative symbol is in the fixed stop state (variable standby state). In the case of a shaking action of an action, the second decorative symbol is in a fixed stop state (variable standby state) and is configured not to perform an action. However, the overlapping relationship between the light amount adjustment screen and the first decorative symbol is configured so as not to overlap with at least one or more first decorative symbols (for example, the first decorative symbol in the left column). Further, during the fluctuation, the display time of the light amount adjustment screen (time corresponding to one operation of the cross button SB-2, for example, 5 seconds) is the shaking action time (1 shaking action execution time, shaking). The total time of the actions, which is shorter than, for example, the execution time of the shaking action executed from the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the left column to the fixed stop), while the time of other actions (1). It is configured to be longer than the execution time of the action and the total time of the action. However, the display time of the light amount adjustment screen can be extended (the timer of the display time is restarted or reset) by operating the cross-shaped button SB-2 again during the display. Therefore, by operating the cross-shaped button SB-2 multiple times while the first decorative symbol in the left column is performing the shaking action while the symbol of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is changing, the shaking action is performed. The light intensity adjustment screen is configured to be displayed simultaneously over the entire time (period) of the inside or from the shaking action to the transition to other actions or super reach. In addition, while the first decorative symbol in the left column is performing a shaking action while the symbol of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is changing, the light amount adjustment screen is performed by one operation of the cross-shaped button SB-2. Is displayed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed by one operation of the cross-shaped button SB-2 while the light amount adjustment screen is displayed, and the light amount is displayed by one operation of the cross-shaped button SB-2 while the volume adjustment screen is displayed. By alternately repeating the display operation of the light amount adjustment screen and the display operation of the volume adjustment screen during the execution of the shaking action so as to display the adjustment screen, the shaking is performed over the entire time (duration) during the shaking action or by shaking. It is configured to display the light amount adjustment screen and the volume adjustment screen at the same time from the action to the other actions and the transition to the super reach (it is configured to display only one of the light amount adjustment screen and the volume adjustment screen). In that case, the display of the light amount adjustment screen and the display of the volume adjustment screen are repeatedly switched over the entire time (period) during the shaking action or during the transition from the shaking action to other actions or super reach).

In addition, the notice production is configured as follows.
(1) The ratio of the advance notice effect when the first decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed is higher than the ratio of the advance notice effect when the deceleration change of the first decorative symbol or immediately before the temporary stop. Further, the number of advance notice effects that can be executed when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed in one symbol change is configured to be larger than the number of advance notice effects that can be executed when the deceleration change of the first decorative symbol or immediately before the temporary stop. .. Further, the number of candidates for the advance notice effect that can be generated when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed in one symbol change is larger than the number of candidates for the advance notice effect that can occur when the deceleration change of the first decorative symbol or immediately before the temporary stop. It is configured. When the first decorative symbol is fluctuating at high speed, it is in a transparent state and no action is executed. Therefore, if the notice effect is executed at the time of high speed change, the player can easily perform the notice effect. While it is visible, no action is executed even when the deceleration of the first decorative symbol fluctuates, but since the first decorative symbol is in a non-transparent state, even if the advance notice effect is executed in this state, , It is difficult for the player to see. Immediately before the temporary stop, the fixed position action is executed, so that even if the advance notice effect is executed in this state, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the action.

Further, the sub-control unit uses the image data of the image object generated when displaying the second element of the first decorative symbol as the data when displaying the second element of the second decorative symbol. For example, the sub-control unit (particularly, the sub-sub control unit SS) has a frame buffer in which image data of an image object to be displayed in the decorative symbol display area SG11 is stored, and an image control for displaying and controlling image data stored in the frame buffer. A means (VDP) and a scaling means for enlarging or reducing the image data stored in the frame buffer are provided, and the scaling means displays the image data of the image object stored when displaying the second element of the first decorative symbol. The image control means is configured to perform the reduction processing and display the image data processed by the scaling means as the second element of the second decorative symbol. By using the image data in this way, it is possible to efficiently generate an image object.

As a supplement, in the sixth embodiment, the second decorative symbol is always displayed during the variable display, and the fixed stop is always shown. However, as described above, the first decorative symbol is visually recognized as the second decorative symbol. It may be configured to be displayed when it is impossible or difficult to see, and in this case, the second decorative symbol does not always stop.

For each action (change start action, fixed position action, shaking action, tempai action, decision action), the action mode may be different depending on whether it is a time-shortened gaming state or a non-time-shortening gaming state. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the action depending on whether the game is in the time-reduced gaming state or the non-time-saving gaming state. Further, for each action (action at the start of fluctuation, fixed position action, shaking action, tempai action, decision action), the action mode may be different depending on whether it is the production stage A or the production stage B. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the action depending on whether it is the effect stage A or the effect stage B. In addition, for each action (change start action, fixed position action, shaking action, tempai action, decision action), even if the action mode is different depending on whether it is a normal background or a reach background (super reach background). good. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the action depending on whether it is a normal background or a reach background (super reach background).

We have explained that the tempai is temporarily stopped in the order of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column, but the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column May be temporarily stopped at the same time and tempted. In this case, in the first (for example, the first) pseudo-variation, the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column are temporarily stopped in this order, tempaied, and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle column. Then, the next (for example, the second) pseudo-variation is started. Then, in the next pseudo-variation, the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column are temporarily stopped and tempered at the same time, and the reach effect is executed as it is, or the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is configured. When the first decorative symbol in the left column and the first decorative symbol in the right column are temporarily stopped and tempted at the same time, the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the left column and the determination of the first decorative symbol in the right column are performed. Position actions are started at the same time.

When a specific advance notice effect (for example, the next advance notice effect) occurs during the symbol change, the fixed position action and the tempai action may not be performed. For example, when the next notice effect occurs during the symbol change, the super reach effect is executed without becoming a tempai and without becoming a normal reach effect. In this configuration, in order to ensure that the super reach effect is shown to the player, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are arranged so that the player cannot easily understand during the super reach effect. It is designed to be tempered, and it is preferable not to perform the fixed position action and the tempai action. Then, by configuring in this way, it is possible to show the player that the tempai state is in the tempai state at the timing when the player unexpectedly strikes.

Depending on the display mode of the hold display for directing the fluctuation or the first hold display immediately before digestion, the mode of the action at the start of the change (whether the action at the start of the change is easy to execute, or the action at the start of the change with a high expectation). It may be configured so that the tendency of (whether it is easy to execute B) is different. For example, in the case of the red hold display for the effect of the change or the first hold display immediately before the digestion, the action at the start of the change is always executed, but the white (normal) hold display for the effect of the change or the first hold immediately before the digestion is performed. In the case of the hold display, it is configured so that the action at the start of the change is not always executed, or in the case of the hold display for directing the change in red or the first hold display immediately before digestion, the change in white (normal). It is configured so that the rate at which the action at the start of the change is executed is higher than in the case of the hold display for production or the first hold display immediately before digestion, or the red hold display for effect or the first hold display immediately before digestion. In the case of 1 hold display, the rate at which action B at the start of change is executed is higher than in the case of the white (normal) hold display for directing the change or the first hold display immediately before digestion. In the case of the white (normal) production hold display of the change or the first hold display immediately before digestion, the change start time than in the case of the red effect hold display or the first hold display immediately before digestion. It is configured so that the rate at which the action A is executed is high.

When expanding by an action (action at the start of fluctuation, fixed position action, tempai action), the expansion ratios of the first element and the second element may be different. For example, the enlargement ratio of the first element may be 1.4 times, but the enlargement ratio of the second element may be 1.1 times, or only the first element may be enlarged and the second element may not be enlarged. Further, regarding the shaking action, the shaking movement amount may be different between the first element and the second element. For example, the movement amount of the first element swings by 0.1 from side to side when the display area of the first element is 1, but the movement amount of the second element is 1 in the display area of the second element. If this is the case, it may be swung by 0.2 (or 0.05) to the left and right. However, it is desirable that the time required for one swing (the cycle of one swing) is the same for both the first element and the second element.

In the explanation so far, as the display mode of the first decorative symbol in each action, the game state, and the stage, only the "number" or the display mode such as "number + character" has been described, but only the "number" or "number". A third element may be added to the display mode of "number + character". For example, in the case of only "numbers", it may be "numbers + effects", and in the case of "numbers + characters", it may be "numbers + characters + effects".

In FIGS. 12 and 13, the determination of the variation pattern of the first main game symbol depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side regardless of whether it is in the time-reduced game state or the non-time-reduced game state (first main game side). The variation selection tendency differs depending on the number of holdings of (The fluctuation selection tendency differs depending on the number of holdings on the second main game side), but the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the first main game symbol is held on the first main game side in the time-reduced gaming state. It does not depend on the number (the fluctuation selection tendency is the same regardless of the number of holdings on the first main game side), but it depends on the number of holdings on the first main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state (on the first main game side). The fluctuation selection tendency differs depending on the number of holdings), and the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the second main game symbol depends on the number of holdings on the second main game side in the time-reduced gaming state (depending on the number of holdings on the second main game side). The variable selection tendency differs depending on the number), but in the non-time shortened gaming state, the variable selection tendency does not depend on the number of holdings on the second main game side (the variable selection tendency is the same regardless of the number of holdings on the second main game side). You may.

Determining the variation mode in the description of hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2, hold 2 → 1, hold 1 → 0, hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2, hold 2 → 1, hold 1 → 0. The determination of the variation mode and the symbol variation in the lottery table correspond as follows. When the hold is 4 → 3 and the hold is 4 → 3, the change mode is determined with reference to the number of holds = 3 in the determination of the change mode in the lottery table for determining the change mode, and the symbol change is used using the determined change mode. Is supposed to be executed. When the hold is 3 → 2 and the hold is 3 → 2, the change mode is determined with reference to the number of holds = 2 in the determination of the change mode in the lottery table for determining the change mode, and the symbol change is performed using the determined change mode. Is supposed to be executed. When the hold is 2 → 1 and the hold 2 → 1, the change mode is determined with reference to the number of holds = 1 in the determination of the change mode in the lottery table for determining the change mode, and the symbol change is used using the determined change mode. Is supposed to be executed. When the hold is 1 → 0 and the hold 1 → 0, the change mode is determined with reference to the number of holds = 0 in the determination of the change mode in the lottery table for determining the change mode, and the symbol change is used using the determined change mode. Is supposed to be executed.

In FIG. 127, the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are displayed separately, but as shown in FIG. 177 (b3), the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are displayed in the display area SG10. May be good.

Although the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side are displayed in FIGS. 143 to 167, the first hold display on the second main game side has been described. And the second hold display on the second main game side may also be displayed.

Further, in FIGS. 143 to 167, the example in which the second decorative symbol has a reach mode has been described, but the configuration may be such that the second decorative symbol does not have a reach mode (always changing until the final stop). ..

Based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation of these listed concepts (upper conceptualization), but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts. You may.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (1) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the entry into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a hit / fail determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the hit / fail determination.
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Then, the identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the identification information, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
The symbol for the first effect that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first effect symbol is confirmed. The special stop display mode, which is not displayed when the stop is displayed temporarily, is configured to be able to be temporarily stopped and displayed.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the special stop display mode is temporarily not stopped and displayed within the one effect period. be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (1-2) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first starting port,
A first game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
The first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can make the variable winning opening a favorable state for the player,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting the game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub-game unit side to the sub-game unit side, and the second identification information is variablely displayed while the first identification information is variablely displayed. It is configured so that the first identification information is not variablely displayed while the second identification information is variablely displayed.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the first effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means for controlling the second effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
Both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be variablely displayed within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable both variable displays of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable both variable displays of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured to be able to execute both the stop display of
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured to be able to execute both the stop display of
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
The first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be provisionally stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain effect period, and is provisionally displayed. When the stop display is displayed, it is possible to execute the pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that the special stop display mode, which is not displayed when the symbol is definitively stopped and displayed, can be temporarily stopped and displayed.
The pachinko game characterized in that the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain effect period. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (2) is
A start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the entry into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a hit / fail determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the hit / fail determination.
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Then, the identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the identification information, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After displaying a plurality of types of first effect symbols in a variable manner on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect display unit (for example, the effect display unit) displays one type or a combination of a plurality of types of first effect symbols. The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the stop display on the effect display device SG), and
After displaying a plurality of types of second effect symbols in a variable manner on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect display unit (for example, the effect display unit) displays the second effect symbol which is a combination of one type or a plurality of types. It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the stop display on the effect display device SG).
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the stop display is definitively displayed and within the one effect period. It is configured to display the second effect symbol in a variable manner and then stop and display it deterministically.
The symbol for the first effect that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is configured to be displayed in a variable manner again within a certain effect period, and when the first effect symbol is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, at the time of the stop display, it is displayed. A special stop display mode indicating that the special game is not executed while the special game may be executed thereafter can be stopped and displayed as the first effect symbol which is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. It is composed and
Is it possible that the symbol for the second effect that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period cannot be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period? Even if the stop display is provisionally displayed before the stop display is definitively displayed within the period, the special stop display mode is used as the second effect symbol that is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. Even when the second effect symbol cannot be stopped and displayed, the special stop display mode is not stopped and displayed as the second effect symbol that is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being played.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (3) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the entry into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a hit / fail determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the hit / fail determination.
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Then, the identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the identification information, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
The symbol for the first effect that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first effect symbol is confirmed. The special stop display mode, which is not displayed when the stop is displayed temporarily, is configured to be able to be temporarily stopped and displayed.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the one effect period.
As the display state of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, the first display state in which the variable display of the first effect symbol is visible to the player and the variable display of the first effect symbol are displayed. Is hidden or is configured to take either a second display state in which the first effect symbol is more difficult for the player to see than the first display state, and the second effect within a certain effect period. The symbol is configured to be able to be displayed at least in the case of the second display state.
If the special stop display mode is provisionally stopped and displayed as the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, it cannot be included when the first effect symbol is definitively stopped and displayed. It is configured to be the first special stop display mode that includes the first effect symbol of the type, or the second special stop display mode that does not include the first effect symbol of the specific type.
When the symbol for the first effect is provisionally stopped and displayed within a certain effect period, the second special stop display mode is provisionally displayed rather than the case where the first special stop display mode is provisionally stopped and displayed. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the case where the pachinko machine is stopped and displayed is configured so that the expected degree of execution of the special game after the end of the certain production period is higher.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (4) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the entry into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage means (for example, a symbol holding means MJ32) that temporarily stores the acquired random numbers up to and controls the occurrence of hold.
When the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the random number related to the hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines an aspect, and
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Then, the identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the identification information, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A display control means (for example, an effect display control means SM20) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information is set as one production period, and the design for the production can be displayed in a variable manner within a certain production period.
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. In that case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the effect symbol is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, the deterministically or provisionally stopped. The special stop display mode indicating that the special game may be executed after the deterministic or provisionally stop display is performed while indicating that the special game is not executed at the time of display is deterministic or provisional. It is configured to be stopped and displayed at
After a certain hold occurs and before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the certain hold is regarded as a specific hold, and when the specific hold occurs. , If there is one or more pre-digestion hold that is a hold that satisfies the variable display start condition of the identification information before the specific hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold is set. Within one effect period corresponding to the case of satisfaction, the special stop display mode is definitively stopped and displayed as the effect symbol only when the effect symbol is definitively stopped and displayed, while the identification regarding the specific hold is made. Within one effect period corresponding to the case where the information fluctuation display start condition is satisfied, the special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect symbol only when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (5) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the entry into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random numbers up to and controls the occurrence of hold.
When the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the random number related to the hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines an aspect, and
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Then, the identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the identification information, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information is set as one production period, and the design for the production can be displayed in a variable manner within a certain production period.
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. In that case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the effect symbol is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, the deterministically or provisionally stopped. The special stop display mode indicating that the special game may be executed after the deterministic or provisionally stop display is performed while indicating that the special game is not executed at the time of display is deterministic or provisional. It is configured to be stopped and displayed at
When the special stop display mode is stopped and displayed as the effect symbol when the effect symbol is deterministically or provisionally stopped and displayed within a certain effect period, at least one special effect symbol and special It is configured to be combined with multiple normal production symbols, which are different types from the production symbols.
After a certain hold occurs and before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the certain hold is regarded as a specific hold, and when the specific hold occurs. , If there is one or more pre-digestion hold that is a hold that satisfies the variable display start condition of the identification information before the specific hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold is set. When the special stop display mode is deterministically or provisionally stopped and displayed within one effect period corresponding to the case of satisfaction, the plurality of normal effect symbols cannot be of the same type, while identification regarding specific hold. When the special stop display mode is deterministically or provisionally stopped and displayed within one effect period corresponding to the case where the information variation display start condition is satisfied, the plurality of normal effect symbols may be of the same type. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured in such a manner.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (6) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second starting port). The game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to make it difficult to enter the ball as compared with the inability to enter the ball or the open state.
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
A first game content determining means (for example, a game content) that executes a hit / fail determination based on a first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. Determining means MN) and
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g), and then the first identification information is displayed. (1) The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the stop display of the identification information, and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
A second game content determining means (for example, a game content) that executes a hit / fail determination based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. Determining means MN) and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), and then the second identification information is displayed. (Ii) A second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the identification information, and
After the winning / failing judgment result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning / failing judgment result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is set as one production period, and the design for the production can be displayed in a variable manner within a certain production period. Has been
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. In that case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the effect symbol is deterministically or provisionally stopped and displayed, the deterministically or provisionally stopped. The special stop display mode indicating that the special game may be executed after the deterministic or provisionally stop display is performed while indicating that the special game is not executed at the time of display is deterministic or provisional. It is configured to be stopped and displayed at
The special stop is within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start to stop display of the variation display of the first identification information and within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the second identification information. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the display mode is configured so that the ratio of deterministically or provisionally stopped display is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (7) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the entry into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random numbers up to and controls the occurrence of hold.
When the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the random number related to the hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines an aspect, and
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Then, the identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the identification information, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
If a predetermined number of holds exist at any timing within a certain production period, the first production symbol that is variablely displayed within the certain production period will be displayed within the certain production period. It is performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding any of the predetermined number of holds is satisfied after the variable display is continuously performed even after the end within the certain production period without being definitively stopped and displayed. During one production period, the continuously variable display of the first production symbol is definitively stopped and displayed.
Even if a predetermined number of holds exist at any timing within a certain production period, the second production symbol that is variablely displayed within the certain production period is within the certain production period. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be definitively stopped and displayed at.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (8) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires random numbers based on the entry into the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a hit / fail determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the hit / fail determination.
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Then, the identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the identification information, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first major winning opening C10, the second major winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
When the first effect symbol has a plurality of types and the result of the winning / failing determination is won and the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the first effect symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed when the result of the winning / failing determination is not won, the combination of the first effect symbols that are not the same type is stopped and displayed.
When the second effect symbol has a plurality of types and the result of the winning / failing determination is won and the second effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the second effect symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the second effect symbol is stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail determination is not won, the combination of the second effect symbols that are not the same type is stopped and displayed.
The combination of the second effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail determination is non-winning, rather than the total number of combinations of the first effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the winning / failing determination is non-winning. It is configured so that the total number is smaller,
It has a plurality of types of effect display modes as an effect display mode that depends on controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
When displaying a certain first effect symbol among the plurality of types of first effect symbols, the display attribute related to the certain first effect symbol in the certain type of effect display mode and the certain type. The display attribute related to the certain first effect symbol in the effect display mode of a different type from the effect display mode of
When displaying a certain second effect symbol among the plurality of types of second effect symbols, the display attribute related to the certain second effect symbol in the certain type of effect display mode and the certain type. It is configured so that the display attribute related to the certain second effect symbol in the effect display mode of a different type from that of the effect display mode is different.
The result of the winning / failing determination is more than the probability that the certain first effect symbol is included in the combination of the first effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the winning / failing determination is non-winning. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the combination of the second effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed in the case is configured so that the probability that the certain second effect symbol is included is higher.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (9) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol.
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first hold number image and the second hold number image.
A pachinko game characterized in that the first and second reserved images are not displayed in the effect display unit in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (10) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
Equipped with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
Even if the number of holds on the first hold and the number of holds on the second hold are the same, the first hold image and the second hold image are configured to have different display modes.
Even if the number of holds for the first hold and the number of holds for the second hold are the same, the first hold number image and the second hold number image are configured to have different display modes. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (11) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
Equipped with
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
In the normal gaming state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold is not displayed on the effect display unit, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold is displayed on the effect display unit. Can be displayed and
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first hold number image and the second hold number image can be displayed on the effect display unit in both the normal game state and the specific game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (12) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
Equipped with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
It is performed when the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of pending images that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied. The fluctuation-compatible image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information is displayed, and
In the normal gaming state, the variation-corresponding image can be displayed when the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, while the variation-corresponding image is displayed when the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. It is a pachinko gaming machine that is characterized by not doing so.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (13) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player.
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved image can be displayed in duplicate.
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first hold number image can be displayed in duplicate.
In the effect display unit, the second effect symbol and the first hold image are configured so that they are not displayed in duplicate.
This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that, in the effect display unit, the second effect symbol and the first hold number image are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (14) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
An operating member that can be operated by the player (for example, the cross button SB-2),
A speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24) and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number indicating the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number indicating the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operating state of the operating member while the variable display is stopped or the variable display is displayed.
When the volume level can be adjusted, the volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display section.
The volume adjustment image, the first effect symbol, and the second effect symbol can be displayed at the same time.
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol, and the display priority of the second effect symbol is higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol.
The volume adjustment image, the first hold image or the second hold image, the first hold number image or the second hold number image can be displayed at the same time.
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first hold image or the second hold image, and the display priority of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is the first hold image or the second hold image. It is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first effect symbol can be displayed in duplicate.
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first effect symbol can be displayed in duplicate.
The volume adjustment image and the second production symbol do not overlap while the variable display is stopped.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the volume adjustment image and the second production symbol are configured so as not to overlap even during the variable display.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (15) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped, the new fluctuation display is not started for the predetermined fluctuation display stop time.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number when there is a new ball entering the first starting port.
It is possible to update the display of the second hold number when there is a new ball entering the second starting port.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (16) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a specific display mode than the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
First hold number immediately before the start of the variable display The variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the image is in the predetermined display mode is the first hold number immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image when the image is in a specific display mode.
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the specific display mode will be the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image is the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the first hold number image will be the specific display mode as the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is the specific display mode immediately before the start.
The probability that the first hold number image will be a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in the predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display is the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image is the special display mode when the first hold number image is a specific display mode immediately before the start. It is a pachinko gaming machine that features it.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (17) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode is set as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal gaming state is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific gaming state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode is set as the display mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (18) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Equipped with
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
When there is a new ball entering the first starting port, the first update display can be executed as the display update of the first hold number image.
When there is a new ball entering the second starting port, the first update display can be executed as the display update of the second hold number image.
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as a display update of the first hold number image or the second hold number image.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
When the execution of the hold image movement effect is started during the execution of the hold image generation effect, the hold image generation effect and the hold image movement effect can be executed at the same time without interrupting the running hold image generation effect, and , When the execution of the hold image generation effect is started during the execution of the hold image movement effect, the hold image movement effect and the hold image generation effect can be executed at the same time without interrupting the running hold image movement effect.
When a new variable display is started during the execution of the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is displayed. After the execution is completed, the second update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is executed, and the execution is completed.
When there is a new ball entering the first starting port or the second starting port during the execution of the second update display of the first holding number image or the second holding number image, the first holding number image or the first (Ii) A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is executed after the execution of the second update display of the hold number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (19) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol.
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first hold number image and the second hold number image.
A pachinko game characterized in that the first and second reserved images are not displayed in the effect display unit in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (20) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped, the new fluctuation display is not started for the predetermined fluctuation display stop time.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
Equipped with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
Even if the number of holds on the first hold and the number of holds on the second hold are the same, the first hold image and the second hold image are configured to have different display modes.
Even when the number of holds of the first hold and the number of holds of the second hold are the same, the first hold number image and the second hold number image are configured to have different display modes.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting port.
It is possible to update the display of the second hold number image when there is a new ball entering the second starting port.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (21) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped, the new fluctuation display is not started for the predetermined fluctuation display stop time.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
Equipped with
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
In the normal gaming state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold is not displayed on the effect display unit, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold is displayed on the effect display unit. Can be displayed and
In both the normal game state and the specific game state, the first hold number image and the second hold number image can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting port.
It is possible to update the display of the second hold number image when there is a new ball entering the second starting port.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (22) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
As a game area where a game ball can flow down, it has a first area and a second area different from the first area.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It is performed when the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of pending images that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied. The fluctuation-compatible image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information is displayed, and
In the normal gaming state, the variation corresponding image can be displayed when the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, while the variation corresponding image is displayed when the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. It is configured not to
The first notification image that notifies that the game ball should be fired toward the first area side can be displayed on the effect display unit.
A second notification image for notifying that the game ball should be fired toward the second region side can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the first hold number image is updated in the specific game state, the second notification image can be displayed.
The second notification image can be displayed in an overlapping manner with the first effect symbol, while the second effect symbol, the first hold image, the second hold image, the first hold number image, and the second hold number image. Is configured to not be duplicated,
Regardless of whether or not the first hold number image is updated in the specific gaming state, the images are different from the first notification image and the second notification image, and the game ball should be launched toward the second region side. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that a special notification image for notifying that the image can be displayed on the effect display unit.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (23) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved image can be displayed in duplicate.
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first hold number image can be displayed in duplicate.
In the effect display unit, the second effect symbol and the first hold image are configured so that they are not displayed in duplicate.
This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that, in the effect display unit, the second effect symbol and the first hold number image are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (24) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
An operating member that can be operated by the player (for example, the cross button SB-2),
A speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24) and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
Equipped with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operating state of the operating member while the variable display is stopped or the variable display is displayed.
When the volume level can be adjusted, the volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display section.
The volume adjustment image, the first effect symbol, and the second effect symbol can be displayed at the same time.
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol, and the display priority of the second effect symbol is higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol.
The volume adjustment image, the first hold image or the second hold image, the first hold number image or the second hold number image can be displayed at the same time.
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first hold image or the second hold image, and the display priority of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is the first hold image or the second hold image. It is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first effect symbol can be displayed in duplicate.
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first effect symbol can be displayed in duplicate.
The volume adjustment image and the second production symbol do not overlap while the variable display is stopped.
Even during the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the second production symbol are configured so that they do not overlap.
The total number of combinations of patterns in the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal gaming state is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the second effect symbol in the normal game state. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (25) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped, the new fluctuation display is not started for the predetermined fluctuation display stop time.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and any of the multiple types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is the first hold of one of the remaining plurality of first holds, is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that it will be done.
The hold change effect was executed during the variable display of the first identification information in the situation where the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and a plurality of first hold remains. In this case, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold may be changed, while the display mode of the first hold number image is not changed.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting port.
It is possible to update the display of the second hold number image when there is a new ball entering the second starting port.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (26) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold images corresponding to the remaining number of second hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a specific display mode than the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
First hold number immediately before the start of the variable display The variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the image is in the predetermined display mode is the first hold number immediately before the start of the variable display. It is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image when the image is in a specific display mode.
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the specific display mode will be the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image is the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the first hold number image will be the specific display mode as the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is the specific display mode immediately before the start.
The probability that the first hold number image will be a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in the predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is a specific display mode immediately before the start.
The total number of combinations of patterns in the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal gaming state is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the second effect symbol in the normal gaming state. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (27) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode is set as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal gaming state is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific game state. It is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode is set as the display mode.
It has at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode as an effect mode that depends on determining the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first effect symbol corresponding to the first effect mode, and the second display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first effect symbol corresponding to the second effect mode, are different. It is configured to be a display mode,
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the first effect mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the first effect mode, the specified first effect symbol, which is the first display mode, can be variablely displayed. Is configured in
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the second effect mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the second effect mode, the specified first effect symbol, which is the second display mode, can be variablely displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured in.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (28) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , With effect display control means SM20)
The number of first reserved images corresponding to the remaining number of first reserved images can be displayed in the first reserved image display area in the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the number of remaining second-held images can be displayed in the second-held image display area in the effect display unit.
The number of first hold, which is the number of remaining hold of the first hold, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit.
The second hold number, which is the remaining hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and any of the multiple types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is the first hold of one of the remaining plurality of first holds, is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that it will be done.
The hold change effect was executed during the variable display of the first identification information in the situation where the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and a plurality of first hold remains. In this case, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold may be changed, while the display mode of the first hold number image is not changed.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
When there is a new ball entering the first starting port, the first update display can be executed as the display update of the first hold number image.
When there is a new ball entering the second starting port, the first update display can be executed as the display update of the second hold number image.
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as a display update of the first hold number image or the second hold number image.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
When the execution of the hold image movement effect is started during the execution of the hold image generation effect, the hold image generation effect and the hold image movement effect can be executed at the same time without interrupting the running hold image generation effect, and , When the execution of the hold image generation effect is started during the execution of the hold image movement effect, the hold image movement effect and the hold image generation effect can be executed at the same time without interrupting the running hold image movement effect.
When a new variable display is started during the execution of the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is displayed. After the execution is completed, the second update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is executed, and the execution is completed.
When there is a new ball entering the first starting port or the second starting port during the execution of the second update display of the first holding number image or the second holding number image, the first holding number image or the first (Ii) A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is executed after the execution of the second update display of the hold number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (29) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
As the type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least the specific display mode A and the specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of the specific display modes is the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol. It is configured so that the execution expectation of the special game differs depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol.
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the types is displayed by the time the specific display mode is displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured differently according to the contents of.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (30) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
As the type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least the specific display mode A and the specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of the specific display modes is the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol. It is configured so that the execution expectation of the special game differs depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed in the effect display unit.
As the types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided.
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? The probability of whether the specific display mode B is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the type is the look-ahead effect displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be different depending on whether the type of is a look-ahead effect A or a look-ahead effect B.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (31) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed in the effect display unit.
As the types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided.
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects and cases where M (M> N) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects. Of the types of look-ahead effects, when M types of look-ahead effects are executed, the probability that a specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to hold, which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effects, is relatively high. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (32) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
In a situation where there is a specific hold that is the first hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, the effect display unit can execute a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation level of the special game related to the specific hold.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed in the effect display unit.
As the types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided.
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects and cases where M (M> N) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects. Of the types of look-ahead effects, when M types of look-ahead effects are executed, the probability that the special display mode is displayed in the variable display related to the hold, which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effects, is relatively high. It is a pachinko gaming machine that is characterized by being played.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (33) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
An operating member that can be operated by the player (for example, the cross button SB-2),
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, a plurality of types of operations can be supported. It is configured to be able to display any of the productions,
When the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing after the timing when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, and when the second operation promotion effect is displayed, the first 2 The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed is different from the timing at which the operation promotion effect is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (34) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
An operating member that can be operated by the player (for example, the cross button SB-2),
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, a plurality of types of operations can be supported. It is configured to be able to display any of the productions,
The types of operation promotion effects include at least the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing after the timing when the first operation promotion effect is displayed is displayed. The probability that the special display mode is displayed and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (35) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It has multiple types of development effects that are executed after the reach is established, and also has multiple types of post-reach effects that can occur after the reach is established and before the development effects are executed.
Pachinko is characterized in that the probability that the special display mode is displayed after the post-reach effect occurs differs depending on which of the plurality of types of post-reach effect occurs. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (36) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
It has at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode as an effect mode that depends on determining the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit.
While the switching display mode in which the symbol type of the first effect symbol is switched and displayed in the first effect mode and the switch display mode in which the symbol type of the first effect symbol is switched and displayed in the second effect mode are configured to be different. ,
The switching display mode in which the symbol type of the second effect symbol is switched and displayed in the first effect mode and the switch display mode in which the symbol type of the second effect symbol is switched and displayed in the second effect mode are configured to be the same. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (37) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
As the type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least the specific display mode A and the specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of the specific display modes is the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol. It is configured so that the execution expectation of the special game differs depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol.
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the type is displayed by the time the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured differently depending on the content of
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, or the special display mode is the provisional display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed differs depending on the number of times displayed as the mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (38) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
As the type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least the specific display mode A and the specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of the specific display modes is the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol. It is configured so that the execution expectation of the special game differs depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed in the effect display unit.
As the types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided.
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A selected as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? The probability of whether the specific display mode B is selected as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the type is a look-ahead effect displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured to be different depending on the type of
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, or the special display mode is the provisional display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed differs depending on the number of times displayed as the mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (39) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed in the effect display unit.
As the types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided.
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects and cases where M (M> N) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects. Of the types of look-ahead effects, when M types of look-ahead effects are executed, the probability that a specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to hold, which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effects, is relatively high. And
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, or the special display mode is the provisional display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed differs depending on the number of times displayed as the mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (40) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and when displaying effects on the effect display unit, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the set effect display format.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed when the re-variation is executed, or the re-variation is executed, depending on which of the plurality of types of effect display formats is set. It is configured so that the display mode of the special display mode displayed when it is displayed is different.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed in the effect display unit.
As the types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided.
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects and cases where M (M> N) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects. Of the types of look-ahead effects, when M types of look-ahead effects are executed, the probability that the special display mode is displayed in the variable display related to the hold, which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effects, is relatively high. It is a pachinko gaming machine that is characterized by being played.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (41) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. There is a case where one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of the specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, or the special display mode is the provisional display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period. It is configured so that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed differs depending on the number of times the mode is displayed.
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, a plurality of types of operations can be supported. It is configured to be able to display any of the productions,
The types of operation promotion effects include at least the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing after the timing when the first operation promotion effect is displayed is displayed. The probability that the specific display mode is displayed and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (42) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
An operating member that can be operated by the player (for example, the cross button SB-2),
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and when displaying effects on the effect display unit, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the set effect display format.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed when the re-variation is executed, or the re-variation is executed, depending on which of the plurality of types of effect display formats is set. It is configured so that the display mode of the special display mode displayed when it is displayed is different.
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, a plurality of types of operations can be supported. It is configured to be able to display any of the productions,
The types of operation promotion effects include at least the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing after the timing when the first operation promotion effect is displayed is displayed. The probability that the special display mode is displayed and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (43) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It has at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode as an effect mode that depends on determining the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit.
The execution expectation of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N> 0) times within a certain effect period in the first effect mode, and the special display mode within a certain effect period in the first effect mode. The difference in the expected degree of execution of the special game when is displayed N + 1 times is the execution of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N> 0) times within a certain effect period in the second effect mode. It is configured to be smaller than the difference between the expectation degree and the execution expectation degree of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N + 1 times within a certain effect period in the second effect mode.
It has multiple types of development effects that are executed after the reach is established, and also has multiple types of post-reach effects that can occur after the reach is established and before the development effects are executed.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed after the post-reach effect occurs, or the probability that the special display mode is displayed, depending on which of the plurality of types of post-reach effect occurs. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured so as to be different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (44) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A first game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With a second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on a ball entering the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M).
An effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed in the effect display unit.
As the types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided.
When the special display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the special display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of special display modes? Of the types of special display modes, the probability that the special display mode B will be displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed before the special display mode is displayed. It is configured to be different depending on whether the type of the look-ahead effect A or the look-ahead effect B.
It has at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode as an effect mode that depends on determining the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit.
The switching display mode in which the symbol type of the first effect symbol is switched and displayed in the first effect mode and the switch display mode in which the symbol type of the first effect symbol is switched and displayed in the second effect mode are different.
The feature is that the switching display mode in which the symbol type of the second effect symbol in the first effect mode is switched and displayed is the same as the switching display mode in which the symbol type of the second effect symbol is switched and displayed in the second effect mode. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine (A1) according to the aspect (45) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop of the variable display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbols are varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the effect symbols is displayed on the effect display unit. Control so that it can be displayed with
For at least one or more production symbols, numbers are provided as components of the production symbols.
The identification information is displayed when the variation display of the new identification information is started after the power is turned off when the power is cut off during the variation display of the identification information scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode. New identification information after returning from the power outage when a power outage occurs during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the numerical combination of the effect design and the identification information other than the predetermined mode. It is configured so that the numerical combination of the effect symbol displayed at the start of the variable display of is the same.
It has multiple types of production modes when the special game is not executed.
In a situation where a certain effect mode is set, the identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode. When a power cut occurs during the variable display of the identification information, a new identification after returning from the power cut. Information fluctuation The combination of the numbers of the effect symbols displayed at the start of display and the identification information that the identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode under the situation where the certain effect mode is set. When the power is cut off during the fluctuation display, the number combination of the effect symbols displayed at the start of the fluctuation display of the new identification information after the power is turned off is the same. However, after the power is turned off when the power is cut off during the fluctuation display of the identification information in which the identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode under the situation where the certain effect mode is set. The display format of the effect symbol displayed at the start of the new variation display of the identification information and the identification information are scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode under the situation where the certain effect mode is set. Variations in identification information When a power outage occurs during display, changes in new identification information after recovery from the power outage The display format of the effect symbol displayed at the start of display may differ from that of the display format. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being played.

The pachinko gaming machine (A2) according to the aspect (46) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the identification information display that controls the stop display of the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed by the identification information display unit based on the random number related to the hold. Control means and
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop of the variable display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbols are varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the effect symbols is displayed on the effect display unit. Control so that it can be displayed with
It is possible to execute a definite notice effect that gives notice during the variable display of the identification information that it is certain that the variable display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode.
It is possible to execute a definite look-ahead effect that announces that there is a hit hold in which the execution of the special game is definite among the remaining holds, before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information regarding the hit hold is satisfied. can be,
If a power cut occurs during the variable display of the identification information for which the final notice effect has been executed and then the power is turned off, the variable display of the identification information that triggered the execution of the final notice effect is displayed in the above-mentioned predetermined mode. The combination of the effect symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the execution of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed is the effect symbol combination A.
If a power cut occurs during the variable display of the identification information for which the confirmed look-ahead effect is executed and then the power is turned off, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the hit hold that triggered the execution of the fixed look-ahead effect is displayed. The combination of the effect symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the execution of the special game executed by the stop display in the predetermined mode is the effect symbol combination B.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the effect symbol combination A and the effect symbol combination B are configured so that the combination of the effect symbols is different.

The pachinko gaming machine (A3) according to the aspect (47) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
Within the one effect period, the effectable movable body can execute a predetermined effect operation, and the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit is visible when the effect moveable body executes the predetermined effect operation. Is configured to decrease,
The movable body for production is configured to be able to perform a predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after recovering from the power failure.
When the movable body for effect performs the predetermined effect operation within the one effect period, the first effect symbol is hidden while the second effect symbol can be displayed. ,
When the effectable movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after the power is restored, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed. Has been
During the period from the start of variable display of the identification information in which the movable body for effect is scheduled to execute the predetermined effect operation within the one effect period to the start of the execution of the predetermined effect operation, the power supply is cut off. From the start of execution of the predetermined initialization operation to the end of the execution of the predetermined initialization operation when the effectable movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after returning from It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be longer than the period of.

The pachinko gaming machine (A4) according to the aspect (48) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a predetermined winning opening than in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. The game state control means to be controlled and
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
If the power is cut off in a normal gaming state and the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed outside the one effect period, the first effect symbol displayed after returning from the power cut. The combination is configured so that it can be a first effect symbol having a display format different from the display format of the first effect symbol before the power failure occurs.
If the power is cut off in a specific gaming state and the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed outside the one effect period, the first effect symbol displayed after returning from the power cut. The combination is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have a first effect symbol having the same display format as the display format of the first effect symbol before the power cutoff occurs.

The pachinko gaming machine (A5) according to the aspect (49) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the identification information display that controls the stop display of the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed by the identification information display unit based on the random number related to the hold. Control means and
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a predetermined winning opening than in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. The game state control means to be controlled and
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop of the variable display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbols are varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the effect symbols is displayed on the effect display unit. Control so that it can be displayed with
If a power failure occurs during the variable display of the identification information that triggers the transition from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the variable display of the identification information does not remain on hold and does not newly occur. When the combination of production symbols is displayed after the power is turned off, the combination of production symbols is displayed once in the display format corresponding to the specific gaming state, and then the display format corresponds to the normal gaming state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to display a combination of patterns for directing.

The pachinko gaming machine (A6) according to the aspect (50) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
It is possible to display a predetermined error screen on the effect display unit in response to the occurrence of a predetermined error.
When the combination of the predetermined error screen and the first effect symbol is displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined error screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol.
When the combination of the predetermined error screen, the first effect symbol, and the second effect symbol is displayed at the same time, the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the first effect symbol overlap. Is configured so that the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the second effect symbol do not overlap.
Even when the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first effect symbol and the combination of the second effect symbol are displayed at the same time, the volume adjustment screen is displayed based on the predetermined player operation to display the volume level. Adjustable,
When the combination of the volume adjustment screen, the first effect symbol, and the second effect symbol is displayed at the same time, the display of the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol.
When the volume adjustment screen, the combination of the first effect symbol and the combination of the second effect symbol are displayed at the same time, the display area of the volume adjustment screen and the display area of the first effect symbol overlap, but the volume adjustment screen. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the display area of the above and the display area of the second effect symbol are configured so as not to overlap.

The pachinko gaming machine (A7) according to the aspect (51) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
An operation instruction effect that prompts the operation of a predetermined operation member can be displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, and the predetermined operation member is operated in a situation where the operation instruction effect is displayed. Correspondingly, a predetermined effect can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the operation instruction effect and the first effect symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the operation instruction effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol.
In the situation where the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member in the situation where the operation instruction effect is displayed, the predetermined effect, the symbol for the first effect, and the second effect are displayed. When the symbol for the effect is displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined effect has a higher display priority than the display of the symbol for the first effect, while the display of the predetermined effect has the symbol for the second effect. The display priority is lower than the display of
The display area of the predetermined effect is larger than the display area of the operation instruction effect, and the display area of the operation instruction effect and the display area of the first effect symbol may overlap with each other. It does not overlap with the display area of the second production symbol,
In the situation where the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member in the situation where the operation instruction effect is displayed, the display area of the predetermined effect is the symbol for the first effect. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to overlap both the display area and the display area of the second effect symbol.

The pachinko gaming machine (A8) according to the aspect (52) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a predetermined winning opening than in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. The game state control means to be controlled and
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
Under the situation of the specific gaming state, the first variable state and the first variable state have at least a second variable state in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different, and under the situation of the normal gaming state. Both the first fluctuation state and the second fluctuation state have at least a normal fluctuation state in which the selection tendency of the fluctuation display time of the identification information is different.
It is possible to shift from the specific gaming state and the first variable state to the specific gaming state and the second variable state, and it is possible to shift from the specific gaming state and the second variable state to the normal gaming state and the normal variable state.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
The combination of the display format of the first effect symbol when the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the first variable state and the combination of the first effect symbol in the specific game state and the second variable state The display format is the same as the display format of the first effect symbol when it is displayed, but for the first effect when the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state. The display format of the first effect symbol when the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the second variable state is also the first effect in the normal game state and the normal variable state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be different from the display format of the first production symbol when the combination of the symbols is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (A9) according to the aspect (53) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
It has at least an effect mode A and an effect mode B as an effect mode when the special game is not executed.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within the one effect period under the situation where the effect mode A is set, the first effect is performed before the final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed. The provisional display mode of the symbol can be displayed, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, the first effect symbol is changed and displayed again within the one effect period. It is possible, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, a special display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed for the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within the one effect period under the situation where the effect mode B is set.
The final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed within the one effect period corresponding to the situation where the effect mode A is set and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode. In some cases, a specific combination may be displayed, but the first within the one effect period corresponding to the situation where the effect mode B is set and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the specific combination is not displayed when the final combination of the effects symbols is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (A10) according to the aspect (54) is
A start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
For at least one or more first production symbols, numbers are provided as components of the first production symbol.
For at least one or more second production symbols, numbers are provided as components of the second production symbol.
Changes in identification information that are scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the above-mentioned predetermined mode Displayed at the start of fluctuation display of identification information after the power is turned off when a power cut occurs during the display. After the combination of the first effect symbol and the change in the identification information that the identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a mode other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode, when the power is cut off, the power is restored. The combination of the first effect symbols displayed at the start of the new identification information variation display is configured to be the same.
The identification information is displayed when the variation display of the new identification information is started after the power is turned off when the power is cut off during the variation display of the identification information scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode. A new combination of numbers for the second production symbol and a change in the identification information whose identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a mode other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode. It is configured so that the numerical combination of the second effect symbol displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information is the same.
It has multiple types of production modes when the special game is not executed.
In the situation where a certain effect mode is set, the identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, and the variation of the identification information is changed. The identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode under the situation where the combination of the first effect symbol displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information and the certain effect mode is set. The combination of the first effect symbols displayed at the start of the new identification information fluctuation display after the power is cut off when the power is cut off during the change display of the identification information is the same. Even in the case of, the display format of the first production symbol is configured to be different.
In a situation where a certain effect mode is set, the identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode. When a power cut occurs during the variable display of the identification information, a new identification after returning from the power cut. Information fluctuation Identification of the numerical combination of the second effect symbol displayed at the start of display and the identification information scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode under the situation where the certain effect mode is set. When the power is cut off during the information fluctuation display, the number combination of the second effect symbol displayed at the start of the new identification information fluctuation display after returning from the power cut is the same. Even in the case, from the power failure when the power is cut off during the fluctuation display of the identification information in which the identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode under the situation where the certain effect mode is set. Fluctuation of new identification information after returning The display format of the second effect symbol displayed at the start of display and the identification information in a situation other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode in the situation where the certain effect mode is set. Changes in identification information scheduled to be stopped and displayed When a power outage occurs during display, changes in new identification information after returning from the power outage Display of the second effect symbol displayed at the start of display The format is configured to be the same,
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display mode can be displayed. If it is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, the final of the first effect symbol is displayed. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as a display mode can be displayed.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for a second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.

The pachinko gaming machine (A11) according to the aspect (55) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the identification information display that controls the stop display of the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed by the identification information display unit based on the random number related to the hold. Control means and
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the certain effect period. In that case, one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols. Have a case
Whether the specific display mode A is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of the specific display mode in which the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol. The content of the advance notice effect that the probability of whether the specific display mode B is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured to be different depending on
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed in the effect display unit.
As the types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided.
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? The probability of whether the specific display mode B is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the type is the look-ahead effect displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured to be different depending on whether the type of the look-ahead effect A or the look-ahead effect B.
It is possible to execute a definite notice effect that gives notice during the variable display of the identification information that it is certain that the variable display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode.
It is possible to execute a definite look-ahead effect that announces that there is a hit hold in which the execution of the special game is definite among the remaining holds, before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information regarding the hit hold is satisfied. can be,
If a power cut occurs during the variable display of the identification information for which the final notice effect has been executed and then the power is turned off, the variable display of the identification information that triggered the execution of the final notice effect is displayed in the above-mentioned predetermined mode. The combination of the effect symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the execution of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed is the effect symbol combination A.
If a power cut occurs during the variable display of the identification information for which the confirmed look-ahead effect is executed and then the power is turned off, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the hit hold that triggered the execution of the fixed look-ahead effect is displayed. The combination of the effect symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the execution of the special game executed by the stop display in the predetermined mode is the effect symbol combination B.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the effect symbol combination A and the effect symbol combination B are configured so that the combination of the effect symbols is different.

The pachinko gaming machine (A12) according to the aspect (56) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
Within the one effect period, the effectable movable body can execute a predetermined effect operation, and the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit is visible when the effect moveable body executes the predetermined effect operation. Is configured to decrease,
The movable body for production is configured to be able to perform a predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after recovering from the power failure.
When the movable body for effect performs the predetermined effect operation within the one effect period, the first effect symbol is hidden while the second effect symbol can be displayed. ,
When the effectable movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after the power is restored, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed. Has been
During the period from the start of variable display of the identification information in which the movable body for effect is scheduled to execute the predetermined effect operation within the one effect period to the start of the execution of the predetermined effect operation, the power supply is cut off. From the start of execution of the predetermined initialization operation to the end of the execution of the predetermined initialization operation when the effectable movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after returning from It is configured to be longer than the period of
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns in the final combination of the first effect symbols is larger than the total number of patterns in the final combination of the second effect symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A13) according to the aspect (57) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a predetermined winning opening than in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. The game state control means to be controlled and
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
If the power is cut off in a normal gaming state and the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed outside the one effect period, the combination of the first effect symbols will be combined after the power is restored. Is displayed, it is configured so that the display format may be different from the display format of the first effect symbol before the power failure occurs.
If the power is cut off in a specific game state and the combination of the first production symbols is displayed outside the one production period, the combination of the first production symbols will be combined after the power is restored. Is displayed, it is configured to have the same display format as the display format of the first effect symbol before the power failure occurs.
It has at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode as an effect mode that depends on determining the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first display format, which is the display format of the specified first effect symbol corresponding to the first effect mode, and the second display format, which is the display format of the specific first effect symbol corresponding to the second effect mode, are different. It is configured to be a display format,
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the first effect mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the first effect mode, the specified first effect symbol, which is the first display format, can be variablely displayed. Is configured in
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the second effect mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the second effect mode, the specified first effect symbol, which is the second display format, can be variablely displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured in.

The pachinko gaming machine (A14) according to the aspect (58) is
The start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the first main game start port A10, 1st) is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the second region side is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the first region side. 2 Main game start port B10) and
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the identification information display that controls the stop display of the identification information after the identification information is variablely displayed by the identification information display unit based on the random number related to the hold. Control means and
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting port than the normal game state, and is controlled so that the special game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. Game state control means and
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
If the power is cut off during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to shift from the specific game state to the normal game state and there is no remaining hold, the effect symbol will be displayed after the power is turned off. When the combination is displayed, the combination of the effect symbols is displayed once in the display format corresponding to the specific game state, and then the combination of the effect symbols is displayed in the display format corresponding to the normal game state. Has been
It is possible to display a launch notification effect for prompting the second area to launch a game ball on the effect display unit, and while the launch notification effect is not displayed under the normal gaming state, the launch notification effect is displayed. Is configured to be visible under certain gaming conditions,
It is possible to display all of the first production design, the second production design, and the launch notification effect at the same time.
A specific notice effect can be displayed on the effect display section within a certain effect period.
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol, and the specific notice effect can be displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol. ,
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect symbol, while the specific notice effect can be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second effect symbol. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine (A15) according to the aspect (59) is
A start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
It is possible to display a predetermined error screen on the effect display unit in response to the occurrence of a predetermined error.
When the combination of the predetermined error screen and the first effect symbol is displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined error screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol.
When the combination of the predetermined error screen, the first effect symbol, and the second effect symbol is displayed at the same time, the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the first effect symbol overlap. Is configured so that the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the second effect symbol do not overlap.
Even when the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first effect symbol and the combination of the second effect symbol are displayed at the same time, the volume adjustment screen is displayed based on the predetermined player operation to display the volume level. Adjustable,
When the combination of the volume adjustment screen, the first effect symbol, and the second effect symbol is displayed at the same time, the display of the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol.
When the volume adjustment screen, the combination of the first effect symbol and the combination of the second effect symbol are displayed at the same time, the display area of the volume adjustment screen and the display area of the first effect symbol overlap, but the volume adjustment screen. It is configured so that the display area of is not overlapped with the display area of the second effect symbol.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the certain effect period. In that case, one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols. Have a case
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the type is displayed by the time the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured differently depending on the content of
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed in the effect display unit.
As the types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided.
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? The probability of whether the specific display mode B is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the type is a look-ahead effect displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured to be different depending on whether the type of the look-ahead effect A or the look-ahead effect B.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns in the final combination of the first effect symbols is larger than the total number of patterns in the final combination of the second effect symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A16) according to the aspect (60) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
The operation instruction effect that prompts the operation of the predetermined operation member can be displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, and the predetermined operation member is operated in the situation where the operation instruction effect is displayed. Correspondingly, a predetermined effect can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the operation instruction effect and the first effect symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the operation instruction effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol.
In the situation where the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member in the situation where the operation instruction effect is displayed, the predetermined effect, the symbol for the first effect, and the second effect are displayed. When the symbol for the effect is displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined effect has a higher display priority than the display of the symbol for the first effect, while the display of the predetermined effect has the symbol for the second effect. The display priority is lower than the display of
The display area of the predetermined effect is larger than the display area of the operation instruction effect, and the display area of the operation instruction effect and the display area of the first effect symbol may overlap with each other. It does not overlap with the display area of the second production symbol,
In the situation where the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member in the situation where the operation instruction effect is displayed, the display area of the predetermined effect is the symbol for the first effect. It is configured to overlap both the display area and the display area of the second production symbol.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the certain effect period. In that case, one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols. Have a case
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display mode can be displayed. If it is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, the final of the first effect symbol is displayed. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as a display mode can be displayed.
The specific display mode and the special display mode are different from each other.
The types of operation instruction effects include at least a first operation instruction effect and a second operation instruction effect, and when the first operation instruction effect is displayed, the timing after the timing at which the first operation instruction effect is displayed is displayed. The probability that the specific display mode is displayed and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation instruction effect is displayed when the second operation instruction effect is displayed. It is configured differently and
When the first operation instruction effect is displayed, the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing after the timing when the first operation instruction effect is displayed, and when the second operation instruction effect is displayed, the first 2 The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the probability that the special display mode is displayed is different from the timing at which the operation instruction effect is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (A17) according to the aspect (61) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a predetermined winning opening than in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. The game state control means to be controlled and
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
Under the situation of the specific gaming state, the first variable state and the first variable state have at least a second variable state in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different, and under the situation of the normal gaming state. Both the first fluctuation state and the second fluctuation state have at least a normal fluctuation state in which the selection tendency of the fluctuation display time of the identification information is different.
It is possible to shift from the specific gaming state and the first variable state to the specific gaming state and the second variable state, and it is possible to shift from the specific gaming state and the second variable state to the normal gaming state and the normal variable state.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
The combination of the display format of the first effect symbol when the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the first variable state and the combination of the first effect symbol in the specific game state and the second variable state The display format is the same as the display format of the first effect symbol when it is displayed, but for the first effect when the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state. The display format of the first effect symbol when the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the second variable state is also the first effect in the normal game state and the normal variable state. It is configured to be different from the display format of the first production symbol when the combination of symbols is displayed.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the certain effect period. In that case, one of a plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed, triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols. Have a case
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the type is displayed by the time the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured differently depending on the content of
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed in the effect display unit.
As the types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided.
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? The probability of whether the specific display mode B is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the type is the look-ahead effect displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured to be different depending on whether the type of the look-ahead effect A or the look-ahead effect B.
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns in the final combination of the first effect symbols is larger than the total number of patterns in the final combination of the second effect symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A18) according to the aspect (62) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
It is provided with an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is varied and displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display. Control so that it can be displayed in the unit,
It has at least an effect mode A and an effect mode B as an effect mode when the special game is not executed.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within the one effect period under the situation where the effect mode A is set, the first effect is performed before the final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed. The provisional display mode of the symbol can be displayed, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, the first effect symbol is changed and displayed again within the one effect period. It is possible, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, a special display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed for the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within the one effect period under the situation where the effect mode B is set.
The final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed within the one effect period corresponding to the situation where the effect mode A is set and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode. In some cases, a specific combination may be displayed, but the first within the one effect period corresponding to the situation where the effect mode B is set and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode. When the final combination of the effects symbols is displayed, the specific combination is not displayed.
While the variable display format of the first effect symbol in the effect mode A and the variable display format of the first effect symbol in the effect mode B are configured to be different, while
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the variable display format of the second effect symbol in the effect mode A and the variable display format of the second effect symbol in the effect mode B are configured to be the same.

The pachinko gaming machine (B1) according to the aspect (63) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is deterministically stopped and displayed. In such a case, it is configured so that a new fluctuation display is not started over a predetermined fluctuation fixed time.
It has at least a first element (for example, a character) and a second element (for example, a number) as constituent elements of a design for production.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
For the given operation,
The first swaying motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It includes a second shaking operation that can be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode in a situation where there is no remaining hold.
The first swaying motion is a mode in which the first element and the second element swaying motion, and the second swaying motion is a mode in which the first element sways and the second element does not sway. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be.

The fluctuation standby state in which the first effect symbol is definitively stopped and displayed for the shaking motion of the first effect symbol when the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during the symbol change). By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid making the screen dull even in the variable standby state (the screen where the production symbol is only stopped), and it is possible to give movement on the LCD screen. By setting only the second element (number) as a fixed display without shaking motion, it is possible to provide an effect that the player does not misunderstand that the symbol is changing.

The pachinko gaming machine (B2) according to the aspect (64) is
A start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is deterministically stopped and displayed. In such a case, it is configured so that a new fluctuation display is not started over a predetermined fluctuation fixed time.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
For the given operation,
The first swaying motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It includes a second shaking operation that can be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode in a situation where there is no remaining hold.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined time is longer than a variable fixed time.

The first when the time for showing the definite stop display of the first effect symbol is secured as the variable fixed time and the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during the symbol change). By applying the swaying motion of the effect symbol even during the variable standby state in which the first effect symbol is in the deterministic stop display, the screen is dull even in the game standby state after the lapse of the variable fixed time. When configured to avoid (screen where the production symbol is only stopped) (give movement on the LCD screen), the shaking operation should be started after at least a fixed time of fluctuation. By configuring it, it is possible to prevent the next fluctuation from being mistakenly recognized as having started.

The pachinko gaming machine (B3) according to the aspect (65) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
A speaker that outputs a production sound (for example, speaker D24) and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is deterministically stopped and displayed. In such a case, it is configured so that a new fluctuation display is not started over a predetermined fluctuation fixed time.
Under the condition that a predetermined effect mode is set when the special game is not executed, the effect sound can be output at least during the variable display of the effect symbol.
It is configured so that the standby demo screen can be displayed on the effect display unit when a specific time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode in the situation where the hold does not remain.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
For the given operation,
The first swaying motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It includes a second shaking operation that can be executed when a predetermined time, which is shorter than the specific time, has elapsed after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a situation other than the predetermined mode in a situation where the hold does not remain. And
The second shaking operation can be executed even after the display of the standby demo screen is finished in the situation where the hold does not remain.
In the case where the second shaking operation is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode in the situation where the hold does not remain, the start timing of the second shaking operation is While the production sound can be output,
A second swaying motion (for example, a second swaying motion or a second swaying motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen is finished) in a situation where there is no remaining hold. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that an effect sound is not output during the execution of the third shaking motion (third shaking motion).

When the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during symbol change), the shaking motion of the first effect symbol is displayed in a variable standby state in which the first effect symbol is deterministically stopped and displayed. By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid making the screen dull even in the variable standby state (the screen where the production symbol is only stopped), and it is possible to give movement on the liquid crystal screen. When the first shaking operation (second shaking operation) is started in the variable standby state, the production sound (stage BGM) is continuously output to appeal to the gaming machine, while the standby demo screen (standby movie) is displayed. In the case of a shaking operation (for example, a second shaking operation or a third shaking operation which is a second shaking operation executed after the display of the standby demo screen is completed) after passing through the display, power saving is performed. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate effect output mode according to the variable standby state, such as stopping (silence) the output of the effect sound.

The pachinko gaming machine (B4) according to the aspect (66) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
Predetermined actions include at least special actions (eg, tempai actions) that can be performed when the effect symbol forms a reach state.
While the effect symbols corresponding to the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol row are configured to be capable of performing special operations, the effect symbols corresponding to the effect symbol rows of the predetermined effect symbol row are configured. Is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured not to perform special movements.

One display column (first effect symbol in the left column, first effect symbol in the right column) that is the first effect symbol other than the other display columns (the first effect symbol in the middle column, which is the final column) that attracts the most attention. By preparing an operation that may be performed only by the first effect symbol of (one effect symbol), for the first effect of another display row (the first effect symbol of the middle row, which is the final row). It is possible to visually notify the noteworthy tempai in the process until the symbol stops.

The pachinko gaming machine (B5) according to the aspect (67) is
A start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
Of a plurality of production symbol rows, different types of production symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the production symbol rows other than the predetermined production symbol rows, so that a non-reach state can be formed. ,
After the reach state or the non-reach state is formed, it is configured so that the re-variation of the effect symbol can be executed.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
For the given operation,
A fixed position operation that can be executed when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the effect display unit,
The shaking motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It includes special actions (eg, tempai actions) that can be performed when the production symbol forms a reach state.
The operation pattern related to the predetermined operation when the re-variation of the effect symbol is executed after the reach state is formed, and the predetermined operation when the re-variation of the effect symbol is executed after the non-reach state is formed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so as to be different from the operation pattern.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (B5) according to the aspect (67) is
The motion pattern related to a predetermined motion is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by having a predetermined number of types and / or combinations of motions.

When a popular production such as a pseudo-ream effect (effect with re-variation) is performed in recent years, depending on the production process until the pseudo-ream is performed (a mode in which the first production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed). By differentizing the time-series contents of the operation of the first production symbol, the flow of the conventional uniform pseudo-ream effect can be diversified by the difference in the mode of the visual first production symbol. Can be done.

The pachinko gaming machine (B6) according to the aspect (68) is
A start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
The predetermined operation includes at least a fixed position operation that can be executed when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the effect display unit.
When the final combination of the effect symbols indicating that the special game is not executed after the reach state is formed is temporarily stopped and displayed, the effect corresponding to the effect symbol sequence other than the predetermined effect symbol sequence is used. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the symbol is configured to be able to execute a fixed position operation, while the effect symbol corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol sequence is configured not to execute the fixed position operation. Is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 179, the pachinko gaming machine (B6) according to the aspect (68) is shown.
When the final combination of the effect symbols indicating that the special game is not executed without forming the reach state is temporarily stopped and displayed, the effect symbols other than the predetermined effect symbol row (for example, the middle row) are displayed. A pachinko machine characterized in that both the effect symbols corresponding to the columns (for example, the left column and the right column) and the effect symbols corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol columns are configured to be capable of performing a fixed position operation. It is a gaming machine.

With this configuration, even the first production symbol in the display row (middle row) that does not form a reach state if it is a normal symbol fluctuation of loss or a normal reach fluctuation of loss is tentatively operated by performing a fixed position operation. While indicating that the display is stopped, regarding the lost super reach effect, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the lost super reach effect and perform further fixed position operation, so by omitting the fixed position operation, when lost. It is possible to realize the seamless movement of the symbol for the first production according to the via production of.

The pachinko gaming machine (B7-1) according to the aspect (69) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
Among a plurality of effect symbol rows, different types of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol row, so that a non-reach state can be formed. Ori,
It has at least the first element and the second element as the constituent elements of the design for production.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
In the symbol variation in which the reach state is formed, the effect symbols corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row that is variablely displayed and the effect symbols other than the predetermined effect symbol row that is temporarily stopped and displayed. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the production symbols corresponding to the rows are configured so that they can be overlapped at a predetermined timing when the reach state is formed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (B7-1) according to the aspect (69) is
The overlapping ratio of the first element of the effect symbol of one effect symbol row and the first element of the effect symbol of the other effect symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol variation in which the reach state is formed is Greater than the overlapping ratio of the first element of the effect symbol of one effect symbol row and the first element of the effect symbol of the other effect symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol change in the non-reach state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (B7-2) according to the aspect (70) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
Of a plurality of production symbol rows, different types of production symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the production symbol rows other than the predetermined production symbol rows, so that a non-reach state can be formed. ,
It has at least the first element and the second element as the constituent elements of the design for production.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
At a predetermined timing within a certain production period, the production symbols of one production design row and the production symbols of another production design row are configured to be overlapping.
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the effect symbol of one effect symbol row and the first element of the effect symbol of another effect symbol row overlap, but for one effect. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second element of the effect symbol of the symbol sequence and the second element of the effect symbol of another effect symbol sequence are configured so as not to overlap.

In this way, when moving the first production symbol, the character as the first element gives a sense of dynamism, so adjacent characters are allowed to overlap, but which number stops is a big hit. By constructing so that the numbers as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it becomes a mode do not overlap, the movement of the first production symbol itself is diversified, but for the original purpose of the first production symbol. It is possible to keep the role of notifying a certain big hit or loss.

The pachinko gaming machine (B8) according to the aspect (71) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
In the situation where there is a specific hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, the effect symbol look-ahead effect (for example, chance eye look-ahead effect) that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the specific hold by using the effect symbol. ) Can be executed in the production display section.
If a specific hold occurs when a ball enters the starting port during a symbol change in a situation where there is no hold remaining, is there a hold that is digested before the specific hold during the symbol change? Depending on whether or not there is, and / or how many holds are digested before the specific hold during the symbol change, the effect mode of the effect symbol look-ahead effect is configured to be different. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by this.

With this configuration, the player can recognize or infer that a specific hold (trigger hold) has occurred when executing a look-ahead effect (chance look-ahead effect) that suggests or informs using the first effect symbol. By letting you select whether or not to save the hold at the timing you set, you can realize a novel playability such as making a difference in the subsequent production mode.

The pachinko gaming machine (B9) according to the aspect (72) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a predetermined winning opening than in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. Equipped with a game state control means to control
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation of the identification information is set as one production period, and a predetermined number of production symbols (for example, three first production symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column) are produced within the one production period. It is provided with an effect symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the variable display is performed on the display unit.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
In the normal gaming state, the number of holds fluctuates with the first number, and the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the display starts, and the number of holds fluctuates with the second number, which is larger than the first number. While the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of effect symbols when the display is started is different, in the specific gaming state, the predetermined number when the number of holds is changed by the first number and the display is started. The order of the stop display of the number of effect symbols and the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of effect symbols when the number of pending numbers starts to fluctuate with the second number shall be the same. It is a pachinko game machine that features.

With this configuration, the first production symbol is shown in the normal game state (non-time reduction game state) where the effect is more important than the fluctuation efficiency and the specific game state (time reduction game state) where the variation efficiency is emphasized. By differentiating the one, the player can recognize in which state the fluctuation is made, and the mode of the symbol fluctuation of the first production symbol suitable for each state can be obtained.

The pachinko gaming machine (B10) according to the aspect (73) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first starting port,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the first random number temporary storage means.
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the variable display time of the first identification information is selected, the first identification information is variablely displayed by the first identification information display unit, and then the first identification information is displayed. The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display,
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the second random number temporary storage means.
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the variable display time of the second identification information is selected, the second identification information is variablely displayed by the second identification information display unit, and then the second identification information is displayed. A second identification information display control means that controls the stop display,
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
The game state during non-execution of the special game has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. Equipped with a game state control means to control
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is set as one effect period, and a predetermined number of effect symbols (for example, the three third columns of the left column, the middle column, and the right column) are set within the one effect period. It is provided with an effect symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the effect display unit is used to display a variable display of the effect symbol).
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in the normal game state, the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of the first hold is changed by the first number and the number of the first hold are changed. While the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of effect symbols is different when the variable display is started with a second number larger than the first number, the first identification information is variablely displayed in the specific gaming state. In this case, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of effect symbols when the number of first hold starts to fluctuate with the first number, and the case where the number of first hold starts to fluctuate with the second number. It is configured so that the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols in the above is the same.
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in the normal gaming state, the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of the second hold starts to change with the first number, and the number of the second hold. Is configured to be in the same order as the stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the variable display is started with the second number, and the second identification information is variablely displayed in the specific gaming state. (Ii) The order of stop display of the predetermined number of effect symbols when the number of holds starts to fluctuate with the first number, and the predetermined number when the number of second holds starts to fluctuate with the second number. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the order of the stop display of the production symbols of is the same.

With this configuration, the first production symbol corresponding to the change on the second identification information side after the end of the normal game state (non-time reduction game state) or the specific game state (time reduction game state) is By configuring it to be digested immediately, it is possible to return to the game on the first identification information side, which is the main game of the normal game state (non-time shortened game state), which is the original game property. While making it simple, by performing each minimum operation corresponding to the normal game state (non-time reduction game state), it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably shift to the game on the first identification information side. ..

The pachinko gaming machine (B11) according to the aspect (74) is
A start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is deterministically stopped and displayed. In such a case, it is configured so that a new fluctuation display is not started over a predetermined fluctuation fixed time.
It has at least a first element (for example, a character) and a second element (for example, a number) as constituent elements of a design for production.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
Predetermined movements include at least the shaking movements of the production symbols.
As a shaking motion,
The first swaying motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It is equipped with a second shaking operation that can be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode in a situation where there is no remaining hold.
The first swaying motion is a mode in which the first element and the second element swaying motion, and the second swaying motion is a mode in which the first element sways and the second element does not sway. It is configured to be
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the execution time of a predetermined motion other than the swing motion is shorter than the execution time of the swing motion within a certain production period.

The fluctuation standby state in which the first effect symbol is definitively stopped and displayed for the shaking motion of the first effect symbol when the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during the symbol change). By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid making the screen dull even in the variable standby state (the screen where the production symbol is only stopped), and it is possible to give movement on the LCD screen. By setting only the second element (number) as a fixed display without shaking motion, it is possible to provide an effect that the player does not misunderstand that the symbol is changing.

The pachinko gaming machine (B12) according to the aspect (75) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is deterministically stopped and displayed. In such a case, it is configured so that a new fluctuation display is not started over a predetermined fluctuation fixed time.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
Predetermined movements include at least the shaking movements of the production symbols.
As a shaking motion,
The first swaying motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It is equipped with a second shaking operation that can be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode in a situation where there is no remaining hold.
It is configured so that the predetermined time is longer than the variable fixed time.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the total time of execution time of a predetermined operation other than the shaking operation is longer than the variable fixed time within a certain production period.

The first when the time for showing the definite stop display of the first effect symbol is secured as the variable fixed time and the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during the symbol change). By applying the swaying motion of the effect symbol even during the variable standby state in which the first effect symbol is in the deterministic stop display, the screen is dull even in the game standby state after the lapse of the variable fixed time. When configured to avoid (screen where the production symbol is only stopped) (give movement on the LCD screen), the shaking operation should be started after at least a fixed time of fluctuation. By configuring it, it is possible to prevent the next fluctuation from being mistakenly recognized as having started.

The pachinko gaming machine (B13) according to the aspect (76) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
A speaker that outputs a production sound (for example, speaker D24) and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is deterministically stopped and displayed. In such a case, it is configured so that a new fluctuation display is not started over a predetermined fluctuation fixed time.
Under the condition that a predetermined effect mode is set when the special game is not executed, the effect sound can be output at least during the variable display of the effect symbol.
It is configured so that the standby demo screen can be displayed on the effect display unit when a specific time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode in the situation where the hold does not remain.
The production symbol can perform a predetermined operation, and can perform a predetermined operation.
Predetermined movements include at least the shaking movements of the production symbols.
As a shaking motion,
The first swaying motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It is provided with a second shaking operation that can be executed when a predetermined time, which is shorter than the specific time, has elapsed after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a situation other than the predetermined mode in a situation where the hold does not remain. Ori,
The second shaking operation can be executed even after the display of the standby demo screen is finished in the situation where the hold does not remain.
In the case where the second shaking operation is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode in the situation where the hold does not remain, the start timing of the second shaking operation is While the production sound can be output,
A second swaying motion (for example, a second swaying motion or a second swaying motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen is finished) in a situation where there is no remaining hold. It is configured so that the effect sound is not output during the execution of the third shaking motion), which is the shaking motion of.
Within a certain production period, the execution time of one predetermined operation other than the shaking operation is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the shaking operation.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the total time of execution time of a predetermined operation other than the shaking operation is longer than the variable fixed time within a certain production period.

When the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during symbol change), the shaking motion of the first effect symbol is displayed in a variable standby state in which the first effect symbol is deterministically stopped and displayed. By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid making the screen dull even in the variable standby state (the screen where the production symbol is only stopped), and it is possible to give movement on the liquid crystal screen. When the first shaking operation (second shaking operation) is started in the variable standby state, the production sound (stage BGM) is continuously output to appeal to the gaming machine, while the standby demo screen (standby movie) is displayed. In the case of a shaking motion (for example, a second shaking motion or a third shaking motion which is a second shaking motion executed after the display of the standby demo screen is finished) after passing through the display. In order to save power, the output of the effect sound can be stopped (silenced), which is an appropriate effect output mode according to the variable standby state.

The pachinko gaming machine (B14) according to the aspect (77) is
A start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
It has at least the first element and the second element as the constituent elements of the design for production.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
Predetermined actions include at least special actions (eg, tempai actions) that can be performed when the effect symbol forms a reach state.
While the effect symbols corresponding to the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol row are configured to be capable of performing special operations, the effect symbols corresponding to the effect symbol rows of the predetermined effect symbol row are configured. Is configured not to perform special actions,
In the symbol variation in which the reach state is formed, the effect symbols corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row that is variablely displayed and the effect symbols other than the predetermined effect symbol row that is temporarily stopped and displayed. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the production symbols corresponding to the rows are configured so that they can be overlapped at a predetermined timing when the reach state is formed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (B14) according to the aspect (77) is
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the effect symbol of one display column overlaps with the first element of the effect symbol of another display column, but the effect symbol of one display column is overlapped. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second element of the above and the second element of the effect symbol of another display column are configured so as not to overlap.

One display column (first effect symbol in the left column, first effect symbol in the right column) that is the first effect symbol other than the other display columns (the first effect symbol in the middle column, which is the final column) that attracts the most attention. By preparing an operation that may be performed only by the first effect symbol of (one effect symbol), for the first effect of another display row (the first effect symbol of the middle row, which is the final row). It is possible to visually notify the noteworthy tempai in the process until the symbol stops.

The pachinko gaming machine (B15) according to the aspect (78) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a predetermined winning opening than in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. Equipped with a game state control means to control
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
Among a plurality of effect symbol rows, different types of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol row, so that a non-reach state can be formed. Ori,
After the reach state or the non-reach state is formed, it is configured so that the re-variation of the effect symbol can be executed.
It has at least the first element and the second element as the constituent elements of the design for production.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
For the given operation,
The start operation when the effect symbol starts variable display,
A fixed position operation that can be executed when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the effect display unit,
The shaking motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It includes special actions (eg, tempai actions) that can be performed when the production symbol forms a reach state.
The operation pattern related to the predetermined operation when the re-variation of the effect symbol is executed after the reach state is formed, and the predetermined operation when the re-variation of the effect symbol is executed after the non-reach state is formed. It is configured to be different from the operation pattern.
In the symbol variation in which the reach state is formed, the effect symbols corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row that is variablely displayed and the effect symbols other than the predetermined effect symbol row that is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is configured so that the design for directing corresponding to the row can be overlapped at a predetermined timing when the reach state is formed.
It is characterized in that it is configured not to execute at least one of the start motion, the fixed position motion, and the special motion within one effect period with a specific gaming state, while it is configured to execute the swing motion. It is a pachinko game machine.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (B15) according to the aspect (78) is
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the effect symbol of one display column overlaps with the first element of the effect symbol of another display column, but the effect symbol of one display column is overlapped. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second element of the above and the second element of the effect symbol of another display column are configured so as not to overlap.

When a popular production such as a pseudo-ream effect (effect with re-variation) is performed in recent years, depending on the production process until the pseudo-ream is performed (a mode in which the first production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed). By differentizing the time-series contents of the operation of the first production symbol, the flow of the conventional uniform pseudo-ream effect can be diversified by the difference in the mode of the visual first production symbol. Can be done.

The pachinko gaming machine (B16) according to the aspect (79) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode, the special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player and the game state during non-execution of the special game are determined more than the normal game state and the normal game state. It has a specific game state that makes it easy to enter the winning opening, and is equipped with a game state control means that controls the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
For the given operation,
The start operation when the effect symbol starts variable display,
A fixed position operation that can be executed when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the effect display unit,
The shaking motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It includes special actions (eg, tempai actions) that can be performed when the production symbol forms a reach state.
When the final combination of the effect symbols indicating that the special game is not executed after the reach state is formed is temporarily stopped and displayed, the effect corresponding to the effect symbol sequence other than the predetermined effect symbol sequence is used. The symbol is configured to be able to execute the fixed position operation, while the effect symbol corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol sequence is configured not to execute the fixed position operation.
It is characterized in that it is configured not to execute at least one of the start motion, the fixed position motion, and the special motion within one effect period with a specific gaming state, while it is configured to execute the swing motion. It is a pachinko game machine.

With this configuration, even the first production symbol in the display row (middle row) that does not form a reach state if it is a normal symbol fluctuation of loss or a normal reach fluctuation of loss is tentatively operated by performing a fixed position operation. While indicating that the display is stopped, regarding the lost super reach effect, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the lost super reach effect and perform further fixed position operation, so by omitting the fixed position operation, when lost. It is possible to realize the seamless movement of the symbol for the first production according to the via production of.

The pachinko gaming machine (B17-1) according to the aspect (80) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode, the special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player and the game state during non-execution of the special game are determined more than the normal game state and the normal game state. It has a specific game state that makes it easy to enter the winning opening, and is equipped with a game state control means that controls the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
Among a plurality of effect symbol rows, different types of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol row, so that a non-reach state can be formed. Ori,
It has at least the first element and the second element as the constituent elements of the design for production.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
For the given operation,
The start operation when the effect symbol starts variable display,
A fixed position operation that can be executed when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the effect display unit,
The shaking motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It includes special actions (eg, tempai actions) that can be performed when the production symbol forms a reach state.
In the symbol variation in which the reach state is formed, the effect symbols corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row that is variablely displayed and the effect symbols other than the predetermined effect symbol row that is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is configured so that the design for directing corresponding to the row can be overlapped at a predetermined timing when the reach state is formed.
It is characterized in that it is configured not to execute at least one of the start motion, the fixed position motion, and the special motion within one effect period with a specific gaming state, while it is configured to execute the swing motion. It is a pachinko game machine.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine (B17-1) according to the aspect (80) is
The overlapping ratio of the first element of the effect symbol of one effect symbol row and the first element of the effect symbol of the other effect symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol variation in which the reach state is formed is Greater than the overlapping ratio of the first element of the effect symbol of one effect symbol row and the first element of the effect symbol of the other effect symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol change in the non-reach state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured.

The pachinko gaming machine (B17-2) according to the aspect (81) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode, the special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player and the game state during non-execution of the special game are determined more than the normal game state and the normal game state. It has a specific game state that makes it easy to enter the winning opening, and is equipped with a game state control means that controls the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
Of a plurality of production symbol rows, different types of production symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the production symbol rows other than the predetermined production symbol rows, so that a non-reach state can be formed. ,
It has at least the first element and the second element as the constituent elements of the design for production.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
For the given operation,
The start operation when the effect symbol starts variable display,
A fixed position operation that can be executed when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the effect display unit,
The shaking motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It includes special actions (eg, tempai actions) that can be performed when the production symbol forms a reach state.
In the symbol variation in which the reach state is formed, at a predetermined timing in which the reach state is formed, the effect symbol corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol sequence that is variablely displayed and the effect symbol corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row are temporarily stopped and displayed. It is configured so that it can overlap with the effect symbols corresponding to the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol row.
At a predetermined timing within a certain production period, the production symbols of one production design row and the production symbols of another production design row are configured to be overlapping.
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the effect symbol of one effect symbol row and the first element of the effect symbol of another effect symbol row overlap, but for one effect. It is configured so that the second element of the effect symbol of the symbol row and the second element of the effect symbol of another effect symbol row do not overlap.
It is characterized in that it is configured not to execute at least one of the start motion, the fixed position motion, and the special motion within one effect period with a specific gaming state, while it is configured to execute the swing motion. It is a pachinko game machine.

In this way, when moving the first production symbol, the character as the first element gives a sense of dynamism, so adjacent characters are allowed to overlap, but which number stops is a big hit. By constructing so that the numbers as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it becomes a mode do not overlap, the movement of the first production symbol itself is diversified, but for the original purpose of the first production symbol. It is possible to keep the role of notifying a certain big hit or loss.

The pachinko gaming machine (B18) according to the aspect (82) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the effect symbol (for example, the first effect symbol) is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the effect symbol is displayed. It is equipped with a symbol display control means for effect that controls the final combination of the above to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
Of a plurality of production symbol rows, different types of production symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the production symbol rows other than the predetermined production symbol rows, so that a non-reach state can be formed. ,
After the reach state or the non-reach state is formed, it is configured so that the re-variation of the effect symbol can be executed.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
The operation pattern related to the predetermined operation when the re-variation of the effect symbol is executed after the reach state is formed, and the predetermined operation when the re-variation of the effect symbol is executed after the non-reach state is formed. It is configured to be different from the operation pattern.
In the situation where there is a specific hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, the effect display unit executes the effect symbol look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the specific hold using the effect symbol. It is possible and
If a specific hold occurs when a ball enters the starting port during a symbol change in a situation where there is no hold remaining, is there a hold that is digested before the specific hold during the symbol change? Depending on whether or not there is, and / or how many holds are digested before the specific hold during the symbol change, the effect mode of the effect symbol look-ahead effect is configured to be different. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by this.

With this configuration, the player can recognize or infer that a specific hold (trigger hold) has occurred when executing a look-ahead effect (chance look-ahead effect) that suggests or informs using the first effect symbol. By letting you select whether or not to save the hold at the timing you set, you can realize a novel playability such as making a difference in the subsequent production mode.

The pachinko gaming machine (B19) according to the aspect (83) is
A start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Identification information display unit (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a predetermined winning opening than in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. Equipped with a game state control means to control
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation of the identification information is set as one production period, and a predetermined number of production symbols (for example, three first production symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column) are produced within the one production period. It is provided with an effect symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the variable display is performed on the display unit.
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
For the given operation,
The start operation when the effect symbol starts variable display,
A fixed position operation that can be executed when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the effect display unit,
The shaking motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It includes special actions (eg, tempai actions) that can be performed when the production symbol forms a reach state.
In the normal game state, the number of holds varies depending on the first number, and the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of effects symbols when the display starts, and the number of holds changes depending on the second number, which is larger than the first number. While the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of effect symbols when the display is started is different, in the specific gaming state, the predetermined number when the number of holds is changed by the first number and the display is started. It is configured so that the order of the stop display of the number of effect symbols and the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of effect symbols when the number of holds starts to fluctuate with the second number are the same.
It is characterized in that it is configured not to execute at least one of the start motion, the fixed position motion, and the special motion within one effect period with a specific gaming state, while it is configured to execute the swing motion. It is a pachinko game machine.

With this configuration, the first production symbol is shown in the normal game state (non-time reduction game state) where the effect is more important than the fluctuation efficiency and the specific game state (time reduction game state) where the variation efficiency is emphasized. By differentiating the one, the player can recognize in which state the fluctuation is made, and the mode of the symbol fluctuation of the first production symbol suitable for each state can be obtained.

The pachinko gaming machine (B20) according to the aspect (84) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first starting port,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the first random number temporary storage means.
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the variable display time of the first identification information is selected, the first identification information is variablely displayed by the first identification information display unit, and then the first identification information is displayed. The first identification information display control means for controlling the stop display,
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the second random number temporary storage means.
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the variable display time of the second identification information is selected, the second identification information is variablely displayed by the second identification information display unit, and then the second identification information is displayed. A second identification information display control means that controls the stop display,
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode.
The game state during non-execution of the special game has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after the execution of the special game is completed. Equipped with a game state control means to control
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is set as one effect period, and a predetermined number of effect symbols (for example, the left column, the middle column, and the right column) are set within the one effect period. It is provided with an effect symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the effect display unit is used to display a variable display of the effect symbol).
It has multiple effect symbol rows, and each of the multiple effect symbol rows is configured so that the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
Of a plurality of effect symbols, the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol rows other than the predetermined effect symbol rows, so that a reach state can be formed.
It is possible to perform a predetermined operation with a design for production,
For the given operation,
The start operation when the effect symbol starts variable display,
A fixed position operation that can be executed when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position on the effect display unit,
The shaking motion that can be executed when the production symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It includes special actions (eg, tempai actions) that can be performed when the production symbol forms a reach state.
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in the normal game state, the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of the first hold is changed by the first number and the number of the first hold are changed. While the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of effect symbols is different when the variable display is started with a second number larger than the first number, the first identification information is variablely displayed in the specific gaming state. In this case, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of effect symbols when the number of first hold starts to fluctuate with the first number, and the case where the number of first hold starts fluctuating with the second number. It is configured so that the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols in the above is the same.
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in the normal game state, the order of the stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of the second hold starts to change with the first number, and the number of the second hold. Is configured to be in the same order as the stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the variable display is started with the second number, and the second identification information is variablely displayed in the specific gaming state. (Ii) The order of stop display of the predetermined number of effect symbols when the number of holds starts to fluctuate with the first number, and the predetermined number when the number of second holds starts to fluctuate with the second number. It is configured so that the order of the stop display of the production symbol of is the same.
It is characterized in that it is configured not to execute at least one of the start motion, the fixed position motion, and the special motion within one effect period with a specific gaming state, while it is configured to execute the swing motion. It is a pachinko game machine.

With this configuration, the first production symbol corresponding to the change on the second identification information side after the end of the normal game state (non-time reduction game state) or the specific game state (time reduction game state) is By configuring it to be digested immediately, it is possible to return to the game on the first identification information side, which is the main game of the normal game state (non-time shortened game state), which is the original game property. While making it simple, by performing each minimum operation corresponding to the normal game state (non-time reduction game state), it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably shift to the game on the first identification information side. ..

The pachinko gaming machine (342) according to the aspect (85) is
The first starting port, which is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the first region side is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the second region side,
The second starting port, which is located at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first starting port,
A first game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on a first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
The first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can make the variable winning opening a favorable state for the player,
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and is set to the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. The game state transition control means that can be controlled,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub-game unit side to the sub-game unit side, and while the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is variablely displayed. It is configured so that the first identification information is not variablely displayed while the second identification information is variablely displayed.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It is possible to display a launch notification effect for prompting the second area to launch a game ball on the effect display unit, and while the launch notification effect is not displayed under the normal gaming state, the launch notification effect is displayed. Is configured to be visible under certain gaming conditions,
It is possible to display all of the first effect symbol, the second effect symbol, and the launch notification effect at the same time.
A specific notice effect can be displayed on the effect display unit within a certain effect period.
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol, and the specific notice effect can be displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol. ,
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect symbol, while the specific notice effect can be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second effect symbol. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine (187) according to the aspect (86) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first starting port,
A first game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
The first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can make the variable winning opening a favorable state for the player,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and any of the multiple types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol While the display area or display position is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. However, it is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the display area or the display position of the second effect symbol is configured to be the same.

The pachinko gaming machine (2342) according to the aspect (87) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter,
The second starting port where the game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first starting port,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the first random number temporary storage means.
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the first identification information,
The first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the second random number temporary storage means.
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The second game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the second identification information,
A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can make the variable winning opening a favorable state for the player,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the number of remaining first hold images can be displayed in the first hold image display area in the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the number of remaining second-held images can be displayed in the second-held image display area in the effect display unit.
The number of first hold, which is the number of remaining hold of the first hold, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit.
The second hold number, which is the remaining hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit.
It is possible to change the display content displayed in the first hold image display area when a new first hold occurs, and the new first hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. It is configured so that the display content displayed in the first reserved image display area can be changed even if there is no occurrence of.
It is possible to change the display content displayed in the second hold image display area at the time of the occurrence of the new second hold, and the new second hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. It is configured so that the display content displayed in the second reserved image display area can be changed even if there is no occurrence of.
It is possible to change the display content displayed in the first hold number display area when a new first hold occurs, and the new first hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. If there is no occurrence of, the display content displayed in the first hold number display area is configured not to change.
It is possible to change the display content displayed in the second hold number display area when a new second hold occurs, and a new second hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. If there is no occurrence of, the display content displayed in the second hold number display area is configured not to change.
When changing the display content displayed in the first reserved image display area, the number of the first reserved images displayed in the first reserved image display area is not changed in the first reserved image display area. Change the display mode of at least one of the first reserved images displayed in
It has a plurality of types of effect display formats, and one of the multiple types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first hold image is displayed in the first hold image display area, but among the plurality of types of effect display formats. When the second effect display format is displayed, the first reserved image is not displayed, but even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the plurality of types of effect display are displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area even if the second effect display format of the formats is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (536) according to the aspect (88) is
The first starting port, which is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down on the first region side is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down on the second region side,
The second starting port, which is located at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first starting port,
A first game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on a first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
The first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can make the variable winning opening a favorable state for the player,
The game state during non-execution of the special game has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and is set to the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. The game state transition control means that can be controlled,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It is possible to display a launch notification effect for prompting the second area to launch a game ball on the effect display unit, and while the launch notification effect is not displayed under the normal gaming state, the launch notification effect is displayed. Is configured to be visible under certain gaming conditions,
It is possible to display all of the first effect symbol, the second effect symbol, and the launch notification effect at the same time.
A specific notice effect can be displayed on the effect display unit within a certain effect period.
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position where it can overlap with the first effect symbol in the variable display, and the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the first effect symbol in the variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position where it is obtained,
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect symbol in the variable display, while the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the second effect symbol in the variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position where it is obtained,
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and any of the multiple types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol While the display mode or the display position of the first effect symbol is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, it is configured so that the display mode of the second effect symbol or the display position of the second effect symbol is the same.
The display size of the first effect symbol when the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit is the second when the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit. It is configured to be larger than the display size of the production design.
The first display mode, which is a display mode of a specific first effect symbol corresponding to the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats, and the specific first effect corresponding to the second effect display format. The second display mode, which is the display mode of the symbol, is configured to be different from the display mode.
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the first effect display format and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the first effect display format, the specific first effect symbol which is the first display mode. Is configured to be variable displayable,
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the second effect display format and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the second effect display format, the specific first effect symbol which is the second display mode. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be able to display variable information.

The pachinko gaming machine (806) according to the aspect (89) is
A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
An identification information display unit that can display identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied and controls the occurrence of hold.
A game content determination means that executes a hit / fail determination based on the random number related to a certain hold and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the hit / fail determination.
An identification information display control means that controls the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit according to the determination by the game content determination means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening can be in an advantageous state for the player after the result of the winning / failing determination based on the random number is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
A second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
As the look-ahead effect display content to be displayed based on the information regarding the hold received by the game information receiving means, the look-ahead effect display content A and the look-ahead effect display content B different from the look-ahead effect display content A are at least included, and the game information receiving means. When the information regarding the hold is received by the above, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information regarding the hold, the look-ahead effect display content A that suggests or notifies the existence of the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition is displayed in the effect display unit. It is equipped with a look-ahead effect display control means that controls so that it can be displayed in.
It is configured to enable variable display of the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information.
When the identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the variation of the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. The display is configured to be executable and
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation of the identification information is regarded as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured to display a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and any of the multiple types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol While the display area or display position is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. However, it is configured so that the display area or display position of the second effect symbol is the same.
The timing at which the look-ahead effect display content A is started is the timing at which the variation display of the identification information is started after the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition occurs.
When the look-ahead effect display content A is displayed in a situation where there is a prior hold that satisfies the variable display start condition of the identification information before the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition, the identification regarding the prior hold is displayed. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the special display mode is not displayed within one effect period from the start to the stop display of the identification information, which is performed when the information variation display start condition is satisfied. Is.

The pachinko gaming machine (537) according to the aspect (90) is
The first starting port, which is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down on the first region side is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down on the second region side,
The second starting port, which is located at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first starting port,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the first random number temporary storage means.
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the first identification information,
The first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the second random number temporary storage means.
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The second game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the second identification information,
A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can make the variable winning opening a favorable state for the player,
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and is set to the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. The game state transition control means that can be controlled,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
It is possible to display a launch notification effect for prompting the second area to launch a game ball on the effect display unit, and while the launch notification effect is not displayed under the normal gaming state, the launch notification effect is displayed. Is configured to be visible under certain gaming conditions,
It is possible to display all of the first effect symbol, the second effect symbol, and the launch notification effect at the same time.
A specific notice effect can be displayed on the effect display section,
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position where it can overlap with the first effect symbol in the variable display, and the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the first effect symbol in the variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position where it is obtained,
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect symbol in the variable display, while the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the second effect symbol in the variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position where it is obtained,
The number of first reserved images corresponding to the remaining number of first reserved images can be displayed in the first reserved image display area in the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the number of remaining second-held images can be displayed in the second-held image display area in the effect display unit.
The number of first hold, which is the number of remaining hold of the first hold, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit.
The second hold number, which is the remaining hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and any of the multiple types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first hold image is displayed in the first hold image display area, but among the plurality of types of effect display formats. When the second effect display format is displayed, the first reserved image is not displayed, but even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the plurality of types of effect display are displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area even if the second effect display format of the formats is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (538) according to the aspect (91) is
The first starting port, which is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down on the first region side is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down on the second region side,
The second starting port, which is located at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first starting port,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the first random number temporary storage means.
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the first identification information,
The first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the second random number temporary storage means.
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The second game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the second identification information,
A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can make the variable winning opening a favorable state for the player,
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and is set to the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. The game state transition control means that can be controlled,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and any of the multiple types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol While the display mode or the display position of the first effect symbol is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, it is configured so that the display mode of the second effect symbol or the display position of the second effect symbol is the same.
The number of first reserved images corresponding to the remaining number of first reserved images can be displayed in the first reserved image display area in the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the number of remaining second-held images can be displayed in the second-held image display area in the effect display unit.
The number of first hold, which is the number of remaining hold of the first hold, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit.
The second hold number, which is the remaining hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit.
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first hold image is displayed in the first hold image display area, but among the plurality of types of effect display formats. When the second effect display format is displayed, the first reserved image is not displayed, but even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the plurality of types of effect display are displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area even if the second effect display format of the formats is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (343) according to the aspect (92) is
The first starting port, which is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the first region side is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the second region side,
The second starting port, which is located at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first starting port,
A first game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
The first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can make the variable winning opening a favorable state for the player,
The game state during non-execution of the special game has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and is set to the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. The game state transition control means that can be controlled,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and any of the multiple types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol While the display mode or the display position of the first effect symbol is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, it is configured so that the display mode of the second effect symbol or the display position of the second effect symbol is the same.
It is possible to display a launch notification effect for prompting the second area to launch a game ball on the effect display unit, and while the launch notification effect is not displayed under the normal gaming state, the launch notification effect is displayed. Is configured to be visible under certain gaming conditions,
It is possible to display all of the first production design, the second production design, and the launch notification effect at the same time.
A specific notice effect can be displayed on the effect display unit within a certain effect period.
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol, and the specific notice effect can be displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol. ,
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect symbol, while the specific notice effect can be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second effect symbol. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine (761) according to the aspect (93) is
The first starting port, which is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down on the first region side is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down on the second region side,
The second starting port, which is located at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means to acquire the first random number based on the entry into the first starting port,
A first game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
The first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
A second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variablely displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can make the variable winning opening a favorable state for the player,
The game state during non-execution of the special game includes a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and is set to the specific game state after the execution of the special game is completed. The game state transition control means that can be controlled,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are used. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
For the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and any of the multiple types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
Depending on whether the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first effect symbol While the display mode or the display position of the first effect symbol is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, it is configured so that the display mode of the second effect symbol or the display position of the second effect symbol is the same.
It is possible to display a launch notification effect for prompting the second area to launch a game ball on the effect display unit, and while the launch notification effect is not displayed under the normal gaming state, the launch notification effect is displayed. Is configured to be visible under certain gaming conditions,
It is possible to display all of the first effect symbol, the second effect symbol, and the launch notification effect at the same time.
In the effect display unit, the launch notification effect is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the first effect symbol and does not overlap with the second effect symbol.
The degree of expectation of execution of the special game when the reach display is performed using the first effect symbol which is the first display mode, and the special when the reach display is performed using the first effect symbol which is the second display mode. It is configured so that the execution expectation of the game is different.
When the reach display is performed using the first effect symbol while the first effect symbol is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the reach display using the second effect symbol is displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured not to be played.

Regarding the "stop display" so far, the mode of the stop display that simply describes "stop display" instead of the expressions "provisionally stop display" and "deterministically stop display" is temporarily stopped. It includes both the displayed aspect and the deterministically stopped display aspect.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B 2nd main game start opening entry determination means, MJ11-H auxiliary game entry entry ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 1st big winning opening entry determination means Means, MJ11-C20 2nd big winning opening ball entry determination means MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A 1st main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H auxiliary Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 hold control means, MJ31 hold digestion control means MJ31j fluctuation start condition satisfaction judgment means, MJ32 symbol hold means MJ32-A first main game symbol hold means, MJ32b-A first main game symbol hold information temporary Storage means MJ32-B 2nd main game symbol holding means, MJ32b-B 2nd main game symbol holding information Temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol holding means, MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol holding information Temporary storage means MN Game content determination Means, MN10 Win / Fail Lottery Means MN11-A 1st Main Game Win / Fail Lottery Means, MN11ta-A 1st Main Game Win / Fail Lottery Table MN11-B 2nd Main Game Win / Fail Lottery Means, MN11ta-B 2nd Main Game Win / Fail Lottery Table MN11-H auxiliary game win / fail lottery means, MN11ta-H auxiliary game win / fail lottery table MN20 special game transition decision means, MN40 symbol content determination means MN41-A first main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A first main game symbol determination Lottery table MN41-B 2nd main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H auxiliary game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 variable mode determination means , MN51-A 1st main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B 2nd main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table , MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP game progress means MP10 display control means, MP11-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol control means MP11t-C 1st. 2nd main game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP11-H auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP20-B 2nd main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP21-B 2nd main Game start port Electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means, MP2 2t-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening timer MP30 Special game control means, MP31 Condition determination means MP32 Special game content determination means, MP32ta Special game content reference table MP33 Special game execution means, MP33-C 1st and 1st 2 Large prize opening Electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34 Special game time management means MP34t Special game timer, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Probability change end condition determination means, MP52 Time reduction end condition determination means MP52c Time reduction count counter, MB game state temporary storage means MB10-C 1st and 2nd main game state temporary storage means, MB11b-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H auxiliary Game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b Special game-related information temporary storage means, MB30b Specific game-related information temporary storage means MT information transmission control means MT10 command transmission buffer, MH prize ball payout determination means A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1 Main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry ball detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display unit B 2nd main game peripheral device , B10 2nd main game start port B11s 2nd main game start port entry ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start port electric accessory B20 2nd main game symbol display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display unit B21h 2nd Main game symbol hold display, C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripherals C10 1st big prize opening, C11s 1st big winning opening Winning detection device C11d 1st big winning opening Electric accessory, C20 2nd big winning opening C21s 2nd prize opening prize detection device, C21d 2nd prize opening electric accessory H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game start port H11s auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol Display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub-control board, SM Sub-game control means (sub-main control unit)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative symbol display control means SM21n design display content determination means, SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta-2 decorative symbol effect table, SM21b Temporary storage of drawing-related information SM21t-1 First drawing fluctuation time management timer, SM22 drawing holding information display control means,
SM22b Temporary storage of drawing reservation information, SM23 background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means, SM23b Background effect related information Temporary storage means SM24 Notice effect display control means, SM24n Notice effect display content determination means SM24b Notice effect related information Temporary storage means, SM25 reach effect display control means SM25n reach effect display content determination means, SM25b reach effect related information temporary storage means SM27 right-handed display control means SM40 information transmission / reception control means SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SS10 sub-information Transmission / reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21b Image display related information Temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative symbol display area, SG12 First hold display area SG13 Second hold display area KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
An identification information display unit that can display identification information,
A speaker that outputs the production sound and
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production, and
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit, and the identification information display control means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode is provided.
The sub-game club
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification information is set as one effect period, and after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the first effect symbols is performed. Is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit, and after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final combination of the second effect symbols is displayed as an effect. It is equipped with a design display control means for effect that controls the display in the unit.
As the gaming state during non-execution of the special game, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
Within the one effect period, the effectable movable body can execute a predetermined effect operation, and the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit is visible when the effect moveable body executes the predetermined effect operation. Is configured to decrease,
The movable body for production is configured to be able to perform a predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after recovering from the power failure.
When the movable body for effect performs the predetermined effect operation within the one effect period, the first effect symbol is hidden while the second effect symbol can be displayed. ,
When the effectable movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within the predetermined period after the power is restored, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed. Is configured to
During the period from the start of variable display of the identification information in which the movable body for effect is scheduled to execute the predetermined effect operation within the one effect period to the start of the execution of the predetermined effect operation, the power supply is cut off. The execution of the predetermined initialization operation is completed after the execution of the predetermined initialization operation is started when the effectable movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within the predetermined period after returning from. It is configured to be longer than the period until
The first display after a power failure occurs in a situation where a predetermined standby display is displayed on the effect display unit during a normal game state and a variable standby in which the identification information is not variable, and then the power is restored from the power failure. The power is cut off when the predetermined standby display is displayed on the effect display unit during the display mode of the effect symbol and during the variable standby where the identification information is not variable and displayed in the specific game state, and then the power is cut off. It is configured to be different from the display mode of the first effect symbol displayed after returning.
It is configured so that a predetermined effect sound can be output at least during the variable display of the first effect symbol under the situation where the predetermined effect mode is set when the special game is not executed.
It is configured to have multiple types of predetermined production sounds and to be able to switch the types of predetermined production sounds during the variable display of identification information.
The display mode of the first effect symbol at the time of stop display of the identification information has a first display mode and a second display mode, and the display mode of the first effect symbol is the first display mode. Therefore, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the stop display of the identification information, the display mode of the first effect symbol may be a second display mode different from the first display mode.
Even after the display of the predetermined standby display is started in the situation where the display mode of the first effect symbol is the second display mode and then the display of the predetermined standby display is finished, the display of the first effect symbol is displayed. It is configured so that the aspect can remain the second display aspect.
When the predetermined period elapses from the stop display of the identification information and the display mode of the first effect symbol is started to be displayed in the second display mode, the display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed in the second display mode. While the predetermined effect sound is output for at least a specific period from the start to the start of the display of the predetermined standby display, the second display displayed after the display of the predetermined standby display is completed. It is configured so that a predetermined effect sound is not output while the first effect symbol of the embodiment is displayed.
It is configured so that a predetermined error sound can be output from the speaker in response to the occurrence of a predetermined error.
Even if the predetermined period has elapsed from the stop display of the identification information and the display mode of the first effect symbol is started to be displayed in the second display mode and the predetermined effect sound is output, the predetermined standby is performed. A predetermined error sound can be output even when the first effect symbol of the second display mode displayed after the display is finished is being displayed and the predetermined effect sound is not output. Has been
The display mode of the first effect symbol at the time of stop display of the identification information is configured so that the display mode may be different before the predetermined period elapses and after the predetermined period elapses, while the identification information stop display. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode of the second effect symbol at the time is configured so as not to be different between before the lapse of the predetermined period and after the lapse of the predetermined period.

Images